JP2016140392A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To enhance an interest of a player in a notice performance which is executed in a start storage display area.SOLUTION: A game machine comprises: start storage means (game control device 100) capable of storing start storages to a predetermined upper limit number, based on entry of game balls to a start area (start winning hole 36, normal variable winning device 37), in which the start storages become an execution right of a variable display game; prior determination means (game control device 100) for determining before executing the variable display game, information of the variable display game based on the start storages stored in the start storage means; and operation means (performance button 25, touch panel 29) which can be operated by a player. The game machine further comprises occurrence period notification means (performance control device 300) capable of executing a period notification performance for suggesting or notifying of an occurrence period of a specific event in the variable display game based on the specific start storage, and the occurrence period notification means starts the period notification performance, based on the fact that the operation means is operated.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 72

Description

  The present invention includes a variable display device capable of displaying a variable display game based on the inflow of game balls into the starting area, and provides a player with a predetermined game value when the result of the variable display game is a special result. The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of executing a special game to be granted.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine or a slot machine, a predetermined game is played on an effect display device such as a liquid crystal display, and a game value can be given to a player in relation to the result of the game. It is common. And as such a gaming machine, what performs a notice effect that gives a notice (notification, suggestion) of the result of the game by displaying a part of a symbol that will appear next in the game is known. (For example, refer to Patent Document 1).

  Further, in recent gaming machines, as a notice effect, when a game execution right is generated, the execution result of the game is determined, and the start displayed in the start memory display area of the effect display device according to the determination result There is also known one that performs a so-called reservation prefetch notice effect that changes the display mode of the memory display.

JP 2002-263291 A

  However, since the conventional reservation pre-reading notice effect is a monotonous effect that only changes the display mode of the start memory display, it has been difficult to enhance the interest of the player.

  An object of the present invention is to enhance the interest of a player with respect to a notice effect performed in a start memory display area.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention described in claim 1
A special game that includes a variable display device capable of displaying a variable display game based on the inflow of game balls into the starting area, and gives a predetermined game value to the player when the result of the variable display game is a special result In gaming machines that can execute
Start memory means capable of storing start memory as a right to execute the variable display game based on the inflow of game balls into the start area up to a predetermined upper limit number;
Pre-determination means for determining information on the variable display game based on the start-up memory stored in the start-up storage means before executing the variable display game;
Operation means that can be operated by the player;
An occurrence time notification means capable of performing a time notification effect that suggests or notifies the occurrence time of a specific event in a variable display game based on a specific start memory,
The generation time notification means starts the time notification effect based on the operation of the operation means.

  According to the first aspect of the present invention, the player's interest can be enhanced with respect to the notice effect executed in the start memory display area.

The invention according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1,
The occurrence time informing means is
As the time notification effect, it is possible to notify the remaining time until the occurrence of the specific event in the variable display game based on the specific start memory,
In the time notification effect, provisional notification is performed to notify a time different from the remaining time until the occurrence of the specific event, and the operation of the operation unit is performed during the provisional notification. It is possible to change to notification of the remaining time until occurrence.

  According to the second aspect of the present invention, the player's interest can be enhanced with respect to the notice effect executed in the start memory display area.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to enhance the player's interest in the notice effect executed in the start memory display area.

It is the perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of one embodiment of the present invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a flowchart explaining a main process. It is a flowchart explaining a main process. It is a flowchart explaining a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure game processing. It is a flowchart explaining a start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a hard random number acquisition process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure start port switch common process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure pending | holding information determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a big winning opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a big winning opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure usual process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a change start information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure variation process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure display process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure display process. It is a flowchart explaining the fanfare / interval 2 mid-process transition setting process 1. It is a flowchart explaining a fanfare / interval 2 process. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process 1 during the big prize opening opening. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process 2 during the big winning opening. It is a flowchart explaining the big winning opening open process. It is a flowchart explaining the process transfer setting process during interval 1. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit end process transfer setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the process during interval 1. 10 is a flowchart for explaining a process transition setting process 2 during a fanfare / interval 2; It is a flowchart explaining a big hit end process. It is a flowchart explaining jackpot end setting processing 1. It is a flowchart explaining jackpot end setting processing 2. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure usual process transfer setting process 2. FIG. It is a timing chart for demonstrating an example of operation | movement in jackpot in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a timing chart for demonstrating an example of operation | movement in jackpot in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining the main process which an effect control apparatus performs. It is a flowchart explaining a received command check process. It is a flowchart explaining a received command analysis process. It is a flowchart explaining a variable system command process. It is a flowchart explaining a change production setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the notice lottery process during the first half change. It is a flowchart explaining the notice lottery process during the latter half change. It is a flowchart explaining a scenario setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a scenario analysis process. It is a flowchart explaining a scenario analysis process. It is a figure for demonstrating the notice effect in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the scenario table used at the time of step-up notice A in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the scenario table used at the time of step-up notice A in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the notice effect (step-up notice A) in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the notice effect (step-up notice A) in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the scenario table used at the time of step-up notice B in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the notice effect (step-up notice B) in this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode of an expectation degree suggestion image. It is a timing chart for demonstrating an example of the operation | movement in the step-up notice effect in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a flowchart explaining prefetch symbol type command processing. It is a flowchart explaining prefetch fluctuation system command processing. It is a flowchart explaining a prefetch lottery process. It is a figure explaining the display mode in a display apparatus. It is a figure explaining an example of a time alerting effect. It is a flowchart explaining a notice time calculation process. It is a figure explaining an example of a time alerting effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a time alerting effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a time alerting effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a time alerting effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a time alerting effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a time alerting effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a time alerting effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a prefetch effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a time alerting effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a time alerting effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a time alerting effect. It is a flowchart explaining another example of a notice time calculation process. It is a figure explaining an example of a time alerting effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a time alerting effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a time alerting effect. It is the perspective view which looked at the game machine of 2nd Embodiment from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure explaining the structure of a collective display apparatus. It is a figure explaining the display mode of a special figure 1 indicator. It is a figure explaining the display mode of a special figure 2 indicator. It is a figure explaining the display mode of a special figure 2 indicator. It is a figure explaining the structure of a special result. It is a figure explaining the kind of fluctuation pattern. It is a figure explaining the kind of fluctuation pattern. It is a figure explaining the opening / closing pattern of a special fluctuation prize-winning apparatus. It is a figure explaining the opening / closing pattern of a special fluctuation prize-winning apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a gaming machine. It is a flowchart explaining a main process. It is a flowchart explaining a main process. It is a flowchart explaining a checksum calculation process. It is a flowchart explaining an initial value random number update process. It is a flowchart explaining a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart explaining an input process. It is a flowchart explaining a switch reading process. It is a flowchart explaining an output process. It is a flowchart explaining a payout command transmission process. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining a winning opening switch / state monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining fraud & winning prize monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining a winning number counter update process. It is a flowchart explaining a production command setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring processing. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining a change in the number of abnormal fluctuations. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating an example in which an abnormal change notification is performed. It is a flowchart explaining a gaming machine state check process. It is a flowchart explaining a payout busy signal check process. It is a flowchart explaining a start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a hard random number acquisition process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure start port 1 switch process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure pending | holding information determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure start port 2 switch process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 game processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 game processing. It is a flowchart explaining a big winning opening switch monitoring process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart for explaining ordinary processing. FIG. 2 is a flowchart for explaining ordinary processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit determination process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a 2 byte distribution process. It is a flowchart explaining a distribution process. It is a flowchart explaining a change start information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the high probability variation frequency update process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart for explaining a process transition setting process during fluctuation. FIG. 2 is a flowchart for explaining a process transition setting process during fluctuation. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 fluctuation process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 fluctuation process. It is a flowchart explaining the special process 1 display process transition setting process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining the special process 2 display process transition setting process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining the special process 1 display process transition setting process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining the special process 2 display process transition setting process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 display process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 display process. It is a flowchart explaining the processing during special figure 2 display. It is a flowchart explaining the processing during special figure 2 display. It is a flowchart explaining a fanfare / interval process transition setting process. FIG. 6 is a flowchart for explaining a process transition setting process during small hitting fanfare. FIG. 2 is a flowchart illustrating a process transition setting process during small hitting fanfare. It is a flowchart explaining a fanfare / interval process. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process 1 during the big prize opening opening. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process 2 during the big winning opening. It is a flowchart explaining the big winning opening open process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit operation | movement transfer setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big winning opening remaining ball process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit end process transfer setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure 1 big hit end process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 big hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the process during a small hit fanfare. It is a flowchart explaining a middle hit process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit remaining ball process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 small hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 small hit end processing. It is a flowchart explaining a design fluctuation control process. It is a flowchart explaining a segment LED edit process. It is a flowchart explaining a magnet fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a board radio wave fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining an external information edit process. It is a flowchart explaining a start port 1 signal edit process. It is a flowchart explaining a main prize ball signal edit process. It is a flowchart explaining a symbol determination frequency signal edit process. It is a figure explaining the display mode in a display apparatus. It is a figure explaining the variation mode of the effect design. It is a figure explaining the display mode in a display apparatus. It is a figure explaining the display mode in a display apparatus. It is a flowchart explaining an effect lottery process. It is a figure explaining the display mode in a display apparatus. It is a figure explaining the display mode in a display apparatus. It is a figure explaining the display mode in a display apparatus. It is a figure explaining the display mode in the game number display part in the 1st modification. It is a figure explaining the display mode with the display apparatus in the 1st modification. It is a figure explaining the display mode with the display apparatus in the 1st modification. It is a flowchart explaining the timer interruption process in a 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 game process in a 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 game process in a 2nd modification. It is a flowchart explaining the big winning opening switch monitoring process in a 2nd modification. It is a figure explaining the example in which the special figure 2 abnormal variation alerting | reporting in a 3rd modification is performed. It is a figure explaining the change of the special figure 2 abnormal winning number in a 3rd modification. It is a figure explaining the change of the special figure 2 abnormal winning number in a 3rd modification. It is a figure explaining the structure of the collective display apparatus in a 4th modification. It is a figure explaining interruption of the special figure change display game in the 4th modification. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the display apparatus and special figure indicator at the time of being interrupted in the 4th modification. It is a figure explaining the display mode of the display apparatus and special figure indicator at the time of being interrupted in the 4th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 fluctuation process in a 4th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 fluctuation process in a 4th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 game process in a 4th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 game process in a 4th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 big hit end process in a 4th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 big hit end process in a 4th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 small hits end process in a 4th modification. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 small hits end process in a 4th modification. It is a figure explaining the pattern of the control method in a 4th modification. It is a figure explaining the display mode with a special figure indicator in the 5th modification. It is a figure explaining the other example of a structure of the special figure display in a 5th modification. It is a figure explaining the other example of a structure of the special figure display in a 5th modification. It is a figure explaining the other example of a structure of the special figure display in a 5th modification. It is a figure explaining the other example of a structure of the special figure display in a 5th modification. It is a figure explaining the other example of a structure of the special figure display in a 5th modification. It is a figure explaining transition of the game state in the 6th modification. It is a figure explaining the transmission timing of the probability information command in a 6th modification. It is a figure explaining the transmission timing of the customer waiting command in a 6th modification.

<First Embodiment>
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention.

  The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be capable of opening and closing. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is stored in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. In addition, a glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

  In addition, lamps and LEDs are incorporated in the left and right sides of the glass frame 15 to provide decorations, effects, and notifications when abnormalities occur (for example, when a payout abnormality occurs, the lamps and LEDs are abnormally notified colors (for example, red) The frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (flashing)), and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effects) are provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19 b is also provided below the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the abnormality content is notified by voice from the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b. Note that a discharge abnormality notification lamp may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

Further, at the lower part of the front frame 12, there is an upper plate 21 (storage tray) for supplying game balls to a not-shown hitting ball launcher, and game balls paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10. There are provided an upper tray ball outlet 22 that flows out, a lower tray (receiving tray) 23 for storing game balls paid out in a state where the upper tray 21 is full, an operation unit 24 of the hitting ball launcher, and the like. Further, an effect button 25 having a built-in effect button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from the player is provided on the upper edge of the upper plate 21. In addition, a touch panel 29 for receiving a touch operation input from the player is provided on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25. That is, the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29 constitute an operation means that can be operated by the player. Further, a key hole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12.
In the present embodiment, the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25, but the touch panel 29 may be separate from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device is provided in the vicinity of the effect button 25, A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

  Further, to the right of the production button 25, a ball lending button 27 that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and a discharge button that is operated to discharge the prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. 28. A balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card is provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, the player turns the operation unit 24 so that the ball-striking device feeds the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 toward the game area 32 on the front surface of the game board 30. Fire. Further, when the player operates the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29, an effect or the like in which the player's operation is intervened in the variable display game (decoration special map variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). It can be carried out.

  Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.

  On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by the guide rail 31 is formed. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 30. In the game area 32, a center case (game production component) 40 provided with a display device 41 is arranged substantially at the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recessed portion provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 surrounds the display area of the display device 41, protrudes forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and is formed so as to make it difficult for a game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

The display device 41 (variable display device) is configured by a device having a display screen such as an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) or a CRT (CRT). In an area (display area) where an image of the display screen can be displayed, information relating to a game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbols), a character that produces a special figure variation display game, and a background image that enhances the presentation effect is displayed. . On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special diagram variation display game is played. In addition, an image for an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.
In addition, the left and right portions of the center case 40 are provided with a board effect device 44 that produces an effect of a game by operating. The board effect device 44 is operable from the state shown in FIG. 2 toward the center of the display device 41.

On the lower right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol start gate (common figure start gate) 34 for providing a start condition for the normal figure change display game is provided. A game ball won in the usual start gate 34 is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3).
In the game area 32, three general winning openings 35 are arranged on the lower left side of the center case 40, and one general winning prize is on the lower right side of the center case 40 and below the normal start gate 34. A mouth 35 is arranged. The game balls that have won the general prize opening 35 are detected by a prize opening switch 35a (see FIG. 3).

  In addition, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, a start winning opening 36 (first start winning opening, start winning area) for providing a start condition for the special figure variation display game is provided. The game ball won in the start winning opening 36 is detected by the start opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3).

Also, an ordinary variation winning device 37 (second starting winning opening, starting winning area) for providing a start condition for the special figure variation display game is provided immediately below the starting winning opening 36.
The normal variation winning device 37 includes a movable member 37b that can be converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in by opening in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted to the near side. A closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) in which a game ball cannot flow is maintained. When the result of the normal variation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, a game ball is likely to flow into the normal variation winning device 37 by a general electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) as a drive device. It can be changed to a state (a state advantageous to the player). A game ball won in the normal variation winning device 37 is detected by the start port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3).
Also, below the normal variation winning device 37, an out port 30a for collecting game balls that have not won a winning port or the like is provided.

Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32 and on the right side of the start winning opening 36, a first that can be converted into a state in which a game ball is not accepted and a state in which it is easy to accept depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. A special variable winning device (large winning port 2, upper winning port) 38 is provided.
The first special variation winning device 38 has an attacker-type open / close door 38c that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted toward the near side, and the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. Depending on how, the state is changed from the closed state (closed state disadvantageous for the player) to the open state (a state advantageous to the player). In other words, the first special variable winning device 38 includes, for example, a large winning opening that is opened and closed by an open / close door 38c driven by an upper large winning solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3) as a driving device. In the small hit game state, by converting the big prize opening from the closed state to the open state, the game balls can easily flow into the big prize opening, and a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player It is supposed to be. Note that an upper count switch 38a (see FIG. 3) is provided inside the grand prize winning opening (winning area) as detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the big winning prize opening. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, two upper count switches 38a are provided, and a game ball that has flowed into the special winning opening is detected by any one of the upper count switches 38a. By providing a plurality of the upper count switches 38a as described above, it is possible to quickly detect the game ball that has flowed into the special winning opening.

In addition, immediately below the first special variable winning device 38, a second special variable winning device (a large winning mouth 1, under the first prize winning port 1, which can be converted into a state where a game ball is not accepted and a state where it is easy to accept depending on the result of the special figure display game. 39 is provided.
The second special variation winning device 39 has an attacker-type opening / closing door 39c that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side tilts toward the near side, and the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. Depending on how, the state is changed from the closed state (closed state disadvantageous for the player) to the open state (a state advantageous to the player). That is, the second special variable prize winning device 39 includes, for example, a big prize opening opened / closed by an open / close door 39c driven by a lower big prize opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 3) as a driving device. In the small hit game state, by converting the big prize opening from the closed state to the open state, the game balls can easily flow into the big prize opening, and a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player It is supposed to be. Note that a lower count switch 39a (see FIG. 3) is provided inside the big winning opening (winning area) as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the big winning opening.
In the case of the present embodiment, the first special variation winning device 38 and the second special variation winning device 39 are alternately opened every big hit round.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, of the game areas 32 where the game balls flow down, the left area of the center case 40 is the left game area, and the right area of the center case 40 is the right game area. ing. Then, the player can aim for winning at the start winning opening 36 by adjusting the firing force and firing the game ball to the left game area (so-called left-handed), and launch the game ball to the right game area (so-called By right-handing), it is possible to aim to win the normal start gate 34, the normal variation winning device 37, and the special variable winning devices 38 and 39.
Here, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the flow path forming member 42 attached to the right end portion of the center case 40 is disposed at a position corresponding to the right game area, and is fired to the right game area. The played game ball is configured to pass through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42. The material of at least the front surface of the flow path forming member 42 is a material that allows a game ball passing through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42 to be visually recognized from the outside. A game ball passing through the flow path formed by the forming member 42 (that is, a game ball flowing down the right game area) can be viewed through the flow path forming member 42 from the front of the flow path forming member 42. .

  In addition, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, in the lower right part of the game board 30), the first special figure fluctuation display game, the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the general figure start gate 34 which form the special figure fluctuation display game are displayed. There is provided a collective display device 50 for displaying a game of variable display with a win as a trigger and displaying various information.

The collective display device 50 includes a first special figure fluctuation display unit (special figure 1 display) 51 and a second special figure for a first special figure fluctuation display game configured by a 7-segment display (LED lamp) or the like. The second special figure fluctuation display part (special figure 2 display) 52 for the fluctuation display game, the fluctuation display part (general figure display) 53 for the common figure fluctuation display game composed of LED lamps, and the LED lamp Storage display units 54, 55, 56 for informing the start memory number of each variable display game.
Further, the collective display device 50 includes a first game state display unit (first game state display unit, right-handed notification unit) 57 for notifying that a right-handed game state is more advantageous than a left-handed game. The second gaming state display unit (second gaming state indicator, time shortening state notifying unit) 58 that lights up when the state occurs and notifies the occurrence of the short time state, and when the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the probability state of the big hit is a high probability state. 3rd game state display part (3rd game state display, probability state display part) 59 which displays that it has become, Round display which displays the number of rounds at the time of big hit (opening and closing frequency of special variable prize-winning devices 38 and 39) A portion 60 is provided.
The collective display device 50 may be further provided with a display unit (display) that lights up when a big hit occurs and notifies the occurrence of the big hit.

The special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 is, for example, during the execution of the fluctuation display game, that is, while the decoration special figure fluctuation display game is being performed on the display device 41, The segment is blinked to indicate that it is changing. The blinking cycle is set to 100 milliseconds, for example. In the case of the present embodiment, in the special figure fluctuation display game on the special figure 1 display 51, in addition to the central segment, the eighth segment provided on the lower right side of the 7-segment is also blinked to change. It is configured to display that it is inside.
When the result of the game is “out of”, for example, the central segment is turned on as a result mode of out of game, and when the result of the game is “win”, the result of out of game (special result mode) is not. A game result is displayed with a result form (for example, a number or a symbol) other than the result form turned on.

The normal display 53 displays the game result as a lighting mode or a lighting color according to the game result after a predetermined time, by blinking the lamp during the change and displaying the change.
In the case of the present embodiment, among the lamps D8, D10, and D18 constituting the general map display 53, only the lamp D8 is turned on when the game result is out of order, and the game result is a hit and the stop symbol When the number is “1”, only the lamp D10 is turned on, and when the game result is hit, the winning stop symbol number is “2”, only the lamp D18 is turned on, and the game result is hit and stopped. When the number is “3”, the lamp D10 and the lamp D18 are turned on.

In addition, the general figure hold display 56 displays the start memory number (= holding number) of the general figure start gate 34 which is the variation start condition of the general figure display 53 by turning off, blinking, and turning on a plurality of LEDs.
In the case of the present embodiment, of the lamp D15 and the lamp D16 constituting the general-purpose hold indicator 56, when the hold number is “0”, both the lamp D15 and the lamp D16 are turned off, and the hold number is “1”. When the hold number is “2”, both the lamp D15 and the lamp D16 are turned on. When the hold number is “3”, the lamp D15 is blinked and the lamp D16 is turned on. Is turned on, and both the lamp D15 and the lamp D16 are in a blinking state when the hold number is "4".

The special figure 1 holding display 54 displays the number of undigested balls (starting memory number = holding number) out of the number of winning balls to the start winning opening 36, which is the variation start condition of the special figure 1 display 51, by a plurality of LEDs. Displayed by turning off, flashing, or turning on.
In the case of this embodiment, among the lamps D11 and D12 constituting the special figure 1 hold indicator 54, when the hold number is “0”, both the lamp D11 and the lamp D12 are turned off, and the hold number is “1”. ", The lamp D11 alone is lit, both the lamp D11 and the lamp D12 are lit when the hold count is" 2 ", and the lamp D11 is blinked when the hold count is" 3 ". D12 is turned on, and both the lamp D11 and the lamp D12 are blinked when the number of holding is “4”. The blinking cycle is set to 128 milliseconds, for example.

The special figure 2 hold indicator 55 indicates the start memory number (= hold number) of the second start winning opening (ordinary variable prize winning device 37), which is the fluctuation start condition of the special figure 2 indicator 52, and turns off the plurality of LEDs. Displayed by blinking and lighting.
In the case of this embodiment, among the lamps D13 and D14 constituting the special figure 2 hold indicator 55, when the hold number is “0”, both the lamp D13 and the lamp D14 are turned off, and the hold number is “1”. ”, Only the lamp D13 is lit, when the number of hold is“ 2 ”, both the lamp D13 and the lamp D14 are lit, and when the number of hold is“ 3 ”, the lamp D13 is blinked. D14 is turned on, and both the lamp D13 and the lamp D14 are in a blinking state when the holding number is “4”. The blinking cycle is set to 128 milliseconds, for example.

  The first game state display unit (right-handed notification unit) 57 is configured by an LED lamp or the like. For example, in the case of a game state in which left-handed is more advantageous for the player than right-handed (normally hit), a lamp Is turned off, and the lamp is turned on when a right-handed game is more advantageous to the player than a left-handed player (right-handed).

  The second gaming state display unit (time-short state notifying unit) 58 is configured by an LED lamp or the like. For example, in the normal gaming state where the time-short state does not occur (when the variable time shortening function is not activated), the lamp is turned on. The lamp is turned off when the time-short state occurs (when the variable time reduction function is activated).

  The third gaming state display unit (probability state display unit) 59 is configured by an LED lamp or the like. For example, when the jackpot probability state is a low probability state (normal probability state) when the gaming machine 10 is turned on, the lamp is turned on. When the gaming machine 10 is turned on, when the jackpot probability state is a high probability state (probability variation state), the lamp is turned on.

The round display unit 60 is configured by an LED lamp or the like. For example, the lamp is turned off when the game is not in a special game state, and the lamp corresponding to the number of rounds selected according to the special result is displayed during the special game state. Turn on the light.
In the case of the present embodiment, among the lamp D6, lamp D5, lamp D4, and lamp D3 constituting the round display unit 60, when the selected round number is “4”, the lamp D6 and the lamp D4 are turned on and selected. When the round number is “16”, the lamp D5 and the lamp D3 are turned on.
Note that the round display unit may be a seven-segment display.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by launching a game ball (pachinko ball) from a launcher (not shown) toward the game area 32. The launched game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by means of direction change members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged at various locations in the game area 32, and the normal start gate 34 and the general winning opening 35 The winning prize opening 36, the normal variable prize winning device 37 or the special variable prize winning devices 38, 39 are awarded, or flow into the outlet 30 a provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and discharged from the game area 32. When a game ball wins the general winning opening 35, the start winning opening 36, the normal variation winning apparatus 37, or the special variable winning apparatus 38, 39, the number of winning balls corresponding to the type of the winning opening is paid out. From the dispensing unit controlled by 200 (see FIG. 3), the glass frame 15 is discharged to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23.

  On the other hand, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) including a non-contact type switch for detecting a game ball that has passed through the general diagram start gate 34 is provided in the general diagram start gate 34. When a game ball that has been driven into the area 32 passes through the usual figure start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a and a usual figure change display game is played. In addition, the normal variation display game cannot be started, for example, the normal variation display game has already been played and the normal variation display game has not been completed, If 37 is converted to the open state and the game ball passes through the general figure start gate 34, the general figure start memory number is added if the number is less than the upper limit number (for example, four) of the normal figure start memory number (for example, 4). +1), and one ordinary start memory is stored. The memorized number of the usual figure start winnings is displayed on the universal figure holding display 56 of the collective display device 50. In addition, a random number value for hit determination (win random number value) for determining the result of the normal map fluctuation display game is stored in the normal chart start memory, and this random number value for hit determination is determined as a determination value. To determine the result of the normal map display game. When the hit determination random number value matches the determination value, the normal variation display game is won and a specific result mode (normal map specific result) is derived.

  The usual figure change display game is provided in the collective display device 50 and is displayed on a change display portion (common figure display) 53 constituted by LEDs. Makes identification information (general, normal). The general map display 53 is composed of a display device, and for example, numbers, symbols, character designs, etc. are used as normal identification information. After this is displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined time, the result is displayed in a stopped state. You may do it. If the stop display of the usual figure change display game is a usual figure specifying result, it becomes a hit of the ordinary figure, and the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened for a predetermined time. This makes it easier for the game ball to win the second start winning opening inside the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the number of times the second special figure changing display game is executed increases.

  The winning ball to the starting winning port 36 and the winning ball to the normal variation winning device 37 are respectively detected by the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a provided inside. A game ball won in the start winning opening 36 is detected as a start winning ball in the first special figure variation display game, and is stored as a first start memory with a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four) as a limit and is normally changed. The game ball that has won the winning device 37 is detected as a start winning ball of the second special figure variation display game, and is stored as a second start memory up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four). Further, when detecting the starting winning ball, a big hit random number value, a big hit symbol random number value, and each variation pattern random number value are extracted as starting storage information, and the extracted random number value is stored in the game control device 100 (see FIG. 3). Are stored in the special figure storage area (a part of the RAM) as a special figure start memory for a predetermined number of times (for example, a maximum of four times). The number stored in the special chart start memory is displayed on the storage display section (the special figure 1 hold display 54, the special figure 2 hold display 55) for notifying the start winning number of the collective display device 50, and the center. Also on the display device 41 of the case 40, it is displayed as a decorative special figure start memory display 83.

  The game control device 100 receives the special prize 1 display 51 (variation display device) or the special figure 2 display 52 (variation display) based on the winning winning opening 36 or the normal variable prize winning device 37, or the starting memory thereof. The first or second special figure variation display game is played on the device. The first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game are performed by variably displaying a plurality of special symbols (special figures, identification information) and then stopping and displaying a predetermined result form. In addition, a decorative special figure variation display game is displayed in which a display device (image display device) 41 displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) in a variable manner. And as a result of the special figure fluctuation display game, when the display form of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 becomes a special result form (special result), a special game state ( So-called big hit state). Correspondingly, the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 is also a special result mode. Further, when the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 becomes the small hit result mode as a result of the special figure change display game, a small hit game state (so-called so-called game condition) , A small hit state). Correspondingly, the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 is also the small hit result mode.

  For example, in the decorative special symbol variation display game on the display device 41, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the numbers and the like described above on the display device 41 is changed to the left variation display region (first special symbol), the right variation display region ( In each of the second special symbol) and the middle fluctuation display area (third special symbol), each symbol is displayed in a variable manner (high-speed fluctuation) at a speed that is difficult to identify. Then, the symbols that have changed after a predetermined time are sequentially stopped in the order of the left variation display region, the right variation display region, and the middle variation display region, and stopped in each of the left variation display region, the right variation display region, and the middle variation display region. This is done by displaying the result of the special figure variation display game according to the result form constituted by the displayed identification information. In addition, the display device 41 performs a variable display game with a decorative special symbol corresponding to the number of special figure starting memories, and various effect displays such as the appearance of a character are performed to improve interest.

  The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be separate displays or the same display, but each special figure variation display is performed so as not to be executed independently or simultaneously. The game is displayed. In addition, the display device 41 may use different display devices and different display areas in the first special map variable display game and the second special map variable display game, or use the same display device and display area. However, the decoration special figure variation display game is displayed so as not to be executed independently or simultaneously. The game machine 10 may not be provided with the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41. Further, the second special figure variation display game is executed with priority over the first special figure variation display game. That is, when there is a start memory of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the special figure fluctuation display game can be executed, the second special figure fluctuation display game is It is to be executed (executed with priority).

  In addition, in the state where the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) can be started and the number of start memories is zero, the start winning opening 36 (or the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37) is entered. When the game ball wins, the start memory is stored as the start right is generated, the start memory number is incremented by 1, and the first special figure variation display game (second special figure) is immediately added based on the start memory. (Variable display game) is started, and at this time, the start memory number is subtracted by one. On the other hand, a state in which the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) cannot be started immediately, for example, the first or second special figure fluctuation display game has already been performed, and the special figure fluctuation display game has ended. If the game ball is won in the start winning opening 36 (or the normal variable winning device 37) in the state of not being played, in the special game state or in the small hit game state, if the start memory number is less than the upper limit number, The start memory number is incremented by 1, and one start memory is stored. Then, in a state where the starting memory number is 1 or more, the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) can be started (the end of the previous special figure fluctuation display game or the special game state, At the end of the small hit gaming state), the start memory number is decremented by 1, and the first special figure variation display game (second special figure variation display game) is started based on the stored start memory. In the following description, when the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure fluctuation display game.

  Although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning port 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variation winning device 37, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, the count switch 38a, 39a is a non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that includes a magnetic detection coil and detects a game ball using a phenomenon in which a magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. ing. In addition, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 and the like of the gaming machine 10 and the body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 and the like include a micro switch having a mechanical contact. Can be used.

FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) for comprehensively controlling games, and a gaming microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a gaming microcomputer) 111 is provided. CPU section 110, input section 120 having an input port, output section 130 having an output port, a driver, etc., CPU section 110, data bus 140 connecting between input section 120 and output section 130, etc. .

  The CPU section 110 includes a game microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and receives a clock that serves as a reference for the CPU operation clock, timer interrupt, and random number generation circuit. An oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 to be generated is included. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a predetermined level of DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 so as to be operable. Is done.

  The power supply apparatus 400 includes a normal power supply including an AC-DC converter that generates the DC 32V DC voltage from a 24V AC power source, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC 12V and DC 5V from the DC 32V voltage, and the like. Unit 410, a backup power supply unit 420 for supplying power supply voltage to the RAM inside the gaming microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal for notifying the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power failure And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a reset signal.

  In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or the game control device 100, that is, the main control device 100. You may comprise so that it may provide on a board | substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing this, it is possible to reduce the cost by removing it from the object of replacement.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly, the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or after the power is shut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops below 17V, for example, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. In addition, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on or the power is restored.

  Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When this RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. Processing is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111B, and a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written as needed.

  The ROM 111B stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, various random number judgment values, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a work area for the CPU 111A and various signals and random number values during game control. Used as As the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used.

  In addition, the ROM 111B stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the production contents, and the presence or absence of the reach state. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to determine the variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start memory. The variation pattern table includes a loss variation pattern table selected when the result is lost, a jackpot variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include a table for determining the second half fluctuation pattern that is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (such as the second half fluctuation group table and the second half fluctuation pattern selection table), and the fluctuation before reaching the reach state. A table for determining a first-half variation pattern as a pattern (first-half variation group table, first-half variation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

  Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state advantageous to the player (special gaming state) when the special result mode is entered, the game is already derived at the stage where some of the plurality of display results are not yet derived and displayed. This means a display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is deviated from the display condition that is the special result mode even when the display device's variable display control progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. There is no display mode. And, for example, a state in which a variable display by a plurality of variable display areas is maintained (so-called full rotation reach) while maintaining a state in which special result forms are aligned. The reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device has progressed to reach a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. The display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition for the special result mode.

  Thus, for example, a decorative special figure fluctuation display game displayed on a display device corresponding to a special figure fluctuation display game fluctuates a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas on the display device. After displaying, when the display of the result mode is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle, the condition that becomes the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas (for example, the same The state in which the identification information is obtained (except for the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

  This reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expectation value is different). As a reach effect, normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), Special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and Premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. In addition, this reach state is included in a variable display mode at least in a case where a special result mode is derived in a special figure variable display game (when a big hit is achieved). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is out of date). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state that is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

  The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B, generates control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generates and outputs drive signals for the solenoid and the display device, thereby playing the gaming machine. 10 overall control is performed. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a jackpot random number for determining the hit of the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol, a variation pattern in the special figure fluctuation display game (various patterns Random number generation circuit for generating fluctuation pattern random numbers for determining the fluctuation pattern game execution time in the variable display of reach and non-reach fluctuation display, and hit random numbers for determining the hit of the usual variable display game And a clock generator for generating a clock that gives a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A and an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. Yes.

  Further, the CPU 111A acquires any one variation pattern table from among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the process related to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (winning (big hit or small hit) or off) or the probability state (normal probability state or high probability) of the special figure changing display game as the current gaming state. State), the operation state (short-time operation state) of the normal variation winning device 37 as the current gaming state, the starting memory number, etc., and selects one variation pattern table from among a plurality of variation pattern tables. Get. Here, when executing the special figure variation display game, the CPU 111A serves as variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one variation pattern table among the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B.

  The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives a payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100, thereby Control to make it pay out. In addition, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the ball.

  The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a panel radio wave sensor 62 that detects the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning port 36, a starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variation winning device 37, Connected to and supplied from the gate switch 34a in the usual start gate 34, the prize opening switch 35a, the upper count switch 38a of the first special variation winning device 38, and the lower count switch 39a of the second special variation winning device 39. Interface chips (proximity I / F) 121a and 121b are provided that receive a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V and convert it to a positive logic signal of 0V-5V. The proximity I / F 121a, 121b has an input range of 7V-11V, so that the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch is improperly shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is disconnected. Thus, an abnormal state such as floating can be detected, and an abnormality detection signal is output.

  The reason why the proximity I / F 121a and the proximity I / F 121b are provided is that the number of input terminals of the proximity I / F 121a is limited. The proximity I / F 121b is made smaller than the proximity I / F 121a in accordance with the number of input terminals that are insufficient, thereby reducing the cost. Note that the proximity I / F 121a having a necessary number of input terminals may be used, and the proximity I / F 121b may not be provided.

  The outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121 a and 121 b are supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b, detection signals and sensors of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, the upper count switch 38a, and the lower count switch 39a An abnormality detection signal 1 output when a switch abnormality is detected is input to the second input port 123. Of the outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b, the detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal 2 output when an abnormality of the sensor or switch is detected are input to the third input port 124. Further, the third input port 124 has a detection signal from the fraud detection magnetic sensor 61 provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 or a glass frame open detection provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10. The detection signal of the switch 63 and the detection signal of the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 of the gaming machine 10 are also input. Note that a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine, and the detection signal may be input to the third input port 124.

  Of the outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the main board 100 to the test firing test apparatus (not shown) via the relay board 70. Furthermore, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a among the outputs of the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123. .

  As described above, the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b have a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, a voltage of 12 V is supplied to the proximity I / Fs 121a and 121b from the power supply device 400 in addition to a voltage such as 5 V necessary for normal IC operation. It is like that.

  The data held in the second input port 123 is read out by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to an effective level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123. be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

  The input unit 120 also includes a fraud radio signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output when the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 detects radio waves), a payout busy signal (payout control device). 200 is a signal indicating whether or not a command can be received), a payout abnormality status signal (status signal indicating a payout abnormality), a shot ball cut switch signal (a signal indicating a lack of game balls before payout), an overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (full), a touch switch signal (input to a touch switch provided on the operation unit 24) A first input port 122 is provided which takes in a signal based on the data bus 140 and supplies the signal to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

  Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting a signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the game microcomputer 111 or the like. It has a function of removing noise from the signal. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to a reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is directly output to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test board. It is configured as follows. Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to each port 122, 123, 124 of the input unit 120. The data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset to prevent malfunction of the system. However, immediately before the reset signal RESET is input, each data of the input unit 120 is reset. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control apparatus 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control apparatus 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. The one-way communication is such that no signal can be input to the game control device 100 from the side of the effect control device 300.

  In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 via a relay board 70 for data indicating special symbol information of the variable display game to a test firing test apparatus of an accredited organization (not shown) and a signal indicating the probability status of jackpot. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (a mass-produced product) installed in the game shop. A detection signal of a switch that does not require processing, such as a start port switch, output from the proximity I / Fs 121 a and 121 b is supplied to the test test apparatus via the relay substrate 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, detection signals that cannot be supplied to the test firing test apparatus as they are, such as the magnetic sensor 61 and the panel radio wave sensor 62, are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, the gaming machine controls the game. An error signal indicating that the state is not possible is supplied from the data bus 140 to the trial test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

  In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and is connected to the data bus 140 to open and close the door 38c of the first special variable winning device 38. And a second output port 134 for outputting opening / closing data of a solenoid (general power solenoid) 37c for opening the movable member 37b of the normal variation winning device 37. Yes. Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line connected to the anode terminal of the LED according to the contents displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information related to the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store, and stores information about the gaming machine 10. It can be supplied to an external device. Further, a launch permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

  Furthermore, the output unit 130 receives the opening / closing data signals of the upper large winning opening solenoid 38b, the lower large winning opening solenoid 39b, and the general power solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid driving signal. Output from the first driver (drive circuit) 138a, the second driver 138b, which outputs the segment line on / off drive signal on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 135, and the fourth output port 136 External information terminal board for supplying external information signals from the third driver 138c for outputting the digit line on / off drive signal of the current drawing side of the collective display device 50 to be supplied to an external device such as a management device from the fifth output port 137 A fourth driver 138d for outputting to 71 is provided.

  The first driver 138a is supplied with DC32V from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Also, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for drawing out the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

  A dynamic drive method is achieved by flowing a current to the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs 12V, and drawing the current through the segment line from the cathode terminal by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in step 1 so that the LEDs are lit. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with DC12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. Note that the buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output board 130 of the game control apparatus 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be capable of two-way communication so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 through serial communication. Note that such data transmission / reception is performed using a serial communication terminal included in the gaming microcomputer 111 in the same manner as a normal general-purpose microprocessor, and thus ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The effect control device 300 is for displaying video on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 and the main control microcomputer 311, similarly to the game microcomputer 111. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor for performing the image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling output of sound for reproducing various melody and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

  The main control microcomputer 311 stores a program ROM 321 composed of a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing a program executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 providing a work area, and stored contents even when power is not supplied in the event of a power failure. An FeRAM 323 that can be held is connected to an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a clock means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day of the week, time, etc.). A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, decides the contents of the presentation and instructs the contents of the output video to the VDP 312, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce the sound, lights the decoration lamp, motors And control of solenoid drive control and production time management.

  The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing images. The VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

  Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

  From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the video of the display device 41 and lighting of the decoration lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing STS is input. The VDP 312 informs the main control microcomputer 311 that it is waiting to receive commands and data from the interrupt control signals INT0 to n and the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT and the like are also input.

  The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by an LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is input to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

  A sound ROM 327 storing sound data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. An interrupt signal INT is input from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier that drives an upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and a lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. An ornamental special figure holding number command, a decorative special figure command, a variation command, a stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 via this command I / F 331 are produced as a production control command signal (production command ). Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. Yes.

  The effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), and a glass frame 15. Frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 and the like) having LEDs (light emitting diodes) and board effects provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). There is provided a board effect movable body control circuit 334 that drives and controls the device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41). These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address / data bus 340. Note that a frame effect device having a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor that operates an effect device) is provided on the glass frame 15, and a frame effect movable body control circuit that drives and controls the frame effect device is provided. good.

  Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25 a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 29 provided on the glass frame 15, an initial position of a motor in the board effect device 44, and the like. The function of detecting the on / off state of the effect actor switch 47 (effect motor switch) for detecting the sound and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 And a switch input circuit 336 for inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply apparatus 400 drives a motor or a solenoid to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control apparatus 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled thereby. In addition to DC32V, display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motors and LEDs, and DC5V as the power supply voltage for command I / F 331, a voltage of DC15V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers is generated. Is configured to do. Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC − for generating DC 3.3 V or DC 1.2 V based on DC 5 V is used. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply apparatus 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device into a reset state. In addition, VDP 312 (VDRESET signal), sound source LSI 314, amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving speakers, and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET) for driving and controlling lamps and motors, etc., are output from main control microcomputer 311. Signal) to reset them. In addition, a cooling FAN 45 that cools various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven in a state in which the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described.
The CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a random number value for hit determination of the normal figure based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided to the normal figure start gate 34, and the ROM 111B. Is compared with the determination value stored in the table, and a process of determining a missed hit of the normal game display game is performed. Then, after the identification symbol (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the general symbol display 53, a processing for displaying a general symbol variation display game to be stopped is performed. When the result of the normal map change display game is a win, a special result mode corresponding to each of the first per stop symbol to the third per stop symbol is displayed on the general diagram display 53, and the general electric solenoid 37c is displayed. Control is performed to open the movable member 37b of the normal variation winning device 37 as described above for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds). That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). In addition, when the result of the normal map change display game is out of order, control is performed on the general map display 53 to display the result form of the shift.

  Further, a start winning (starting memory) is stored based on an input of a detection signal of a game ball from a starting port 1 switch 36a provided in the start winning port 36, and based on this start memory, the first special figure variation display game is stored. The big hit determination random number value is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining a miss of the first special figure variation display game is performed. In addition, the start memory is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variation winning device 37, and based on this start memory, the big hit determination of the second special figure variable display game A random number value is extracted and compared with a determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining a miss of the second special figure variation display game is performed.

  Then, the CPU 111 </ b> A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including the determination results of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game to the effect control device 300. Then, after the identification symbol (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, a process for displaying a special figure fluctuation display game to be stopped is performed. In other words, the game control unit 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the start winning area (the first start winning opening 36, the normal variable winning apparatus 37). Make.

  In addition, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 performs a process of displaying the decoration special figure change display game corresponding to the special figure change display game. Furthermore, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the production state setting, the sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b, the process of controlling the light emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed. That is, the production control device 300 serves as production control means for controlling production related to a game (such as a variable display game).

  Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode and the small hit result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit or a small hit. In addition, a process for generating a special game state or a small hit game state (that is, a process for executing a special game or a small hit game) is performed. In the process of generating the special game state or the small hit game state, the CPU 111A opens, for example, the open / close door 38c of the first special variable winning device 38 by the upper large winning opening solenoid 38b or the second by the lower large winning opening solenoid 39b. Control is performed such that the open / close door 39c of the special variable winning device 39 is opened to allow the game ball to flow into the special winning opening. Then, until the condition that either a predetermined number (for example, nine) of game balls wins the grand prize winning opening or a predetermined openable time elapses after the opening of the big winning opening is achieved, A control (cycle game) is performed in which the release is set as one round, and this is continued (repeated) a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a special winning opening / closing control means for performing control for opening / closing the special winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of order, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are controlled to display the result form of the deviation.

  In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a gaming state after the special gaming state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. This high probability state is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than the normal probability state. Moreover, even if it becomes a high probability state based on the result aspect of any of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game, the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure Both of the variable display games are in a high probability state.

  In addition, the game control device 100 is capable of generating a short time state (a specific game state, a general figure high probability state) as a game state after the special game state is ended, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this short state, the probability that the hit result of the normal map change display game (normal map probability) is higher than the normal probability (normal low probability state) of 0 (normal high probability state). Is possible. As a result, control is performed so that the opening time of the normal variation winning device 37 per unit time is longer than when the normal variation winning device 37 is in the normal low probability state. Here, in the normal variation winning device 37 in the present embodiment, the normal probability is set to 0 so that the movable member 37b is not opened in the normal gaming state.

  Also, in the short time state, the execution time of the normal map change display game (the normal map change time) is, for example, 500 milliseconds, and the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map change display game is, for example, 600 milliseconds. When the normal variation winning game 37 is released as a result of the normal variation display game being won, the first stop symbol opening time (general power release time) and the number of releases (for example, 500 msec × 1), Opening time (general power opening time) of the second per stop symbol and the number of times of opening (for example, 1700 msec × 2 times), opening time of the third per symbol (opening time of the main power), and the number of times of opening (for example, 1700 ms ×) 3 times).

  In addition, the execution time of the general map variable display game, the general map stop time, the number of general power releases, and the general power open time are appropriately set so as to control the normal map variable display game and the normal variable winning device 37 to be in the short-time operation state. For example, in the short-time state, it is possible to control the execution time of the above-described normal variation display game (ordinary variation time) to be the second variation display time shorter than the first variation display time. (For example, 10,000 milliseconds is 1000 milliseconds). Further, in the short time state, it is possible to control so that the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map change display game becomes the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 milliseconds). 704 ms). Also, in the short-time state, when the normal variation winning game 37 is released as a result of the normal-variation display game being won, the opening time (general power open time) is set to the normal state (low-probability state) It is possible to control so that the second opening time is longer than one opening time (for example, 100 msec is 1352 msec). In the short-time state, the number of times of opening of the normal variation winning device 37 (the number of times of normal power release) is greater than the number of times of opening the first time (for example, 2 times) with respect to the result of one hit of the normal fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the number of times of opening (for example, 4 times) to the second opening number. Also, in the short-time state, the probability that the hit result of the normal-variable display game (normal-probability) is higher than the normal probability (normal low-probability state, for example, 1/251) in the normal operation state. Probability (usually high probability state, eg 250/251) is possible.

  In the short-time state, the normal variation winning device 37 is in an open state by changing any one or more of the normal time fluctuation time, the normal time stop time, the number of normal power releases, the normal power release time, and the normal figure probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time-short states that are different from each other. Moreover, when it is a hit, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first release mode and the second release mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the short time state can be generated independently, and both can be generated simultaneously or only one can be generated.

  Hereinafter, control of the gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes a main process shown in FIGS. 5 and 6 and a timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 7 performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 milliseconds).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIG. 5 and FIG. 6, first, the process of prohibiting an interrupt (step S1) is performed, and then the start address of the area in which the value of a register or the like is saved when an interrupt occurs. A stack pointer setting process (step S2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, register bank 0 is designated (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (eg, D register) (step S4). In the case of the present embodiment, the RAM address range is 0000h to 01FFh, the upper order is 00h or 01h, and the top 00h is set in step S4. Next, a firing stop signal is output to set the firing permission signal to a prohibited state (step S5). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing stop signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited.

  Thereafter, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step S6), and processing for setting a power-on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, a program of slave control means (for example, payout control apparatus 200 or effect control apparatus 300) that performs various controls in accordance with instructions from the game control apparatus 100 serving as the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for normal startup is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 is first started up, and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the production control device 300) is started up. Can avoid missing commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the start of the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the effect control device 300, etc.) when the power is turned on. A standby means for setting the standby time is provided.

  In addition, the power-on delay timer is counted using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not subject to validity determination) that is not subject to RAM validity determination (checksum calculation). Thereby, when calculating check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area, so that it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

  Note that an initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122, and the operation of the initialization switch 112 is reliably performed by reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time. It can be detected. In other words, if the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch 112 is operated after waiting for the standby time to elapse, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from when the power is turned on until the standby time elapses. It is necessary to continue doing. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by operating immediately after turning on the power without performing such troublesome operations. Can be prevented from being accepted.

  After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step S7), the process of measuring the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps S8 to S12) is performed. First, the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read via the port and the data bus and the number of times (for example, twice) to be checked is set (step S8) to determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Perform (step S9).

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (step S10; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9). If the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the power supply of the gaming machine is waited to be cut off. In this way, it is possible to prevent a power outage from being erroneously detected due to noise, etc. by determining that a power outage has occurred when the power outage monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, and appropriately deal with problems at power-on. can do.

  That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100 that constitutes the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of power-on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power shut-off are retained, so backup processing is performed when a power failure occurs here There is no need. For this reason, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control burden can be reduced.

  On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step S11), and the timer value is 0? Is determined (step S12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step S8). If the value of the timer is 0 (step S12; Y), that is, if the standby time has expired, access to a readable / writable RWM (read / write memory) such as a RAM or EEPROM is permitted (step S13). ), Off-data is output to all output ports (set to a state in which there is no output) (step S14).

  Next, a serial port (a port pre-installed in the gaming microcomputer 111 and used in this embodiment for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200) is set (step S15) and read first. Whether the initialization switch has been turned on is determined from the state of the first input port 122 (step S16).

  When the initialization switch is OFF (step S16; N), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step S17). If so (step S17; Y), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step S18). If the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S18; Y), a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step S19). It is determined whether or not the checksums match (step S20). If the checksums match (step S20; Y), the process proceeds to step S21 in FIG.

  Further, when it is determined that the initialization switch is on (step S16; Y), or when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S17; N or step S18; N). If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (step S20; N), the process proceeds to step S26 in FIG. 6 to perform initialization processing. That is, the initialization switch constitutes an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make.

  In step S21 of FIG. 6, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step S21). The areas to be initialized here are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. The busy signal status area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. Undefined state. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area for storing the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and an undefined state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal has not been determined. Thereafter, an area for storing the game state in the RWM is examined to determine whether or not the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (step S22). Here, when the special figure is not in high probability (step S22; N), steps S23 and S24 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S25. On the other hand, when the special figure is in a high probability (step S22; Y), the on-information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S23), and for example, a high probability notification LED (error display) provided in the batch display device 50 is saved. Data) is saved in the segment area (step S24). And the command at the time of the power failure restoration corresponding to the process number prepared in order to perform the special figure game process mentioned later reasonably is transmitted to an effect control board (effect control apparatus 300) (step S25), and step S31 Proceed to In the case of the present embodiment, in step S25, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, a screen designation command (a customer waiting demonstration screen command if waiting for a customer, otherwise) If so, send multiple commands such as recovery screen commands). Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, an effect count information command and a high probability count information command are also transmitted.

  On the other hand, when jumping from step S16, S17, S18, S20 to step S26, the RAM access prohibited area is set to access permitted (step S26), and all the areas including the busy signal status area and the touch switch signal state monitoring area are set. The RAM area is cleared to 0 (step S27), and the RAM access prohibition area is set to access prohibition (step S28). Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S29). The area to be initialized here is an area relating to the setting of the customer waiting demonstration area and the production mode. And the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to an effect control board (effect control apparatus 300) (step S30), and it progresses to step S31. In this embodiment, in step S30, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a special figure 2 hold number command, a probability information command, a RAM initialization command (a customer waiting demonstration screen is displayed and a predetermined time ( A plurality of commands such as a command for informing the RAM initialization with light and sound (for example, for 30 seconds) are transmitted. Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, an effect count information command and a high probability count information command are also transmitted.

  In step S31, a process of starting a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC for giving a trigger for updating a random number supplied to the random number generation circuit.

  After the CTC activation process in step S31, a process for setting the activation of the random number generation circuit is performed (step S32). Specifically, the CPU 111A performs setting of a code (specified value) for starting the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Also, a bit transposition pattern of a hard random number (here, a big hit random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is set. Bit transposition pattern is a method of permutation when the extracted random bit arrangement (the arrangement before the upper bit transposition) is replaced in a predetermined order and stored as a different bit arrangement (the arrangement after the lower bit transposition). It is a pattern that defines By replacing the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may arbitrarily set it.

  Thereafter, the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of power-on is extracted, and various corresponding initial value random numbers (in the case of this embodiment, random numbers that determine the hit pattern of the special figure) RWM as the initial value (start value) of (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number), random number that determines the hit of the normal figure (per random number), random number that determines the hit symbol of the normal figure (per hit random number) After saving to the area (step S33), the interruption is permitted (step S34). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in this embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes every time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of random numbers generated by software, making it difficult for a player to obtain illegal random numbers.

  Subsequently, an initial value random number update process (step S35) is performed for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the winning symbol random number are generated using random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. It is configured as follows. However, the big hit random number is a so-called “high-speed counter” that is updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU. The big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are processed by the program. This is a “low-speed counter” that is updated on the basis of a CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing) having the same cycle as the timer interrupt processing as a unit. In addition, in the big hit design random number, the small hit design random number, the hit random number, and the hit design random number, each time the random number makes a round, the initial value random number (generated by software) is used to change the start value. Is adopted. Each random number may be a counter update by +1 or −1, or may be a random update in which all values within the range appear without overlapping until one round is reached. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

  After the initial value random number update process in step S35, the number of times (for example, twice) for reading and checking the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step S36), It is determined whether the monitoring signal is on (step S37). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S37; N), the process returns to the initial value random number update process (step S35). That is, when no power failure has occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop processing) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step S35) (step S34), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed. Can be prevented from being interrupted by waiting for the initial value random number update process.

  The initial value random number update process in step S35 includes a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process in addition to the main process. In order to avoid execution of the value random number update process, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update to cancel the interrupt. If the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed in the main process and only the main process is performed, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. There is an advantage that it is simplified.

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step S36 (step S38). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (step S38; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (step S38; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, processing for temporarily prohibiting interruption (step S39), all A process of outputting off data to the output port (step S40) is performed.

  Thereafter, the power failure inspection region check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection region 1 (step S41), and the power failure inspection region check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection region 2 (step S42). Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step S43) for calculating a checksum when the RWM is powered off, and a process for saving the calculated checksum (step S44), a process for prohibiting access to the RWM (step S45). ) And wait for the gaming machine to be turned off. In this way, the check data is saved in the power failure inspection area and the checksum at the time of power shutoff is calculated to determine whether the information stored in the RWM is correctly backed up before the power shuts down. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

  From the above, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) for overall control of the game, and the slave control means (payout control apparatus 200, effect control apparatus 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means. ), The main control means is a standby means (game control apparatus) for setting a predetermined standby time for delaying the start of the main control means and waiting for the start of the slave control device when the power is turned on. 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined waiting time.

  The power supply device 400 includes a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices. The power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When a power failure monitoring signal is continuously received over a predetermined period, it is determined that a power failure has occurred.

  Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is based on the RAM 111C capable of storing data, the initialization operation unit (initialization switch) capable of being operated from the outside, and the initialization operation unit being operated. An initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing data stored in the RAM 111C, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the waiting time.

  Further, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) permits access to the RAM 111C after the standby time has elapsed.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 7, the timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 7 is started.

  When timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is designated (step S101). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing a register saving process in which a value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in the main process) is transferred to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S102). In step S102, the same processing as step S4 in the main processing is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, input processing (step S103) is performed to input from various sensors and switches and to acquire signals, that is, to read the state of each input port. Then, based on the output data set in various processes, an output process (step S104) for performing drive control of actuators such as solenoids (large winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b, general-purpose solenoid 37c) and the like is performed. Note that when a signal for stopping the firing is output in step S5 in the main process, a signal for permitting the firing is output by performing this output process, and the launch permitting signal can be set to the permitted state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, no signal processing or the like is performed. In addition, the launch permission signal is a first signal indicating a launch permission state viewed from the game control device, and a second signal (launch permission signal) indicating the launch permission state viewed from the payout control device is also a payout control. Generated in the device and output to the launch controller. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the game ball can be launched.

  Next, a payout command transmission process (step S105), a random number update process 1 (step S106), and a random number update process 2 (step S107) for outputting commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control apparatus 200 are performed. Thereafter, it is monitored whether a normal signal is input from the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the usual gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the count switches 38a and 39a, and an error ( A prize opening switch / state monitoring process (step S108) is performed to determine whether the front frame or the glass frame is open. Also, a special figure game process (step S109) for performing a process related to the special figure variation display game and a general figure game process (step S110) for performing a process related to the common figure variation display game are performed.

Next, a segment LED editing process (step S111), which is provided in the gaming machine 10 and drives a segment LED that displays special information variation display game and various information related to the game to display desired contents, magnetic sensor 61 Magnet fraud monitoring process (step S112) that performs a process of checking the detection signal from the panel to determine whether there is an abnormality, and a panel radio wave fraud that performs a process of checking the detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62 to determine whether there is an abnormality A monitoring process (step S113) is performed. Then, an external information editing process (step S114) for setting a signal to be output to various external devices in the output buffer is performed, and the timer interrupt process is terminated.
Here, in the present embodiment, the process for restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process for allowing the interrupt) and the process for restoring the designation of the register bank (that is, the process for designating the register bank 0) Automatically at the time of the timer interrupt processing. Depending on the CPU used, there is a gaming machine that needs to instruct execution of processing for restoring the interrupt disabled state and processing for restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Special Figure Game Processing]
Next, the details of the special game process (step S109) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the special figure game process, the input of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is monitored, the entire process related to the special figure variation display game is controlled, and the special figure display is set.

  As shown in FIG. 8, in the special figure game process, first, a start port switch monitoring process (step A1) for monitoring winning of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is performed. In the start port switch monitoring process, when a game ball is won in the normal variable winning device 37 that forms the start winning port 36 and the second starting winning port, various random numbers (such as big hit random numbers) are extracted, and a special feature based on the winning is obtained. Prior to the start of the figure variation display game, a game result preliminary determination is performed in which a game result based on a prize is determined in advance.

  Next, a special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In the big winning opening switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball is monitored by the upper count switch 38a provided in the first special variation winning device 38 and the lower count switch 39a provided in the second special variation winning device 39. Perform the process.

  Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step A3). The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure game process timer is “0” (step A4). When the value of the special figure game process timer is “0” (step A4; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, reference is made to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number. The special figure game sequence branch table to be set is set in the register (step A5), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the table (step A6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure game process number (step A7).

In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “0”, the fluctuation start of the special figure fluctuation display game is monitored, the fluctuation start setting of the special figure fluctuation display game, the setting of the production, A special figure routine process (step A8) for setting information necessary for the process is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “1”, special figure changing process for setting a special figure stop display time, setting information necessary for performing the special figure display process, etc. (Step A9) is performed.

  In step A7, if the special figure game process number is “2”, if the game result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit, the fanfare command is set according to the type of the big hit, and the big winning opening for each big hit A special chart display process (step A10) is performed for setting the fanfare time according to the release pattern and setting information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval 2 process.

In step A7, if the special figure game process number is “3”, setting of the opening time of the big prize opening, updating of the number of times of opening, setting of information necessary for performing the process during opening of the big prize opening, etc. are performed. The fanfare / interval 2 processing (step A11) is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “4”, if the big hit round is not the final round, an interval command is set, while if it is the final round, an ending command is set, or an interval 1 process is set Or a special winning opening opening process (step A12) for performing a process of setting information necessary for performing the big hit end process.

In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “5”, the process for forcibly terminating the period for waiting for the remaining balls in the big prize opening to be discharged (the big prize mouth remaining ball processing period) Then, processing during interval 1 (step A13) is performed for performing processing for setting information necessary for performing fanfare / interval 2 processing.
In step A7, if the special figure game process number is “6”, a big hit end process (step A14) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure routine process is performed.

In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “7”, in order to perform the process of setting the opening time / opening pattern of the big prize opening, the setting of the fanfare command, and the small hitting process when the small hit occurs A small hitting fanfare process (step A15) for setting necessary information and the like is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “8”, a small hitting process (step A16) for setting an ending command and setting information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball process is performed. .
In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “9”, a process for setting a time for discharging the remaining balls won in the big winning opening during the small hitting process, The small hit remaining ball processing (step A17) for setting information necessary for performing the above is performed.
In step A7, when the special figure game process number is “10”, a small hit end process (step A18) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure routine process is performed.

  Then, after preparing the table for controlling the fluctuation | variation of the special figure 1 indicator 51 (step A19), the symbol fluctuation | variation control process (step A20) which concerns on the special figure 1 indicator 51 is performed. And after preparing the table for controlling the fluctuation | variation of the special figure 2 indicator 52 (step A21), the symbol fluctuation control process (step A22) which concerns on the special figure 2 indicator 52 is performed, and a special figure game process is complete | finished. To do. On the other hand, if the value of the special figure game process timer is not “0” in step A4 (step A4; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step A19 and the subsequent processes are performed. Do.

  Note that the small hit is a result mode that does not involve the operation of the condition device, and the big hit is a special result that involves the operation of the condition device. The condition device is activated when a big hit occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game (stop display of the big hit symbol). When the conditional device is activated, for example, a big hit state occurs and a special electric accessory is generated. This means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable winning devices 38 and 39 is set (the accessory continuous operation device is operated). The fact that the condition device does not operate means that the aforementioned flag is not set as in the case of winning a small lottery. The “condition device” may be software means such as a flag that is turned on / off in software as described above, or may be hardware means such as a switch that is electrically turned on / off. In addition, the “condition device” is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term having a meaning.

[Starter switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the start port switch monitoring process (step A1) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 9, in the start port switch monitoring process, first, a first start port (start winning port 36) winning monitoring table is prepared (step A101), and a hard random number acquisition process (step A102) is performed. It is determined whether or not there is a winning at one start opening (step A103).
If it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning at the first start opening (step A103; N), the process proceeds to step A109 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A103 that there is a winning at the first start opening (step A103; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure is running shortly (under normal power support) (step A104). ).

If it is determined in step A104 that the special drawing time is not short (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A104 that the special drawing time is short (step A104; Y), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and an effect command setting process (step A106) is performed. . That is, if the time is short, the right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105) and the effect command setting process (step A106) is performed regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game. In the case of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the first starting port (start winning port 36) is not left unless it is left-handed, and the normal variable winning device 37 is not winning unless it is right-handed. Therefore, in the short-time state, a right-handed game is more advantageous than left-handed, but when there is a winning at the first starting port during the short-time state (that is, when left-handed during the short-time state). Is configured such that a right-handed instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and a notification (warning) for instructing to right-hand is performed by the effect control device 300.
Next, after preparing a table for setting information on hold by the first start opening (start winning prize opening 36) (step A107), special figure start opening switch common processing (step A108) is performed.

Next, a winning start monitoring table is prepared for the second starting opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) (step A109), and a hard random number acquisition process (step A110) is performed to determine whether or not there is a winning at the second starting opening. Determine (step A111).
If it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning at the second starting port (step A111; N), the starting port switch monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A111 that there is a winning at the second starting port (step A111; Y), the ordinary electric accessory (ordinary variable winning device 37) is operating, that is, normal variation. If the winning device 37 is activated to determine whether or not the game ball is open (step A112), and if it is determined that the ordinary electric accessory is operating (step A112; Y), the step The process proceeds to A114, and the subsequent processes are performed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A112 that the ordinary electric accessory is not in operation (step A112; N), it is determined whether or not a normal electric power fraud has occurred (step A113).

  In determining whether the electric power fraud is occurring, it is determined that the fraud is occurring when the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variation winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraud determination (for example, 5). The normal variation winning device 37 cannot win a game ball in the closed state, and can win a game ball only in the open state. Therefore, when the game ball wins in the closed state, it is a case where some abnormality or fraud occurs, and when there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as an illegal winning number. Then, when the number of illegal winnings counted in this way is equal to or larger than a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

  If it is determined in step A113 that there is no fraudulent power transmission (step A113; N), a table for setting information on hold by the second starting port (ordinary variable winning device 37) is prepared (step A114). The start port switch common process (step A115) is performed, and the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. If it is determined in step A113 that the power transmission fraud has occurred (step A113; Y), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second start memory is not generated any more.

[Hard random number acquisition processing]
Next, details of the hard random number acquisition processing (steps A102 and A110) in the above-described start port switch monitoring processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 10, in the hard random number acquisition process, first, information on no winning of the start target to be monitored among the first start port (start winning port 36) and the second start port (ordinary variable winning device 37) is obtained. It is set (step A121), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the monitored start port switch among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a (step A122). Then, when there is no input to the monitoring target start port switch (step A122; N), the hard random number acquisition process is terminated. On the other hand, when there is an input to the monitored start port switch (step A122; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A123), and it is determined whether there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124). .

  If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; N), that is, if no random number has been extracted, the hard random number acquisition process is terminated. If there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; Y), the big hit random number extracted to the monitored hard random number latch register is loaded and prepared (step A125). Then, among the first start port (start winning port 36) and the second start port (ordinary variation winning device 37), information on winning with the start port to be monitored is set (step A126), and hard random number acquisition processing is performed. finish.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, the details of the special-purpose start port switch common process (steps A108 and A115) in the above-described start port switch monitoring process will be described. The special figure start port switch common process is a process performed in common for each input when there is an input from the start port 1 switch 36a or the start port 2 switch 37a.

  As shown in FIG. 11, in the special figure start port switch common process, first, information regarding the number of winnings to the start port switch to be monitored among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is obtained from the gaming machine 10. The start port signal output count that is the output count to the external management device is loaded (step A131), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step A132), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (step A133). ). If the number of outputs does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is saved in the starter signal output number area of the RWM (step A134), and the process proceeds to step A135. On the other hand, if the number of outputs overflows (step A133; Y), the process proceeds to step A135. In the present embodiment, values from “0” to “255” can be stored in the start port signal output frequency area. When the loaded value is “255”, the updated value becomes “0” by +1 update, and it is determined that the output count overflows.

  Next, it is determined whether the number of special figure reservation (starting memory) to be updated corresponding to the monitoring target starter switch among the starter 1 switch 36a and the starter 2 switch 37a is less than the upper limit (step A135). When the number of special figure reservations to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step A135; N), the special figure start port switch common process is terminated. If the number of special figure hold to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A135; Y), update the number of special figure hold to be updated (number of special figure 1 hold or number of special figure 2 hold) by +1 ( Step A136), the target start opening winning flag is saved (Step A137). Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored and the special figure hold number is calculated (step A138), and the big hit random number prepared in step A125 is saved in the big hit random number storage area of the RWM ( Step A139). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the starter switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (step A140), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A141).

Next, it is determined whether or not the first start opening (start winning opening 36) is won (step A142).
If it is determined in step A142 that the winning is not for the first start opening (step A142; N), the process proceeds to step A145.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A142 that the winning is to the first start opening (step A142; Y), a small hit symbol random number is extracted and prepared (step A143), and the RWM small hit symbol is selected. Save in the random number storage area (step A144).

Next, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are saved in the corresponding RWM fluctuation pattern random number storage area (step A145), and special figure hold information determination processing (step A146) is performed.
Next, a decoration special figure hold number command corresponding to the monitoring target start opening switch and the special figure hold number is prepared (step A147), a production command setting process (step A148) is performed, and a special figure start opening switch common process is performed. finish.

  Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of game balls to the start winning area of the start winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, and becomes the right to execute the variable display game. A starting storage means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as starting storage is provided. In addition, the game control device 100 extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of game balls to the first start area (start winning prize opening 36), and stores a first start memory as a right to execute the special figure 1 variable display game. The first start storage means capable of storing the number up to the upper limit, and a predetermined random number is extracted based on the inflow of game balls to the second start area (ordinary variable winning device 37) to execute the special figure 2 variable display game The second start memory means capable of storing the second start memory to be a predetermined number as an upper limit.

[Special figure hold information judgment processing]
Next, the details of the special figure hold information determination process (step A146) in the above-described start port switch common process will be described. The special figure hold information determination process is a look-ahead process for determining the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

As shown in FIG. 12, first, the start opening prize flag saved in step A137 is checked to determine whether or not the first start opening (start winning opening 36) has been won (step A151).
If it is determined in step A151 that the winning is not for the first start opening (step A151; N), the process proceeds to step A154.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A151 that the winning is to the first start opening (step A151; Y), it is determined whether or not the special drawing time is short (step A152).

If it is determined in step A152 that the special figure time is short (step A152; Y), the special figure hold information determination process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A152 that the special drawing time is not short (step A152; N), it is determined whether the big hit or the small hit is being made (step A153).
In step A153, when it is determined that the big hit or the small hit is being made (step A153; Y), the special figure holding information determination processing is ended.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A153 that no big hit or small hit is being made (step A153; N), it is determined whether or not the big hit is a big hit depending on whether or not the big hit random value matches the big hit determination value. A big hit determination process (step A154) is performed. If the determination result is a big hit (step A155; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starter switch is set (step A156), and the big hit symbol random number prepared in step A140 is corresponded. Stop symbol information is acquired (step A157), and the process proceeds to step A164.

On the other hand, if the determination result is not a big hit (step A155; N), it is determined whether or not the first start opening (start winning opening 36) is a win (step A158).
If it is determined in step A158 that the winning is not to the first start opening (step A158; N), the stop symbol information of the deviation is set (step A163), and the process proceeds to step A164.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A158 that the first start opening is won (step A158; Y), whether or not the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value or not is a small hit. A small hit determination process (step A159) for determining whether or not. If the determination result is not a small hit (step A160; N), the stop symbol information of the detachment is set (step A163), and the process proceeds to step A164.
On the other hand, if the determination result is a small hit (step A160; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (step A161), and stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in step A143 is obtained. (Step A162), and the process proceeds to step A164.

  Then, a pre-read stop symbol command corresponding to the target start opening switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A164), and an effect command setting process is performed (step A165). Next, a special figure information setting process (step A166) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern is performed, and a fluctuation pattern setting process for setting the fluctuation mode of the special figure fluctuation display game is performed (step S166). A167).

  After that, a pre-reading variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number representing the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step A168), and an effect command setting process is performed. (Step A169), the special figure hold information determination process is terminated. The special figure information setting process in step A166 and the fluctuation pattern setting process in step A167 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure ordinary process.

  Through the above processing, a prefetch symbol command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory to be prefetched and a prefetch variation pattern command including information on the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are prepared. And transmitted to the production control device 300. As a result, the determination result (prefetch result) of the result related information corresponding to the start memory (whether it is a big hit or the type of the fluctuation pattern) is controlled before the start timing of the special figure change display game based on the corresponding start memory. It is possible to notify the device 300, in particular, by changing the decorative special figure start memory display 83 displayed on the display device 41, etc., the result related information to the player before the start timing of the special figure variable display game. Can be notified.

  That is, the game control device 100 serves as a pre-determination unit that determines a random number stored as a start memory in the start memory means (game control device 100) before the execution of the variable display game based on the start memory, for example, a special result. It is determined whether or not the information of the change display game such as whether or not and the change pattern. Note that the time when the random number value stored in correspondence with the start memory is determined in advance is not only at the start winning time when the start memory is generated, but any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is performed. Good.

[Big prize opening switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, in the special winning opening switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not a small hit (during a small hit gaming state) (step A201). When the small hit is not being made (step A201; N), it is determined whether the upper prize winning opening (the first special variable winning device 38) is open (step A202).

If the top prize winning opening is not open (step A202; N), it is determined whether the top university winning opening remaining ball valid timer is not "0" (step A203). If the upper large winning opening remaining ball valid timer is “0” (step A203; N), it is determined whether the lower large winning opening (second special variable winning apparatus 39) is open (step A204).
If the lower major winning opening is not open (step A204; N), it is determined whether the lower major winning opening remaining ball valid timer is not "0" (step A205). When the lower major winning opening remaining ball valid timer is “0” (step A205; N), the process proceeds to step A216.
Further, when the lower prize winning opening is being opened (step A204; Y), or when the lower outstanding prize winning ball remaining timer valid timer is not “0” (step A205; Y), the lower prize winning switch (lower count) It is determined whether there is an input to the switch 39a) (step A206). If there is no input to the lower prize winning switch (step A206; N), the process proceeds to step A216. If there is an input to the lower major prize opening switch (step A206; Y), a lower major prize opening count command is prepared (step A207), an effect command setting process (step A208) is performed, and the process of step A212 is performed. Migrate to

  Also, when the upper prize winning opening is open (step A202; Y) or when the upper prize winning ball remaining ball valid timer is not "0" (step A203; Y), the upper prize winning switch (up count) It is determined whether or not there is an input to the switch 38a) (step A209). If there is no input to the upper prize winning switch (step A209; N), the process proceeds to step A216. If there is an input to the upper prize winning switch (step A209; Y), an upper prize winning count command is prepared (step A210), an effect command setting process (step A211) is performed, and the process of step A212 is performed. Migrate to

In step A212, the winning prize count is updated by +1 (step A212). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of the big winning count is equal to or more than the upper limit (the number of game balls that can be won in one round. For example, “9”) (step A213).
When the number of winning prizes is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (step A213; N), the process proceeds to step A216. Further, when the number of the big winning mouth count becomes equal to or greater than the upper limit (step A213; Y), the special winning mouth count number is kept at the upper limit (step A214), and the special game process timer area is cleared to 0 ( The process proceeds to step A215) and step A216.

In step A216, it is determined whether or not the lower large winning opening (second special variable winning device 38) is open (step A216).
If the lower major prize opening is open (step A216; Y), the process proceeds to step A220. If the lower university winning opening is not open (step A216; N), if the lower university winning opening remaining ball valid timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step A217), and the lower university winning opening remaining ball is reached. It is determined whether the valid timer is “0” (step A218).
If the lower major winning opening remaining ball valid timer is not “0” (step A218; N), the process proceeds to step A220. Further, when the lower prize winning port remaining ball valid timer is “0” (step A218; Y), a signal related to the completion of the lower prize winning opening operation (for example, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is OFF) is a test signal. The data is saved in the output data area (step A219), and the process proceeds to step A220.

In step A220, it is determined whether or not the top university winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) is open (step A202).
If the top prize winning opening is open (step A220; Y), the big prize opening switch monitoring process is terminated. If the upper prize winning opening is not open (step A220; N), if the upper university winning opening remaining ball valid timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step A221), and the upper winning prize remaining ball is set. It is determined whether the valid timer is “0” (step A222).
When the upper prize winning port remaining ball valid timer is not “0” (step A222; N), the big prize opening switch monitoring process is terminated. When the upper prize winning port remaining ball valid timer is “0” (step A222; Y), a signal relating to the completion of the upper prize winning opening operation (for example, the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is OFF) is a test signal. The data is saved in the output data area (step A223), and the special winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated.

If the small hit is being made (step A201; Y), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game process number is "8", that is, whether the small hit is being processed (step A224).
If it is not under mid-hit processing (step A224; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the small hits are being processed (step A224; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the big prize opening switch 1 (lower count switch 39a) (step A225).

  When there is no input to the big prize opening switch 1 (step A225; N), the big prize opening switch monitoring process is terminated. Further, when there is an input to the prize winning switch 1 (step A225; Y), the value of the prize winning counter is added to the prize winning count (step A226), and the prize winning count is the upper limit (one round). It is determined whether or not the number of game balls that can be won is increased (for example, “9”) or more (step A227).

  When the number of the big prize winning count is not equal to or greater than the upper limit value (step A227; N), the special winning prize mouth switch monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the number of the big winning mouth count becomes equal to or larger than the upper limit (step A218; Y), the special winning mouth count number is kept at the upper limit (step A228), and the special game process timer area is cleared to 0 (step). A229), the value of the end of the small hit release operation is saved in the big winning opening control pointer area (step A230), and the big winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. This closes the grand prize opening and ends one round.

[Special figure routine processing]
Next, details of the special figure routine process (step A8) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 15, in the special figure normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 hold number (second start memory number) is “0” (step A301). If it is determined that the special figure 2 hold number is “0” (step A301; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 hold number (first start memory number) is “0” (step A306). Then, if it is determined that the special figure 1 hold number is “0” (step A306; Y), it is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration has been started (step A311), and if the customer waiting demonstration has not started (step A311). A311; N) sets a customer waiting demo flag in the customer waiting demo flag area (step A312).

  Subsequently, a customer waiting demonstration command is prepared (step A313), an effect command setting process (step A314) is performed, a special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A315) is performed, and the special figure normal process is terminated. . On the other hand, when the customer waiting demonstration has been started in step A311, (step A311; Y), the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A315) is performed, and the special figure normal process is terminated.

In step A301, if the special figure 2 hold number is not “0” (step A301; N), a special figure 2 change start process (step A302) is performed, and the decorative special figure corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is executed. A reservation number command is prepared (step A303), and an effect command setting process (step A304) is performed. Then, the special figure changing process transition setting process (step A305) of special figure 2 is performed, and the special figure usual process is terminated.
In step A306, if the number of reserved special figure 1 is not "0" (step A306; N), a special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A307) is performed, and a decorative special figure corresponding to the number of special figure 1 held is displayed. A reserve number command is prepared (step A308), and an effect command setting process (step A309) is performed. Then, the special figure changing process transition setting process (step A310) of special figure 1 is performed, and the special figure usual process is terminated.

  As described above, the special figure 2 hold count is checked before the special figure 1 hold count check. If the special figure 2 hold count is not “0”, the special figure 2 change start process (step A302). Will be executed. That is, the second special figure variation display game is executed with priority over the first special figure variation display game. That is, when the game control device 100 has the second start memory in the second start memory means (game control device 100), the variable display game based on the second start memory is displayed as the variable display based on the first start memory. Priority control means for executing with priority over the game.

[Special Figure 1 Change Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 variation start process (step A307) in the above-described special figure ordinary process will be described. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game. As shown in FIG. 16, first, a special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step A331), and the first special figure fluctuation is performed. A jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A332) is performed to set the shift information and the jackpot information to the jackpot flag 1 for determining whether or not the display game is a jackpot.

  Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A333) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure which sets the special symbol information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern An information setting process (step A334) is performed to prepare a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the first special figure fluctuation display game is set. (Step A335). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (step A336) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the first special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting variation start information of the first special figure variation display game. (Step A337) is performed, and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is terminated.

[Special Figure 2 Variation Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 variation start process (step A302) in the above-described special figure ordinary process will be described. The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the same process as the special figure 1 fluctuation start process shown in FIG. Is what you do.

  As shown in FIG. 17, first, a special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step A341), and the second special figure fluctuation is performed. A jackpot flag 2 setting process (step A342) is performed for setting the shift information and jackpot information to the jackpot flag 2 for determining whether or not the display game is a jackpot.

  Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) relating to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special symbol for setting the special symbol information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern An information setting process (step A344) is performed to prepare a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the second special figure fluctuation display game is set. (Step A345). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (step A346) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the second special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting variation start information of the second special figure variation display game. (Step A347) is performed, and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is terminated.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
FIG. 18 shows the big hit flag 1 setting process (step A332) in the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation start process. In the big hit flag 1 setting process, first, deviation information is saved in the small hit flag area (step A351), and deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step A352). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for hold number 1), prepared (step A353), and the special figure big hit random number storage area (for hold number 1) is cleared to 0 (Step A354). Note that for the number of holdings 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers or the like) about the special figure starting storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1). Thereafter, a jackpot determination process (step A355) is performed for determining whether the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value or not.

  If the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A355) is a big hit (step A356; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 1 area where the loss information was saved in step A352 (step A357). ), The big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A355) is not a big hit (step A356; N), whether or not the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value is a small hit. A small hit determination process (step A358) is performed to determine.

  If the determination result of the small hit determination process (step A358) is a small hit (step A359; Y), the small hit information is overwritten and saved in the small hit flag area in which the loss information is saved in step A351. (Step A360), the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step A358) is not a small hit (step A359; N), the big hit flag 1 setting process is performed while saving the deviation information in both the big hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag area. finish. Thus, in the present embodiment, the result of the first special figure variation display game is any one of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “out of game”.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
FIG. 19 shows the big hit flag 2 setting process (step A342) in the above-described special figure 2 fluctuation start process. In the big hit flag 2 setting process, first, shift information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step A371). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for hold number 1), prepared (step A372), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for hold number 1) is cleared to 0 (Step A372). Note that for the number of reservations 1 is an area for storing information (random number or the like) about the special figure starting storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 2). Thereafter, a jackpot determination process (step A374) is performed for determining whether the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value or not.

  If the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A374) is a big hit (step A375; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step A371 (step A376). ), The big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A374) is not a big hit (step A375; N), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated while the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the second special figure fluctuation display game is either “big hit” or “out of game”.

[Big hit judgment processing]
FIG. 20 shows the big hit determination process (steps A154, A355, A374) in the special figure hold information determination process, the big hit flag 1 setting process, and the big hit flag 2 setting process described above. In this jackpot determination process, first, a lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step A381), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value that is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value that is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value It is determined that it is a big hit.

When the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; Y), the difference is set as the determination result (step A387), and the big hit determination process ends. Specifically, when the jackpot determination process is a jackpot determination process (step A355) in the jackpot flag 1 setting process, if the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; Y), Since it is a small hit or miss, “other than big hit (small hit or miss)” is set as the determination result (step A387). On the other hand, when the jackpot determination process is the jackpot determination process (step A374) in the jackpot flag 2 setting process, the case where the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; Y) is out of place. Therefore, “other than big hit (out of line)” is set as the determination result (step A387).
On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; N), it is determined whether or not the state is a high probability state (step A383).

  If it is in a high probability state (step A383; Y), an upper limit determination value with a high probability is set (step A384), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386). ). If not in the high probability state (step A383; N), an upper limit determination value with a low probability is set (step A385), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386). .

When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; Y), the difference is set as the determination result (step A357), and the big hit determination process is terminated. Specifically, when the big hit determination process is the big hit determination process (step A355) in the big hit flag 1 setting process, when the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; Y), Since it is a hit or miss, “other than big hit (small hit or miss)” is set as the determination result (step A387). On the other hand, when the big hit determination process is the big hit determination process (step A374) in the big hit flag 2 setting process, the case where the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; Y) is out of place. Then, “other than big hit (out of)” is set as the determination result (step A387).
If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step A386; N), that is, if the big hit is a big hit, the big hit is set as the determination result (step A388), and the big hit determination process is terminated.

[Small hit judgment processing]
FIG. 21 shows the small hit determination process (steps A159 and A358) in the above-described special figure hold information determination process and the big hit flag 1 setting process. In this small hit determination process, first, a small hit lower limit determination value is set, and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A391). Note that the small hit determination is performed using the same random number (big hit random number) as the big hit determination. In other words, “small hit” means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the small hit judgment lower limit judgment value that is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit judgment upper limit that is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. When it is less than or equal to the determination value, it is determined to be a small hit. Of course, the range of the big hit judgment value and the range of the small hit judgment value are set so as not to suffer.

When the value of the big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A391; Y), that is, when it is out of place, a determination is made as a determination result (step A393), and the small hit determination processing is terminated.
If the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step A391; N), the small hit upper limit determination value is set, and it is determined whether the target big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value. (Step A392).

When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step A392; Y), that is, when it is out of place, the determination result is set as out (step A393), and the small hit determination process is terminated.
If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step A392; N), that is, if it is a small hit, the small hit is set as the determination result (step A394), and the small hit determination processing is terminated. To do.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 22 shows the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A333) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above. In the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A401). If it is a big hit (step A401; Y), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (holding number 1) The jackpot symbol random number is loaded from (for step A402). Next, the special figure 1 big hit symbol table is set (step A403), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A404). By this process, the type of special result is selected.

  After that, the special symbol 1 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step A405), a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A406). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special symbol 1 indicator 51) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A407), the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the time reduction determination is acquired. The data area is saved (step A408), and the production mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state is saved (step A409). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state and the effect mode after the special game state ends. In the case of the present embodiment, the effect mode shifts in response to the hit, and the transition destination of the effect mode that shifts after the hit ends changes according to the type of winning symbol (type of big hit symbol or small hit). Also, when a specific big hit symbol (for example, 4R probability variation symbol) in the special figure 1 becomes a special big winning symbol (for example, 4R probability variation symbol), the transition destination production mode is determined to be certain probability variation depending on whether or not the gaming state is in certain probability variation. It is determined whether to shift to the production mode, which is difficult to distinguish whether it is the production mode or the probability variation. Then, a special decoration figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A418).

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A401; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag is a small hit (step A410), and if it is a small hit (step A411; Y), the special figure 1 small hit is determined. The small hit design random number is loaded from the design random number storage area (for the number of holdings 1) (step A411). Next, the special figure 1 small hit symbol table is set (step A412), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A413).
Thereafter, a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A414), and effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (step A415). Then, a special decoration figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A418).

  If the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A410; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number region (step A416), and the loss stop symbol pattern is stored in the stop symbol pattern region. Save (step A417), and prepare a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step A418). Through the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decoration special figure command is saved in the decoration special figure command area (step A419), and an effect command setting process (step A420) is performed. This decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A421), and the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A422). The small hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A423), and the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 23 shows the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above. In the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, it is first determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A431). If the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A431; Y), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (holding number 1) ) Is loaded with the jackpot symbol random number (step A432). Next, the special figure 2 big hit symbol table is set (step A433), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step A434). By this process, the type of special result is selected.

  Thereafter, the special symbol 2 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step A435), a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A436). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on a special symbol display (here, special symbol 2 indicator 52) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A437), the time reduction determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the time reduction determination is acquired. The data area is saved (step A438), and the presentation mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state is saved (step A439). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state and the effect mode after the special game state ends. Further, in the case of this embodiment, in the big hit in the special figure 2, regardless of the big hit symbol, the destination production mode becomes a dedicated production mode in which the probability change is confirmed. Then, a special decoration figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A442).

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag 2 is not big hit (step A431; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number area (step A440), and the loss stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area. (Step A441), a special decoration command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (Step A442). Through the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decoration special figure command is saved in the decoration special figure command area (step A443), and an effect command setting process (step A444) is performed. This decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A445), and the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A446). 2. The stop symbol setting process is terminated.

  In other words, the game control device 100 executes the first variation display game as the variation display game based on the detection of the game ball at the first start prize opening (start prize winning hole 36), and the second start prize opening (ordinary variable prize winning). Based on the detection of the game ball by the device 37), a variation display game executing means for executing the second variation display game as the variation display game is provided. In addition, the game control device 100 serves as a variable display game execution control unit that controls the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination unit (game control device 100).

[Special figure information setting process]
Next, details of the special figure information setting process (steps A166, A334, and A344) in the special figure hold information determination process, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above will be described. In the case of the present embodiment, the probability state (low / high probability, with / without time) does not affect the change distribution, and the effect mode managed by the game control device 100 affects the change distribution. In the effect mode, one effect mode is set from a plurality of effect modes in accordance with the probability state, the presence / absence of the short time state, the progress of the special figure variation display game, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 24, in the special figure information setting process, first, the first half variation group selection pointer table is set (step A451), and the first half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information is acquired (step A452).
Next, the first-half variation group selection offset table is set (step A453), and offset data corresponding to the target special figure holding number and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (step A454).
Next, the first-half variation group selection pointer and offset data are added (step A455), and the value obtained by the addition is saved in the variation distribution information 1 area (step A456). As a result, the variable distribution information 1 generated based on the stop symbol type, the number of holds, and the effect mode is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area. The fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation (fluctuation mode until the start of reach), and is used to select a fluctuation group later. However, depending on the specifications of the model, since the fluctuation time is shortened only when there is a large number when the number of holdings is large, the number of holdings does not affect the distribution of the first half fluctuation as a result. A variation group includes a plurality of variation patterns. When determining a variation pattern, the variation group is first selected, and then one variation pattern is selected from the variation group. ing.

Next, the latter half variation group selection pointer table is set (step A457), and the latter half variation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information is acquired (step A458).
Next, the second half variation group selection offset table is set (step A459), and offset data corresponding to the target special figure holding number and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (step A460).
Next, the latter half variation group selection pointer and the offset data are added (step A461), the value obtained by the addition is saved in the variation distribution information 2 area (step A462), and the special figure information setting process is terminated. As a result, the variable distribution information 2 generated based on the stop symbol type, the number of holds, and the effect mode is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area. This fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for distributing the latter half fluctuation (reach type (including no reach)), and is used later to select a fluctuation group. However, the reach rate changes according to the number of holds only in the case of a loss (the reach rate becomes low when the number of holds is large). Does not affect.

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, details of the above-described special figure hold information determination process, special figure 1 fluctuation start process, and fluctuation pattern setting process (steps A167, A336, A346) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start will be described. Note that the fluctuation patterns are the first half fluctuation pattern that is a fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation that is a fluctuation aspect from the reach state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game. First, the second half variation pattern is set first, and then the first half variation pattern is set.

  As shown in FIG. 25, in the variation pattern setting process, first, a variation group selection address table is set (step A471), and the address of the latter half variation group table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step A472), the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the target fluctuation pattern random number 1 storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step A473). In the present embodiment, the structure of the latter-half variation group table differs depending on whether it is a hit or not. Specifically, the hit use has a 1-byte size and the out-use use has a 2-byte size. The hit occurrence rate is lower than the occurrence rate of loss, and even 1 byte is sufficient. Therefore, from the viewpoint of saving the data capacity, the use is 1 byte size. Therefore, only the lower value of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 is used for the hit. In addition, the occurrence rate of deviation is higher than the occurrence rate of hits, and in order to make more various effects appear, the size for removal is a 2-byte size.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure variation display game is out of place (step A474). If it is out of place (step A474; Y), a 2-byte distribution process (step A475) is performed, and step A477 is executed. Transition to processing. On the other hand, if it is not out of step (step A474; N), a sorting process (step A476) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A477.

  Then, the address of the latter half fluctuation selection table obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and prepared (step A477), and the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the target fluctuation pattern random number 2 storage area (for the number of holdings 1), Prepare (Step A478). Then, a sorting process (step A479) is performed, the latter half variation number obtained as a result of the sorting is acquired and saved in the latter half variation number area (step A480). By this process, the latter half fluctuation pattern is set.

  Next, the first half variation group table is set (step A481), and a table selection pointer is calculated based on the variation distribution information 1 and the second half variation number (step A482). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (step A483), and the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of holdings 1). (Step A484). Thereafter, a sorting process (step A485) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the sorting is acquired, saved in the first half variation number area (step A486), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated. By this processing, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern that is a game execution mode from among a plurality of variations.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, details of the change start information setting process (steps A337 and A347) in the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation start process and special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. As shown in FIG. 26, in the change start information setting process, first, the random number storage areas of the target change pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are cleared (step A491). Next, the first half variation time value table is set (step A492), and the first half variation time value corresponding to the first half variation number is acquired (step A493). Further, the latter half variation time value table is set (step A494), and the latter half variation time value corresponding to the latter half variation number is acquired (step A495).

  Then, the first half variation time value and the second half variation time value are added (step A496), and the added value is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A497). Thereafter, a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first variation number is prepared (step A498), a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second variation number is prepared (step A499), and an effect command setting process is performed (step A500). ). Next, the special symbol hold number corresponding to the variation symbol discrimination flag is updated by -1 (step A501), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variation symbol discrimination flag is set (step A502). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (step A503), the empty area after the shift is cleared (step A504), and the variation start information setting process is terminated.

  Through the above processing, information related to the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a determination unit that determines various random values stored in the start storage unit (game control device 100). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining a variation pattern of identification information executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

  Information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. To set the detailed contents of the decoration special map change display game. The information related to the start of the special figure variation display game includes a decoration special figure hold number command including information related to the start memory number (holding number), a decoration special figure command including information related to the stop symbol, and a fluctuation of the special figure variation display game. A variation command including information related to the pattern and a stop information command including information related to extension of the stop time are listed, and the commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decoration special figure command before the variation command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Special figure changing process]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (step A9) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 27, in the special figure changing process, first, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A601), and the set display time is saved in the special figure game process timer area (step A602). ). In the case of the present embodiment, when the stop symbol pattern is an outlier symbol pattern, the display time is set to 600 ms, and when the stop symbol pattern is a jackpot symbol pattern, the display time is set to 600 ms. When the pattern is a small hit symbol pattern, 600 ms is set as the display time.
Subsequently, the special figure display process transition setting process (step A603) is performed, and the special figure display process is terminated. That is, the game control device 100 serves as stop time setting means for setting a stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

[Special figure display processing]
Next, the details of the special figure display process (step A10) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, in the special figure display process, first, the small hit flag set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A701), and the RWM Processing for clearing the small hit flag area (step A702) is performed.
Next, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 variation start process and the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 set process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process are loaded. (Step A703), a process of clearing the RWM big hit flag 1 area and the big hit flag 2 area (step A704) is performed. Then, it is determined whether or not the loaded big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A705), and if it is decided that the big hit is a big hit (step A705; Y), the big hit of the second special figure variation display game (special figure 2 big hit) starts (For example, the condition device operating signal ON, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal ON, and the special symbol 2 signal ON) are saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A708), A round number upper limit value table is set (step A709).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A705 that the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (step A705; N) as a result of the check of the big hit flag 2, it is determined whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A706), and the big hit (step A705). If A706; Y) is determined, a test signal related to the start of the big hit (special figure 1 big hit) of the first special figure variation display game (for example, the condition device operating signal ON, the accessory continuous operating device active signal ON, The special symbol 1 signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A707), and processing for setting the round number upper limit value table (step A709) is performed.

  After performing the process of setting the round number upper limit table (step A709), the round number upper limit value (in the present embodiment, “16” or “4”) corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired, and the RWM Is saved in the round number upper limit area (step A710). Subsequently, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A711).

  Next, a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the decoration special figure command area of the RWM, prepared (step A712), and an effect command setting process (step A713) is performed. Thereafter, a probability information command related to information for setting the probability of the winning result in the normal map variation display game and the special map variation display game to be a normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A714), and an effect command setting process is performed. (Step A715) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special symbol 1 or special symbol 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A716), and an effect command setting process (step A717) is performed.

  Next, the prize winning opening release information and the signal corresponding to the probability state of the winning result in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A718). In the case of the present embodiment, in step A718, two jackpot signals and three jackpot signals are saved as signals corresponding to the winning prize opening information and the probability state. Each ON / OFF is determined by the special winning opening information and the probability state. For example, the jackpot 2 signal is ON when the jackpot is a jackpot with a lottery (the jackpot opening information is other than the jackpot opening information 1), and the jackpot without a lottery (a so-called sudden hit jackpot. When the information is the big prize opening information 1), it is ON if it is a big hit in the short time state, and is OFF otherwise. The big hit 3 signal is ON when the big hit has a ball and is OFF when the big hit has no ball.

  After that, the winning prize opening information and the jackpot fanfare time (for example, 5000 msec, 4700 msec, 7700 msec, or 300 msec) corresponding to the state of the probability of being a hit result in the ordinary map variation display game and the special map variation display game. It is set (step A719), and the set big hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A720). Then, the special game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special game mode flag save area (step A721). As a result, information on the probability state and the short time state of the special figure when the special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special gaming state is determined based on the information stored later.

  Then, the large winning mouth illegal prize number area of the big winning mouth (special variable prize winning devices 38 and 39) corresponding to the big winning opening information is cleared (step A722), and the big winning mouth corresponding to the big winning opening information is cleared. The fraud monitoring non-period monitoring period flag is saved in the big prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A723). Thereafter, the fanfare / interval 2 mid-process transition setting process 1 (step A724) is performed, and the special figure display mid-process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not big hit in step A706 (step A706; N), it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag is a small hit (step A725).
If it is determined in step A725 that the small hit flag is a small hit (step A725; Y), the high probability variation frequency update process (step A726), the production mode information check process related to the production mode setting (step A727). ) To determine whether the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (step A728).

When it is determined in step A728 that the special figure is not in high probability (step A728; N), the special decoration command is loaded from the special decoration command area, prepared (step A729), and the production command is set. Processing (step A730) is performed. Next, a small hitting fanfare command is prepared (step A731), an effect command setting process (step A732) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A733.
If it is determined in step A728 that the special figure has a high probability (step A728; Y), the process proceeds to step A733. As described above, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state, the big winning opening is opened by occurrence of a small hit, but the occurrence of the small hit is a game. The screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed in order to prevent the person from being aware of it.
Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag saving area (step A733). Thereafter, the small hitting fanfare mid-process transition setting process 1 (step A734) is performed, and the special figure display mid-process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A725 that the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A725; N), the high probability variation frequency update process (step A735), the production mode information check process related to the production mode setting (step A735). A736) is performed, a remaining switching preparation rotation speed corresponding to the effect mode number is set (step A737), and it is determined whether or not the remaining effect rotation speed matches the remaining switching preparation rotation speed (step A738). The remaining number of rotations for preparation for switching may be a different value (number of rotations) in all the effect modes of the plurality of effect modes, or the same value in any effect mode of the plurality of effect modes. (Number of rotations) may be used, or the same value (number of rotations) may be used in all the effect modes of the plurality of effect modes.
If it is determined in step A738 that the remaining rotation speed for production and the remaining rotation speed for switching preparation do not match (step A738; N), special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A741) is performed to display the special figure. End the middle process.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A738 that the remaining production rotation speed matches the remaining switching preparation rotation speed (step A738; Y), a production mode switching preparation command is prepared (step A739), and production command setting is performed. After performing the process (step A740), the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (step A741) is performed, and the special figure display process is terminated. The production mode switching preparation command is a command for preventing the pre-reading production from being performed several rotations before the production mode is switched, and the production mode switching preparation command is transmitted to the production control device 300, thereby producing the production across modes. It is possible to prevent contradiction from occurring.

[Fanfare / interval 2 mid-process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval 2 mid-process transition setting process 1 (step A724) in the above-described special figure display process will be described. As shown in FIG. 30, in the fanfare / interval 2 process transition setting process 1, first, “3”, which is a process number related to the fanfare / interval 2 process, is set (step A791). The processing number is saved in (Step A792).

  Next, a signal related to the start of the big hit (special gaming state) (for example, one big hit signal is ON (output with big hit + small hit), and four big hits are ON (output with big hit)) is saved in the external information output data area. (Step A793), a signal related to the end of the high probability state and the short time state (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 1 variable time shortening state signal is OFF, special The symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal is OFF and the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A794). In addition, even during the special figure high probability, since only the probability state changes, the normal symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal are always OFF. Thereafter, the number of rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state is cleared (step A795), the number without time is saved in the game state display number area (step A796), and the normal game mode flag Save the ordinary low probability flag in the area (step A797).

  Then, the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared (step A798), and the high probability notification flag area is cleared to turn off the gaming state display LED (third gaming state display unit 59) related to the display of the high probability state ( In step A799), the special figure low probability & no short time flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A800). Next, a probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery to save the command output to the production control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A801), and the special figure change that can be executed in a high probability state The high probability variation frequency area for managing the number of times of the display game is cleared (step A802). As a result, the high-probability state and the short-time state are terminated, and the normal probability state and the normal state are obtained.

  Thereafter, the number of effect mode 1 is saved in the effect mode number area (step A803), the effect remaining rotation speed area is cleared (step A804), and the no-update code is saved in the next mode transition information area (step A805). . Then, a signal related to the right-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A806), and the right-handed display LED (for example, the first game state display unit 57) is displayed. In order to make it light up, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A807), and the fanfare / interval 2 mid-process transition setting process 1 is terminated. As a result, the information on the effect mode is once cleared with the occurrence of the special game state.

[Fanfare / interval 2 processing]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval 2 processing (step A11) in the above-described special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 31, in the fanfare / interval 2 processing, first, the number of rounds in the special gaming state is updated by +1 (step A901), and a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state is prepared (step A902). ), An effect command setting process (step A903) is performed.

After that, a special winning opening operation determination table is set (step A904), an opening switching determination value corresponding to the big winning opening information is acquired (step A905), and the number of rounds in the special game state is acquired opening switching determination. It is determined whether it is larger than the value (step A906).
When the number of rounds is larger than the open switching determination value (step A906; Y), the special winning game opening time for short opening (in this embodiment, 0.2 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area. (Step A907), the process proceeds to Step A909.
If the number of rounds is not larger than the open switching determination value (step A906; N), the long opening big winning opening opening time (29 seconds in the present embodiment) is saved in the special game processing timer area. (Step A908), the process proceeds to Step A909.

Here, in this embodiment, as a big hit pattern, (1) 4R, special winning opening release information 1 (all short opening), (2) 16R, special winning opening release information 2 (all long opening), (3) 16R, special prize opening information 3 (1-4R is long open, 5-16R is short open), (4) 4R, special prize opening information 4 (all are long open), (5) 16R, special prize opening is open Information 5 (all open long), (6) 16R, large winning opening information 6 (1-8R is long opening, 9-16R is short opening), (7) 16R, large winning opening information 7 (1-4R) Is long open, and 5-16R is short open).
Therefore, in the big prize opening operation determination table, the big prize opening information 1 data and the opening switching determination value “0”, the big winning opening information 2 data and the opening switching determination value “16” are the big winning opening. The opening information 3 data and the opening switching determination value “4” are the big winning opening opening information 4 data and the opening switching determination value “4”, and the big winning opening opening information 5 data and the opening switching determination value “16” are. The special winning opening opening information 6 data and the opening switching determination value “8” are stored in association with the large winning opening opening information 7 data and the opening switching determination value “4” in association with each other. Then, an opening operation is performed so that long opening is performed while the number of rounds is equal to or less than the opening switching determination value, and short opening is performed when the number of rounds exceeds the opening switching determination value.

In step A909, it is determined whether the number of rounds in the special gaming state is an odd number (step A909). When the number of rounds in the special game state is an odd number (step A909; Y), the special winning opening opening process transition setting process 1 (in order to open the lower special winning opening 39 (second special variable winning apparatus 39)) Step A910) is performed, and the fanfare / interval 2 processing is terminated. Further, when the number of rounds in the special gaming state is not an odd number (step A909; N), that is, when the number of rounds in the special gaming state is an even number, the top prize winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) is opened. Next, the process for setting the transition to the winning prize opening process 2 (step A911) is performed, and the process during the fanfare / interval 2 is completed.
As a result, during the big hit (in the special gaming state), the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39 are alternately opened every big round. In the case of the present embodiment, when the number of rounds is an odd number, the lower major prize opening (second special variation prize winning device 39) is opened, and when the number of rounds is an even number, the upper major prize opening (first special fluctuation prize). The winning device 38) is opened. However, when the number of rounds is an odd number, the upper large winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) is opened, and when the number of rounds is an even number, the lower large winning port ( It is also possible to configure the second special variable winning device 39) to be opened.
In the case of the present embodiment, during the small hit (during the small hit gaming state), only the lower big prize opening (second special variable prize winning device 39) is opened (see FIG. 14), but the upper big prize opening (first It is possible to configure so that only the first special variable winning device 38) is opened, or the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39 may be alternately opened. .

[Large winning opening open process transition setting process 1]
FIG. 32 shows the process for setting the transition to the process for setting a special winning opening during the fanfare / interval 2 process described above (step A910). In the special winning opening opening process transition setting process 1, first, the processing number is set to “4” related to the special winning opening open process (step A921), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A922). Thereafter, a signal related to the opening of the lower grand prize winning opening (second special variable prize winning device 39) (for example, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A923). The information in the large winning mouth count number area for storing the winning number to the winning mouth is cleared (step A924). Then, the ON data of the lower major prize opening (second special variable prize winning device 39) is saved in the special prize opening solenoid output data area (step A925), and the special prize opening opening process transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Large winning opening open process transition setting process 2]
FIG. 33 shows the process for setting the process for setting a special winning opening during the fanfare / interval 2 process transition setting process 2 (step A911). In the special winning opening opening process transition setting process 2, first, the process number is set to “4” related to the special winning opening open process (step A 931), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A932). Thereafter, a signal related to the opening of the upper prize winning opening (the first special variable prize winning device 38) (for example, the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A933). The information in the large winning mouth count area storing the number of winning prizes is cleared (step A934). Then, the ON data of the upper prize winning opening (the first special variable winning prize apparatus 38) is saved in the large winning prize opening solenoid output data area (step A935), and the special winning opening releasing process transition setting process 2 is ended.

[Processing during the grand prize opening]
Next, details of the special winning opening opening process (step A12) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 34, in the special prize opening opening process, first, the current round is determined by comparing the current round number in the special gaming state being executed with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit area of the RWM. It is determined whether it is the final round (step A1001). If it is not the final round (step A1001; N), it is determined whether the current round is an odd number (step A1002).

When the current round is an odd number round (step A1002; Y), the initial valid time (2.5 seconds in this embodiment) is saved in the lower major winning opening remaining ball valid timer area (step A1003). ), 1 hour interval for long closing (in the case of this embodiment, 0.296 seconds) is saved in the special-purpose game processing timer area (step A1004), and processing transition setting processing during interval 1 (step A1007) is performed. Then, the process for opening the big prize opening is finished.
If the current round is not an odd land (step A1002; N), that is, if the current round is an even round, the effective time initial value (in this embodiment, 2.5 seconds) is saved (step A1005), and an interval 1 hour for short closing (in this embodiment, 0.096 seconds) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A1006). The middle process transition setting process (step A1007) is performed, and the special winning opening opening process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is the final round (step A1001; Y), an ending command corresponding to the special winning opening release information is prepared (step A1008), and an effect command setting process (step A1009) is performed.
Next, the initial valid time (2.5 seconds in the case of this embodiment) is saved in the upper prize winning ball remaining timer effective timer area (step A1010), and the ending time corresponding to the special winning opening information (this implementation). In the case of the form, for example, it is 5.1 seconds for the special prize opening information 1, 12.0 seconds for the special prize opening information 2 and 5, and 5 for the special prize opening information 3, 4 and 7. 3 seconds, 14.1 seconds if the big prize opening information is 6) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A1011), the big hit end process transition setting process (step A1012) is performed, and the big prize opening Terminate the process during opening.

[Interval 1 transition process setting process]
FIG. 35 shows the process transition setting process (step A1007) during interval 1 in the above-described process during opening of the special winning opening. In this interval 1 process transition setting process, first, the process number is set to “5” related to the process during interval 1 (step A1021), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A1022). . Then, in order to close the open / close door 38c of the first special variable prize-winning device 38 or the open / close door 39c of the second special variable prize-winning device 39, it is turned off to turn off the upper large prize winning solenoid 38b or the lower special prize winning solenoid 39b. The data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1023), and the process transition setting process during the interval 1 is terminated.

[Big jackpot end process transition setting process]
FIG. 36 shows the jackpot end process transition setting process (step A1012) in the above-described process for opening the big prize opening. In the jackpot end process transition setting process, first, “6” is set as the process number related to the jackpot end process (step A1031), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A1032). After that, in order to close the open / close door 38c of the first special variable winning device 38, off data for turning off the upper prize winning solenoid 38b is saved in the big winning prize solenoid output data area (step A1033).

  Next, the information on the number-of-winner count area for storing the number of winning prizes is cleared (step A1034), and the information on the number-of-rounds area for storing the number of rounds in the special gaming state is cleared (step A1035). ), Information on the round number upper limit area storing the upper limit value of the round number in the special gaming state is cleared (step A1036). Then, the information of the round number upper limit information area storing the round number upper limit value determination flag is cleared (step A1037), and the big winning opening opening information area storing the flag for determining the opening information of the big winning opening is stored. The information is cleared (step A1038), and the jackpot end process transition setting process ends.

[Processing during interval 1]
Next, details of the process during interval 1 (step A13) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 37, in the processing during interval 1, it is first determined whether or not the current round is an odd-numbered round (step A1101).
If the current round is an odd number round (step A1101; Y), the upper prize winning port remaining ball valid timer is cleared to 0 (step A1102), and the fanfare / interval 2 mid-process transition setting process 2 (step A1104) is performed. Then, the processing during interval 1 is completed.
On the other hand, if the current round is not an odd number round (step A1101; N), that is, if the current round is an even number round, the lower winning prize remaining ball valid timer is cleared to 0 (step A1103), and the fanfare / interval 2 The middle process transition setting process 2 (step A1104) is performed, and the process during the interval 1 is ended.

[Fanfare / interval 2 transition process setting process 2]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval 2 mid-process transition setting process 2 (step A1104) in the above-described mid-interval 1 process will be described. As shown in FIG. 37, in the fanfare / interval 2 mid-process transition setting process 2, first, “3” is set as the process number related to the fanfare / interval 2 mid-process (step A1111). Save in the process number area (step A1112).
Next, an interval of 2 hours (0.004 seconds in the case of this embodiment) is saved in the special game process timer area (step A1113), and the fanfare / interval 2 transition process setting process 2 is terminated.

[Big hits end processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot end process (step A14) in the above-described special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 39, in this jackpot end process, first, it is determined whether the time reduction determination data is the time reduction operation data (step A1201).
If it is not the short-time operation data (step A1201; N), the big hit end setting process 1 is performed (step A902), and if it is the short-time operation data (step A1201; Y), the big hit end setting process 2 is performed (step A903). . Then, the production mode information address table is set (step A1204), and the address of the table corresponding to the production mode transition information set at the start of variation (when the stop symbol is set) is acquired (step A1205).

  Next, as processing for saving the information necessary for managing the production mode in the game control device 100, first, the production mode number of the production mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved in the production mode number area. (Step A1206). Further, the effect remaining speed of the effect mode set after the end of the special gaming state is acquired, saved in the effect remaining speed region (step A1207), and the next mode of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state. Transition information is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A1208).

  Thereafter, a probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number is prepared (step A1209), the command is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A1210), and an effect command setting process (step A1211) is performed. Here, as the probability information command, there are a plurality of commands that include information on the production mode in any of “high probability / with time reduction” and “high probability / without time reduction”. In the case of the present embodiment, the probabilistic state is always obtained when the big hit ends (so-called ST state), and therefore, as the probability information command, “high probability / short time / direction mode A”, “high probability / short time / direction mode B”. , “High probability / short time / direction mode C” and “High probability / no time / direction mode A” are not used in this process, but “low probability / no time / direction mode A”, “ There are “low probability / no time reduction / direction mode B” and “low probability / no time reduction / direction mode C”.

Next, an effect rotation speed command corresponding to the remaining effect rotation speed is prepared (step A1212), and an effect command setting process (step A1213) is performed.
Next, a high-probability variation number command corresponding to the high-probability variation number is prepared (step A1214), and an effect command setting process (step A1215) is performed to determine whether or not a short-time state occurs after the big hit ends (step A1216). .
When the short time state occurs after the big hit (step A1216; Y), the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 is performed (step A1219), and the big hit end process is ended.
Further, when the time-short state does not occur after the big hit (Step A1216; N), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (Step A1217), and after performing the effect command setting process (Step A1218), the special figure normal process transition is performed. A setting process 2 is performed (step A1219), and the jackpot end process ends.

[Big jackpot end setting 1]
FIG. 40 shows the jackpot end setting process 1 (step A1202) in the above jackpot end process. In this jackpot end setting process 1, first, a signal related to the absence of the time-saving state (for example, 2 signals of the big hit) are saved in the external information output data area (step A1221), and a signal related to the start of the high-probability state and the absence of the time-shortening state. (For example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is ON, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is ON, the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal is OFF, and the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF. The status signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1222).

  Next, a number without a short time state is saved in the game state display number area (step A1223), a common low probability flag is saved in the normal game mode flag area (step A1224), and the special game mode flag area is saved. The special figure high probability & no short time flag is saved (step A1225). Thereafter, an initial value (for example, 100 times) is saved in the high probability variation number area (step A1226), and a signal related to the left-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1227), in order to extinguish the right-handed display LED (first gaming state display unit 57), the number in the left-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A1228), and the jackpot end setting process 1 Exit.

[Big hit end setting process 2]
FIG. 41 shows the jackpot end setting process 2 (step A1203) in the above jackpot end process. In the jackpot end setting process 2, first, a signal related to the start of the time-saving state (for example, the jackpot 2 signal is ON) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1231). Since the signal related to the start of the short-time state is output from the big hit, it is saved in the external information output data area in a continuous manner. Next, signals related to the start of the high probability state and the short time state (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is ON, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is ON, the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal is ON, the special symbol 2 variation The time shortening state signal is turned on and the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1232).

  Next, the number with the short time state is saved in the game state display number area (step A1233), the common figure high probability flag is saved in the ordinary figure game mode flag area (step A1234), and the special figure game mode flag area is saved. The special figure high probability & short time flag is saved (step A1235). Thereafter, an initial value (for example, 100 times) is saved in the high probability variation frequency area (step A1236), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is ended. In the present embodiment, the right-handed mode is set during the short-time state, but since the right-handed mode is set from the big hit, the setting for the right-handed end setting process 2 is not performed.

[Special figure transition setting process 2]
FIG. 42 shows special figure normal process transition setting process 2 (step A1219) in the big hit end process described above. In the special figure normal process transition setting process 2, first, “0” is set as the process number related to the special figure normal process (step A1241), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A1242). .

  Thereafter, a signal related to the end of the big hit (for example, 1 signal for the big hit is OFF, 3 signals for the big hit is OFF, and 4 signals for the big hit is OFF) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1243). The condition device operating signal OFF, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal OFF, the special symbol 1 signal OFF, and the special symbol 2 signal OFF are saved in the test signal output data area (step A1244). Subsequently, the information in the time reduction determination flag area is cleared (step A1245), the information in the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of rounds of the big hit is cleared (step A1246), and the information in the effect mode transition information area is cleared. (Step A1247). Then, the information of the special figure game mode flag saving area is cleared (step A1248), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the special prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A1249), and the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 is performed. Exit.

Here, forcible termination of the big winning opening remaining ball processing period (period for waiting for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged), which is a feature of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, will be described.
The gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment includes two large winning openings, an upper prize winning opening (first special variable winning prize apparatus 38) and a lower large winning prize opening (second special variable winning prize apparatus 39). The big prize opening is configured to open alternately every round (big hit round). In other words, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment uses both of the two big winning holes in one special gaming state, and different big winning holes corresponding to the round update in the special gaming state. Is converted to an open state.

That is, the first special variation winning device 38 is a first variable winning device that can convert between a closed state and an open state in response to execution of a special game (a game that gives a special game state), and a second special variation. The winning device 39 is a second variable winning device that can convert between a closed state and an open state in response to the execution of the special game.
The upper count switch 38a serves as first game ball detecting means for detecting a game ball flowing into the first variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38), and the lower count switch 39a is used as the second variable winning device. It constitutes a second game ball detecting means for detecting a game ball that has flowed into the (second special variation winning device 39).
In addition, the game control device 100 controls the conversion between the first variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38) and the second variable winning device (second special variable winning device 39) in the special game. Make.
The special game consists of a predetermined number of rounds, and the winning device control means (game control device 100) converts the first variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38) into the open state and the second variable winning. Conversion to the open state of the device (second special variable winning device 39) is performed alternately for each round.

If there are two big prize openings and one big prize opening and the other big prize opening are alternately opened, when the opening of one big prize opening ends, the remaining balls in the one big prize opening are discharged. In order to wait for the winning prize remaining ball processing period to be set, the other winning prize opening is opened during the winning prize remaining ball processing period for one of the winning prize openings. In this case, if the other big prize opening is closed in a short time, the opening of the other big prize opening ends and the one big prize winning is completed before the big prize opening remaining ball processing period for one big prize opening passes. Mouth may be converted to open. In other words, the current round may end and the next round may start before the last winning ball remaining ball processing period of the previous round elapses. In this case, a game ball won in the next round may be detected in the last winning ball remaining ball processing period of the previous round and may not be detected in an appropriate round (that is, the next round). It is not preferable as a specification.
On the other hand, even if the other big prize opening closes in a short time and the opening of the other big prize opening ends before the big prize opening remaining ball processing period for one big prize opening expires, If it is configured such that one of the big winning openings is converted to the open state after the mouth remaining ball processing period has elapsed (finished), it does not occur when the game balls won in the big winning opening are not detected in an appropriate round. However, in this case, after the other special winning opening is converted to the closed state, after waiting for the passage of the outstanding winning opening remaining ball processing period for the one special winning opening, the one special winning opening is converted to the open state. Therefore, it is not possible to smoothly convert the big winning mouth.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the other big prize opening is closed in a short time, and the opening of the other big prize opening ends before the big prize opening remaining ball processing period for one big prize opening passes, The large winning opening remaining ball processing period is forcibly terminated and one large winning opening is converted into an open state. As a result, it is possible to detect the game balls that have won the big winning opening in an appropriate round and to smoothly convert the big winning opening.
In other words, the winning device control means (game control device 100) changes one of the first variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38) and the second variable winning device (second special variable winning device 39). After the effective period for the winning device (large winning opening remaining ball processing period) ends, the one variable winning device is converted to an open state.

In this embodiment, the winning ball remaining ball processing period for the upper winning hole is timed by the upper winning hole remaining ball valid timer, and the remaining winning ball processing period for the lower winning hole is the lower winning hole remaining time. Timed by a ball valid timer. Accordingly, when the upper prize winning ball remaining timer valid timer becomes “0”, the big winning prize remaining ball processing period for the upper prize winning gate ends, and when the lower outstanding prize winning ball remaining timer becomes “0”, The large winning opening remaining ball processing period for the winning opening ends.
Then, the winning prize remaining ball processing period for the upper winning prize opening is a step A1102 (that is, a process of clearing the upper winning prize remaining ball valid timer to 0) during the interval 1 process (see FIG. 37) in the special game process. It is forcibly terminated at.
In addition, during the interval 1 in the special game process (see FIG. 37), step A1103 (that is, the process of clearing the bottom large winning opening remaining ball valid timer to 0) is performed during the large winning opening remaining ball processing period for the lower large winning opening. It is forcibly terminated at.

When the other big prize opening (for example, the lower big prize opening) is closed in a short time, when the process shifts to the processing during the interval 1, the big winning opening remaining ball process for one of the big prize winning holes (for example, the upper big prize opening) Since the period has not expired, the remaining ball valid timer (for example, the upper prize winning ball remaining timer valid timer) of one of the large prize winning openings is not “0”. Therefore, the game control device 100 forcibly terminates the winning ball remaining ball processing period for one of the big winning ports by clearing the remaining ball valid timer of one of the big winning ports to 0 in the interval 1 process.
Here, in the present embodiment, “when the other big prize opening is closed in a short time” means, for example, the big prize opening opening time for short opening (for example, 0.2. Seconds), or a long winning big opening opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is set as the opening time of the other big winning opening, and the remaining winning ball processing of the big winning opening for one of the big winning openings is set. This is the case when the upper limit number (for example, 9) of game balls wins the other big winning opening before the period ends.

If the other winning a prize opening is not closed in a short period of time, the process of the one winning prize remaining ball processing period for the one winning award has ended at the time of shifting to the processing during interval 1, so The remaining ball effective timer of the mouth is “0”, and it is not necessary to clear the remaining ball effective timer of one of the winning prize ports to 0 in the processing during the interval 1, but in this embodiment, the remaining ball effective timer is From the viewpoint of surely setting “0”, reducing the processing load (specifically, omitting the process of determining whether the remaining ball valid timer is already “0”), etc. At the time of transfer, regardless of whether or not the remaining ball valid timer of one large winning opening is already “0”, the remaining ball valid timer of one large winning opening is cleared to zero.
Here, in the present embodiment, “when the other big prize opening does not close in a short time” means, for example, that the big prize opening opening time for long opening is set as the opening time of the other big prize opening, When the opening time of the big winning opening for the long opening is completed (that is, when the upper limit number of game balls has not been won by the other winning opening before the opening time of the large winning opening for the long opening) The opening time of the large winning opening for the long opening is set as the opening time of the other large winning opening, and the large winning opening for the long opening after the large winning opening remaining ball processing period for the one winning opening ends. This is the case, for example, when an upper limit number of game balls have been won in the other big prize opening before the opening time elapses.

43 and 44 are timing charts for explaining an example of the operation during the big hit (special game state) in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
FIG. 43 is a timing chart for explaining an example of the case where the other special winning opening is not closed in a short time.
Specifically, FIG. 43 shows (2) 16R, special winning opening release information 2 (all long opening), (5) 16R, special winning opening release information 5 (all long opening), and (6) ) When 16R or any of the big winning opening information 6 (1-8R is long opening, 9-16R is short opening) is set, and the big opening opening time is satisfied in each round ( That is, it is a timing chart for explaining an example of a case where the upper limit number of game balls have not won before the big winning opening opening time elapses.

  In the example shown in FIG. 43, first, the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit (special result), and the special figure display process (step A10) in the special figure game process is terminated, and the fanfare / interval 2 intermediate process (step) When A11) starts, a fanfare for notifying the occurrence of a big hit (special game state) starts. In the case of the present embodiment, the special gaming state is a gaming state in which right-handed is more advantageous than left-handed. Therefore, the firing position that is turned on when right-handed is more advantageous than left-handed The designation signal 1 is turned ON from the start of the special gaming state (that is, fanfare start) to the end of the special gaming state (that is, ending end).

  Next, when the big prize opening opening process in the special game process is started (step A12), the first round (1R) starts and the lower big prize opening (second special variable prize winning device 39) is opened (long open). ) In the case of the present embodiment, the opening time for the large winning opening for long opening is 29 seconds (see step A908). Therefore, the condition that 29 seconds elapse after the lower winning opening is converted to the open state and the lower winning prize The lower large winning opening is kept open until either one of the conditions that the upper limit number of game balls wins is achieved. In this example, the lower major prize opening is opened until the condition that 29 seconds elapses after the lower major prize opening is converted to the open state, and the lower major prize opening is closed based on the achievement of the condition. Has been converted.

  Next, when 0.3 second has elapsed after the lower major winning opening is converted to the closed state and the large winning opening opening process (step A12) in the special game process is started, the second round (2R) is started. Thus, the upper university winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) is opened (long open). In the case of the present embodiment, since the opening time for the long opening big winning opening is 29 seconds (see step A908), the condition that 29 seconds elapse after the upper winning opening is converted to the open state and the upper winning prize The upper prize winning opening is kept open until either one of the conditions that the upper limit number of game balls wins is achieved. In this example, the upper university prize opening is opened until the condition that 29 seconds elapses after the upper university prize opening is converted to the open state, and the upper university prize opening is closed based on the achievement of the condition. Has been converted.

  From the end of the process during the opening of the big prize opening in the first round (conversion to the closed state of the lower prize opening) to the start of the process during the opening of the big winning opening in the second round (conversion to the open state of the upper prize opening) ) During the interval 1 (step A13) and the fanfare / interval 2 processing (step A11) in the special figure game processing are performed. In the present embodiment, the current round is an odd number round. The interval 1 hour set in this case is 0.296 seconds (see step A1004), and the interval 2 hours set regardless of whether the current round is an odd round is 0.004 seconds (see step A1113). Therefore, when 0.3 seconds (= 0.296 seconds + 0.004 seconds) have elapsed since the lower major prize opening was converted to the closed state, the upper major prize opening changed to the open state. It is.

In addition to the conversion of the lower prize winning opening to the closed state, timing by the lower prize winning opening remaining ball valid timer is started (that is, the timing of the remaining winning ball remaining ball processing period for the lower prize winning opening). The initial valid time saved in the lower great winning opening remaining ball valid timer area is 2.5 seconds (see step A1003). Therefore, when 2.5 seconds have elapsed since the lower major winning opening was converted to the closed state, the major winning opening remaining ball processing period for the lower major winning opening ends.
In addition, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal that is turned on while the detection of the lower major prize opening count switch (lower count switch 39a) is valid is the lower major prize winning after the lower major prize opening is converted to the open state. It is turned ON until the end of the winning ball remaining ball processing period for the mouth.

Next, when 0.1 second elapses after the top prize winning opening is converted to the closed state and the big winning opening releasing process (step A12) in the special game process is started, the third round (3R) starts. As a result, the lower grand prize opening (second special variable winning device 39) is opened (long open).
From the end of the process during opening of the big prize opening in the second round (conversion to the closed state of the upper prize opening) to the start of processing during opening of the big prize opening in the third round (conversion to the open state of the lower prize opening) ) During the interval 1 (step A13) and the fanfare / interval 2 processing (step A11) in the special figure game processing are performed. In the present embodiment, the current round is an even number round. The interval 1 hour set in this case is 0.096 seconds (see step A1006), and the interval 2 hours set is 0.004 seconds (see step A1113 regardless of whether or not the current round is an even-numbered round). Therefore, the lower prize winning opening is changed to the open state when 0.1 second (= 0.096 seconds + 0.004 seconds) has elapsed since the upper winning prize opening is converted to the closed state. It is.

In addition to the conversion to the closed state of the upper prize winning opening, timing by the upper winning prize remaining ball valid timer is started (that is, the time measurement of the outstanding winning opening remaining ball processing period for the upper prize winning opening) is started. The initial valid time saved in the upper prize winning port remaining ball valid timer area is 2.5 seconds (see step A1005). Accordingly, when 2.5 seconds elapses after the upper prize winning opening is converted to the closed state, the big winning prize remaining ball processing period for the upper prize winning opening ends.
In addition, the special electric accessory 2 operating signal that is turned on while the detection of the upper prize winning count switch (upper count switch 38a) is valid is the upper prize winning after the upper prize winning opening is converted to the open state. It is turned ON until the end of the winning ball remaining ball processing period for the mouth.
After the third round, operations similar to those in the first round and operations similar to those in the second round are alternately performed.

In other words, the game control device 100 performs a predetermined time (this embodiment) after the first variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38) or the second variable winning device (second special variable winning device 39) is converted to the closed state. In the case of the embodiment, effective period setting means for setting the period until 2.5 seconds) as the effective period (large winning opening remaining ball processing period) is set.
Further, the game control device 100 serves as conversion condition determination means for determining whether or not the open state conversion condition of the first variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38) is satisfied. In the present embodiment, when the second special variable winning device 39 is converted to the closed state, that is, the time set as the opening time (for example, 29 seconds or 0.2 seconds) of the second special variable winning device 39. When the time has elapsed, or when an upper limit number (for example, 9) of game balls has won the second special variable winning device 39 until the time set as the opening time of the second special variable winning device 39 has elapsed. Then, it is determined that the open state conversion condition of the first special variation winning device 38 is satisfied.
In addition, the winning device control means (game control device 100) is determined by the conversion condition determining means (game control device 100) that the open state conversion condition of the first variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38) is satisfied. In this case, the first variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38) is converted to an open state.

Further, the game control device 100 serves as conversion condition determination means for determining whether or not the open state conversion condition of the second variable winning device (second special variable winning device 39) is satisfied. In the present embodiment, when the first special variable winning device 38 is converted to the closed state, that is, the time set as the opening time (for example, 29 seconds or 0.2 seconds) of the first special variable winning device 38. When the time has elapsed, or when the upper limit number (for example, nine) of game balls has won the first special variable winning device 38 before the time set as the opening time of the first special variable winning device 38 has elapsed. Then, it is determined that the open state conversion condition of the second special fluctuation winning device 39 is satisfied.
In addition, the winning device control means (game control device 100) is determined by the conversion condition determination means (game control device 100) that the open state conversion condition of the second variable winning device (second special variable winning device 39) is satisfied. In this case, the second variable winning device (second special variable winning device 39) is converted to the open state.

FIG. 44 is a timing chart for explaining an example of the case where the other prize winning opening (in this example, the upper prize winning opening) is closed in a short time.
In the example shown in FIG. 44, in the second round (2R), the upper limit number (9 in the case of this embodiment) of game balls won in the upper grand prize winning opening in one second, that is, the first round (1R) The maximum number of games that can be opened in the second round before the remaining winning ball processing period for the big winning opening (ie, the lower winning prize opening) has passed in the second round (ie, the upper winning prize opening). The example is the same as the example shown in FIG. 43 except that the ball is won. Therefore, mainly different parts will be described.

  In the example shown in FIG. 44, the maximum number of game balls won in the second round (2R) in the second round (2R) (that is, the upper major prize opening) in one second. The mouth open process is completed in 1 second. Therefore, normally, when 2.5 seconds have passed after the lower major winning opening is converted to the closed state, the extra winning opening remaining ball processing period for the lower major winning opening ends. 1.3 seconds after conversion to the closed state (= 0.296 seconds (odd round (for long closing) interval 1 hour) + 0.004 seconds (interval 2 hours) + 1 second (processing time during opening of the big prize opening) )) Elapses, the winning prize remaining ball processing period for the lower winning prize opening is forcibly terminated (that is, the lower winning prize remaining ball valid timer area is cleared to 0 (see step A1103)). Here, in this embodiment, “forcibly ending the winning ball remaining ball processing period” means that the remaining ball effective timer area is cleared to 0 while the remaining ball effective timer is not “0”. That is, in the present embodiment, the “large winning opening remaining ball processing period” is a period in which the remaining ball valid timer is not “0”.

  In other words, the valid period setting means (game control device 100) determines the valid period (large winning opening remaining ball) for the second variable winning device when the second variable winning device (second special variable winning device 39) is converted to the closed state. Processing period), and before the predetermined time (in this embodiment, 2.5 seconds) elapses, the conversion condition determination means (game control device 100) causes the second variable winning device (second special variable winning device 39). If the open state conversion condition is determined to be satisfied, the set valid period is terminated (forced termination) without waiting for the predetermined time to elapse.

Then, the upper prize winning opening is converted to the closed state (that is, the big winning opening remaining ball processing period for the lower winning prize opening is forcibly terminated) for 0.1 second (= 0.096 seconds (for even round (short closing)). ) (Interval 1 hour) +0.004 seconds (interval 2 hours)) has elapsed, the third round (3R) starts and the lower major prize opening (second special variable prize winning device 39) is opened ( Long open). As a result, it is possible to detect the game ball that has won the lower major prize opening in an appropriate round, since there is no loss of the upper prize opening remaining ball processing period for the lower major prize opening and the opening of the lower major prize opening. It becomes possible, and it is possible to smoothly convert the big winning opening.
That is, the winning device control means (game control device 100) is determined by the conversion condition determining means (game control device 100) that the open state conversion condition of the second variable winning device (second special variable winning device 39) is satisfied. A predetermined period from the point in time (interval period. In this embodiment, 0.1 second (= 0.096 second (interval 1 hour for even round (short closing)) + 0.004 second (interval 2 hours))) After the elapse of time, the second variable winning device (second special variable winning device 39) is converted to the open state.
In addition, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal that is turned on while the detection of the lower major prize opening count switch (lower count switch 39a) is valid forcibly ends the extra prize winning ball remaining ball processing period for the lower major prize opening. Since it is turned off in step A219 of the big prize opening switch monitoring process (see FIG. 13) executed after the interval 1 process (see FIG. 37), 1.396 after the lower big prize opening is converted to the closed state. It is turned OFF when seconds (= 1.3 seconds (large winning opening remaining ball processing period) +0.096 seconds (interval 1 hour for even round (short closing))) have elapsed.
Therefore, during the period in which the detection of the lower count switch 39a is valid (that is, the ON period of the special electric accessory 1 operating signal), if the large winning port remaining ball processing period for the lower large winning port is not forcibly terminated, “ (The period during which the lower prize winning opening is open) + (the remaining prize ball processing period for the lower prize winning opening) ”, but the remaining big ball processing period for the lower prize winning opening is forcibly terminated Is “(period in which the lower prize winning opening is open) + (large winning prize remaining ball processing period for the lower prize winning opening) + (interval 1 hour for even round (short closing))”.

  In the example shown in FIG. 44, since the upper limit number of game balls won in the second round at the upper prize opening in one second, the big prize for the big prize opening opened in the first round (that is, the lower big prize opening). Although the mouth remaining ball processing period is “1.3 seconds”, in the case of this embodiment, the length T1 of the large winning port remaining ball processing period with respect to the lower prize opening is the opening time of the upper university winning mouth. If it is less than 2.2 seconds, 0.3 seconds (= 0.296 seconds (odd round (long closing) interval 1 hour) + 0.004 seconds (interval 2 hours)) depending on the opening time If the opening time is arbitrarily changed in the range of <T1 <2.5 seconds and the opening time is 2.2 seconds or more, T1 = 2.5 seconds regardless of the opening time. In the case of the present embodiment, since the opening time for the large winning opening for short opening is 0.2 seconds, the upper number of upper winning holes is set to the upper limit before the winning ball remaining ball processing period for the lower winning hole has elapsed. Not only when the game ball of the game is won, but also when the opening of the upper prize winning opening is short, the upper winning prize opening will be closed before the remaining winning ball processing period for the lower winning prize is over. The winning ball remaining ball processing period for the lower winning port is forcibly terminated (that is, T1 <2.5 seconds).

Of course, the winning ball remaining ball processing period for the upper winning ball can also be forcibly terminated. In other words, if the upper limit number of game balls are won in the lower prize opening before the upper prize opening remaining ball processing period for the upper prize winning gate elapses, the remaining prize ball processing period for the upper prize opening is mandatory. The process ends (that is, the upper prize winning port remaining ball effective timer area is cleared to 0 (see step A1102)).
Specifically, in the case of the present embodiment, the length T2 of the outstanding winning opening remaining ball processing period for the upper winning opening is the opening time when the opening time of the lower winning opening is less than 2.4 seconds. 0.1 seconds (= 0.096 seconds (interval 1 hour for even round (short closing)) + 0.004 seconds (interval 2 hours)) <T2 <2.5 seconds If the opening time is changed to 2.4 seconds or longer, T2 = 2.5 seconds regardless of the opening time. In the case of the present embodiment, since the opening time for the large winning opening for short opening is 0.2 seconds, the upper limit of the number of lower winning holes before the upper winning hole remaining ball processing period elapses for the upper winning hole. Not only when the game ball of the game is won, but also when the opening of the lower prize winning opening is short, the lower prize winning opening will be closed before the remaining winning ball processing period for the upper winning prize is over The winning ball remaining ball processing period for the upper winning ball is forcibly terminated (that is, T2 <2.5 seconds).

In other words, the effective period setting means (game control device 100) determines the effective period (large winning opening remaining ball) for the first variable winning device when the first variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38) is converted to the closed state. Processing period), and before the predetermined time (in this embodiment, 2.5 seconds) elapses, the conversion condition determination means (game control device 100) performs the first variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38). If the open state conversion condition is determined to be satisfied, the set valid period is terminated (forced termination) without waiting for the predetermined time to elapse.
In addition, the winning device control means (game control device 100) is determined by the conversion condition determining means (game control device 100) that the open state conversion condition of the first variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38) is satisfied. A predetermined period from the point in time (interval period. In this embodiment, 0.3 seconds (= 0.296 seconds (interval 1 hour for odd round (long closing)) + 0.004 seconds (interval 2 hours))) After the elapse of time, the first variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38) is converted to the open state.

  Next, control executed by the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control apparatus 300 will be described. The control process by the main control microcomputer 311 mainly includes a main process shown in FIG. 45 and a timer interrupt process (not shown).

[Main processing]
In the main process, as shown in FIG. 45, the process at the start of the program is first performed. In the processing at the start of the program, first, interrupts are prohibited (step C1), the CPU is initialized (step C2), the VDP 312 is initialized (step C3), and the interrupt is permitted (step C4). .
Next, the generation of display data is permitted (step C5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7).

In this main process, next, a loop process is performed as a main loop process. In this loop processing, first, a WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8).
Next, an effect button input process (step C9) for creating input information from an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect operation unit (the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29) is performed. The input from the production operation unit is read in the timer interruption process. In this production button input process, when there is an input from the production operation unit, a process for changing the production content is performed.
Next, hall / player setting mode processing (step C10) is performed for accepting operations such as setting of changeable ranges such as the brightness and volume of the LED and liquid crystal, and changing the brightness and volume of the LED and liquid crystal by the player.
Next, a random number update process (step C11) is performed to update a random number that determines the details of the variation mode of the decoration special figure variation display game.
Next, a received command check process (step C12) is performed in which a command from the game control device 100 is analyzed and a response is made.
Next, scenario setting processing (step C13) and motion control processing (step C14) are performed.

Next, an effect display editing process (step C15) is performed, and a drawing command preparation end is set (step C16). In the effect display editing process, various data are updated in accordance with the content to be drawn, and so on until the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. If drawing data of a screen to be drawn within 1/30 seconds (about 33.3 milliseconds) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.
Next, it is determined whether it is a frame switching timing (step C17). In this embodiment, in order to create a system cycle (1 frame 1/30 seconds), it is determined that it is the frame switching timing when the V blank interrupt (1/60 seconds) is entered twice. Note that the frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. For example, image updating (frame switching) may be performed at 1/60 seconds, or image updating (frames) at a timing later than 1/60 seconds. Switching).
If it is determined in step C17 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C17; N), the process of step C17 is repeated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C17 that it is the frame switching timing (step C17; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C18).

  Next, a sound control process (step C19) for controlling the output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a and lower speaker 19b), a decoration control process (step C20) for controlling the LEDs of the panel decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18 ), A movable body control process (step C21) for controlling the motor and solenoid of the board rendering device 44 is performed, and the process returns to the process for clearing the WDT (step C8).

[Received command check processing]
Next, details of the received command check process (step C12) in the above-described main process will be described.
As shown in FIG. 46, in the received command check process, first, the value of a command reception counter that counts how many commands are received during one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the number of received commands (see FIG. 46). Step C31).
Next, it is determined whether or not the command reception number is not “0” (step C32).
If it is determined in step C32 that the command reception number is “0” (step C32; N), the received command check process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step C32 that the number of received commands is not “0” (step C32; Y), the content of the command reception counter area is subtracted by the number of received commands (step C33).
Next, the contents of the received command buffer are copied to the command area (step C34), the command read index is updated by +1 in the range of “0” to “31” (step C35), and the command is copied for the number of received commands. It is determined whether or not the process has been completed (step C36). As described above, in this embodiment, the command is not directly analyzed in the reception command buffer, the contents of the reception command buffer are copied to the command area (analysis RAM area), and the command analysis is performed in the command area. It is configured as follows. Thereby, in preparation for the case where a command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during the analysis of the command, it is possible to move the command (data) and create a space. In addition, command analysis can be performed collectively in a round of main processing.
If it is determined in step C36 that command copying for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C36; N), the process returns to step C34.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step C36 that the command copy for the number of received commands has been completed (step C36; Y), the contents of the command area are loaded (step C37), and the received command analysis process (step C38). )I do.
Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C39), and it is determined whether or not the analysis of the command for the number of received commands is completed (step C40).
If it is determined in step C40 that the command analysis for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C40; N), the process returns to step C37.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step C40 that the analysis of the command for the number of received commands has been completed (step C40; Y), the received command check process is terminated.
As described above, in the received command check process, commands received during one frame (1/30 second) are collectively analyzed. In the present embodiment, up to 32 commands can be stored.

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, details of the received command analysis process (step C38) in the received command check process described above will be described.
As shown in FIG. 47, in the received command analysis process, first, the command upper byte is separated as MODE and the lower byte as ACT (ACTION) (step C51).
Next, it is determined whether or not MODE is within a normal range (step C52).
If it is determined in step C52 that MODE is in the normal range (step C52; Y), it is determined whether or not ACT is in the normal range (step C53).
If it is determined in step C53 that the ACT is in the normal range (step C53; Y), it is determined whether or not the ACT for the MODE is a correct combination (step C54).

Further, if it is determined in step C52 that MODE is not in the normal range (step C52; N), if it is determined in step C53 that ACT is not in the normal range (step C53; N), or in step C54, the response to the MOED If it is determined that ACT is not a correct combination (step C54; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.
If it is determined in step C54 that the ACT for the MODE is a correct combination (step C54; Y), it is determined whether the MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C55).
If it is determined in step C55 that MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C55; Y), the variable command process (step C56) is performed, and the received command analysis process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step C55 that MODE is not in the range of the variable command (step C55; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the big hit command (step C57).
If it is determined in step C57 that MODE is within the range of the jackpot command (step C57; Y), the jackpot command processing (step C58) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C57 that MODE is not within the range of the jackpot command (step C57; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of symbol system command (step C59).
If it is determined in step C59 that MODE is within the range of symbolic commands (step C59; Y), symbolic command processing (step C60) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step C59 that MODE is not in the range of symbol-related commands (step C59; N), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of single-shot commands such as a pending number command or an error command. (Step C61).
If it is determined in step C61 that MODE is within the range of the single command (step C61; Y), single command processing (step C62) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

  The single command processing (step C62) includes a special figure 1 hold information setting process for performing a process related to the generated first start memory when a decoration special figure hold number command corresponding to the first start memory is received. , A special figure 2 hold information setting process for performing processing related to the second start memory that has occurred when the special figure hold number command corresponding to the second start memory is received is included. In the special figure 1 hold information setting process and the special figure 2 hold information setting process, a process for displaying the decorative special figure start storage display 83 corresponding to the generated hold on the display device 41 is performed. That is, the production control device 300 displays a start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display 83) corresponding to the start memory stored in the start memory means (game control device 100) on the variable display device (display device 41). It serves as a start memory display control means.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step C61 that MODE is not within the range of the single-shot command (step C61; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the pre-read symbol command (step C63).
If it is determined in step C63 that MODE is within the range of the pre-read symbol command (step C63; Y), pre-read symbol command processing (step C64) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step C63 that MODE is not within the range of the prefetched symbol system command (step C63; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the prefetching variation system command (step C65).
If it is determined in step C65 that MODE is within the range of the prefetch variation command (step C65; Y), the prefetch variation command processing (step C66) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C65 that MODE is not within the range of the prefetching variation command (step C65; N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

[Variable command processing]
Next, the details of the variable command process (step C56) in the received command analysis process described above will be described.
As shown in FIG. 48, in the variable command process, it is first determined whether or not the type of the special figure variable display game is unconfirmed (step C71). This determination makes it possible to check whether a stop symbol command has been received before receiving the variation pattern command. Since the stop symbol command includes information on the type of the special symbol fluctuation display game (whether it is special graph 1 or special graph 2), if the stop symbol command can be received normally, the special symbol variation display game It is determined that the type of is not yet determined.
When it is determined in step C71 that the type of the special figure variation display game is unconfirmed (step C71; Y), the variation command processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step C71 that the type of the special figure variation display game is not yet determined (step C71; N), a variation pattern corresponding symbol determination process (step C72) is performed. In this variation pattern corresponding symbol determination process, it is determined whether or not the type of stop symbol command matches (matches) the variation pattern command. Thus, for example, when the variation pattern command and the stop symbol command type do not match, such as a combination of a variation pattern command of hit variation and a stop symbol command of the off symbol, it does not vary (specifically (Do not play the decoration special figure fluctuation display game).

If the result of determination in step C72 is that the variation pattern command and stop symbol command type do not match (step C73; Y), the variation command processing is terminated.
On the other hand, if the result of determination in step C72 is that the variation pattern command and stop symbol command type match (step C73; N), the variation effect setting processing (step C74) is performed, and the variation command processing is terminated. To do.

[Variation production setting processing]
Next, the details of the changing effect setting process (step C74) in the above-described changing command process will be described.
As shown in FIG. 49, in the variation effect setting process, the effect control device 300 first performs the variation pattern classification process (step C81), clears all the notice information area (step C82), and the first half change notice lottery. Processing (step C83) is performed.
Next, as a result of the classification in step C81, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern based on the variation pattern command is roughly classified into a variation pattern with no reach variation (step C84).

If it is determined in step C84 that the variation pattern of the variation without reach is roughly divided (step C84; Y), the process proceeds to step C86.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step C84 that the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation without reach is not roughly divided (step C84; N), that is, if the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern command is a fluctuation pattern of fluctuation with reach, the latter half fluctuation. The middle notice lottery process (step C85) is performed, and the process proceeds to step C86.
In Step C86, a decoration stop symbol setting process (Step C86) is performed, and thereafter, a variation start setting process (Step C87) is performed, and the variation effect setting process is terminated.

[First half lottery notice lottery processing]
Next, the details of the first-variation preliminary notice lottery process (step C83) in the above-described variable effect setting process will be described.
As shown in FIG. 50, in the first half change notice lottery process, the effect control device 300 first sets the first half notice group table 1 corresponding to the type of change pattern, the effect mode, and the like (step C101).

Next, a notice group lottery process A (step C102) is performed in which a lottery for selecting a notice group for a notice effect at the start of change is selected.
If “no notice” is selected as a result of the lottery in step C102 (step C103; Y), information related to “no notice” is stored as normal performance information of the notice effect at the start of change, and the process of step C105 is performed. Migrate to

  On the other hand, if a result other than “No notice” is selected as a result of the lottery in step C102 (step C103; N), the variation from the normal notice pattern included in the notice group selected in the lottery in step C102 is changed. A detailed notice lottery process A (step C104) for performing a lottery for selecting a notice pattern to appear at the start is performed, and information on the selected notice pattern is stored as normal effect information of the notice effect at the start of change. Transition to processing.

In step C105, the first half notice group table 2 corresponding to the type of variation pattern and the production mode is set (step C105).
Next, a notice group lottery process B (step C106) is performed in which a lottery for selecting a notice group for a pre-reach notice effect is performed.
As a result of the lottery in step C106, when “no notice” is selected (step C107; Y), information related to “no notice” is stored as the normal performance information of the pre-reach notice effect, and the first lottery notice lottery The process ends.

  On the other hand, when a result other than “No notice” is selected as a result of the lottery in step C106 (step C107; N), reach is selected from the normal notice patterns included in the notice group selected in the lottery in step C106. Advance notice lottery processing B (step C108) for performing a lottery for selecting a notice pattern to appear before is performed, and information on the selected notice pattern is stored as normal performance information of the pre-reach notice effect. The lottery process is terminated.

[Lottery processing during the latter half of the change]
Next, details of the latter-half fluctuation notice lottery process (step C85) in the above-described fluctuation effect setting process will be described.
As shown in FIG. 51, in the latter-half change notice lottery process, the effect control device 300 first sets the latter-order notice group table 1 corresponding to the type of change pattern, the effect mode, and the like (step C111).

Next, a notice group lottery process C (step C112) for performing a lottery for selecting a notice group for a notice effect during reach is performed.
As a result of the lottery in step C112, when “no notice” is selected (step C113; Y), information related to “no notice” is stored as normal performance information of the notice announcement effect during reach, and the process of step C115 is performed. Transition.

  On the other hand, if the result of the lottery in step C112 is other than “no notice” (step C113; N), the reach is selected from the normal notice patterns included in the notice group selected in the lottery in step C112. A detailed notice lottery process C (step C114) for performing a lottery for selecting a notice pattern to appear inside is performed, information about the selected notice pattern is stored as normal effect information for the notice effect during reach, and the process of step C115 Migrate to

In Step C115, the latter half notice group table 2 corresponding to the type of variation pattern, the production mode, etc. is set (Step C115).
Next, a notice group lottery process D (step C116) is performed in which a lottery for selecting a notice group for the notice effect after reach is selected.
As a result of the lottery in step C116, when “no notice” is selected (step C117; Y), information regarding “no notice” is stored as normal performance information of the notice effect after reach, and the notice lottery during the latter half of the change The process ends.

  On the other hand, when the result of the lottery in step C116 is other than “no notice” (step C117; N), reach is selected from the normal notice patterns included in the notice group selected in the lottery in step C116. Detailed notice lottery processing D (step C118) for performing a lottery for selecting a notice pattern to be displayed later is performed, and information on the selected notice pattern is stored as normal effect information of the notice effect after reach, and the latter half is changing. The notice lottery process ends.

In this embodiment, it is configured that the notice group lottery process is performed twice assuming that there are two notice timings (at the start of change, before reach) during the first half fluctuation, but the number of notice timings during the first half fluctuation is However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be one time or three or more times. In addition, the number of executions of the notice group lottery process can be arbitrarily changed according to the number of notice timings during the first half change.
Similarly, in this embodiment, it is configured that the notice group lottery process is performed twice assuming that there are two notice timings (during reach and after reach) during the latter half of the change, but the number of notice timings during the latter half of the change is However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be one time or three or more times. In addition, the number of executions of the notice group lottery process can be arbitrarily changed according to the number of notice timings during the latter half of the change.

50, the notice group lottery process is performed twice, and in the previous notice group lottery process (that is, the notice group lottery process A (step C102)), “the notice effect at the start of change” is performed. The “notice group” is selected and the “notice group for pre-reach notice effect” is selected in the subsequent notice group lottery process (ie, the notice group lottery process B (step C106)). It is also possible to configure the system so that “notice group of notice effect at start of change” and “notice group of notice effect before reach” are selected in the notice group lottery process.
Similarly, in the second-half fluctuation notice lottery process in FIG. 51, the notice group lottery process is performed twice, and the previous notice group lottery process (that is, the notice group lottery process C (step C112)) is executed. The “notice group” is selected, and the “notice group for the post-reach notice effect” is selected in the subsequent notice group lottery process (that is, the notice group lottery process D (step C116)). It is also possible to perform only once, and in the notice group lottery process, select “notice group for notice effect during reach” and “notice group for notice effect after reach”.
In addition, instead of the first-half variable notice lottery process and the second-half variable notice lottery process, the notice group lottery process is performed only once. It is also possible to perform a floating notice lottery process for selecting a notice group for a notice effect, a notice group for a notice effect during reach, and a notice group for a notice effect after reach.

As in the present embodiment, lottery effects can be executed even with a small amount of memory usage by performing lottery at every notice timing. For example, in the case where “notice group of notice effect at start of change” and “notice group of notice effect before reach” are selected in two lotteries as in the present embodiment, the notice group table used in the two lotteries is selected. As the storage area, an area corresponding to “the number of notice groups of the notice effect at the start of change” + “the number of notice groups of the notice effect before the reach” is necessary. On the other hand, when selecting “Advance notice group at the start of change” and “Advance notice group at the start of reach” in one lottery, “Advance notice group at the start of change” in the one lottery. One combination is selected from the notice group table that stores a plurality of combinations of "Pre-reach notice notice group". Therefore, the storage area of the notice group table used in the one lottery needs an area corresponding to “the number of notice groups of the notice effect at the start of change” × “the number of notice groups of the notice effect before the reach” × As the number of timings and the number of notice groups increase, the required area increases, so the memory usage increases. For this reason, it is preferable to perform the notice group lottery process at each notice timing from the viewpoint of reducing the memory usage.
On the other hand, by configuring a plurality of notice groups in one lottery, a large number of notice effects can be executed even with a small number of lotteries. That is, from the viewpoint of reducing the number of lotteries, it is preferable to select a plurality of notice groups in one notice group lottery process.

[Scenario setting process]
Next, details of the scenario setting process (step C13) in the above-described main process will be described.
As shown in FIG. 52, in the scenario setting process, first, the address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 0 (scenario layer number 0) is prepared (step C201), and the scenario analysis process ( Step C202) is executed. Here, “preparing an address area” means preparing an address of the address area itself in order to read data set in the address area in a later process.

Next, an address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 1 (scenario layer number 1) is prepared (step C203), and scenario analysis processing (step C204) is executed based on this preparation.
Next, an address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 2 (scenario layer number 2) is prepared (step C205), and scenario analysis processing (step C206) is executed based on this preparation.
Next, an address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 3 (scenario layer number 3) is prepared (step C207), and scenario analysis processing (step C208) is executed based on this preparation.
Next, an address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 4 (scenario layer number 4) is prepared (step C209), and scenario analysis processing (step C210) is executed based on this preparation.
Next, an address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 5 (scenario layer number 5) is prepared (step C211), and scenario analysis processing (step C212) is executed based on this preparation.
Next, an address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 6 (scenario layer number 6) is prepared (step C213), and scenario analysis processing (step C214) is executed based on this preparation.
Next, the address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the scenario management area 7 (scenario layer number 7) is prepared (step C215), and the scenario analysis process (step C216) is executed based on this preparation to execute the scenario setting process. finish.

  In this embodiment, there are eight scenario layers, and the scenario layer numbers are 0 to 7. Of these eight scenario layers, scenario layer 0 is a layer that mainly controls the background, scenario layer 1 is a layer that mainly controls the cut-in notice character, and scenario layer 2 is mainly the left design. Scenario layer 3 is a layer that mainly controls the right symbol, scenario layer 4 is a layer that mainly controls the middle symbol, and scenario layer 5 is a layer that mainly controls the hold. The scenario layer 6 is a layer that mainly controls the notice character, and the scenario layer 7 is a layer that mainly controls the fourth symbol.

  However, it is not restricted to this aspect. For example, although the number of scenario layers is 8 in this embodiment, the number of scenario layers is not limited to this. In particular, the layers used for backgrounds and notices are increased or decreased depending on the model specifications, and in this embodiment, description is limited to as few as possible. Further, the control target of each scenario layer is not limited to that of the present embodiment, and various allocations are possible. For example, scenario layer 0 is a layer that mainly controls the background, scenario layer 1 is a layer that mainly controls the left symbol, scenario layer 2 is a layer that mainly controls the right symbol, and scenario layer 3 is The layer that mainly controls the middle symbol, the scenario layer 4 is the layer that mainly controls the notice 1, the scenario layer 5 is the layer that mainly controls the notice 2, and the scenario layer 6 mainly controls the hold. The scenario layer 7 may be a layer that mainly controls the fourth symbol.

  The address area of the scenario management area is provided for each scenario layer. When there is something to be controlled, the scenario management area X corresponds to the address area of the scenario management area X (X = 0 to 7). When the address of the area is stored and there is nothing to control, the address area of the corresponding scenario management area X is set to NULL. For example, since no hold display is performed in a movie waiting for a customer, an address (address of scenario management area 0) is set in the background area (address area of scenario management area 0). NULL is set in (address area of scenario management area 6).

[Scenario analysis processing]
Next, details of the scenario analysis process (steps C202, C204, C206, C208, C210, C212, C214, and C216) in the scenario setting process described above will be described.
As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, in the scenario analysis process, first, the value of brk (data used for repetition of the process described later) is set to 0 (step C221), and the prepared scenario management area X Data (address of scenario management area X or NULL) set in the address area is loaded (step C222). Here, “the prepared address area of the scenario management area X” means that, for example, when the scenario analysis process is executed in step C202 in the scenario setting process, it is prepared in the immediately preceding step C201. If the scenario analysis process is executed at step C204 in the scenario setting process (address area of the scenario management area 0), the address area (scenario management area 1) prepared at the immediately preceding step C203. In other cases, the address area is prepared in the immediately preceding step.

Next, it is determined whether the data at the address loaded in step C222 is NULL (step C223). If NULL (step C223; Y), the control is not necessary, and the scenario analysis process is terminated. If not NULL (step C223; N). Then, the value of the scenario timer in the scenario management area at the address loaded in step C222 is read to determine whether the value of the scenario timer is smaller than 0 (step C224). If it is smaller than 0 (step C224; Y), the scenario analysis process is terminated because it is abnormal. The scenario timer value is first set to 0 each time scenario control data is set, but 0 is the lower limit. On the other hand, if it is 0 or more (step C224; N), if the scenario timer value is not 0, the scenario timer value is updated by -1 (step C225).
Then, it is determined whether the value of the scenario timer is greater than 0 (step C226). If it is greater than 0 (step C226; Y), the scenario analysis process is terminated because the time has not yet been reached, and is 0 or less. In the case (step C226; N), the process proceeds to step C227.

  According to these steps C224 to C226, wait timer management is performed. That is, only the time corresponding to the value of the scenario timer set in the scenario timer area in the target scenario management area (the scenario management area of the address loaded in step C222) is the target scenario table (in the target scenario management area). The operation of delaying the control progress of the scenario table at the address set in the scenario data table area is realized. Here, the “operation for delaying the control of the scenario table” means to wait for the progress of the scenario table (it does not proceed to the next line of the scenario table but waits there, and continues to produce at that time). . For example, in the 10th line (// 9) in FIG. 56, since the constant wait code is set and the wait time value is (6), the time corresponding to 6 frames (in this embodiment, 6/30 seconds) (1 frame = 1/30 seconds)) Staying on this line and proceeding to the next line after the lapse of the time, this operation corresponds to “an operation for delaying the control of the scenario table”. In the scenario table, a line in which a code (a constant wait code or the like (including a PB (push button) waiting code) is included) between the wait time value and the wait time value is set, and then a constant wait code or the like is set. All opcodes between the lines) are executed at the same time. Then, when the value of the scenario timer becomes 0 or less due to the update of step C225, it is determined that the scenario timer has timed up, so that the control process of the target scenario table proceeds to proceed to step C227 via step C226. It has a configuration to proceed. However, the target scenario table control process (after step C234) is executed after the timer management process for the PB valid time described later.

That is, when the process proceeds to step C227, the value of the target PB timer (the value of the PB timer area in the scenario management area at the address loaded in step C222) is read, and it is determined whether the value of this PB timer is greater than zero. (Step C227) If it is greater than 0 (Step C227; Y), the time is not up, so proceed to Step C228. If it is 0 or less (Step C227; N), the time is up, so Proceed to C233.
When the process proceeds to step C228, it is determined whether or not a PB operation is detected (step C228). If a PB operation is detected (step C228; Y), the process proceeds to step C229 and no PB operation is detected. In (Step C228; N), the value of the target PB timer is updated by -1 (Step C232), and the process proceeds to Step C233. Here, whether or not a PB operation is detected is determined by whether or not a flag (PB operation flag) that is set when an operation on the PB is detected in the effect button input process (step C9) is set. . In the present embodiment, PB is an integrated product (production operation unit) of the production button 25 and the touch panel 29, and does not indicate only the push button (production button 25) provided in the production operation unit.

Proceeding to step C229, the value of the target PB timer at this time (that is, the remaining time of the PB effective time when the PB is pressed) is stored as the PB effect addition time (step C229), and then the target Is set to “0” (step C230), and the PB detection flag is set in the PB detection flag area of the target scenario management area (step C231). In these steps C229 to C231, since the PB has been operated, the remaining time of the PB timer is stored as the PB effect addition time, the PB timer is reset to 0, and the PB detection flag indicating that the PB has been operated is displayed. It is set in the scenario management area for scenario control.
In step C233, it is determined whether the value of the target PB timer is greater than 0 (step C233). If greater than 0 (step C233; Y), the PB operation is not detected and the time is up. If not, the scenario analysis process ends. If it is 0 or less (step C233; N), the process proceeds to step C234 because the PB operation has been performed or the time is up.

According to steps C227 to C233, timer management for the PB valid time is performed. That is, when a PB timer value larger than 0 is set in the PB timer area in the target scenario management area (the scenario management area of the address loaded in step C222), this PB timer value is supported. The operation of delaying the control of the target scenario table (the scenario table of the address set in the scenario data table area in the target scenario management area) for the PB valid time is realized for the time to be set. Here, “the operation of delaying the control of the scenario table and providing the PB valid time” means that the value of the target PB timer is 0 (that is, the PB timer is timed up) or the PB is operated. Until it is done, it means to wait for the progress of the scenario table (waiting there without proceeding to the next line of the scenario table, continuing to produce at that time). For example, in the 10th line (// 9) of FIG. 56, since the constant wait code is set and the wait time value is (6), the time corresponding to 6 frames remains in this line, and after the time has elapsed, the next time Although the process proceeds to the eleventh line, the operation by the tenth line is the “operation to delay the progress of the scenario table control” by the scenario timer described above. On the other hand, for example, when the PB wait (PUSH) code is set and the valid time value is (30), this valid time value (30) is set in the PB timer in the PB wait process (step C256). If there is no PB operation (specifically, PUSH operation (pressing operation)), the effective time corresponding to a maximum of 30 frames remains in this line, and within this effective time, the PB operation (specifically, PUSH operation (pressing operation)) is performed. If there is, the operation immediately proceeds to the next line. In this way, the operation of waiting for the operation on the PB for the effective time (PB effective time) set in the PB timer is “delaying the control progress of the scenario table and reducing the PB effective time. It corresponds to “operation to provide”. Then, without any operation on the PB, the value of the PB timer becomes 0 or less by updating the step C232, and the PB timer expires, or during the PB valid time until the PB timer expires, Is operated, the process proceeds to step C233 through step C232 or steps C229 to C231. In this case, the determination result in step C233 is No (the PB timer is 0), and the process proceeds to step C234.
However, when the value of the PB timer set in the PB timer area is 0 from the beginning, the process proceeds from step C227 to step C233, and further proceeds from step C233 to step C234 to immediately control (in this case) The PB valid time is 0 (none). Since the PB valid time is provided in the case of a notice effect or the like, in other cases, the value of the PB timer area is set to 0 and no PB valid time is provided.

Next, in step C234 and subsequent steps, control processing for the target scenario table is executed. This will be described below.
When the process proceeds to Step C234, the process from Step C234 to Step C273 at the loop end is repeatedly executed until a value other than 0 is set as the value of brk. That is, in step C273, which is the rear loop end, the value of brk at that time is read. If the value of brk is 0, the process returns to step C234 and the process is repeated from the next step C235.

That is, when the process proceeds to step C234, first, steps C235 to C238 are sequentially executed, and then the process proceeds to step C239.
Specifically, first, the address of the scenario table is loaded from the scenario data table area in the target scenario management area (step C235). For example, in the case of scenario layer number 31 at step-up notice A, the address of the scenario table shown in FIG. 56 is loaded at step C235, and in the case of scenario layer number 32 at step-up notice A, The address of the scenario table shown in 57 is loaded in this step C235.
Next, an operation code of a specific line (specified line) of the scenario table specified by the address loaded in step C235 is acquired (step C236). In the scenario table, for example, as shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, the operation code and operand data (scenario data) are set in each line. For example, in the case of FIG. 56, if the target is the scenario management area 31 (scenario layer number 31) and the designated line is the first line, “motion 4 registration”, which is the opcode data on the first line of the topmost scenario layer 31 "Code" is obtained in step C236.

Next, the operation code acquired in step C236 is separated into upper bits and lower bits and prepared (step C237). For example, when the operation code data is “51h”, the upper bit “5” and the lower bit “1” are separately prepared. The upper and lower bits of the opcode have meanings (however, the lower bits may have no meaning). For example, among “51h” which is the “motion 1 deletion code”, the upper bit “5” means the motion deletion, and the lower bit “1” is the target (in this case, the motion deletion target) This means that the layer is motion 1.
Next, an operand of a specific row (designated row) of the scenario table designated by the address loaded in step C235 is acquired and prepared (step C238). For example, in the case of FIG. 56, if the target is the scenario management area 31 (scenario layer number 31) and the designated row is the first row, “motion index No. .. (1) "is acquired and prepared in step C238.

Thereafter, when the process proceeds to step C239, the prepared operation code high-order data (data prepared by separating in step C237, the same applies hereinafter) is determined, and if it is data (motion registration code) instructing motion registration (step C239; Y ), After executing the motion registration process (step C251), the process proceeds to step C271. If the data is not data for commanding the motion registration (step C239; N), the process proceeds to step C240.
Proceeding to step C240, the prepared opcode high-order data is determined, and if it is data (motion deletion code) commanding motion deletion (step C240; Y), the step after executing the motion deletion process (step C252) The process proceeds to C271, and if it is not data for commanding motion deletion (step C240; N), the process proceeds to step C241.

Proceeding to step C241, if the prepared operation code high-order data is determined and the data is the data (motion continuation code) for instructing motion continuation (step C241; Y), the step after executing the motion continuation process (step C253) is executed. The process proceeds to C271, and if it is not data for instructing to continue the motion (step C241; N), the process proceeds to step C242.
Proceeding to step C242, if the prepared operation code high-order data is determined and the data is a constant wait command (constant wait code) (step C242; Y), the constant wait process (step C254) is executed and then the step is performed. The process proceeds to C271, and if it is not data for instructing a constant wait (step C242; N), the process proceeds to step C243.

Proceeding to step C243, if the prepared opcode high-order data is determined and the data is a variable weight command (variable weight code) (step C243; Y), the variable weight process (step C255) is executed and then the step is performed. The process proceeds to C271, and if it is not data for instructing a variable weight (step C243; N), the process proceeds to step C244.
Proceeding to step C244, the prepared opcode high-order data is determined, and if it is data (PB wait code) for instructing PB wait (step C244; Y), after executing the PB wait process (step C256), step The process proceeds to C271, and if it is not data for instructing to wait for PB (step C244; N), the process proceeds to step C245.

Proceeding to step C245, the prepared opcode high-order data is determined, and if it is data (PB determination branch code) for instructing the PB determination branch (step C245; Y), the PB determination branch process (step C257) is executed. After that, the process proceeds to step C271, and if it is not the data for commanding the PB determination branch (step C245; N), the process proceeds to step C246.
Proceeding to step C246, the prepared opcode high-order data is determined, and if it is data (stop symbol set code) commanding symbol stop (step C246; Y), after executing symbol stop processing (step C258) Proceeding to step C271, if the data is not data for commanding symbol stop (step C246; N), the process proceeds to step C247.

Proceeding to step C247, if the prepared opcode high-order data is determined and the data is for designating reverse symbol replacement (symbol reverse calculation replacement code) (step C247; Y), the reverse symbol replacement processing (step C259) ) Is executed, the process proceeds to step C271. If the data is not the data for commanding symbol reverse replacement (step C247; N), the process proceeds to step C248.
When the process proceeds to step C248, the prepared opcode high-order data is determined, and if it is data (fluctuation scenario switching code) for instructing switching of the fluctuation scenario (step C248; Y), the fluctuation scenario switching process (step C260) is executed. After that, the process proceeds to step C271, and if it is not the data for commanding the change scenario switching (step C248; N), the process proceeds to step C249.

When the process proceeds to step C249, the prepared opcode high-order data is determined, and if it is data (repetition code) for commanding repetition (step C249; Y), the process proceeds to step C271 after executing the repetition process (step C261). If the data is not data for commanding repetition (step C249; N), the process proceeds to step C250.
When the process proceeds to step C250, the prepared opcode high-order data is determined, and if it is data (end code) for commanding termination (step C250; Y), the termination process (step C262) is executed and then the process proceeds to step C271. If it is not data for instructing termination (step C250; N), the process proceeds to step C263.
Proceeding to step C263, if it is data (notice time calculation code) that determines the prepared operation code high-order data and commands the calculation of the time to be used for the notice (step C263; Y), the notice time calculation process ( After executing step C264), the process proceeds to step C271, and if it is not data for instructing the calculation of the time to be used for the advance notice (step C263; N), the process proceeds to another step not shown.

  Note that other steps (not shown) (steps indicated by the wavy lines in FIG. 54) determine the contents of the prepared opcode high-order data, as in steps C239 to C264, and the determination result is another type. The process corresponding to the case of data (code) is executed and the process proceeds to step C271. If the prepared opcode upper data does not correspond to any kind of data (code), the scenario analysis process is terminated. It has a configuration.

Then, when proceeding to Step C271, the data set at this time is read into the address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the target scenario layer number to determine whether this data is NULL (Step C271). (Step C271; Y), the value of brk is set to 1 (Step C272), and the process proceeds to Step C273. If not NULL (Step C271; N), the process proceeds to Step C273 without executing Step C272.
When the process proceeds to step C273, as described above, the value of brk at that time is read. If the value of brk is 0, the process returns to step C234 to repeat the process from the next step C235, and the value of brk is not 0. Returns to the scenario analysis process.

For this reason, in any of the processes of steps C251 to C264, the value of brk is set to a non-zero value, or NULL is set to the address area of the scenario management area corresponding to the target scenario layer number. Then, the loop processing with steps C234 and C273 as loop ends is completed and the process returns. Until the loop process is completed in this way, the address of the scenario data table area in the scenario management area (the address for designating the scenario table and its row) is appropriately changed, and the loop process is repeated until a series of steps are repeated. The production control is executed.
The above subroutine group (steps C251 to C264) is an example, and changes depending on the specifications of the model.

Here, the notice effect (particularly the parallel notice effect) that is characteristic of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described.
FIG. 55 is a diagram for explaining a notice effect in the present embodiment.
The notice effect is an effect for notifying (notifying or suggesting) a game result or the like. In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 55, the notice effects are as follows: at the start of fluctuation, before reach, during reach (when N reach (normal reach) starts, when SP reach (special reach) develops), and after reach And four timings.

The notice pattern (scenario table) of the notice effect (variation start notice effect) executed at the start of change is selected from “first half notice group 1” as shown in FIG.
Specifically, in the case of the present embodiment, in the notice group lottery process A (step C102) of the first-half variable notice lottery process (see FIG. 50), “first half notice group 1” is set as the notice group for the notice effect at the start of change. Any one of the notice group to which it belongs ("background change notice", "step-up notice A", "step-up notice B") and "no notice" is selected.
Then, when “not notice” is selected in the notice group lottery process A, the notice effect at the start of change is shown in the notice detail lottery process A (step C104) of the notice lottery process during the first half change (see FIG. 50). Any one of the notice patterns (scenario tables) belonging to the notice group selected in the notice group lottery process A is selected as the notice pattern. For example, when “background change notice” is selected in the notice group lottery process A, “scenario table 1: dead tree”, “scenario table 2: green leaves”, “scenario table 3: cherry blossoms in full bloom”, and “scenario table” One of the four is selected.

The notice pattern (scenario table) of the notice effect (pre-reach notice effect) executed before the reach is selected from “first half notice group 2” as shown in FIG.
Specifically, in the case of this embodiment, in the notice group lottery process B (step C106) of the first-half variable notice lottery process (see FIG. 50), it belongs to “first half notice group 2” as the notice group of the pre-reach notice effect. One of the notice group and “no notice” is selected.
Then, when a setting other than “No notice” is selected in the notice group lottery process B, the notice of the pre-reach notice effect is given in the notice detail lottery process B (step C108) of the first-variation notice lottery process (see FIG. 50). Any one of the notice patterns (scenario tables) belonging to the notice group selected in the notice group lottery process B is selected as a pattern.

The notice pattern (scenario table) of the notice effect (execution during reach) executed during the reach is selected from “second half notice group 1” as shown in FIG.
Specifically, in the case of this embodiment, in the notice group lottery process C (step C112) of the latter-half variable notice lottery process (see FIG. 51), it belongs to “second half notice group 1” as the notice group of the reach notice effect during reach. Any one of the notice group ("group notice", "title notice", "object action notice") and "no notice" is selected.
Then, when a notice other than “No notice” is selected in the notice group lottery process C, the advance notice lottery notice during the reach in the notice detail lottery process C (step C114) in the latter half change notice lottery process (see FIG. 51). Any one of the notice patterns (scenario tables) belonging to the notice group selected in the notice group lottery process C is selected as a pattern. For example, when “group notice” is selected in the notice group lottery process C, “scenario table 1: green leaves group”, “scenario table 2: pink petal group”, “scenario table 3: red petal group”, and One of the “scenario table 4: rainbow-colored petals” is selected.
In addition, the advance notice effect during reach is executed at the start of N reach, and when the reach develops to SP reach, it is also executed at the time of SP reach development.

The notice pattern (scenario table) of the notice effect (post-reach notice effect) executed after the reach is selected from “second half notice group 2” as shown in FIG.
Specifically, in the case of the present embodiment, in the notice group lottery process D (step C116) in the latter-half variable notice lottery process (see FIG. 51), it belongs to “second half notice group 2” as a notice group for the notice effect after reach. One of the notice group and “no notice” is selected.
Then, when a notice group other than “no notice” is selected in the notice group lottery process D, in the notice detail lottery process D (step C118) in the latter half change notice lottery process (see FIG. 51), the notice of the notice effect after the reach is reached. Any one of the notice patterns (scenario tables) belonging to the notice group selected in the notice group lottery process D is selected as a pattern.

In this embodiment, when “step-up notice A” or “step-up notice B” is selected as the notice group of the notice notice at the start of change, the pseudo-continuous effect (one decoration based on one special figure starting memory) is selected. In a special figure variation display game, a pseudo-continuous announcement effect for giving notice (implying) the occurrence of a unit change display for displaying a plurality of identification information fluctuating for a predetermined period of time) and a notice (implying) for the occurrence of a reach effect. It is configured to execute a parallel notice effect that performs the reach notice effect in parallel.
Specifically, when “step-up notice A” is selected as the notice group of the notice notice at the start of change, “scenario table 2: SU2 notice” and “scenario table 3: SU3 notice (pseudo-continuation) are selected as the notice pattern. Notice) ”and“ scenario table 4: SU3 notice (reach notice) ”are selected, so that the parallel notice effect that performs the pseudo-continuous notice effect and the reach notice effect in parallel is executed. It is configured.
In addition, when “step-up notice B” is selected as the notice group of the notice notice at the start of change, the parallel notice that performs the pseudo-announce notice effect and the reach notice effect in parallel regardless of the selected notice pattern. It is comprised so that a production may be performed.

On a gaming machine that does not execute the pseudo-announcement effect and the reach-notice effect in parallel, the occurrence of the pseudo-continuous effect is denied when the reach-notification effect is executed, and the reach effect is generated when the pseudo-notice effect is executed. Will be denied. Therefore, for example, if the expectation that the result of the game is a special result (big hit) is higher when the pseudo-continuous effect occurs than when the reach effect occurs, such a game machine executes the reach notice effect. At that time, it was found that the pseudo-continuous notice effect with a higher expectation did not occur, so the interest was sometimes lowered. In addition, when the expectation that the game result is a special result is higher when the pseudo-rendition effect occurs than when the reach effect occurs, the reach notice effect is successful (that is, the reach effect after the reach notice effect) In many cases, the frequency of success of the pseudo-continuous announcement effect (that is, the occurrence of the pseudo-continuous effect after the pseudo-continuous announcement effect) is set lower than the frequency of occurrence of the pseudo-continuous announcement effect. The success frequency of the notice effect + the reach notice effect) is lowered, and the interest in the notice effect may be reduced.
On the other hand, in the case of the present embodiment, since the parallel notice effect that performs the pseudo-continuous notice effect and the reach notice effect in parallel can be executed, the notice with a lower expectation of the pseudo-continuous notice effect and the reach notice effect is provided. It is possible to prevent the interest from deteriorating at the time when the performance is executed. In addition, even if the frequency of success of the other notice effect is set lower than the frequency of success of the one notice effect, these notice effects are executed in parallel. The success frequency of the notice effect (pseudo-continuous notice effect + reach notice effect) is higher than when it is not executed, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest with respect to the notice effect.

In other words, the production control device 300 first notices the occurrence of the first event (in the case of this embodiment, a pseudo-continuous production) (in the case of this embodiment, the pseudo-continuous notice effect), and the first A parallel notice effect is performed in parallel with a second notice effect (reach notice effect in the case of this embodiment) for notifying the occurrence of a second event (reach effect in the case of this embodiment) different from the event. The notice effect execution means to make.
The first event is not limited to the pseudo-rendition effect, and the second event is not limited to the reach effect. The first event and the second event can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate, and may be other effects (for example, a probable latent effect, an accessory action effect, etc.) or a game result. Also good.

Hereinafter, the parallel notice effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 to 63.
56 and 57 are diagrams showing an example of a scenario table used at the time of step-up notice A in the present embodiment. Specifically, FIG. 56 shows a case where “step-up notice A” is selected as the notice group of the notice notice at the start of change, and “scenario table 3: SU3 notice (pseudo continuous notice)” is shown as the notice pattern. FIG. 57 is a notice pattern (scenario table) set when selected, and FIG. 57 shows a case where “step-up notice A” is selected as the notice group for the notice effect at the start of change. Table 4: A notice pattern (scenario table) set when “SU3 notice (reach notice)” is selected.
58 and 59 are diagrams showing an example of the notice effect (step-up notice A) in the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 58 (a), the effect control device 300 starts a step-up notice effect when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the decoration special figure variation display game on the display device 41. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56 and FIG. 57, first, an expectation suggestion image for notifying (suggesting) an expectation that will be a special result (big hit) is displayed ("// 0: SU1 motion registration"). ), And a wait time value (6) is set (“// 1: wait (6 frames)”). Thereby, as shown in FIG.58 (b), an expectation suggestion image is displayed on the middle fluctuation display area of the display apparatus 41. FIG.
When “scenario table 1: SU1 notice” is selected as the notice pattern of the notice effect at the start of change, the expectation degree is not continued as shown in FIG. 58C, for example, without continuing the step-up notice effect. After changing the display mode of the suggestion image, a symbol confirmation (out of line) effect or reach effect is executed.

On the other hand, “scenario table 2: SU2 notice”, “scenario table 3: SU3 notice (pseudo-continuous notice)”, or “scenario table 4: SU3 notice (reach notice)” is selected as the notice pattern of the notice effect at the start of change. If it does, step up notice effect is continued. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56 and FIG. 57, the display of the first pseudo-continuous notice image for notifying the occurrence of the pseudo-continuous production (“// 2: SU2 pseudo-continuous area motion registration”) and the reach production. Display of the first reach notice image in advance of occurrence (“// 3: SU2 reach notice area motion registration”) and set a wait time value (6) (“// 4: wait (6 frames)) ) "). As a result, as shown in FIG. 58 (d), the first pseudo continuous notice image and the first reach notice image are displayed in the left change display area and the right change display area of the display device 41, respectively, and the parallel notice effect is started. Is done.
Then, when “scenario table 2: SU2 notice” is selected as the notice pattern of the notice effect at the start of change, the expected degree is not continued without performing the step-up notice effect, for example, as shown in FIG. After changing the display mode of the suggestion image, a symbol confirmation (out of line) effect, a reach effect, or a pseudo-continuous effect is executed.

On the other hand, when “scenario table 3: SU3 notice (pseudo-continuous notice)” is selected as the notice pattern of the notice effect at the start of change, as shown in FIG. 56, the display mode of the first pseudo-continuous notice image is changed. ("// 5: SU2 pseudo continuous area motion deletion", "// 7: SU3 pseudo continuous area motion registration") and change of the display mode of the first reach notice image ("// 6: SU2 reach notice area motion") Delete ”and“ // 8: SU3 reach notice area motion registration ”) and set a wait time value (6) (“ // 9: wait (6 frames) ”). As a result, as shown in FIG. 58 (f), the colors of the first pseudo-continuous notice image and the first reach notice image change.
Next, as shown in FIG. 56, the display mode of the first pseudo continuous notice image is changed (“// 10: SU3 pseudo continuous area motion deletion”, “// 11: pseudo continuous area selection motion registration”). A wait time value (6) is set (“// 12: wait (6 frames)”). Thereby, as shown in FIG. 58 (f), the first pseudo-continuous notice image is surrounded by a thick frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 56, the degree-of-expectation suggestion image is deleted (“// 13: SU1 motion deletion”) and the first reach notice image is deleted (“// 14: SU3 reach notice area motion registration”). The first pseudo-continuous preview image is deleted (“// 15: pseudo-continuous area selection motion deletion”), and the second pseudo-continuous preview image is displayed for notifying (notifying) that the pseudo-continuous effect has been generated. (“// 16: pseudo continuous area determination motion registration”), a wait time value (6) is set (“// 17: wait (6 frames)”). As a result, as shown in FIG. 59 (a), the expectation suggestion image, the first reach notice image, and the first pseudo-continuous notice image disappear, and the second pseudo-continuous notice image is displayed. Executed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 56, the second pseudo-continuous preview image is deleted (“// 18: pseudo-continuous area determination motion deletion”), and the step-up preliminary announcement effect is ended (“// 19: end”). . Thereby, as shown in FIGS. 59B and 59C, the second pseudo-continuous notice image disappears, the parallel notice effect ends, and the process proceeds to the pseudo-continuous effect.

When “scenario table 4: SU3 notice (reach notice)” is selected as the notice pattern of the notice notice at the start of change, as shown in FIG. 57, the display mode of the first pseudo continuous notice image is changed ( “// 5: SU2 pseudo continuous area motion deletion”, “// 7: SU3 pseudo continuous area motion registration”) and change of display mode of the first reach notice image (“// 6: SU2 reach notice area motion deletion) ”,“ // 8: SU3 reach notice area motion registration ”), and a wait time value (6) is set (“ // 9: wait (6 frames) ”). As a result, as shown in FIG. 58 (g), the colors of the first pseudo-continuous notice image and the first reach notice image change.
Next, as shown in FIG. 57, the display mode of the first reach notice image is changed (“// 10: SU3 reach notice area motion deletion”, “/ 11: reach notice area selection motion registration”), and the weight is changed. A time value (6) is set (“// 12: wait (6 frames)”). Thereby, as shown in FIG. 58 (g), the first reach notice image is surrounded by a thick frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 57, the degree of expectation suggestion image is deleted (“// 13: SU1 motion deletion”) and the first pseudo-continuous preview image is deleted (“// 14: SU3 pseudo-continuous region motion registration”). And delete the first reach notice image ("// 15: delete reach notice area selection motion"), and display the second reach notice image for notifying (notifying) that the reach effect has occurred (" // 16: Reach notice area confirmed motion registration ") and wait time value (6) is set (" / 17: wait (6 frames) "). Thereby, as shown in FIG. 59 (d), the expectation suggestion image, the first reach notice image, and the first pseudo-continuous notice image disappear, and the second reach notice image is displayed, and the reach confirmation effect is executed. The
Next, as shown in FIG. 57, the second reach notice image is deleted (“// 18: delete reach notice area determination motion”), and reach display is displayed (“// 19: reach display motion registration”). The wait time value (6) is set (“// 20: wait (6 frames)”). As a result, as shown in FIG. 59 (e), the second reach notice image disappears, the parallel notice effect ends, and a reach display (in this example, the character “reach”) is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 57, the reach display is deleted (“// 21: reach display motion deletion”), and the step-up notice effect is ended (“// 22: end”). Thereby, as shown in FIG.59 (f), a reach display disappears and it transfers to reach production.

FIG. 60 is a diagram illustrating an example of a scenario table used at the time of step-up notice B in the present embodiment. Specifically, FIG. 60 shows a case where “step-up notice B” is selected as the notice group of the notice notice at the start of change, and “scenario table 3: SU3 notice (pseudo-continuous notice)” is shown as the notice pattern. This is a notice pattern (scenario table) that is set when selected.
FIG. 61 is a diagram showing an example of a notice effect (step-up notice B) in the present embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 61 (a), the effect control device 300 starts a step-up notice effect when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the decorative special figure variation display game on the display device 41. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 60, first, an expectation suggestion image (“// 0: SU1 motion registration”) for notifying an expectation that will be a special result (big hit) is generated, and a pseudo-continuous production is generated. Display of the first pseudo-announcement image (“// 1: SU1 pseudo-continuous area motion registration”) and display of the first reach notice image for announcing the occurrence of the reach effect (“// 2: SU1 reach notice) Region motion registration ") and set a wait time value (6) (" // 3: wait (6 frames) "). Thereby, as shown in FIG. 61 (b), the expectation suggestion image, the first pseudo-continuous notice image, and the first reach are respectively displayed in the middle variation display region, the left variation display region, and the right variation display region of the display device 41. A preview image is displayed and a parallel preview effect is started.
Then, when “scenario table 1: SU1 notice” is selected as the notice pattern of the notice notice at the start of change, the step-up notice effect is not continued, for example, as shown in FIG. After the display mode of the suggestion image, the first pseudo-announcement image, and the first reach notice image is changed, a symbol confirmation (out of line) effect, a reach effect, or a pseudo-continuous effect is executed.

On the other hand, “scenario table 2: SU2 notice”, “scenario table 3: SU3 notice (pseudo-continuous notice)”, or “scenario table 4: SU3 notice (reach notice)” is selected as the notice pattern of the notice effect at the start of change. If it does, step up notice effect is continued. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 60, the display mode of the expectation suggestion image is changed (“// 4: SU1 motion deletion”, “// 7: SU2 motion registration”), and the first pseudo-continuous preview image. Change of the display mode (“// 5: SU1 pseudo continuous area motion deletion”, “// 8: SU2 pseudo continuous area motion registration”), and change of the display mode of the first reach notice image (“// 6: "SU1 reach notice area motion deletion", "// 9: SU2 reach notice area motion registration") and a wait time value (6) is set ("// 10: weight (6 frames)"). Thereby, as shown in FIG. 61 (d), the characters in the degree-of-expectation suggestion image, the first pseudo-continuous notice image, and the first reach notice image change.
Then, when “scenario table 2: SU2 notice” is selected as the notice pattern of the notice effect at the start of change, the expectation degree is not continued as shown in FIG. 61 (e), for example, without continuing the step-up notice effect. After the display mode of the suggestion image, the first pseudo-announcement image, and the first reach notice image is changed, a symbol confirmation (out of line) effect, a reach effect, or a pseudo-continuous effect is executed.

On the other hand, when “scenario table 3: SU3 notice (pseudo-continuous notice)” is selected as the notice pattern of the notice notice effect at the start of change, as shown in FIG. // 11: Delete SU2 motion ”,“ / 14: Register SU3 motion ”) and change the display mode of the first pseudo-continuous preview image (“ // 12: Delete SU2 pseudo-continuous region motion ”,“ // 15 : SU3 pseudo continuous area motion registration "), change of the display mode of the first reach notice image (" // 13: SU2 reach notice area motion deletion "," // 16: SU3 reach notice area motion registration "), To set a wait time value (6) ("// 17: wait (6 frames)"). As a result, as shown in FIG. 61 (f), the characters in the degree-of-expectation suggestion image, the first pseudo-continuous notice image, and the first reach notice image change, and the first pseudo-continuous notice image and the first The color of the reach notice image changes.
Next, as shown in FIG. 60, the display mode of the first pseudo continuous notice image is changed (“// 18: SU3 pseudo continuous area motion deletion”, “/ 19: pseudo continuous area selection motion registration”). A wait time value (6) is set (“// 20: wait (6 frames)”). As a result, as shown in FIG. 61 (f), the first pseudo-continuous notice image is surrounded by a thick frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60, the degree-of-expectation suggestion image is deleted (“// 21: SU3 motion deletion”) and the first reach notice image is deleted (“// 22: SU3 reach notice area motion registration”). , Delete the first pseudo-continuous preview image (“// 23: delete pseudo-continuous area selection motion”), and display the second pseudo-continuous preview image for notifying the occurrence confirmation of the pseudo-continuous effect (“/ / 24: quasi-continuous region finalized motion registration ") and wait time value (6) is set (" // 25: wait (6 frames) "). As a result, the expectation suggestion image, the first reach notice image, and the first pseudo-continuous notice image disappear, and the second pseudo-continuous notice image is displayed, and the pseudo-continuous confirmation effect is executed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 60, the second pseudo-continuous notice image is deleted (“// 26: pseudo-continuous area determination motion deletion”), and the step-up notice effect is ended (“// 27: end”). . As a result, the second pseudo-continuous preview image disappears and the parallel preliminary announcement effect ends, and the process shifts to the pseudo-continuous effect.

Further, when “scenario table 4: SU3 notice (reach notice)” is selected as the notice pattern of the notice notice at the start of change, the display mode of the expectation suggestion image is changed and the first pseudo-continuous notice image is displayed. The wait time value is set by changing the mode and changing the display mode of the first reach notice image. As a result, as shown in FIG. 61 (g), the characters in the expectation degree suggestion image, the first pseudo-continuous notice image, and the first reach notice image change, and the first pseudo-continuous notice image and the first The color of the reach notice image changes.
Next, the display mode of the first reach notice image is changed to set the wait time value. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 61 (g), the first reach notice image is surrounded by a thick frame.

Next, the anticipation suggestion image is deleted, the first pseudo-continuous preview image is deleted, and the first reach notification image is deleted, and the second reach notification image for notifying the confirmation of the occurrence of the reach effect is displayed. Set the wait time value. Thereby, the expectation suggestion image, the first reach notice image, and the first pseudo-continuous notice image disappear, and the second reach notice image is displayed, and the reach confirmation effect is executed.
Next, the second reach notice image is deleted, a reach display is displayed, and a wait time value is set. As a result, the second reach notice image disappears, the parallel notice effect ends, and a reach display is displayed.
Next, the reach display is deleted, and the step-up notice effect is ended. As a result, the reach display disappears and the shift to the reach effect is made.

That is, the first control effect (in the case of the present embodiment, the pseudo-continuous notification effect) and the second notification effect (the present embodiment) executed in parallel by the effect control device 300 (the effect control device 300). In this case, a notice effect selecting means for selecting one of the reach notice effect) is provided.
Further, the effect control device 300 serves as an event generating means for generating an event corresponding to the notice effect selected by the notice effect selecting means (effect control device 300). In the case of the present embodiment, if the selected notice effect is a pseudo notice effect, a pseudo notice effect is generated, and if the selected notice effect is a reach notice effect, a reach effect is generated.

Further, the notice effect executing means (effect control device 300) can display a predetermined notice effect image on the display device 41 as a parallel notice effect, and can execute an effect of changing the display mode of the notice effect image at a predetermined timing. It is.
The notice effect image includes a first notice effect image for notifying the occurrence of the first event (in the case of the present embodiment, a pseudo continuous notice image (first pseudo continuous notice image, second pseudo continuous notice image)), and a second A second notice effect image (in the case of this embodiment, a reach notice image (first reach notice image, second reach notice image)).
In the present embodiment, when “step-up notice A” is selected, the timing of step-up from “step 2 (SU2)” to “step 3 (SU3)”, and from “step 3” The display mode of the notice effect image changes at the timing of shifting to the “confirmation effect (pseudo-continuation effect, reach confirmation effect)”.
When “step-up notice B” is selected, the timing of step-up from “step 1 (SU1)” to “step 2 (SU2)” and “step 2” to “step 3 (SU3)” The display mode of the notice effect image changes to “timing to step up” and “timing to shift from“ step 3 ”to“ confirmed effect (pseudo-continuous effect, reach confirmed effect) ”.

The notice effect execution means (effect control apparatus 300) is the first when the first notice effect (in the case of the present embodiment, the pseudo-continuous notice effect) is selected by the notice effect selection means (effect control device 300). The display mode of one preview effect image (in the case of this embodiment, a pseudo-continuous preview image) is changed at a greater number of times than the display mode of the second preview effect image (in the case of this embodiment, reach notification image), and a preview is made. When the second notice effect (reach notice effect in the case of the present embodiment) is selected by the effect selection means (effect control device 300), the display mode of the second notice effect image is displayed as the first notice effect image. It is changed at more timing than the mode.
Specifically, in the case of the present embodiment, when the pseudo-continuous notice effect is selected, the reach notice image does not change (that is, the first reach notice image is changed from the first reach notice image when the pseudo-continuous notice effect is shifted to). Although it disappears without changing to the two-reach notice image, the pseudo-continuous notice image changes (that is, the first pseudo-continuous notice image changes to the second pseudo-continuous notice image). Therefore, when the pseudo-continuous notice effect is selected, the display form of the pseudo-continuous notice image changes at a higher timing than the display form of the reach notice image. Cheap.
In addition, when the reach notice effect is selected, the pseudo continuous notice image does not change when shifting to the reach confirmation effect (that is, the first pseudo continuous notice image does not change to the second pseudo continuous notice image). But the reach notice image changes (that is, the first reach notice image changes to the second reach notice image). Therefore, when the reach notice effect is selected, the display form of the reach notice image changes at a higher timing than the display form of the pseudo-continuous notice image, so it is easy to understand which notice effect is selected. .

In the case of this embodiment, the expectation degree suggestion image appearing in the step-up notice A is noticed (suggested) as to the big hit expectation degree by the color of the image, as shown in FIG.
As shown in FIG. 58, it is possible to notify the jackpot expectation degree by the color of the expectation degree suggestive image appearing in “Step 1 (SU1)”, or at the time of step-up (ie, “ When stepping up from "Step 1" to "Step 2 (SU2)" or "Stepping up from" Step 2 "to" Step 3 (SU3) "), change the color of the expectation suggestion image It is also possible to configure so that the big hit expectation degree is notified in advance by the color of the final expectation degree suggestion image.
Moreover, you may make it display the character (for example, "one more time!" Etc.) which alert | reports the remaining number of step-ups in an expectation degree suggestion image. As a result, the expectation degree suggestion image can not only notify the big hit expectation degree but also notify the remaining number of step-ups.

In the case of the present embodiment, the expectation degree suggestion image appearing in the step-up notice B is informed of the big hit expectation degree by characters in the image as shown in FIG. 62 (b).
Note that it is possible to notify the jackpot expectation degree by the characters in the expectation degree suggestion image appearing in “Step 1 (SU1)”. As shown in FIG. It is also possible to change the character in the suggestion image and notify the big hit expectation degree by the character in the final expectation degree suggestion image (in the case of FIG. 61, “Heat!”).
Moreover, you may make it display the character which alert | reports the remaining number of step-ups in an expectation degree suggestion image.

FIG. 63 is a timing chart for explaining an example of the operation during the step-up notice effect in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
Special figure fluctuation display game (that is, special figure fluctuation display game for variably displaying special symbols on special figure 1 display 51 or special figure 2 display 52 and decorative special figure variability display for variably displaying decorative symbols on display device 41 When a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of (game), a step-up notice effect is started.

When step-up notice A (SU notice A) is selected, an image is displayed only in the middle fluctuation display area (SU first area) of the display device 41 at the stage of “step 1”. In the case of the present embodiment, an expectation level suggestion image is displayed in the middle fluctuation display area, and the display mode of the expectation level suggestion image does not change even when stepping up.
Next, at the timing of stepping up from “step 1” to “step 2”, a pseudo continuous notice image (specifically, the first pseudo continuous notice image is displayed in the left variation display area (SU second area) of the display device 41. ) And a reach notice image (specifically, a first reach notice image) are displayed in the right variation display area (SU third area) of the display device 41.
Next, at the timing of stepping up from “Step 2” to “Step 3”, the display mode of the pseudo continuous announcement image displayed in the left variation display area (SU second area) of the display device 41 and the display device 41 are displayed. The display mode of the reach notice image displayed in the right fluctuation display area (SU third area) changes.

Next, a suggestion content notification is performed to notify (notify) the occurrence of the pseudo-continuous effect or the reach effect.
Specifically, in the case of notifying the occurrence of the pseudo-continuous production, as shown in FIG. 63, the expectation level suggestion image displayed in the middle fluctuation display area (SU first area) of the display device 41, the display The reach notice image displayed in the right change display area (SU third area) of the device 41 is deleted, and the pseudo continuous notice displayed in the left change display area (SU second area) of the display device 41 is deleted. The display mode of the image changes (specifically, the first pseudo continuous notice image changes to the second pseudo continuous notice image). Thereby, the display (suggestion content notification) of the second pseudo-continuous notice image for notifying the occurrence confirmation of the pseudo-continuous effect is performed, and the process proceeds to the pseudo-continuous effect.
Further, when the occurrence of the reach effect is predicted, the expectation suggestion image displayed in the middle fluctuation display area (SU first area) of the display device 41 and the left fluctuation display area (SU second of the display device 41). And the display mode of the reach notice image displayed in the right variation display area (SU third area) of the display device 41 is changed (specifically, the pseudo continuous notice image displayed in the area) is deleted (specifically, the area). , Change from the first reach notice image to the second reach notice image). Thereby, the display of the second reach notice image for notifying the confirmation of the occurrence of the reach effect (suggested content notification) is performed, and the process shifts to the reach effect.

In addition, when step-up notice B (SU notice B) is selected, an expectation-indicating image is displayed in the middle fluctuation display area (SU first area) of the display device 41 at the stage of “step 1”. The pseudo continuous notice image (specifically, the first pseudo continuous notice image) is displayed in the left fluctuation display area (SU second area) of the display device 41, and the right fluctuation display area (SU third area) of the display device 41 is displayed. A reach notice image (specifically, a first reach notice image) is displayed.
Subsequently, at the timing of stepping up from “Step 1” to “Step 2”, the display mode of the expectation-suggesting image displayed in the middle fluctuation display area (SU first area) of the display device 41, and the display device 41 Display mode of the pseudo continuous announcement image displayed in the left fluctuation display area (SU second area) and the display aspect of the reach announcement image displayed in the right fluctuation display area (SU third area) of the display device 41 And change.
Next, at the timing of stepping up from “Step 2” to “Step 3”, the display mode of the expected degree suggestion image displayed in the middle fluctuation display area (SU first area) of the display device 41, and the display device 41 Display mode of the pseudo continuous announcement image displayed in the left fluctuation display area (SU second area) and the display aspect of the reach announcement image displayed in the right fluctuation display area (SU third area) of the display device 41 And change.

Next, a suggestion content notification is performed to notify (notify) the occurrence of the pseudo-continuous effect or the reach effect.
Specifically, in the case of notifying the occurrence of the pseudo-continuous production, the expectation suggestion image displayed in the middle fluctuation display area (SU first area) of the display device 41 and the right fluctuation display area of the display device 41. The reach notice image displayed in the (SU third area) is deleted, and the display mode of the pseudo continuous notice image displayed in the left variation display area (SU second area) of the display device 41 changes ( Specifically, the first pseudo continuous notice image changes to the second pseudo continuous notice image). Thereby, the display (suggestion content notification) of the second pseudo-continuous notice image for notifying the occurrence confirmation of the pseudo-continuous effect is performed, and the process proceeds to the pseudo-continuous effect.
Further, in the case of giving notice of the occurrence of the reach effect, as shown in FIG. 63, the expectation suggestion image displayed in the middle variation display area (SU first area) of the display device 41 and the left of the display device 41 are displayed. The display mode of the reach notice image displayed in the right change display area (SU third area) of the display device 41 after the pseudo continuous notice image displayed in the change display area (SU second area) is deleted. Changes (specifically, changes from the first reach notice image to the second reach notice image). Thereby, the display of the second reach notice image for notifying the confirmation of the occurrence of the reach effect (suggested content notification) is performed, and the process shifts to the reach effect.

[Pre-reading design command processing]
Next, details of the look-ahead design command processing (step C64) in the above-described received command analysis processing will be described.
As shown in FIG. 64, in the look-ahead design command processing, the effect control device 300 first determines whether the latest hold information is special figure 1 hold (step C301). That is, it is determined whether the latest prefetched symbol command received this time relates to the first start memory.

When the latest hold information is special figure 1 hold (step C301; Y), that is, when it relates to the first start memory, the latest prefetched symbol command received this time is the special figure corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number. 1 Save in the pre-read symbol command area (step C302), set the pre-read variation command reception wait flag (step C304), and end the pre-read symbol command processing.
On the other hand, when the latest hold information is not special figure 1 hold (step C301; N), that is, related to the second start memory, the latest prefetched symbol command received this time is the special figure corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number. 2 is saved in the prefetch symbol command area (step C303), the prefetch variation command reception waiting flag is set (step C304), and the prefetch symbol command processing is terminated.
The reason why the prefetch variation command reception waiting flag is set in step C304 is that the prefetch symbol command and the prefetch variation command (prefetch variation pattern command) are set (paired).

[Read-ahead variation command processing]
Next, details of the look-ahead variation command processing (step C66) in the above-described received command analysis processing will be described.
As shown in FIG. 65, in the prefetch variation command processing, the effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the prefetch variation command is waiting to be received (step C401). Here, when there is a prefetch fluctuation command reception wait flag set in the above-mentioned prefetch symbol system command processing, it is determined that reception is awaiting.
If the prefetch fluctuation command reception is not awaited (step C401; N), the prefetch fluctuation command processing is terminated.
On the other hand, if the prefetch fluctuation command reception wait is in progress (step C401; Y), the prefetch fluctuation command reception wait flag is cleared (step C402).

Thereafter, in the processes of steps C403 to C406, a process of converting the prefetch fluctuation command (prefetch fluctuation pattern command) received from the game control apparatus 100 so as to be convenient for the process in the effect control apparatus 300 is performed.
First, a process (step C403) for setting a prefetch variation MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of retained symbols in the latest pending information is performed (step C403), and the special type of start memory corresponding to the prefetch variation command received this time (see FIG. 1). Alternatively, a MODE conversion table for converting the MODE is set according to the information of the special figure 2) and the current number of reservations of the special figure type.
Next, with reference to the set MODE conversion table, the sub-prefetch variation command MODE corresponding to the prefetch variation command MODE is acquired (step C404).
Next, the prefetching variation ACT conversion table is set (step C405), and the sub-internal prefetching conversion command ACT corresponding to the ACT of the prefetching variation command is acquired (step C406).

The MODE contains information on the first half fluctuation, but since the contents and time of the first half fluctuation set based on this MODE vary depending on the number of holds at the time of judgment, the judgment at the time of prior judgment and the start of the special figure fluctuation display game The determination result may differ depending on the determination of time.
Therefore, in order to enable easy and reliable processing of the pre-reading notice effect without being influenced by the number of holds at the time of determination, MODE is converted in a conversion mode according to the current number of holds, and at the time of determination It can be handled in common regardless of the number of holds.
For example, there is a possibility of a short first fluctuation time depending on the hold situation without reach and a short first fluctuation time depending on the hold situation. It is converted into MODE divided according to matters to be considered in the setting of the prefetching notice effect, so that the process of the prefetching notice effect can be performed easily and reliably.

In addition, the ACT includes information on the latter half fluctuation such as the presence / absence of reach and the type of reach. The content of the latter-half fluctuation set based on this ACT does not change depending on the number of holds at the time of determination.
However, for example, even in the case of normal reach, there are various aspects of the same type of reach, such as the case where the final stop symbol is set to the stop that stops one frame before the reach symbol, the stop that stops one frame ahead, and the winning case. Since the ACT corresponding to each of these is set, the range of values is wide.
For this reason, the number of ACTs corresponding to the reach of the same system is converted to the same ACT, thereby reducing the number and reducing the processing load such as the check in the pre-reading notice effect processing.

Next, it is determined whether both MODE and ACT after conversion are other than 0 (step C407).
If neither MODE nor ACT after conversion is other than 0 (step C407; N), since the command value is abnormal, the prefetching variation command processing is terminated.
On the other hand, if the converted MODE and ACT are both other than 0 (step C407; Y), the converted command is the latest hold information and the prefetch change command area corresponding to the number of holds (see FIG. 2 is saved (step C408), and a prefetch command consistency check process (step C409) is performed to determine whether the combination of MODE and ACT (command combination) is normal.

As a result of the prefetch command matching check process (step C409), if the command combination is not normal (step C410; N), the prefetch fluctuation command process is terminated.
On the other hand, if the command combination is normal (step C410; Y), a prefetch lottery process (step C411) for lottery execution of the prefetch notice effect is performed to determine whether a prefetch notice effect is generated (step C412).

If no prefetching notice effect is generated (step C412; N), the prefetching variation command processing is terminated.
On the other hand, when the prefetching notice effect is generated (step C412; Y), is the prefetching notice effect that is generated (that is, the prefetching notice effect selected in the prefetch lottery process (step C411)) immediately started? Is determined (step C413). The effect that starts immediately is, for example, a pre-reading notice effect that changes the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display 83 displayed on the display device 41 from the present time. An effect that does not start immediately is a pre-reading notice effect that is performed during the execution of a special figure fluctuation display game, which produces a specific effect or reach state continuously over a plurality of special figure fluctuation display games. For example, an effect of giving a notice by a character appearing during the display, a pre-reading notice effect of changing the display mode of the decoration special figure start memory display 83 at a timing later than the current time, and the like. The timing of starting the execution of such an effect that does not start immediately is that the special figure fluctuation display game is ended if the special figure fluctuation display game is being executed, and the execution of the next special figure fluctuation display game is started. Applicable timing.

If the effect is not to start immediately (step C413; N), the prefetch fluctuation command processing is terminated. In this case, a notice is set at the start of a special figure change display game that executes a prefetch notice effect.
On the other hand, if the effect is to start immediately (step C413; Y), a scenario layer number corresponding to the selected prefetching notice effect is prepared (step C414), and the scenario data table corresponding to the selected prefetching notice effect is prepared. Are prepared (step C415), and the prefetch fluctuation command processing is terminated.

[Pre-fetch lottery processing]
Next, the details of the prefetch lottery process (step C411) in the prefetch fluctuation command processing described above will be described.
As shown in FIG. 66, in the prefetch lottery process, the effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the prefetch lottery can be executed (step C421). The case where the prefetch lottery can be executed is, for example, a case where another prefetch notice effect is not being executed. This condition can be arbitrarily set.

  When the prefetch lottery can be executed (step C421; Y), it is determined whether the latest hold information (hold information to be processed) is the special figure 2 hold (second start memory) (step C422). If it is in FIG. 2 hold (step C422; Y), it is determined whether or not it is in the effect mode in which the pre-reading notice effect can be produced in the special figure fluctuation display game based on the special figure 2 hold (step C423). In the present embodiment, the effect mode in which the pre-reading notice effect is possible is an effect mode in the short-time state.

In the special figure variation display game based on the special figure 2 suspension, when the pre-reading notice effect is not possible (step C423; N), the prefetch lottery process is terminated.
On the other hand, when the special mode fluctuation display game based on special figure 2 hold is in the production mode capable of pre-reading notice effect (step C423; Y), or when the latest hold information (hold information to be processed) is not special figure 2 hold (Step C422; N) clears all the prefetch control areas to zero (Step C424), and prefetches all pending precautions of the latest pending special figure (the same type as the target pending (Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2)) A variation command is loaded (step C425).

Next, a prefetch change combination confirmation process (step C426) for confirming whether or not the content of the variation based on each hold (special figure variation display game) can execute the prefetch notice effect is performed from the prefetch result of each hold, and the prefetch notice It is determined whether it is a combination of fluctuations that can produce an effect (step C427).
If it is not a combination of changes that can perform the pre-reading notice effect (step C427; N), the pre-read lottery process is terminated. When it is not a combination of fluctuations that can perform a pre-reading notice effect, a hold that is digested before a hold subject to processing is digested before a reach effect with a higher degree of reliability or a hold subject to processing This is the case when a big hit is made by holding, or when there is a possibility that an inconsistency in the production may occur if a pre-reading notice production is performed. This condition can be arbitrarily set.

  On the other hand, if it is a combination of fluctuations that can perform the pre-reading notice effect (step C427; Y), the pre-read lottery group address table corresponding to the pre-read symbol command of the latest hold (hold for processing) is acquired (step C428). Based on the acquired prefetch lottery group address table, a prefetch lottery group table corresponding to the ACT of the prefetch variation command is acquired (step C429). The case of a combination of fluctuations that can perform the pre-reading notice effect is a case where all the holds that are digested before the hold to be processed are shifted without reach.

  The look-ahead symbol command referred to in step C428 includes a determination result that can identify the result and the probability state that brings about the result, that is, “exceeding either low probability state or high probability state”, “low probability state and high probability state” Either of them is a big hit or a big hit only in a high probability state. Based on this information, the prefetch lottery group address table is acquired.

In the prefetch lottery group table acquired based on the prefetch lottery group address table in step C429, the type of prefetch notice effect that can be executed and the selection probability are defined. The table selected in the case of “big hit only in the game” does not include a specific advance notice effect that is an effect for definite notification of the big hit.
This is because the second start memory is generated when the pre-reading notice effect for the first start memory is performed, and a big hit is generated by the second start memory, and the probability state is changed from the high probability state to the low probability state. This is because it may change. In other words, the first start memory that is “big hit only in a high probability state” was a big hit at the start of the pre-reading notice effect, but it would be lost due to a change in the probability state, so the big hit is confirmed. The specific advance notice effect, which is an effect to be notified, is not performed.

Next, it is determined whether the acquired address is undefined data (step C430), and if it is not undefined data (step C430; N), random number lottery processing for lottery of presence / absence of pre-reading notice effect and type of effect (Pre-reading notice lottery process) is performed (step C431).
As a result of the random number lottery process (step C431), when the prefetch notice effect is not performed (step C432; N), the prefetch lottery process ends. Even when the acquired address is undefined data (step C430; Y), the prefetching notice effect is not performed (step C432; N), and the prefetching lottery process is terminated.
On the other hand, when performing the pre-reading notice effect (step C432; Y), the number of pre-reading effects that is the number of times of execution of the special figure variable display game that executes the pre-reading notice effect based on the latest hold information (the hold information to be processed) is set. (Step C433), the execution flag of the determined prefetch notice effect is set (Step C434), and the prefetch lottery process is terminated.

If the prefetch lottery cannot be executed (step C421; N), it is determined whether the latest hold information (hold information to be processed) is special figure 2 hold (second start memory) (step C435). If the special figure 2 is not on hold (step C435; N), the prefetch lottery process is terminated.
On the other hand, when the special figure 2 is on hold (step C435; Y), it is determined whether a pre-reading notice effect for performing an interruption effect in the special figure fluctuation display game based on the special figure 2 hold is being executed (step C436). The prefetching notice effect for performing the interrupt effect in the special figure fluctuation display game based on the special figure 2 hold is a prefetching notice effect based on the special figure 1 hold (first start memory), and the special figure 2 hold executed by interruption. This is a pre-reading notice effect capable of executing an effect related to the special figure variation display game based on the game.

When the pre-reading notice effect for performing the interrupt effect in the special figure variation display game based on the special figure 2 suspension is not being executed (step C436; N), the pre-read lottery process is terminated.
On the other hand, when the pre-reading notice effect for performing the interrupt effect in the special figure fluctuation display game based on the special figure 2 hold is being executed (step C436; Y), the pre-reading control area corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is being executed. Is saved (step C437), and the prefetch lottery process is terminated. In step C437, an effect related to the pre-reading notice effect being executed which is to be performed in the special figure fluctuation display game based on the special figure 2 suspension is set. As such an effect, for example, an effect is set so as not to cause a contradiction in the prefetching notice effect being executed.

  Next, a time notification effect that suggests or notifies the occurrence time of a specific event in the special figure variation display game based on a specific start memory will be described. This time notification effect is one of the pre-reading notice effects, and here it is performed by changing the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display 83.

  FIG. 67 shows a display example on the display device 41. In the center of the display area, there is provided a decoration special figure fluctuation display game display section 81 for displaying a decoration special figure fluctuation display game. Here, the decorative special figure variation display game is displayed by stopping and displaying the identification information in each of the left, middle and right variation display areas.

  At the bottom of the display area, a start memory display area 82 for displaying a decorative special figure start memory display 83 corresponding to the first start memory and the second start memory is provided. In the start memory display area 82, the special display start memory display 83 corresponding to the first start memory is displayed in a row in the lower row, and the special display start memory display 83 corresponding to the second start memory is displayed in the upper row. Are displayed side by side. The decorative special figure start memory display 83 is arranged in the order of storage in a one-to-one correspondence with the start memory, and in the column corresponding to each special figure, the leftmost decorative special figure start memory display 83 is stored first. It moves to the left every time it is digested. In this case, there are four start memories in the first start memory and the second start memory. The display form of the decoration special figure start memory display 83 in the start memory display area 82 is not limited to this. For example, a part of the decoration special figure start memory display 83 corresponding to the first start memory and the second start memory are supported. The decorative special figure start memory display 83 to be displayed may be displayed so as to overlap each other.

  At the lower left of the display area and to the left of the start memory display area 82, a changing memory display unit 84 for displaying information related to the start memory corresponding to the currently executed special figure changing display game is provided. At the time of starting the special figure fluctuation display game, the decorative special figure start memory display 83 corresponding to the special figure fluctuation display game is transferred to the in-fluctuation memory display section 84, and the fluctuation changed from the decorative special figure start memory display 83. A middle storage display 85 is displayed. According to the display mode of the during-change memory display 85, the result of the special figure change display game to be executed, the change pattern, etc. are suggested or notified.

  The display control device 300 controls these display controls. In other words, the effect control device 300 serves as a start memory display control means for displaying the decorative special figure start memory display 83 corresponding to the start memory stored in the start memory means (game control device 100) on the display device 41. Further, the effect control device 300 serves as a changing memory display control means for displaying the decoration special figure start memory display 83 corresponding to the currently executed special map change display game on the display device 41 as the changing memory display 85.

  FIG. 68 shows an example of the time notification effect. Here, as shown in FIG. 68 (a), the special FIG. 1 variable display game is being executed with four first start memories. When the predetermined timing is reached, a time notification effect is started, and a timer display 86 is displayed on the decorative special figure start memory display 83 corresponding to the start memory to be notified as shown in FIG. 68 (b).

  The timer display 86 indicates the time from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the occurrence of a specific event in the special figure fluctuation display game based on the start memory. Here, the time is indicated by “minute: second”. For example, in FIG. 68B, the time value of the timer display 86 is 3:00. In other words, it indicates that a specific event occurs 3 minutes after the start of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory to be notified. It should be noted that at this point in time, the specific event is not notified, but may be notified.

  The time value of the timer display 86 is a countdown display in which the time value is decreased in synchronization with a decrease in the time until the occurrence of a specific event with the passage of time, and the time value is 0 (“00:00”). A specific event occurs at the timing. Here, a countdown display for decreasing the time value in units of 1 second is performed. At the time of FIG. 68 (b), since the special figure change display game to be notified is not started, the timer display 86 is stopped without being counted down.

  Thereafter, the special figure variation display game being executed is terminated as shown in FIG. 68 (c), and the next special figure variation display game is started as shown in FIG. 68 (d). With the start of this new special figure fluctuation display game, the decoration special figure start memory display 83 located at the left end shifts to the changing memory display section 84, and the other special figure special start memory display 83 is adjacent to the left. Move to the position. At this time, the timer display 86 also moves in accordance with the movement of the target decoration special figure start memory display 83.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 68 (e), the running special map fluctuation display game is ended, and as shown in FIG. 68 (f), the special map fluctuation display game that is the target of the time notification effect is started. . With the start of the special figure variation display game, the decoration special figure start memory display 83 located at the left end shifts to the changing memory display section 84, and the other special figure special display start memory display 83 is located on the left side. Migrate to At this time, the timer display 86 also moves to the changing memory display unit 84 in accordance with the movement of the target decoration special figure start memory display 83, and is displayed on the changing memory display 85 changed from the decoration special figure start storage display 83. .

  Further, the countdown display is started in the timer display 86 from the start of the target special figure change display game, and the time value of the timer display 86 decreases as the special figure change display game progresses as shown in FIG. . Then, as shown in FIG. 68 (h), when the time value of the timer display 86 becomes 0, a specific event occurs. Here, the notification that the reach production has been developed is a specific event, and the occurrence time is reported.

  By performing such a time announcement effect, it is possible to predict the content of the effect and the possibility of a special result from the time until the occurrence of a specific event, and it is possible to have a sense of expectation for the special figure fluctuation display game Can enhance the fun of gaming. That is, if the time value of the timer display 86 is large, it can be expected that an effect with a high degree of expectation (such as a long reach) will be performed after this, and it can be predicted that there is a high possibility of a special result. Furthermore, by performing the countdown display, it is possible to gradually increase the player's expectation and to enhance the interest until the occurrence of a specific event.

[Notice time calculation process]
FIG. 69 shows a process in a notice time calculation process (see step C264, FIG. 54) for performing the time notification effect as described above. When the start of the time notification effect is determined, a scenario table for the time notification effect is set. In this scenario table, a notice time calculation code is set as an operation code, and a notice time calculation process is performed based on this.

  In the advance notice time calculation process, first, a scheduled time from the start of the advance notice pending game to the occurrence of a specific event is calculated and set as the notice time 1 (step C501). This scheduled time can be calculated from the information of the variation pattern included in the prefetch information about the special figure variation display game based on the start memory to be notified. Then, the time value corresponding to the calculated notification time 1 is saved in the display area (step C502). As a result, the time value is displayed on the timer display 86.

  Thereafter, the remaining time of the current fluctuation and the scheduled fluctuation time (including the display time after the fluctuation) of each hold other than the notice target hold are added to obtain a standby time 1 (step C503). The remaining time of the current variation is the remaining variation time of the special figure variation display game currently being executed. In addition, each hold other than the notice target hold is each start memory that is digested before the start memory to be the notice target. The scheduled variation time is a variation time calculated from variation pattern information included in the prefetch information for each start memory. Further, the display time after the change is a time for stopping and displaying the result. Here, all these times are added to obtain the standby time 1. That is, the waiting time 1 is the time from the present time until the special figure variation display game based on the start memory to be notified is started.

  Then, the waiting time 1 is saved in the variable wait timer area (step C504), and the notice time calculation process is terminated. Through the above processing, the state in which the notification time 1 is displayed as the time value of the timer display 86 is maintained until the special-figure display game to be notified is started.

  Note that the notification time 1 is a scheduled time because the variation pattern is not fixed at the time of performing the notice time calculation process. Similarly, the waiting time 1 is also the scheduled time because the changing pattern is not determined except for the remaining changing time of the currently-executed special figure changing display game. This is because the selected variation pattern may differ depending on the starting memory number at the start.

  As these scheduled times, the shortest or longest fluctuation time among the fluctuation times that can be set may be set based on the pre-read information obtained at the time of performing the notice time calculation process, or the average value may be You may make it set. Alternatively, a rough value may be set by setting a specified value regardless of the variable time that can be set. If the variation pattern is determined with the start of the special map variation display game based on each start memory and a difference from the scheduled time occurs, the time value set in accordance with this is set at a predetermined timing. Increase or decrease. That is, the effect control device 300 is provided with time adjusting means for calculating a difference between the time set as the scheduled time and the actual time.

  Of course, if the variation pattern is fixed at the time of performing the notice time calculation process, the fixed time can be set based on this. For example, the game control device 100 determines to perform the time notification effect, determines the change pattern for all the special figure change display games related to the time notification effect, and notifies the result control device 300 of the result. Thus, it is possible to set an accurate time value.

  Then, in the scenario table for the time notification effect, when the variable wait timer set with the waiting time 1 is timed up, the notification time 1 is newly saved in the variable wait timer area and the time measurement is started. Is set to Further, the display area is also set so that the value is subtracted in synchronization with the time measurement in the variable wait timer area, and the countdown display of the time value displayed on the timer display 86 is performed.

  The value of the variable wait timer area is set to be updated to an accurate time value until the occurrence of a specific event at a predetermined timing. The time value of the timer display 86 is set so as to be updated at a timing necessary for performing various effect displays described later. After that, when the variable wait timer set with the notification time 1 is timed up, the timer display 86 is ended and the time notification effect is ended.

  That is, the effect control device 300 serves as a calculation means for calculating the time until the occurrence of a specific event in the variable display game, and also serves as a time display means for displaying the calculation result by the calculation means as the timer display 86. Further, the effect control device 300 can execute a time notification effect that suggests or notifies the occurrence time of a specific event in a variable display game based on a specific start memory based on the determination result of the prior determination means (game control device 100). It serves as a means for notifying the occurrence time.

  As specific events, in addition to the development of reach production as described above, the occurrence of a reach state and the derivation of the result mode, the temporary stop of identification information in the decoration special figure variation display game, the start of the production, the character of the production in the production Appearance, occurrence of cut-in effects, branching to two or more different effects, opening of the normal variable prize winning device 37, start timing of start memory display change notice for notifying the prefetch result by the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display 83, Any operation related to the game, such as the operation timing of the effect button 25 by the player, may be used. Further, the type or content of a specific event, the high possibility of being a big hit (expected degree) when the specific event occurs, or the like is suggested by the display form such as the background, shape, and operation of the timer display 86 You may make it alert | report.

  In view of the above, the variation display device (display device 41) capable of displaying the variation display game based on the inflow of game balls into the start area (the start winning opening 36, the normal variation prize winning device 37) is provided. In a gaming machine capable of executing a special game that gives a predetermined game value to a player when a special result is obtained, a start memory that becomes a right to execute a variable display game based on the inflow of game balls to the start area is stored. Start storage means (game control device 100) capable of storing up to a predetermined upper limit number, and prior determination means for determining information on the variable display game based on the start storage stored in the start storage means before the execution of the variable display game (Game control device 100) and a time notification effect that suggests or notifies the occurrence time of a specific event in a variable display game based on a specific start memory based on the determination result of the prior determination means. A row can be generated timing notification means (effect control device 300), and further comprising a.

  The start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display 83) corresponding to the start memory stored in the start memory means is configured to be displayed on the variable display device, and the occurrence time notification means corresponds to a specific start memory. The time notification effect is performed in the start memory display to be performed.

  The start memory display corresponding to the running variable display game is configured to be displayed on the variable display device as the changing memory display 85, and the occurrence time notification means performs the time notification effect on the changing memory display 85. It becomes that.

  Further, the occurrence time notification means displays the remaining time until the occurrence of the specific event in the variable display game based on the specific start memory as the time notification effect.

  FIG. 70 shows an example of the effect for adjusting the time value of the timer display 86 in the time notification effect. In the example shown in FIG. 70A, the time value of the timer display 86 increases as the character 87 performs a display that works on the timer display 86. An effect that decreases the time value of the timer display 86 can also be performed with the same effect. In addition to the case where the timer display 86 is displayed in the changing memory display 85 as shown in FIG. 70 (a), the timer display 86 is displayed in the decorative special chart start storage display 83 as shown in FIG. 70 (b). A similar effect can also be performed when displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 70 (c), the countdown display on the timer display 86 is stopped as the character 87 performs a display that works on the timer display 86. As a result, the same effect as increasing the time value of the timer display 86 is produced.

  It should be noted that the addition or subtraction may be performed after the notice display for notifying the addition or subtraction value of the time value, and the addition or subtraction may or may not be performed according to the notice display. . When there is an advance notice display as an advance notice display, it is expected that the addition will be performed, and when there is an advance notice display of the subtraction, it is expected that the subtraction will not be performed. Can be increased.

  Although the timing of addition or subtraction can be set arbitrarily, it is preferable to perform addition before the time value on the timer display 86 becomes zero. Further, it is preferable to perform subtraction so that the time value of the timer display 86 does not become 0 or less. Further, addition or subtraction may be performed periodically, such as every time the start-up memory is digested. In such a case, the more the number of start memories digested before the start-up memory to be notified, the more opportunities for addition and subtraction, and the more opportunities for attention to the time notification effect can be made. Furthermore, when determining the start timing of the time notification effect, it is determined in consideration of how many start memories are digested before the start memory to be notified. For example, with respect to the start memory that is likely to be a big hit, the start memory to be digested before the start memory is increased, and the player's sense of expectation is increased by increasing the number of additions and the added value. Can be increased.

  Further, as a method of addition or subtraction, not only the time value of the timer display 86 is simply changed, but also a display corresponding to addition or subtraction by changing the speed of the countdown display on the timer display 86 over a predetermined period. good. In the display corresponding to addition, the speed of the countdown display on the timer display 86 is decreased (for example, 1 is subtracted from the value corresponding to the number of seconds every 2 seconds), and in the display corresponding to subtraction, the speed of the countdown display on the timer display 86 is displayed. (For example, 1 is subtracted from the value corresponding to the number of seconds every 0.5 seconds). Also, as shown in FIGS. 70 (a) and 70 (b), in combination with simply changing the time value of the timer display 86, a pattern for increasing the speed of the countdown display after simply adding a large time value, It is also possible to set a pattern for reducing the speed of the countdown display after simply adding a small time value.

  The effect of adjusting the time value of the timer display 86 in this way is performed when there is a difference between the scheduled time set as the time value of the timer display 86 at the start of the time notification effect and the actual execution time. At the start of the production, provisional notification is intentionally displayed on the timer display 86 for a time shorter than the scheduled time, and the production is performed at a predetermined timing to change the time value of the timer display 86 to a value corresponding to the actual execution time. It can also be applied. Although this predetermined timing can be set arbitrarily, for example, it is set as the operation timing of the effect button 25 by the player.

  It should be noted that the temporary notification state may be further shifted to the provisional notification state, and a value corresponding to the actual execution time may be obtained by changing the time value of the timer display 86 in a plurality of stages. In the provisional notification, in addition to a time shorter than the scheduled time, a time longer than the scheduled time may be used. Further, when provisional notification is performed, provisional notification may be performed by displaying a specified value unrelated to the scheduled time.

  In addition, the temporary notification is not limited to the display of the temporary time value on the timer display 86, but a display indicating that the value according to the scheduled time or the actual execution time can be displayed through the change of the production mode. It may be set as temporary notification by performing. For example, changing the color, form, and operation of the decoration special figure start memory display 83, displaying characters, characters, figures, etc., and indicating that the value of the timer display 86 is undecided (“ ------------------ "in preparation".

  From the above, the generation time notification means (production control device 300) can notify the remaining time until the occurrence of the specific event in the variable display game based on the specific start memory as the time notification effect. In the production, temporary notification is given to notify a time different from the remaining time until the occurrence of the specific event, and the operation means (production button 25, touch panel 29) is operated during execution of the temporary notification. It is possible to change to notification of the remaining time until the occurrence of the event.

  FIG. 71 also shows an example of the effect for adjusting the time value of the timer display 86 in the time notification effect. In this effect, the timer display 86 changes to a character 87 as shown in FIG. 71 (a), the character 87 explodes as shown in 71 (b), and debris is scattered as shown in FIG. 71 (c). It will be in the state. Thereafter, the fragments gather as shown in FIG. 71 (d), and the display returns to the timer display 86 as shown in FIG. 71 (e). At this time, the time value of the timer display 86 is in a state increased from the state of FIG.

  That is, the time value of the timer display 86 is changed by deleting the timer display 86 and displaying it again. The changed value may be larger or smaller than the original value. However, when the time value of the timer display 86 is not changed, the time value is reduced by the amount of the production time from FIG. 71 (a) to FIG. 71 (e). Further, the contents of the production from FIG. 71 (a) to FIG. 71 (e) are varied in accordance with the increase or decrease of the time value before and after the change and the amount of change, and suggest or notify what kind of change will occur. You may do it.

  When returning to the timer display 86 as shown in FIG. 71 (e), the timer display 86 is moved to another decoration special figure start memory display 83 instead of returning to the original special figure start memory display 83. May be. In this case, the timer display 86 is performed with the decorative special figure start memory display 83 corresponding to the start memory that is not the subject of notice in the stage of FIG. 71 (a). In addition, the time notification effect may end without returning to the timer display 86 from the state of FIG.

  FIG. 72 shows an example of the effect at the start of the time notification effect. When the game is in progress with the start-up memory as shown in FIG. 72 (a), an instruction display 88 for instructing the operation of the effect button 25 as shown in FIG. 72 (b) at a predetermined timing. Made. When the player operates the effect button 25 in accordance with the instruction display 88, a time notification effect as shown in FIG. 72 (c), and an expectation notification effect indicating an expectation level resulting in a special result as shown in FIG. 72 (d). Any one of is started.

  The effect control device 300 determines which effect is to be executed when the execution of the prefetch effect is determined, and starts the effect that has been determined when the effect button 25 is operated. Further, when the effect button 25 is not operated within a predetermined operable period, the effect may not be performed, or the effect may be started after the operable period has elapsed.

  It should be noted that both the time notification effect and the expectation notification effect may be set, and the effect determined by lottery when the effect button 25 is operated may be performed. Further, it is possible to determine which effect is to be performed based on the operation of the effect button 25 and to set the determined effect. Alternatively, one effect may be performed when the effect button 25 is operated within a predetermined operable period, and the other effect may be performed when the operation button 25 is not operated.

  Further, the timing notification effect shown in FIG. 72 (c) and the expectation notification effect shown in FIG. 72 (d) may be switched between each time the effect button 25 is operated. Further, not only can the switching be performed once when the instruction display 88 is made, but also the timing notification effect and the expectation notification effect can be switched to each other any number of times for each operation of the effect button 25 for a certain period. Also good.

  That is, the effect control device 300 serves as an expectation degree notification means capable of executing an expectation degree notification effect that suggests or notifies the possibility that a variable display game based on a specific start memory will have a special result. Further, the effect control device 300 serves as a notification switching means capable of switching between the time notification effect and the expectation notification effect based on the establishment of a predetermined condition.

  Note that the operation of the effect button 25 may change the time notification effect or the expectation notification effect to an effect that suggests or notifies a result or a change pattern of the special figure change display game to be notified. For example, on the basis of the operation of the effect button 25, the time value of the timer display 86 in the time notification effect may be changed to “777” to be notified definitely.

  Further, although the gaming machine of the present embodiment includes the touch panel 29 in addition to the effect button 25, the above-described processing may be performed by detecting an operation on the touch panel 29. The same applies to the case where the effect button 25 is used in the description to be described later. Furthermore, as long as the operation by the player can be detected, it is not limited to the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29, and any thing may be used.

  As described above, the operation means (the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29) that can be operated by the player is provided, and the occurrence time notification means (the effect control device 300) provides the time notification effect based on the operation of the operation means. It will be to start.

  In addition, an expectation degree notification means (effect control device 300) capable of executing an expectation degree notification effect that suggests or notifies the possibility that a variable display game based on a specific start memory will have a special result, and establishment of a predetermined condition And a notification switching means (effect control device 300) capable of switching between the time notification effect and the expectation notification effect.

  In addition, the notification switching unit performs switching based on the operation unit being operated.

  FIG. 73 shows an example of an execution mode of the time notification effect. As shown in FIG. 73 (a), when the predetermined timing is reached while the timer display 86 is displayed in the changing memory display 85, the timer display 86 changes to the changing memory display 85 as shown in FIG. 73 (b). It is possible to move outside. As a case where such movement is performed, there is a case where the time value of the timer display 86 becomes a predetermined value (for example, 15 seconds) or less. Also, it may be notified that the possibility that the timer display 86 is moved is more likely to be a big hit than the case where it does not move. Further, it may be notified that the larger the time value of the timer display 86 when moving, the higher the possibility of a big hit. Further, the timer display 86 may be moved from the state in the decoration special figure start memory display 83.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 73 (c), a second display device 89 capable of displaying a timer display 86 is provided separately from the display device 41, and the timer display 86 may be moved to the second display device 89. . In this case, the second display device 89 may be configured to be movable, and may overlap the front surface of the display device 41 when the timer display 86 is performed on the second display device 89. The time notification effect may be performed by the second display device 89 from the beginning. In this case, the start memory to be notified may or may not be clearly indicated.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 73 (d), as the timer display 86 moves, the time from when the time value of the timer display 86 becomes 0 to when the next specific event occurs is set as another timer. The display 86 may be used. In the example shown in FIG. 73D, it is suggested that the first specific event occurs after 3 minutes and the second specific event occurs after 1 minute and 10 seconds. It is also possible to perform three or more timer displays 86. Further, two or more second display devices shown in FIG. 73 (c) may be provided and the timer display 86 may be performed respectively. Further, as shown in FIG. 73 (e), a plurality of timer displays 86 may be performed from the beginning of the time notification effect or from a predetermined timing.

  FIG. 74 also shows an example of the execution mode of the time notification effect. The time notification effect can be executed for each of the plurality of start memories. In this example, as shown in FIG. 74A, the time notification effect is provided for each of the first start memory and the second start memory in the digestion order. Has been made. As described above, even when the timing notification effect is performed for each of the plurality of start memories, the timing notification effect is performed for a single start memory as shown in FIGS. 74 (b) to (d). The production will be performed in the same way.

  In addition, it is possible to execute different effects that appear to be performing the time notification effect for each of the plurality of start memories. In this effect, the time until the occurrence of one specific event is divided into a plurality of times, and the divided times are distributed and displayed on a plurality of timer displays 86.

  In the case of such a time notification effect, the plurality of timer displays 86 shown in FIG. 74 (a) indicate the time until the occurrence of a specific event in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory having the first digestion order. The time is divided. Then, after the special figure variation display game based on the start memory to be notified is started as shown in FIG. 74 (b), the decorative special figure start memory display 83 is displayed at a predetermined timing as shown in FIG. 74 (e). The displayed timer display 86 is moved to the changing storage display 85, and the time values of the timer display 86 are added together as shown in FIG. 74 (f).

  By doing in this way, the variation of production can be increased and an interest can be heightened. In addition, when the time notification effect is performed for each of the plurality of start memories, when the time value of the timer display 86 is small, the length of the special figure variation display game is expected to be short, so the expectation is not so high. However, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation by giving the possibility that the time value is increased by adding the time values.

  From the above, the occurrence time notification means (production control device 300) can report the remaining time until occurrence of a specific event by dividing it into a plurality of times. Further, the occurrence time notifying means sums up the remaining time that has been divided into a plurality of notifications based on the establishment of the predetermined condition, and reports them together as one.

  In addition, the occurrence time notification means can distribute and display the remaining time divided into a plurality of start memory displays (decoration special figure start memory display 83) and changing memory display 85. Further, the occurrence time notifying means decreases only the time displayed on the changing memory display 85 with the passage of time, and the time displayed on the starting memory display based on the establishment of the predetermined condition is the time displayed on the changing memory display 85. It will be added to.

  FIG. 75 shows another example of the effect of adding the time values of the timer display 86. In this example, as shown in FIG. 75 (a), the game progresses with the timer display 86 displayed on the changing memory display 85, and the time value of the timer display 86 is 0 as shown in FIG. 75 (b). However, a specific event does not occur. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 75 (c), a timer display 86 is displayed on the decoration special figure start memory display 83, and as shown in FIG. 75 (d), these timer displays 86 move to the changing memory display 85. As shown in FIG. 75 (e), it is added to the timer display 86 of the changing memory display 85. When the game progresses and the time value on the timer display 86 becomes 0, a specific event occurs.

  Although the timer display 86 for addition is displayed on the decorative special figure start memory display 83, it may be displayed at a place other than this. Alternatively, the time value of the timer display 86 displayed on the changing memory display 85 may be simply increased. In addition, as a time notification effect, when performing a so-called gasse effect that is performed even if a specific event does not occur, the time notification effect ends after the display shown in FIG. In the production shown in FIG. 75, it is possible to develop the production after pretending that it is a Gase production, and it is possible to increase the variation of the production and enhance the interest.

  FIG. 76 also shows another example of the effect of adding the time values of the timer display 86. As shown in FIG. 76 (a), the game proceeds with the timer display 86 displayed on the changing memory display 85, and as shown in FIG. 76 (b), another decoration special figure start memory display is displayed at a predetermined timing. A timer display 86 is displayed at 83. At this time, it seems that the timing notification effect has been started for each start memory as shown in FIGS. 74 (c) and 74 (d), as shown in FIGS. 74 (e), 74 (f) and 75. Thus, it seems that the effect to be added to the timer display 86 of the special figure variation display game being executed is started.

  However, as shown in FIG. 76 (c), the special figure fluctuation display game that is being executed ends with the value remaining in the timer display 86 of the memory display 85 during fluctuation. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 76 (d), the decorative special figure start memory display 83 shifts to the changing memory display unit 84 while the changing memory display 85 and the timer display 86 of the changing memory display 85 remain. As shown in FIG. 76 (e), the time values of the timer display 86 are added together, and the next special figure variation display game is started.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 76 (f), the special figure fluctuation display game is also finished with the time value remaining in the timer display 86 of the changing memory display 85, and is changing as shown in FIG. 76 (g). While the memory display 85 and the timer display 86 of the changing memory display 85 remain, the decorative special figure start storage display 83 shifts to the changing memory display unit 84 and the time values shown in the timer table 86 are added together. A special figure variation display game is started. Thereafter, when the time value of the timer display 86 becomes 0 as shown in FIG. 76 (h), a specific event occurs.

  That is, even in the special figure fluctuation display game based on the start memory that is digested before the start memory to be notified, the timer display 86 is displayed on the changing memory display 85, and a specific event occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game. After that, the time value of the timer display 86 is carried over to the next special figure fluctuation display game. By doing this, it is possible to give a sense of expectation that a specific event will occur in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory that is digested before the start memory of the advance notice target. It is possible to improve the interest of the period until the start of the special figure fluctuation display game based.

  Note that the time value of the timer display 86 may be summed based on the player operating the effect button 25. In addition, the time value of the timer display 86 displayed on the decoration special figure start storage display 83 is added to the timer display 86 of the changing memory display 85 after being added in a display area different from the changing memory display unit 84. You may make it.

  Alternatively, the timer display 86 may be displayed on all the decoration special figure start storage displays 83, and the addition to the changing storage display 85 may be always performed every time the special figure change display game is started. In the case of performing such an effect, in the special figure fluctuation display game that is likely to be a big hit, it is displayed on the changing memory display 85 so as to be the time value until the occurrence of a specific event such as when the result mode is derived. The effect of increasing or decreasing the time value of the timer display 86 is performed. If the game is not a special figure fluctuation display game that is highly likely to be a big hit, the timer display 86 displayed on the changing memory display 85 is set so that the time value of the timer display 86 displayed on the changing memory display 85 does not become zero. An effect of increasing the time value is appropriately performed so that the time value is carried forward.

  In addition, the effect of adding in the changing memory display unit 84 can be realized other than the time notification effect. FIG. 77 shows an example of the effect of adding up in the changing memory display unit 84. Here, as shown in FIG. 77 (a), the display mode of the during-change memory display 85 during the execution of the special figure change display game indicates that there is a high possibility of winning a big hit in the order of ○ <△ <☆. Yes, as shown in FIG. 77 (b), it is assumed that the changing memory display 85 is erased at the end of the special figure changing display game.

  In such a configuration, it is possible to perform an effect in which the changing memory display 85 and the decorative special figure start memory display 83 are added together in the changing memory display unit 84. In this effect, the changing memory display 85 is not erased despite the end of the special figure changing display game as shown in FIG. 77 (c), and the changing memory display unit 84 is shown in FIG. 77 (d). The decoration special figure start memory display 83 shifts to FIG. Then, as shown in FIG. 77 (e), as a result of the addition of ○ and ○, it changes to Δ and the next special figure variation display game is started.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 77 (f), when the special figure variation display game is finished, the changing memory display 85 is not erased, and the decorative special figure start storage display 83 is transferred to the changing memory display unit 84. To do. Then, as shown in FIG. 77 (g), the result of the addition of ◯ and △ is changed to ☆, and the next special figure variation display game is started. ☆ indicates that the possibility of a big hit is very high, and a special result is derived here as shown in FIG. 77 (h).

  In other words, the higher the number of times the changing memory display 85 and the decorative special figure start memory display 83 are added, the higher the degree of expectation. By doing this, even if the display mode of the memory display 85 during change is a display mode with low expectation, it can be promoted by summation, so that it can be expected, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. Can be improved. For example, since the possibility of being a big hit is very low in the changing memory display 85 where the display mode is ◯, the player loses a sense of expectation when the changing memory display 85 occurs, but may be promoted by summing up. By giving this, the expectation can be given until the start of the next special figure variation display game.

  It should be noted that the display mode of the during-change storage display 85 and the change pattern may be associated with each other so that the sum is always generated when the state is contrary to the association (so-called law breaking). For example, if there is an association that a reach always occurs when the display mode of the changing memory display 85 is △, and no reach has occurred, the change is in progress at the start of the next special figure change display game. An effect that the storage display 85 and the decorative special figure start storage display 83 are added together may be performed without fail.

  Further, as a pre-reading effect of the decoration special figure start memory display 83, it is indicated that the display mode is likely to be a big hit in the order of ○ <Δ <☆. Depending on the combination of the display forms of the decorative special figure start storage display 83 that is added to the storage display 85, the display form of the display storage display 85 after addition, that is, the degree of expectation, may be determined. For example, when the display storage display 85 with a display mode of Δ and the decoration special figure start storage display 83 with a display mode of Δ are added together, it becomes “★”, indicating that the degree of expectation is higher than ☆. Thus, when the display storage display 85 with the display mode ☆ and the decoration special figure start storage display 83 with the display mode ☆ are added together, the result is “NO” and the big hit is definitely notified. May be.

  Thus, by adding the display mode of the display memory display 85 and the display mode of the decoration special figure start memory display 83, the player can change the display mode of the special figure start storage display 83 from the normal display mode to the special display mode. In addition to the expectation of whether or not to change to (for example, Δ or ☆), it is possible to have an expectation of whether or not the display mode of the changing memory display 85 changes to the special display mode. Further, since the display mode of the changing memory display 85 is not changed independently but is changed in relation to the display mode of the decoration special figure start storage display 83, the decorative special figure start memory following the changing memory display 85 is changed. The display mode of the display 83 can also be interested, and the decoration special figure start memory display 83, which has conventionally been a notice display only for the decoration special figure start memory display 83 corresponding to one start memory. In the notice of changing the display mode (starting memory change notice), it becomes possible to make the decorative special figure starting memory display 83 corresponding to a plurality of starting memories relevant, and display a novel notice display which is not present in the past. It becomes possible. Note that the same effect can be obtained in the execution mode of the time notification effect shown in FIGS.

  FIG. 78 shows an example of the execution mode of the time notification effect. Here, as the execution mode of the decoration special figure fluctuation display game, a revariation display in which the fluctuation display starts again after the decoration special figure fluctuation display game temporarily stops in a result aspect other than the special result aspect in the middle of the special figure fluctuation display game. It is the structure which can perform the pseudo | simulation continuous variation display mode which performs this more than once. In this example, a time notification effect is performed in relation to the pseudo continuous variation display mode.

  As shown in FIG. 78 (a), when the game progresses with the timer display 86 displayed in the changing memory display 85, and the time value of the timer display 86 becomes 0 as shown in FIG. A temporary stop state is displayed in which information is displayed so as to shake. That is, here, the temporary stop is notified as a specific event. At this time, an instruction display 88 for instructing the player to operate the effect button 25 is displayed.

  When re-change is scheduled after this temporary stop, re-change of the identification information is started as shown in FIG. 78 (c) based on the player operating the effect button 25 according to the instruction display 88. At the same time, the time until the next temporary stop is added to the timer display 84. In addition, in the case where re-change is not scheduled after the temporary stop in FIG. 78 (b), even if the player operates the effect button 25 in accordance with the instruction display 88, the identification information is regenerated as shown in FIG. 78 (d). It does not fluctuate and then stops.

  Although the time until the temporary stop is notified on the timer display 86, when the timer display 86 becomes 0, it gives an impression that the special figure variation display game has ended. The indication display 88 may be displayed by stopping before 0, such as “: 03”. Further, in the case where a re-variation is scheduled after the temporary stop, if the player does not operate the effect button 25, the display may be automatically shifted to the display of FIG. 78 (c). The temporary stop state may be maintained until the next temporary stop timing. Further, an effect display in which a character appears and operates an effect button may be performed, and the display may be shifted to the display of FIG. In this case, you may make it alert | report the high possibility of being a big hit by the character which appears.

  Further, the state shown in FIG. 78 (b) may be a state in which a series of reach effects are completed and temporarily stopped in the form of the result of the loss of reach. In this way, it can be an effect whether or not further reach development is performed (whether or not it will be revived).

  FIG. 79 shows an example of the execution mode of the time notification effect. When the time notification effect is executed as shown in FIG. 79 (a), the stop design of the decorative special figure variation display game being executed is displayed corresponding to the timer display 86 as shown in FIG. 79 (b). It is possible to do. Here, the stop symbol is set to “352” corresponding to the timer display being “03:52”.

  In this way, when the stop symbol that matches the time value of the timer display 86 appears, it is more likely that the special figure variation display game based on the start memory to be notified will be a big hit than when it does not appear. It is supposed to be. That is, this effect is also one of the expectation notification effects that suggest or notify the high possibility that the special figure variation display game based on the specific start-up memory will have a special result. Thereby, the interest about the special figure fluctuation display game based on the start memory digested before the start memory to be notified can be enhanced.

  It should be noted that emphasis display for emphasizing that the time value of the timer display 86 and the stop symbol coincide with each other, or outputting sound may or may not be performed. Further, when the time value of the timer display 86 and the stop symbol match, the highlight display and the sound output may be performed only when the effect button 25 is operated at the stop timing of the identification information. In this case, the instruction display 88 for instructing the operation of the effect button 25 may not be particularly performed.

  In addition, during the period when the stop symbol is displayed, the countdown display on the timer display 86 may be temporarily stopped, and a time may be provided for the player to compare the time value on the timer display 86 with the stop symbol. Such a temporary stop of the countdown display may be performed regardless of whether or not the time value of the timer display 86 matches the stop symbol, or the time value of the timer display 86 and the stop symbol match. It may be performed only when there is. When such a temporary stop is performed, the time value of the timer display 86 is set by considering the corresponding time, or the time value of the timer display 86 is adjusted at a predetermined timing.

  In addition, the timer display 86 does not indicate the time until the occurrence of a specific event from the beginning, but is displayed in order to perform the above-described expectation notification effect that matches the time value of the timer display 86 with the stop symbol. May be. In other words, the expectation notification effect that pretends to be the time notification effect may be executable. In this case, the timer display 86 is erased at a predetermined timing after the display that emphasizes that the time value of the timer display 86 matches the stop symbol.

  From the above, the variable display game (decorative special map variable display game) is configured to display a combination of numbers according to the result after displaying a plurality of numbers in a variable manner in each of a plurality of display areas. The degree notification means (effect control means 300) matches the combination of numbers stopped and displayed in the variable display game with the time display value generated by the occurrence time notification means (effect control device 300) when the variable display game stops. The notification is made depending on whether or not to do so.

  FIG. 80 shows an example of the execution mode of the time notification effect. In this example, the timer display 86 indicates the time from the start of the special figure variation display game based on the start-up memory to be notified to the occurrence of a specific event.

  When a predetermined timing of the special figure variation display game being executed in the state where the start memory exists, the time notification effect is started, and as shown in FIG. 80 (a), the decorative special figure corresponding to the start memory to be notified is given. A timer display 86 is displayed on the start memory display 83. The timer display 86 indicates the time from the current time until the occurrence of a specific event in the special figure change display game based on the start memory to be notified, and here, 5:00 seconds are shown.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 80B, the countdown display on the timer display 86 is started from this point. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 80 (c) to 80 (g), as the other start memories are digested, the decorative special figure start memory display 83 corresponding to the start memory to be notified is moved. During this time, the countdown display on the timer display 86 is continued. Then, as shown in FIG. 80 (h), a specific event occurs when the time value of the timer display 86 becomes 0 in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory to be notified.

  In such a time notification effect, the same effect as the time notification effect shown in FIG. 68 can be obtained, and the time value of the timer display 86 is based on the start memory prior to the start memory to be notified. Depending on how much is consumed, the expectation for the start memory of the advance notice object changes, so that the interest in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory before the advance notice object also increases.

[Notice time calculation process]
When performing the time notification effect as shown in FIG. 80, the notice time calculation process shown in FIG. 81 is performed instead of the notice time calculation process shown in FIG. In the advance notice time calculation process, first, a scheduled time from the start of the advance notice pending game to the occurrence of a specific event is calculated and set as the notice time 1 (step C511). This process is the same as step C501 in FIG. Next, the remaining time of the current fluctuation and the scheduled fluctuation time (including the display time after the fluctuation) of each hold other than the notice target hold are calculated and set as the notification time 2 (step C512). In this process, the content of the time to be calculated is the same as that in step C503 in FIG. 69, but the calculated value is set as the notification time 2.

  Then, a time value obtained by adding the notification time 1 calculated in step C511 and the notification time 2 calculated in step C512 is saved in the display area and the variable wait timer area (step C513). As a result, in the variable wait timer area, time counting is started by adding the notification time 1 and the notification time 2. In addition, the timer display 86 displays a time obtained by adding the notification time 1 and the notification time 2 as a time value. In addition, the value for the display area is also subtracted in synchronization with the time measurement in the variable wait timer area, and the countdown display of the time value displayed on the timer display 86 is performed. Then, in the scenario table for performing the time notification effect shown in FIG. 80, the timer display 86 is ended and the time notification effect is ended when the variable wait timer expires.

  In addition, you may make it alert | report the time from the present time to the start of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the start memory of the notice target. In this case, the time calculated in step C511 is set to zero. Moreover, the examples of the various execution modes shown in FIGS. 70 to 79 are also applicable to the time notification effect shown in FIG. In addition, when the execution of the time notification effect is determined, a time notification effect for notifying the time from the start of the special figure change display game to be notified to the occurrence of a specific event as shown in FIG. 68, and FIG. You may make it select which of the time alerting | reporting effects which alert | report the time until generation | occurrence | production of a specific event as shown is performed. In this case, the scenario table is set according to the type of the selected time notification effect, and the advance time calculation process shown in FIG. 69 or the advance time calculation process shown in FIG. To do.

  FIG. 82 shows an example of the execution mode of the time notification effect as shown in FIG. In this example, the time notification effect is started as shown in FIG. 82 (a), and then the second start memory is generated as shown in FIG. 82 (b).

  Since the special figure 2 fluctuation display game based on the second start memory is executed in preference to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game based on the first start memory, the special figure fluctuation that was not scheduled at the start of the time notification effect is performed. The display game is interrupted and executed. As a result, the time until the occurrence of the specific event increases by the amount corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game, and a deviation from the time value in the current timer display 86 occurs. I have to.

  First, as shown in FIG. 82 (c), the countdown display is performed on the timer display 86 as usual until the end of the special figure 1 variable display game being executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 82 (d), the countdown display on the timer display 86 is stopped when the special figure 2 variable display game is started. Here, the timer display 86 is displayed so as to sway, thereby indicating that the countdown display on the timer display 86 is stopped.

  Thereafter, when the special figure 2 variable display game is finished as shown in FIG. 82 (e) and the special figure 1 variable display game is started as shown in FIG. 82 (f), the countdown display on the timer display 86 is displayed. Resume. By doing in this way, it can prevent that the time value in the timer display 86 and the time until generation | occurrence | production of a specific event arise by the interruption of a special figure 2 fluctuation display game.

  If a second start memory is generated during the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game that is interrupted and executed in the middle of the time notification effect, the special figure 2 variable display game based on the second start memory is ended. Until the countdown display on the timer display 86 is stopped. That is, the countdown display on the timer display 86 is stopped until the start of the special figure variation display game scheduled to be executed at the start of the time notification effect.

  In order to perform such control, the production control device 300 performs setting to stop the subtraction of the value of the display area at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game and to display the timer display 86 so as to sway. Also, the current value of the variable wait timer area is saved, and the time corresponding to the change time and stop time of the special figure 2 change display game is newly set in the variable wait timer area. Then, based on the time-up of the variable wait timer, the saved value is set in the variable wait timer area, and the subtraction of the value synchronized with the time measurement in the variable wait timer area is resumed for the display area, The countdown display of the time value displayed on the timer display 86 is resumed. As a result, the timer display 86 maintains the value at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game over the fluctuation time and stop time of the special figure 2 variable display game. The countdown display is resumed.

  That is, when the production control device 300 notifies the remaining time until the occurrence of the specific event in the variable display game before the start of the variable display game based on the specific first start memory, the second start memory is stored. When the variable display game based on the second start memory is generated and started, subtracting display of the remaining time is stopped until the end of the variable display game based on the second start memory.

  From the above, the starting area includes the first starting area (start winning prize port 36) and the second starting area (ordinary variable prize winning device 37), and the starting storage means (game control apparatus 100) is the first. First start storage means (game control device 100) capable of storing the first start memory up to a predetermined number based on the inflow of game balls into one start area, and predetermined based on the inflow of game balls into the second start area Second start storage means (game control device 100) capable of storing the second start memory up to the upper limit, and when the second start storage means has the second start memory, the second start memory Priority control means (game control device 100) for executing the variable display game based on the first start memory is prioritized over the variable display game based on the first start memory, and before the start of the variable display game based on the specific first start memory Occurrence of a specific event in a variable display game When the remaining start time is informed and the second start memory is generated and the variable display game based on the second start memory is started, the subtraction display of the remaining time is based on the second start memory. Stop means (production control device 300) for stopping until the end of the variable display game is provided. Thereby, it is possible to prevent a contradiction from occurring in the time notification effect.

  Although the countdown display on the timer display 86 is stopped at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game executed by interruption, the countdown display on the timer display 86 may be stopped when the second start memory is generated. good. In this case, a variable wait timer is newly set including the time from the occurrence of the second start memory to the start of the special figure 2 variable display game based on the second start memory.

  In addition, other measures may be taken when the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted and executed in the middle of the time notification effect. For example, at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game, the time value corresponding to the fluctuation time and stop time of the special figure 2 variable display game is added to the time value of the timer display 86, and The countdown display on the timer display 86 may be continued during execution. By doing so, the player can know the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game executed by interrupting, and if this fluctuation time is long, the player can expect the big hit of the special figure 2 variable display game. Since the player comes to have, the interest of the special figure 2 variable display game executed by interrupting can be enhanced.

  In the case of such control, the effect control device 300 corresponds to the variable wait timer area and the display area at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game corresponding to the variable time and stop time of the special figure 2 variable display game. Process to add time. As a result, the time until the occurrence of a specific event is changed. That is, when the effect control device 300 notifies the remaining time until the occurrence of the specific event in the variable display game before the start of the variable display game based on the specific start memory, the execution of another variable display game is performed. When the remaining time until the occurrence of the specific event changes, the change means for changing the remaining time to be notified according to the change is made. Note that the timing of addition is not limited to the start of the special figure 2 variable display game, and any timing can be used. However, it is preferable to perform addition before the time value of the timer display 86 becomes zero.

  In addition, when the special figure 2 variable display game executed by interruption is a big hit, the notice target is changed to the special figure 2 variable display game until the occurrence of a specific event in the special figure 2 variable display game. The time may be displayed as the time value of the timer display 86 and the countdown display may be performed. In the case of such control, the effect control device 300 uses the values of the variable weight timer area and the display area at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game as the fluctuation time and stop time of the special figure 2 variable display game. Replace with the time equivalent to.

  From the above, when the occurrence time notification means (production control device 300) notifies the remaining time until the occurrence of the specific event in the variable display game before the start of the variable display game based on the specific start memory. In addition, when the remaining time until the occurrence of a specific event changes due to the execution of another variable display game, a change means (effect control device 300) is provided for changing the remaining time to be notified according to the change. Become.

  Further, the changing means (the effect control device 300) is configured to notify the second time when the time until the occurrence of the specific event in the variable display game is notified before the start of the variable display game based on the specific first start memory. When the start memory is generated and the variable display game based on the second start memory is started, and the result of the variable display game based on the second start memory is a special result, until the occurrence of a specific event This time notification can be changed to the time notification until the special result is derived.

  If the prior notice only changes the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display 83, even if the second start memory that is preferentially digested occurs when the advance notice is performed for the first start memory, particularly Although no problem arises, when the timer display 86 is used for notification as in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the time until the occurrence of a specific event due to the interruption of the special figure 2 variable display game and the value in the current timer display 86 Deviation occurs. However, by adding the time value of the timer display 86 and stopping the countdown display as described above, it is possible to prevent a time difference between the time until the occurrence of the specific event and the value in the current timer display 86 from occurring. It is possible to prevent inconsistencies in the time notification effect. The timer display 86 may be erased at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game executed by interruption, and the countdown display may be terminated. In this way, it is possible to eliminate the continuous display of the difference between the time until the occurrence of the specific event and the value in the current timer display 86.

  FIG. 83 shows an example of the execution mode of the time notification effect as shown in FIG. In this example, the time notification effect is started as shown in FIG. 83 (a), and when the value of the timer display 86 becomes 0 as shown in FIG. 83 (b), the normal variation winning is shown as shown in FIG. 83 (c). The device 37 is opened. That is, here, the opening of the normal variation winning device 37 is notified as a specific event.

  In addition, in the state that is not in the short-time state, when the short-opening and the long-opening that is longer than the short-opening can be selected as the opening mode of the normal variable winning device 37, the long-opening is opened. It is preferable to notify. Further, in the case where there are a plurality of decorative special figure start memory displays 83, it may be notified that there is a high possibility of being long open depending on the position of the decorative special figure start memory display 83 displaying the timer display 86. For example, it is notified that the possibility of being long open is higher as it is displayed on the decorative special figure start memory display 83 corresponding to the start memory whose digestion order is earlier.

  In addition, such a time notification effect is a result of whether or not the result of the normal variation display game is a hit or a long open after the occurrence of the normal diagram start memory and before the start of the normal variation display game based on the general diagram start memory. In the case of performing the prefetching process for determining whether or not, it can be started after the prefetching process. Further, when the prefetch process is not performed, it can be started after the start of the normal variation display game.

  FIG. 84 shows an example of the execution mode of the time notification effect as shown in FIG. If the time value of the timer display 86 is small before the start of the special figure change display game to be notified in the time notification effect, the expectation for the special figure change display game to be notified becomes low. Therefore, in order to prevent a decrease in the player's expectation, an effect as shown in FIG. 84 can be executed.

  As shown in FIG. 84 (a), the decoration special figure variation display game being executed as shown in FIG. 84 (b) in a state in which the timer display 86 is displayed on the decoration special figure start memory display 83 in the time notification effect. The identification information is temporarily stopped. As a result, the player feels as if the running special figure variation display game has ended. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 84 (c), an instruction display 88 for instructing the operation of the effect button 25 is performed. When the player operates the effect button 25 according to the instruction display 88, the identification is performed as shown in FIG. As the information changes again, the time value is added to the timer display 86, and the special figure change display game continues as shown in FIG.

  By giving the possibility that the time value of the timer display 86 will increase in this way, it is possible to give a sense of expectation even if the time value of the timer display 86 is small before the start of the special figure variation display game to be notified. . Furthermore, it is possible to have a sense of expectation by continuing the variable display for the special figure variable display game being executed. That is, with the effect shown in FIG. 84, the expectation of the special figure fluctuation display game to be notified can be enhanced, and the expectation of the special figure fluctuation display game being executed can also be enhanced.

  When the player does not operate the effect button 25, the display may automatically shift to the display of FIG. 84 (d), or the temporary stop may be maintained as it is. Further, an effect display in which a character appears and operates an effect button may be performed to shift to the display of FIG. In this case, you may make it alert | report the high possibility of being a big hit by the character which appears. Moreover, you may provide the opportunity to perform an effect as shown in FIG. 84 in one time alerting | reporting effect in multiple times. In this case, a plurality of occasions may be provided in one special figure variation display game.

  Furthermore, in conjunction with the resumption of the variable display, an indication or notification that the running special-figure display game is a big hit, an occurrence of a reach state, an indication or notification of a part or all of the result mode, and the like are performed. You may do it. In this way, expectation can be enhanced together with an increase in the time value of the timer display 86.

  Further, the time value of the timer display 86 is added in association with the re-change after the temporary stop, but other triggers may be used. Further, the same effect can be obtained by stopping the countdown display on the timer display 86 at a predetermined timing such as when the effect button 25 is operated. In addition, a special figure change display game that is being executed without temporary change after the temporary stop shown in FIG. 84 (c) may be included. In this case, the timer display 86 is displayed based on the operation of the effect button 25. Only addition of time values may be performed.

  In the timer display 86 in the various time notification effects described above, the display is updated every second in synchronization with the passage of time, but the present invention is not limited to this. When the time value is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, the time value may be updated over a longer period. For example, when the time value is 5 minutes or more, it may be updated in units of 1 minute, and when the time value is 1 minute or more, it may be updated in units of 10 seconds. Further, although the unit of time value in the timer display 86 is minutes and seconds, other units may be used. For example, a unit of a year, month, day, week, day of week, hour, second or less is used. Also good.

  Further, although the timer display 86 for displaying time by digital display is used, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the time may be displayed by a display such as an analog clock, or the time may be displayed by a display such as a progress bar. The time notification effect is not limited to notification of the time until the occurrence of a specific event, and may be notification of the time. For example, the execution period of the special figure change display game to be notified may be divided into the first period, the middle period, and the second period, and a notification may be made in which period a specific event occurs.

  Further, although the occurrence timing of the specific event is notified by the time until the occurrence of the specific event, the occurrence timing of the specific event may be notified by matters other than the time. For example, it may be specified by an event in the game such as “at the start of change”, “at the time of change stop”, “at the end of the game”, “at the time of reach formation”, or “when the third character appears”.

  In addition, the occurrence time may be notified by a time notification effect for a specific event whose occurrence time is known without depending on the determination result of the prior determination means. For example, it may be set in advance that a specific event occurs at a specific time of the special figure changing display game which is a predetermined number of times after the special game state is ended, and a time notification effect may be performed on this. In this case, since it may be difficult to calculate an accurate time value, the average time from the end of the special gaming state to the specific time of the special figure variation display game for the predetermined number of times may be indicated. Until the time until the occurrence of a specific event can be calculated, the number of remaining games of the special figure variation display game may be indicated. In addition, regardless of the progress of the game, a specific event such as an effect display based on a specific date or time is generated every certain period, and a time notification effect may be performed on this. good. In these cases, it is preferable to display the timer display 86 at a place other than the decorative special figure start memory display 83 and the changing memory display 85.

  Further, during the execution of the time notification effect, the display of the decoration special figure variation display game may be reduced, and the display may be changed so that the decoration special figure start storage display 83 becomes main. Further, a separate display device for displaying the decorative special figure start memory display 83 may be provided so that the time notification effect is performed on the separate display device.

  In addition, the shortest time that can be selected when the time notification effect is not being executed as the change time of the special figure change display game based on the start memory that is digested before the start memory to be notified during the execution of the time notification effect It may be possible to set a variation time shorter than the variation time. In this way, it is possible to minimize the decrease in the time value of the timer display 86 before the start of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the advance notice object, and the special figure based on the start memory of the advance notice object. Even when the time value of the timer display 86 before the start of the variable display game is small, the player's expectation can be maintained.

  Further, it is possible to execute a time notification effect (so-called gas effect) in which a specific event does not occur even if the occurrence of the specific event is not notified, that is, the time value of the timer display 86 becomes zero. If a start memory that is subject to advance notice occurs during execution of such a time notification effect, the start memory may be changed to the advance notice. In this case, the time value of the timer display 86 is increased or decreased in accordance with the occurrence timing of the specific event, and the timer display 86 is moved to the decorative special figure start memory display 83 corresponding to the start memory to be notified. However, the various execution modes described above can be used as the execution mode in this case. In particular, the timer display 86 has the effect of adding the time values of the timer display 86 as shown in FIG. It can be performed without a sense of incongruity by performing the summation.

  In addition, the time information managed by the RTC 338 may be used to notify the date when the specific event occurs and the actual time. For example, the time from the current time to the occurrence of a specific event is calculated, and this time is added to the current time to notify the calculated time. In other words, the time management means (RTC 338) for managing the actual time is provided, and the generation time notification means (production control device 300) is based on the time until a specific event occurs and the current time as the time notification production, You may make it alert | report the time when the said specific event generate | occur | produces.

Second Embodiment
Next, the gaming machine of the second embodiment will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above, and hereinafter, the same reference numerals are given to portions having the same configuration, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The gaming machine of this embodiment can execute the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game simultaneously.

  The time notification effect described above can also be executed in the gaming machine of this embodiment. However, as will be described later, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are simultaneously executed, when a special result is derived in one special figure fluctuation display game, the other special fluctuation display game is obtained. The figure change display game is forcibly stopped by the result of the deviation.

  As a countermeasure for such a case, a timer display 86 is displayed during a period from when it is determined that the special-figure display game that is the target of the time notification effect is forcibly stopped by the result of losing, until it is forcibly stopped. It is preferable to perform a process such as changing the time value or canceling the time notification effect so that no contradiction occurs in the content of the time notification effect. For example, if the time value of the timer display 86 is changed to the time until forced stop, it is changed to a time notification effect informing that a special result is derived in the other special figure variation display game. There is no sense of incongruity.

  As shown in FIG. 85, the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be capable of opening and closing. The game board 30 (see FIG. 86) is stored in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. In addition, a glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

  In addition, lamps and LEDs are incorporated in the left and right sides of the glass frame 15 to provide decorations, effects, and notifications when abnormalities occur (for example, when a payout abnormality occurs, the lamps and LEDs are abnormally notified colors (for example, red) The frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (flashing)), and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effects) are provided. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19 b is also provided below the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the abnormality content is notified by voice from the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b. Note that a discharge abnormality notification lamp may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

Further, at the lower part of the front frame 12, there is an upper plate 21 (storage tray) for supplying game balls to a not-shown hitting ball launcher, and game balls paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10. There are provided an upper tray ball outlet 22 that flows out, a lower tray (receiving tray) 23 for storing game balls paid out in a state where the upper tray 21 is full, an operation unit 24 of the hitting ball launcher, and the like. Further, an effect button 25 having a built-in effect button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from the player is provided on the upper edge of the upper plate 21. In addition, a touch panel 29 for receiving a touch operation input from the player is provided on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25. Further, a key hole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12.
In the present embodiment, the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25, but the touch panel 29 may be separate from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device is provided in the vicinity of the effect button 25, A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

  Further, to the right of the production button 25, a ball lending button 27 that is operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and a discharge button that is operated to discharge the prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. 28. A balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card is provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, the player turns the operation unit 24 so that the ball-striking device feeds the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 toward the game area 32 on the front surface of the game board 30. Fire. Further, when the player operates the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29, an effect or the like in which the player's operation is intervened in the change display game (decoration special view change display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 86). It can be carried out.

  Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.

  On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by the guide rail 31 is formed. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at the four corners of the game board 30. In the game area 32, a center case (game production component) 40 provided with a display device 41 is arranged substantially at the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recessed portion provided in the center case 40 at a position deeper than the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 surrounds the display area of the display device 41, protrudes forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and is formed so as to make it difficult for a game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

  The display device 41 (variable display device) is configured by a device having a display screen such as an LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) or a CRT (CRT). In an area (display area) where an image of the display screen can be displayed, information relating to a game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbols), a character that produces a special figure variation display game, and a background image that enhances the presentation effect is displayed. . On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special diagram variation display game is played. In addition, an image for an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen. In addition, the left and right portions of the center case 40 are provided with a board effect device 44 that produces an effect of a game by operating. The board effect device 44 is operable from the state shown in FIG. 86 toward the center of the display device 41.

  In the game area 32, three general winning ports 35 are arranged on the lower left side of the center case 40, and one general winning port 35 is arranged on the lower right side of the center case 40. The game balls that have won the general prize opening 35 are detected by a prize opening switch 35a (see FIG. 96).

  Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, there is provided a first start winning opening 36 (start winning opening, start winning area) for giving a start condition for the special figure 1 variable display game. A game ball won in the first start winning opening 36 is detected by the start opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 96). Further, a second start winning port 37 (start winning port, start winning region) for providing a start condition for the special figure 2 variable display game is provided at the lower right of the center case 40 in the game area 32. The game ball won in the second start winning opening 37 is detected by the start opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 96).

  Below the center case 40 in the game area 32, on the right side of the first start winning opening 36, a first special that can be converted into a state where a game ball is not accepted and a state where it is easy to accept depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. A variable winning device (upper prize winning port) 38 is provided.

  The first special variation winning device 38 has an attacker-type open / close door 38c that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted toward the near side, and the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. Depending on how, the state is converted from the closed state (blocked state disadvantageous to the player) to the open state (state advantageous to the player). That is, the first special variable winning device 38 includes, for example, an upper prize winning opening that is opened and closed by an open / close door 38c driven by an upper prize winning solenoid 38b (see FIG. 96) as a driving device. In the special gaming state based on the above, the upper prize winning opening is converted from the closed state to the opened state, thereby facilitating the inflow of gaming balls into the upper winning prize opening and allowing the player to obtain a predetermined game value (the prize ball). ).

  An upper prize port switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 96) as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the upper prize port is disposed inside the upper prize port (winning area). Yes. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, two upper prize winning port switches 38a are provided, and a game ball that has flowed into the upper prize winning port is detected by any one of the upper prize winning port switches 38a. As described above, by providing a plurality of upper prize winning port switches 38a, it is possible to quickly detect a game ball that has flowed into the upper prize winning opening.

  Directly below the first start winning port 36, a second special variable winning device (lower large winning port) 39 that can be converted into a state where a game ball is not accepted and a state where it is easy to accept depending on the result of the special figure variation display game is arranged. Has been. The second special variation winning device 39 includes an opening / closing door 39c that can be converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in by opening in a direction in which the upper end side is tilted to the near side.

  The second special variation winning device 39 has an attacker-type opening / closing door 39c that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side tilts toward the near side, and the result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. Depending on how, the state is converted from a closed state (closed state disadvantageous for the player) to an open state (a state advantageous to the player). That is, the second special variable winning device 39 includes, for example, a lower big prize opening opened and closed by an open / close door 39c driven by a lower big prize opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 96) as a driving device. In the special gaming state based on the above, the lower prize winning opening is converted from the closed state to the opened state, thereby facilitating the inflow of gaming balls into the lower major winning prize opening, and allowing the player to obtain a predetermined game value (the prize ball). ).

  A lower major prize opening switch (count switch) 39a (see FIG. 96) is provided inside the lower major prize opening (winning area) as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special prize opening. . Also, below the second special variable winning device 39, there is provided an out port 30a for collecting game balls that have not won a winning port or the like.

  The arrangement of the first special variation winning device 38 and the second special variation winning device 39 is not limited to this. For example, in FIG. 86, the second special variation winning device 39 may be provided adjacent to the upper side or the lower side of the first special variation winning device 38. In this case, it may be completely overlapped vertically, or it may be shifted to the left and right and only a part may overlap vertically. Further, the opening / closing doors 38c and 39c are not limited to the attacker type, and other types such as a slide type that can open the grand prize opening by sliding a plate-like member capable of closing the big prize opening. It may be in the form of

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, of the game areas 32 where the game balls flow down, the left area of the center case 40 is the left game area, and the right area of the center case 40 is the right game area. ing. Then, the player can aim to win the first start winning opening 36 by firing the game ball to the left game area by adjusting the firing force (so-called left-handed), and launch the game ball to the right game area By so-called “right-handed”, it is possible to aim for winning in the second start winning opening 37 and the first special variable winning device 38. It should be noted that the second special variation winning device 39 can be aimed regardless of whether the game ball is fired in the left or right game area.

  Here, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the flow path forming member 42 attached to the right end portion of the center case 40 is disposed at a position corresponding to the right game area, and is fired to the right game area. The played game ball is configured to pass through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42. The material of at least the front surface of the flow path forming member 42 is a material that allows a game ball passing through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42 to be visually recognized from the outside. A game ball passing through the flow path formed by the forming member 42 (that is, a game ball flowing down the right game area) can be viewed through the flow path forming member 42 from the front of the flow path forming member 42. .

  In addition, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, in the lower right part of the game board 30), the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that form the special figure fluctuation display game, and a batch of various information are displayed. A display device 50 is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 87, the collective display device 50 is a special figure 1 display for a special figure 1 variable display game (first special figure fluctuation display section) composed of a 7 segment type display (LED lamp) or the like. 51 (D1) and special figure 2 display for special figure 2 variable display game (second special figure fluctuation display part) 52 (D2) and start memory number notification of special figure 1 variable display game composed of LED lamp Storage display unit 54 (D11 to D14).

  Further, the collective display device 50 has a round display unit 60 (D3 to D7) for displaying the number of rounds at the time of big hit (the number of opening / closing of the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39), and left-handed ( The first game state display unit 77 (D8 to D10) for notifying the player of the right hit (the normal hit) and the right hit (how to hit the game state) that are advantageous to the player, and the probability state (high) of the special figure variation display game A probability display section 78 (D15 to D18) for notifying a probability state or a low probability state) is provided. The collective display device 50 has a probability state display unit that displays that the probability state of the big hit is a high probability state when the gaming machine 10 is turned on. A unit (display) or the like may be provided. Further, the ordinary variation display game is executed as in a conventional gaming machine, and a normal starting point that constitutes a second start winning opening through which the game ball can be awarded based on the specific result of the ordinary variation display game When equipped with a variable winning device, a general map display for displaying a general variable display game, a memory display for notifying the start memory number of a general variable display game, and a lighted time when a short time occurs A short time state notifying unit or the like may be provided.

  The special figure fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 is, for example, during the execution of the fluctuation display game, that is, while the decoration special figure fluctuation display game is being performed on the display device 41, The segment is blinked to indicate that it is changing. The blinking cycle is set to 100 milliseconds, for example. In the case of this embodiment, in the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display 51, as shown in FIG. 87 (b), it is provided on the lower right side of 7 segments in addition to the central segment. In addition, the eighth segment is also blinked to indicate that it is changing, so that the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be distinguished. When the result of the game is “out of”, as a result mode of out of game, for example, the central segment (in the case of Special Figure 1, the eighth segment on the lower right side) is turned on, and the result of the game is In the case of “winning”, the game results are displayed with the result modes (for example, numbers and symbols) other than the off-result mode being turned on as the winning result mode (special result mode).

  The memory display unit 54 displays the number of undigested balls (starting memory number = reserved number) among the number of winning balls to the first starting winning port 36, which is the variation start condition of the special figure 1 display 51, as shown in FIG. ), A plurality of LEDs are turned off and turned on (flashing). The round display unit 60 is composed of LED lamps and the like, and as shown in FIG. 87 (d), when not in the special game state, all the LEDs are turned off, and during the special game state, it is selected according to the special result. The LED is turned on corresponding to the number of rounds. Note that the round display unit may be a seven-segment display.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 87 (e), the first gaming state display unit 77 turns off all the LEDs when the gaming state is more advantageous for the player to the left than the right. When the game state is more advantageous to the player than right-handed (left-handed), all LEDs are turned on. As shown in FIG. 87 (e), the probability display unit 78 turns off all the LEDs when the jackpot probability state is a low probability state (normal probability state), and the jackpot probability state is a high probability state (probability change). In the case of (state), all the LEDs are turned on.

  FIG. 88 shows a display mode of the special figure 1 display 51. During the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the center segment and the eighth segment provided on the lower right side of the 7-segment are blinked at a cycle of 100 milliseconds. And a result is displayed by lighting in the aspect corresponding to a result with completion | finish of fluctuation | variation time. In some cases, a plurality of lighting modes are associated with one result, and in this case, any one lighting mode is selected from among these by a random number or the like.

  89 and 90 show a display mode of the special figure 2 display 52. FIG. Special Figure 2 Fluctuation Display During the fluctuation display of the game, the center segment blinks at a cycle of 100 milliseconds. And a result is displayed by lighting in the aspect corresponding to a result with completion | finish of fluctuation | variation time. In some cases, a plurality of lighting modes are associated with one result, and in this case, any one lighting mode is selected from among these by a random number or the like. Multiple patterns of lighting are set for each of the big hits and small hits, which will be described later, but this does not clearly notify the player of which big hits have occurred, especially when a small hit occurs. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the act of illegally trying to acquire a game ball at the time of a small hit by looking at the lighting mode of the special figure 2 display 52.

  FIG. 91 shows the jackpot and jackpot probabilities, the jackpot type allocation probability when winning the jackpot, and the jackpot type allocation probability when winning the jackpot. The big hit is a special result (first special result) accompanied by the operation of the condition device, and the small hit is a special result (second special result) not accompanied by the operation of the condition device. The condition device is activated when a big hit occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game (stop display of the big hit symbol). When the conditional device is activated, for example, a big hit state is generated and a special electric accessory is generated. This means that a specific flag for continuously operating the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39 is set (the consecutive accessory operating device is operated). The fact that the condition device does not operate means that the aforementioned flag is not set as in the case of winning a small lottery. The “condition device” may be software means such as a flag that is turned on / off in software as described above, or may be hardware means such as a switch that is electrically turned on / off. In addition, the “condition device” is a term generally used in the field of pachinko gaming machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of the electric accessory, and the same applies to this specification. It is used as a term having a meaning.

  The jackpot probability, which is the probability of being a big hit (first special result), is common to the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and the probabilities in the normal gaming state which is the low probability state and the specific gaming state which is the high probability state are respectively illustrated. The probabilities are as shown in 91 (a). In the gaming machine of this embodiment, after the special gaming state (first special gaming state) based on the big hit, it becomes a high probability state, and when a special number variation display game is executed a predetermined number of times (here, 50 times), the low probability state is achieved. It is comprised so that it may become. Moreover, even if it becomes a high probability state based on the result aspect of either the special figure 1 fluctuation display game or the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game Both are in a high probability state.

  The small hit probability, which is the probability of a small hit (second special result), is as shown in FIG. 91 (b). This small hit probability is higher in special figure 2 than in special figure 1. The small hit probability is always constant regardless of the gaming state and the big hit probability. In the lottery for the big hit and the small hit, the big hit and the small hit do not overlap. Therefore, in the high probability state, either the big hit or the small hit is surely won for Special Figure 2. In addition, you may make it become a loss result.

  FIG. 91 (c) shows the jackpot types that can be selected in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, the special variable winning devices and distribution probabilities that are released for each jackpot type, and FIG. 1 and 2 show the types of small hits that can be selected, the special variable winning device that is opened for each type of small hit, the opening time, the number of times of opening, and the distribution probability. It should be noted that the 2R probability variation D1 in the special figure 2 can hardly be expected, but since it is a big hit, the number of special figure variation display games that can be executed in a high probability state is set to 50 again. In the special game state based on the 2R probability variation D1, an effect is provided such that the number of games that can be executed in a high probability state is added.

  FIG. 92 and FIG. 93 show the variation pattern of the special map variation display game. FIG. 92 (a) shows a variation pattern when the result is out of order in a low probability state. As described above, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to aim for winning in the first start winning opening 36 by left-handed and aim for winning in the second starting winning opening 37 by right-handing. It has become. That is, it is possible to select which of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game is mainly executed according to the player's intention. In addition, depending on the gaming state, the game is designed assuming that the game progresses mainly in one of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game. According to this design, the player plays the game. In order to progress, it is configured such that it is advantageous for a player to play a game mainly in one of the special figure variation display games determined to be main in design. In the following description, one special figure fluctuation display game determined to be main in each gaming state may be referred to as main fluctuation, and the other special figure fluctuation display game may be referred to as irregular fluctuation.

  In the low probability state, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is designed as a main fluctuation, and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is designated as an irregular fluctuation. In order to allow the player to proceed with the game in accordance with this design, for Special Figure 2, regardless of which variation pattern is selected, a long variation in which a variation time of about 10 minutes is set is selected. It has become. That is, in the normal gaming state, the variation time that can be determined as the variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is longer than the variation time that can be determined as the variation time of the special figure 1 variable display game. The special figure 2 fluctuation display game has a higher probability of small hits than the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. The execution of the variable display game in FIG. 2 is made inefficient in terms of time, and in the low probability state, the game is progressed mainly in the special FIG. 1 variable display game.

  FIG. 92 (b) shows a variation pattern when the result is out of order in a high probability state. In the high probability state, the variation pattern is not set because the lottery result for the special figure 2 variation display game is not likely to be off. For the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, only one fluctuation pattern is selected. In this high probability state, contrary to the low probability state described above, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is set as the main fluctuation, and the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is set as the irregular fluctuation.

  Here, the fluctuation time in the case of a special figure 1 fluctuation display game that is irregular fluctuation in a high probability state is a deviation result in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game that is irregular fluctuation in a low probability state. Is set shorter than the fluctuation time (see FIG. 92A). As will be described later, a short time is set as a fluctuation time when the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit or a small hit in the high probability state, and in the high probability state, a lottery is drawn for the special figure 2 variable display game. This is because there is no case in which the result of.

  In other words, in the high probability state in which the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is short and can be executed efficiently in terms of time, the special figure 1 variable display game having the result of losing the lottery result is clearly disadvantageous. The game can be progressed mainly in the special figure 2 variable display game to the player without setting a long variable time. Therefore, the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game may not be set longer than necessary. However, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed simultaneously, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is mainly used. In order for the game to proceed, it is forced to stop by a big hit or a small hit of the special figure 2 variable display game as a sufficiently long fluctuation time with respect to the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game.

  FIG. 93 (a) shows a variation pattern when the result is a big hit in a low probability state. For the special figure 2, only the variation pattern that does not generate the reach state can be selected. In the low probability state, the fluctuation time when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a big hit may be longer than the fluctuation time that can be selected when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is a big hit. FIG. 93B shows a variation pattern when the result is a big hit in a high probability state. In either case, a reach state is not generated, and a very short variation time variation pattern is selected.

  In particular, for the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the second shortest fluctuation time is selected when compared with the fluctuation time that can be selected when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a big hit or a small hit. ing. This increases the possibility that the special figure 1 fluctuation display game that becomes irregular fluctuation even in the high probability state stops before the special figure 2 fluctuation display game that becomes the main fluctuation, and the big hit of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game However, the possibility that the result is forcibly removed and changed to a result is reduced. Although the distribution of the fluctuation pattern in FIG. 2 is performed according to the type of jackpot described above, it may be determined by a random number or the like.

  FIG. 93 (c) shows the fluctuation pattern when the result is a small hit in the low probability state. As for the special figure 2, a long fluctuation in which a fluctuation time of about 10 minutes is set is selected without generating a reach state. FIG. 93 (d) shows a variation pattern when the result is a small hit in a high probability state. In either case, a reach state is not generated, and a very short variation time variation pattern is selected. For the special figure 1 variable display game, the time is the same as in the case of the loss in the high probability state, but this is also forcibly stopped by the big hit or the small hit of the special figure 2 variable display game as in the case of the loss. It's enough time to be done. In the high probability state, if the special figure 1 variable display game is out of play or a small hit, the fluctuation time should be long enough to be forcibly stopped by the big hit or small hit of the special figure 2 variable display game. For example, it may be shorter than the time shown here.

  94 and 95, special in special game state (first special game state) based on big hit (first special result) and special game state (second special game state) based on small hit (second special result) The open / close pattern of the variable winning device is shown. FIG. 94 shows the opening / closing pattern of the special variable winning device for the big win type and the small hit type that can be selected in the special figure 1 variable display game, and FIG. The open / close pattern of the special variable prize-winning device in the hit type is shown.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 94, in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, when the big hit type is a big hit of 16R probability variation A1, the first special variable prize winning device 38 is opened according to the big prize opening / closing pattern 1 on the special figure 1. . In the special prize 1 upper winning opening / closing pattern 1, after the fanfare period of 5000 ms, an opening period of 29000 ms is set in the first round (1R). Thereafter, a round in which an interval period of 2000 ms and an open period of 29000 ms are set is repeated up to 16 rounds, and after the ending period of 11000 ms elapses, the special gaming state ends.

  The time described in the interval period and the ending period in each open / close pattern shown in FIGS. 94 and 95 is a time obtained by adding the remaining sphere processing time and the interval time or ending time. For example, the interval period in the special winning opening / closing pattern 1 in FIG. 1 is 2000 ms, of which 1400 ms in the first half is the remaining ball processing time and 600 ms in the second half is the interval time. Further, the ending period in the special prize opening / closing pattern 1 in FIG. 1 is 11000 ms, of which 1400 ms in the first half is the remaining ball processing time and 9600 ms in the second half is the ending time.

  The other open / close patterns are a fanfare period, an open period, an interval period (including the remaining ball processing time) and an ending period (including the remaining ball processing time) as shown in the figure, and the first special variable winning device is accordingly constructed. 38 or the second special variable winning device 39 is opened. Note that the special prize opening opening / closing pattern 5 in FIG. 95 of FIG. 95 is configured by opening an opening period of 27200 ms in 5R, repeating 200 ms opening and 1500 ms closing 11 times, and then opening 25000 ms. Also, in any open / close pattern, when a predetermined number of winnings are made in each round, the opening period of the round ends at that time.

  In addition, for example, when the opening / closing pattern is the same from the start of the special game state to the middle, as shown in the special figure 1 top prize opening / closing patterns 1 to 3 and the special figure 2 top prize opening opening / closing patterns 2 and 3, The effects in the device 41 may be the same so that it is difficult to determine the big hit type or the small hit type. Further, during the special gaming state, information suggestion or notification that enables discrimination of the big hit type or the small hit type may be performed.

  In addition, when a big hit is executed by any of the special winning opening opening / closing patterns 4 and 5 on the special figure 2, the effect of whether or not the long open round is executed again after the end of 4R (whether or not to continue) is provided. You may make it perform. In this case, for example, if the special winning opening / closing pattern 4 on the special figure 2 is opened, the short opening is performed from 5R to 16R which is the final round, and the big hit is completed. In FIG. 2, after the short opening which is substantially the same as 5R to 16R of the special prize opening / closing pattern 4 on the special figure 2 described above is performed, the long opening (25000 ms) is performed, and thereafter, the same long opening as the 4R is resumed. . Therefore, if the special winning opening / closing pattern 4 on the special figure 2 is used, the time from 5R to 15R is used, and if the special winning opening / closing pattern 5 on the special figure 2 is used, the time between the multiple short openings of 5R is used. If the special winning opening / closing pattern 4 on the special figure 2 is continued, the result that the long opening is not resumed (the big hit game does not continue) is notified. By notifying the result that the long release is resumed (the big hit game is continued), the player may be given a sense of expectation.

  From the above, the special results include the first special result (big hit) that can generate the first special game state and the second special game that has a lower game value that can be given to the player than the first special game state. The second special result (small hit) that can generate the state is included.

  In the following description, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure fluctuation display game. Further, when the decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a decoration special figure fluctuation display game. Further, when the big hit (first special result) and the small hit (second special result) are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a hit (special result). In addition, when the first special gaming state that is a special gaming state based on the big hit and the second special gaming state that is a special gaming state based on the small hit are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special gaming state.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by launching a game ball (pachinko ball) from a launcher (not shown) toward the game area 32. The launched game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by means of direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged in various places in the game area 32, and the general winning opening 35, the first start winning opening 36, wins the second start winning port 37, the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39, or flows into the out port 30a provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and is discharged from the game area 32 Is done. Then, when a game ball wins the general winning opening 35, the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 37, the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39, the type of the winning winning port is set. A corresponding number of prize balls are discharged to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23 of the glass frame 15 from the payout unit controlled by the payout control device 200 (see FIG. 96).

  A winning ball to the first starting winning opening 36 is detected as a starting winning ball of the special FIG. 1 variable display game by a start opening 1 switch 36a provided therein, and a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4) Is stored in the limit. When the game ball wins the first start winning slot 36 in a state where the special figure 1 variable display game can be started and the first start memory number is 0, the first start memory is generated with the start right. Is stored, the first start memory number is incremented by 1, and the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is immediately started based on the first start memory. At this time, the first start memory number is decremented by 1. . On the other hand, when the special figure 1 variable display game cannot be started immediately, for example, when the special figure 1 variable display game has already been played and the special figure 1 variable display game has not ended or is in a special gaming state In addition, when a game ball wins the first start winning opening 36, if the first start memory number is less than the upper limit number, the first start memory number is incremented by 1 and one first start memory is stored. . When the first start memory number becomes 1 or more, the special figure 1 variable display game can be started (the previous special figure 1 variable display game ends or the special game state ends). The start memory number is decremented by 1, and the special figure 1 variable display game is started based on the stored first start memory.

  A winning ball to the second starting winning port 37 is detected as a starting winning ball of the special figure 2 variable display game by a start port 2 switch 37a provided inside. In the state where the special figure 2 variable display game can be started, when a winning is made to the second start winning opening 37, the special figure 2 variable display game is immediately executed based on the winning. Also, when the special figure 2 variable display game cannot be started immediately, for example, when the special figure 2 variable display game has already been played and the special figure 2 variable display game has not ended, or when the special game state has been entered. Even if a game ball wins the second start winning opening 37, the second start memory is not generated. In the state where the special figure 2 variable display game can be started, if there is a winning at the second starting winning opening 37, the second starting memory is generated once for convenience of processing. Since it is immediately digested, the second start memory for deferring the start of the special figure 2 variable display game does not occur.

  Further, when detecting the starting winning ball, a big hit random number value, a big hit symbol random number value, and each variation pattern random number value are extracted as starting storage information, and the extracted random number value is stored in the game control device 100 (see FIG. 96). Is stored as a special figure start memory for a predetermined number of times (for example, a maximum of four times for the first start memory). The number stored in the special figure start memory is displayed on the start display number storage display unit 54 (special figure 1 hold indicator) of the collective display device 50 and also on the display device 41 of the center case 40. It is displayed as a decoration special figure start memory display.

  The game control device 100 plays the special figure 1 variation display game on the special figure 1 display 51 (first fluctuation display device) based on the winning to the first start winning opening 36 or the first start memory, and the second start. Based on the winning in the winning opening 37, the special figure 2 display game is performed by the special figure 2 display 52 (second fluctuation display device). The special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game can be executed at the same time. While one of the special figure fluctuation display games is being executed, the other special figure fluctuation display game has a special result (big hit or small hit). If it becomes, the one special figure variation display game is ended as a result other than the special result (out-of-order result).

  In the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, after the variable display is performed in the display form as shown in FIGS. 88 to 90, the predetermined result form is stopped and displayed. When the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 becomes a special result mode (a big hit result mode) corresponding to the first special result. It becomes a big hit and becomes the first special gaming state (so-called big hit state). In addition, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a small hit, a special result form (small hit result form) in which the display form of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 corresponds to the second special result. It becomes a small hit and becomes the second special gaming state (so-called small hit state). That is, the special figure 1 display 51 serves as a first fluctuation display means capable of displaying a first fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game) based on winning of a game ball in the first start winning opening 36. Further, the special figure 2 display 52 serves as a second fluctuation display means capable of displaying a second fluctuation display game (special figure 2 fluctuation display game) based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening 37.

  In response to the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game, a plurality of types of decoration identification information (numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) are displayed in a variable manner on the display device (image display device) 41. The special figure variation display game to be executed is executed. The decorative special figure fluctuation display game includes a decorative special figure 1 fluctuation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, and a decorative special figure 2 fluctuation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. Displayed in the display area. Then, a variation display is performed in accordance with the variation of the corresponding special figure variation display game, and a display corresponding to the result is performed with the derivation of the result mode in the corresponding special diagram variation display game.

  That is, the display device 41 displays a decoration variation display game in which the decoration identification information is displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the first variation display game (Special Figure 1 variation display game) and the second variation display game (Special Figure 2 variation display game) ( A decoration variation display means capable of displaying a decoration special map variation display game) is provided. It should be noted that separate display devices may be used for the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game, or only one decorative special figure variable display game may be displayed. The game machine 10 may not be provided with the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41.

  In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the special figure 2 variable display game has a higher probability of small hits, but in the normal game state that is in a low probability state, the fluctuation time is as a fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 variable display game. A very long (about 10 minutes) long variation is selected. As a result, the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game becomes inefficient in time in the normal gaming state, and the player does not select the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game aiming at winning a small hit in the normal gaming state. I have to. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, it is more advantageous for the player to make a left turn and aim at the first start winning opening 36 and play the special figure 1 variable display game. Although the long fluctuation time is about 10 minutes, it may be longer or shorter (5 minutes, 50 minutes, 10 hours, etc.).

  When the big hit occurs and the special gaming state is reached, the first special variable winning device 38 can be aimed by right-handed. In addition, when the 2nd special fluctuation prize-winning apparatus 39 is open | released in the special game state based on a big hit or a small hit, it can aim at right-handed or left-handed. After the special gaming state based on the big hit, the specific gaming state is a high probability state. In this specific gaming state, the variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is short, so it is advantageous for the player to perform the special figure 2 variable display game by making a right turn and aiming at the second start winning opening 37. It becomes. In the specific gaming state, the special variable winning device based on the small hits and the special variable winning device based on the big hits occur frequently, and the player can acquire a large amount of game balls.

FIG. 96 is a block diagram of a control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) for comprehensively controlling games, and a gaming microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a gaming microcomputer) 111 is provided. CPU section 110, input section 120 having an input port, output section 130 having an output port, a driver, etc., CPU section 110, data bus 140 connecting between input section 120 and output section 130, etc. .

  The CPU section 110 includes a game microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and receives a clock that serves as a reference for the CPU operation clock, timer interrupt, and random number generation circuit. An oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 to be generated is included. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a predetermined level of DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 so as to be operable. Is done.

  The power supply apparatus 400 includes a normal power supply including an AC-DC converter that generates the DC 32V DC voltage from a 24V AC power source, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC 12V and DC 5V from the DC 32V voltage, and the like. Unit 410, a backup power supply unit 420 for supplying power supply voltage to the RAM inside the gaming microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal for notifying the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power failure And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a reset signal.

  In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or the game control device 100, that is, the main control device 100. You may comprise so that it may provide on a board | substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing this, it is possible to reduce the cost by removing it from the object of replacement.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly, the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or after the power is shut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops below 17V, for example, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. In addition, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on or the power is restored.

  Further, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When this RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. Processing is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111B, and a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written as needed.

  The ROM 111B stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, various random number judgment values, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a work area for the CPU 111A and various signals and random number values during game control. Used as As the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used.

  In addition, the ROM 111B stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the production contents, and the presence or absence of the reach state. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to determine the variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start memory. The variation pattern table includes a loss variation pattern table selected when the result is lost, a jackpot variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include a table for determining the second half fluctuation pattern that is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (such as the second half fluctuation group table and the second half fluctuation pattern selection table), and the fluctuation before reaching the reach state. A table for determining a first-half variation pattern as a pattern (first-half variation group table, first-half variation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

  Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state advantageous to the player (special gaming state) when the special result mode is entered, the game is already derived at the stage where some of the plurality of display results are not yet derived and displayed. This means a display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is deviated from the display condition that is the special result mode even when the display device's variable display control progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. There is no display mode. And, for example, a state in which a variable display by a plurality of variable display areas is maintained (so-called full rotation reach) while maintaining a state in which special result forms are aligned. The reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device has progressed to reach a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. The display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition for the special result mode.

  Thus, for example, a decorative special figure fluctuation display game displayed on a display device corresponding to a special figure fluctuation display game fluctuates a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas on the display device. After displaying, when the display of the result mode is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle, the condition that becomes the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas (for example, the same The state in which the identification information is obtained (except for the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

  This reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expectation value is different). As a reach effect, normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), Special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and Premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. In addition, this reach state is included in a variable display mode at least in a case where a special result mode is derived in a special figure variable display game (when a big hit is achieved). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is out of date). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state that is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

  The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B, generates control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generates and outputs drive signals for the solenoid and the display device, thereby playing the gaming machine. 10 overall control is performed. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a jackpot random number for determining the hit of the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol, a variation pattern in the special figure fluctuation display game (various patterns Random number generation circuit for generating fluctuation pattern random numbers for determining the fluctuation pattern game execution time in the variable display of reach and non-reach fluctuation display, and hit random numbers for determining the hit of the usual variable display game And a clock generator for generating a clock that gives a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A and an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. Yes.

  Further, the CPU 111A acquires any one variation pattern table from among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the process related to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (big hit, small hit or miss) of the special figure variation display game, the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current gaming state, Based on the number of starting memories, etc., any one variation pattern table is selected from a plurality of variation pattern tables and acquired. Here, when executing the special figure variation display game, the CPU 111A serves as variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one variation pattern table among the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B.

  The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives a payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100, thereby Control to make it pay out. In addition, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the ball.

  The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a panel radio wave sensor 62 that detects the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a start port 1 switch 36a in the first start prize port 36, and a start port 2 in the second start prize port 37. A plurality of (1 to x, two in this embodiment) upper prize port switches 38a and second special variable prize device 39 disposed in the switch 37a, the prize port switch 35a, and the first special variable prize device 38. An interface chip that is connected to the lower major prize opening switch 39a and receives a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from these switches, and converts it into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V. Proximity I / F) 121 is provided. The proximity I / F 121 has an input range of 7V-11V, so that the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch is improperly shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is disconnected to float. It is possible to detect an abnormal state such as, and output an abnormality detection signal.

  The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the upper large winning port switch 38a, and the lower large winning port switch 39a are detected by the second input port 123. Is input. Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the panel radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when the abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124. Further, the third input port 124 has a detection signal from the fraud detection magnetic sensor 61 provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 or a glass frame open detection provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10. The detection signal of the switch 63 and the detection signal of the main body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 of the gaming machine 10 are also input. Note that a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine, and the detection signal may be input to the third input port 124.

  Of the outputs from the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the main board 100 to the test test apparatus (not shown) via the relay board 70. Furthermore, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36 a and the start port 2 switch 37 a among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121 are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123.

  As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V from the power supply device 400 in addition to a voltage such as 5 V required for normal IC operation. It has become.

  The data held in the second input port 123 is read out by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to an effective level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123. be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

  The input unit 120 also includes a fraud radio signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output when the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 detects radio waves), a payout busy signal (payout control device). 200 is a signal indicating whether or not a command can be received), a payout abnormality status signal (status signal indicating a payout abnormality), a shot ball cut switch signal (a signal indicating a lack of game balls before payout), an overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (full), a touch switch signal (input to a touch switch provided on the operation unit 24) A first input port 122 is provided which takes in a signal based on the data bus 140 and supplies the signal to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

  Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting a signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 or the like. The Schmitt buffer 125 receives these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to a reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RESET is directly output to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test board. It is configured as follows. Further, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to each port 122, 123, 124 of the input unit 120. The data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input needs to be reset to prevent malfunction of the system. However, immediately before the reset signal RESET is input, each data of the input unit 120 is reset. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control apparatus 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control apparatus 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. The one-way communication is such that no signal can be input to the game control device 100 from the side of the effect control device 300.

  In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 via a relay board 70 for data indicating special symbol information of the variable display game to a test firing test apparatus of an accredited organization (not shown) and a signal indicating the probability status of jackpot. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (a mass-produced product) installed in the game shop. A detection signal output from the proximity I / F 121, such as a start port switch, that is not required to be processed is supplied to the test test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, detection signals that cannot be supplied to the test firing test apparatus as they are, such as the magnetic sensor 61 and the panel radio wave sensor 62, are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, the gaming machine controls the game. An error signal indicating that the state is not possible is supplied from the data bus 140 to the trial test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

  In addition, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 to open / close data of an upper large prize opening solenoid 38b for opening the first special variable winning prize apparatus 38 and a lower large prize opening solenoid 39b for opening the second special variable winning prize apparatus 39. Is output. Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line connected to the anode terminal of the LED according to the contents displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information related to the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store, and stores information about the gaming machine 10. It can be supplied to an external device. Further, a launch permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

  Further, the output unit 130 receives a switching data signal of the upper large prize opening solenoid 38b and the lower large prize opening solenoid 39b output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal (driving). Circuit) 138a, a second driver 138b for outputting an ON / OFF drive signal for a segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 135, and a collective display device output from the fourth output port 136 A third driver 138c that outputs an on / off drive signal for a digit line on the current draw side of 50, and a third driver 138c that outputs an external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device to the external information terminal board 71 Four drivers 138d are provided.

  The first driver 138a is supplied with DC32V from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Also, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for drawing out the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

  A dynamic drive method is achieved by flowing a current to the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs 12V, and drawing the current through the segment line from the cathode terminal by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in step 1 so that the LEDs are lit. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with DC12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. Note that the buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output board 130 of the game control apparatus 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be capable of two-way communication so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 through serial communication. Note that such data transmission / reception is performed using a serial communication terminal included in the gaming microcomputer 111 in the same manner as a normal general-purpose microprocessor, and thus ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

  Although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the first starting winning port 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the second starting winning port 37, the winning port switch 35a, the upper prize port switch The non-contact type magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as proximity) that detects a game ball by utilizing a phenomenon that a magnetic field changes when a metal comes close to the coil. Called switch). In addition, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 and the like of the gaming machine 10 and the body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 and the like include a micro switch having a mechanical contact. Can be used.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The effect control device 300 is for displaying video on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 and the main control microcomputer 311, similarly to the game microcomputer 111. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor for performing the image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling output of sound for reproducing various melody and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

  The main control microcomputer 311 stores a program ROM 321 composed of a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing a program executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 providing a work area, and stored contents even when power is not supplied in the event of a power failure. An FeRAM 323 that can be held is connected to an RTC (real-time clock) 338 that serves as a clock means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day of the week, time, etc.). A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, decides the contents of the presentation and instructs the contents of the output video to the VDP 312, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce the sound, lights the decoration lamp, motors And control of solenoid drive control and production time management.

  The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing images. The VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

  Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

  From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the video of the display device 41 and lighting of the decoration lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing STS is input. The VDP 312 informs the main control microcomputer 311 that it is waiting to receive commands and data from the interrupt control signals INT0 to n and the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT and the like are also input.

  The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by an LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is input to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

  A sound ROM 327 storing sound data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. An interrupt signal INT is input from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier that drives an upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and a lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. An ornamental special figure holding number command, a decorative special figure command, a variation command, a stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 via this command I / F 331 are produced as a production control command signal (production command ). Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. Yes.

  The effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), and a glass frame 15. Frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 and the like) having LEDs (light emitting diodes) and board effects provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). There is provided a board effect movable body control circuit 334 that drives and controls the device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41). These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address / data bus 340. Note that a frame effect device having a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor that operates an effect device) is provided on the glass frame 15, and a frame effect movable body control circuit that drives and controls the frame effect device is provided. good.

  Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25 a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 29 provided on the glass frame 15, an initial position of a motor in the board effect device 44, and the like. The function of detecting the on / off state of the effect actor switch 47 (effect motor switch) for detecting the sound and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 and the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 And a switch input circuit 336 for inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply apparatus 400 drives a motor or a solenoid to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control apparatus 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled thereby. In addition to DC32V, display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motors and LEDs, and DC5V as the power supply voltage for command I / F 331, a voltage of DC15V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers is generated. Is configured to do. Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC − for generating DC 3.3 V or DC 1.2 V based on DC 5 V is used. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply apparatus 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device into a reset state. In addition, VDP 312 (VDRESET signal), sound source LSI 314, amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving speakers, and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET) for driving and controlling lamps and motors, etc., are output from main control microcomputer 311. Signal) to reset them. In addition, a cooling FAN 45 that cools various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven in a state in which the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

  In these control circuits, on the basis of the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 1 switch 36a provided in the first start winning port 36, the random number for jackpot determination of the special figure 1 variable display game is extracted. The first start memory is stored in the RAM 111C. The random number value for determining the big hit in the first start-up memory is compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and the process of determining the hit or variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game is performed. Further, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the second start winning port 37, the random number for determining the big hit of the special figure 2 variable display game is extracted to the second RAM 111C. Store the starting memory. The random number value for determining the big hit in the second start-up memory is compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining a hit or variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game is performed. The second start memory can be generated only in a state where the special figure 2 variable display game can be started, and temporarily stores information necessary for starting the special figure 2 variable display game. The special figure 2 variable display game is not suspended.

  Then, the CPU 111 </ b> A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game to the effect control device 300. Then, after the identification symbol (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, a process for displaying a special figure fluctuation display game to be stopped is performed. In other words, the game control device 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on winning in the start winning area (first start winning opening 36, second start winning opening 37) of the game balls flowing down the game area 32. Make a means.

  In addition, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 performs a process of displaying the decoration special figure change display game corresponding to the special figure change display game. Furthermore, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the production state setting, the sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b, the process of controlling the light emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed. That is, the production control device 300 serves as production control means for controlling production related to a game (such as a variable display game).

  Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit or a small hit, and also displays the special game. Performs processing to generate a state. In the process of generating the special game state, the CPU 111A, for example, can open the opening / closing door 38c of the first special variable prize winning device 38 by the top big prize opening solenoid 38b and allow the game ball to flow into the top big prize opening. Control. Alternatively, the opening / closing door 39c of the second special variable prize winning device 39 is opened by the lower big prize winning solenoid 39b, and control is performed so that the game ball can flow into the lower big prize winning opening.

  Then, the special winning opening is opened until a predetermined number (for example, nine) of game balls wins the special winning opening or a predetermined opening time elapses from the opening of the large winning opening. Opening is defined as one round, and control (cycle game) is performed to continue (repeat) this for a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a special winning opening / closing control means for performing control for opening / closing the special winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of order, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are controlled to display the result form of the deviation.

  In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a gaming state after the special gaming state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. This high probability state is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than the low probability state. Moreover, even if it becomes a high probability state based on the result aspect of either the special figure 1 fluctuation display game or the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game Both are in a high probability state.

  Hereinafter, control of the gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. Control processing by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes main processing shown in FIGS. 98 and 99 and timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 102 performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIG. 98, first, after performing the process for prohibiting the interrupt (step X1), the stack pointer that is the start address of the area in which the value of the register or the like is saved when the interrupt occurs A stack pointer setting process (step X2) is set. Next, register bank 0 is designated (step X3), and the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step X4). In the case of the present embodiment, the RAM address range is 0000h to 01FFh, the upper order is 00h or 01h, and the top 00h is set in step X4. Next, a firing stop signal is output to set the firing permission signal to a prohibited state (step X5). The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing stop signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited.

  Thereafter, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step X6), and a process for setting a power-on delay timer is performed (step X7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, a program of slave control means (for example, payout control apparatus 200 or effect control apparatus 300) that performs various controls in accordance with instructions from the game control apparatus 100 serving as the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for normal startup is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 is first started up, and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the production control device 300) is started up. Can avoid missing commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the start of the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the effect control device 300, etc.) when the power is turned on. A standby means for setting the standby time is provided.

  In addition, the power-on delay timer is counted using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not subject to validity determination) that is not subject to RAM validity determination (checksum calculation). Thereby, when calculating check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area, so that it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

  Note that an initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122, and the operation of the initialization switch 112 is reliably performed by reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time. It can be detected. In other words, if the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch 112 is operated after waiting for the standby time to elapse, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from when the power is turned on until the standby time elapses. It is necessary to continue doing. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by operating immediately after turning on the power without performing such troublesome operations. Can be prevented from being accepted.

  After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step X7), the process of measuring the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps X8 to X12) is performed. First, the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read via the port and the data bus and the number of times (for example, twice) to check is set (step X8) to determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. Perform (Step X9).

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step X9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step X8 (step X10). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (step X10; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step X9). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (step X10; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, it waits for the power to the gaming machine to be cut off. In this way, it is possible to prevent a power outage from being erroneously detected due to noise, etc. by determining that a power outage has occurred when the power outage monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, and appropriately deal with problems at power-on. can do.

  That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100 that constitutes the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of power-on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power shut-off are retained, so backup processing is performed when a power failure occurs here There is no need. For this reason, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control burden can be reduced.

  On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step X9; N), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step X11), and the timer value is 0? Is determined (step X12). When the value of the timer is not 0 (step X12; N), that is, when the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step X8). When the value of the timer is 0 (step X12; Y), that is, when the standby time has ended, access to a read / write RWM (read / write memory) such as a RAM or EEPROM is permitted (step X13). ), Off-data is output to all output ports (set to a state in which there is no output) (step X14).

  Next, a serial port (a port pre-installed in the gaming microcomputer 111 and used in this embodiment for communication with the production control device 300 and the payout control device 200) is set (step X15) and read first. Whether the initialization switch has been turned on is determined from the state of the first input port 122 (step X16).

  When the initialization switch is OFF (step X16; N), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5Ah) (step X17). If so (step X17; Y), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step X18). If the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step X18; Y), a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step X19). It is determined whether or not the checksums match (step X20). If the checksums match (step X20; Y), the process proceeds to step X21 in FIG.

  Further, when it is determined that the initialization switch is on (step X16; Y), or when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step X17; N or step X18; N) If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (step X20; N), the process proceeds to step X23 in FIG. 99 to perform initialization processing. That is, the initialization switch constitutes an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make.

  In step X21 of FIG. 99, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step X21). The areas to be initialized here are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. Note that the busy signal flag area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 is ready to accept a command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. Undefined state. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area for storing the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and an undefined state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal has not been determined.

  After that, a command at the time of power failure restoration corresponding to the special figure status prepared for rationally executing the special figure game process described later is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step X22). Proceed to X28. In this embodiment, in step X22, a plurality of commands such as a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a probability information command, and a screen designation command are transmitted. As for the screen designation command, if both special figure 1 and special figure 2 are in normal processing, which will be described later, that is, if the special figure variation display game is neither being executed nor being in a special game state, the customer is waiting. Send a waiting demo screen command, otherwise send a recovery screen command. Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, an effect count information command and a high probability count information command are also transmitted.

  On the other hand, when jumping from step X16, X17, X18, X20 to step X23, the RAM access prohibited area is set to access permitted (step X23), and all the areas including the busy signal flag area and the touch switch signal state monitoring area are set. The RAM area is cleared to 0 (step X24), and the RAM access prohibition area is set to access prohibition (step X25). Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step X26). The area to be initialized here is an area relating to the setting of the customer waiting demonstration area and the production mode. Then, the RAM initialization command is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step X27), and the process proceeds to step X28. In the case of the present embodiment, in step X27, a model designation command, a special figure 1 hold number command, a probability information command, a RAM initialization command (a customer waiting demonstration screen is displayed and light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) are displayed. And a plurality of commands such as a command for informing the RAM initialization. Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, an effect count information command and a high probability count information command are also transmitted.

  In step X28, a process of starting a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC for giving a trigger for updating a random number supplied to the random number generation circuit.

  After the CTC activation process in step X28, a process for setting the activation of the random number generation circuit is performed (step X29). Specifically, the CPU 111A performs setting of a code (specified value) for starting the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Also, a bit transposition pattern of a hard random number (here, a big hit random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is set. Bit transposition pattern is a method of permutation when the extracted random bit arrangement (the arrangement before the upper bit transposition) is replaced in a predetermined order and stored as a different bit arrangement (the arrangement after the lower bit transposition). It is a pattern that defines By replacing the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may arbitrarily set it.

  Thereafter, the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of power-on is extracted, and various corresponding initial value random numbers (in the case of this embodiment, random numbers that determine the hit pattern of the special figure) An initial value (start value) of (big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number) is saved in a predetermined area of the RWM (step X30), and an interrupt is permitted (step X31). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in this embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes every time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of random numbers generated by software, making it difficult for a player to obtain illegal random numbers.

  Subsequently, an initial value random number update process (step X32) is performed to update the values of various initial value random numbers to break the regularity of the random numbers. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the small hit symbol random number are configured to be generated using random numbers generated by a random number generation circuit. However, the big hit random number is a so-called “high-speed counter” that is updated based on a clock having a speed equal to or higher than the operation clock of the CPU. It is a “low speed counter” that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing) having the same cycle. The big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number employ a so-called “initial value changing method” in which the start value is changed by using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random number makes a round. Each random number may be a counter update by +1 or −1, or may be a random update in which all values within the range appear without overlapping until one round is reached. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

  After the initial value random number update process in step X32, the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read via the port and the data bus and the number of times (for example, twice) to check is set (step X33). It is determined whether the monitoring signal is on (step X34). When the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step X34; N), the process returns to the initial value random number update process (step X32). That is, when no power failure has occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop processing) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step X32) (step X31), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is executed with priority, and the timer interrupt Can be prevented from being interrupted by waiting for the initial value random number update process.

  Note that the initial value random number update process in step X32 includes a method of performing an initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process in addition to the main process. In order to avoid execution of the value random number update process, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update to cancel the interrupt. If the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed in the main process and only the main process is performed, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. There is an advantage that it is simplified.

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step X34; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in step X33 (step X35). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (step X35; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step X34). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks (step X35; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, processing for temporarily prohibiting interruption (step X36), all A process of outputting off data to the output port (step X37) is performed.

  Thereafter, the power failure inspection region check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection region 1 (step X38), and the power failure inspection region check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection region 2 (step X39). Furthermore, after performing a checksum calculation process (step X40) for calculating a checksum when the RWM is powered off, and a process for saving the calculated checksum (step X41), a process for prohibiting access to the RWM (step X42) ) And wait for the gaming machine to be turned off. In this way, the check data is saved in the power failure inspection area and the checksum at the time of power shutoff is calculated to determine whether the information stored in the RWM is correctly backed up before the power shuts down. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

  From the above, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) for overall control of the game, and the slave control means (payout control apparatus 200, effect control apparatus 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means. ), The main control means is a standby means (game control apparatus) for setting a predetermined standby time for delaying the start of the main control means and waiting for the start of the slave control device when the power is turned on. 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined waiting time.

  The power supply device 400 includes a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices. The power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When a power failure monitoring signal is continuously received over a predetermined period, it is determined that a power failure has occurred.

  Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is based on the RAM 111C capable of storing data, the initialization operation unit (initialization switch) capable of being operated from the outside, and the initialization operation unit being operated. An initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing data stored in the RAM 111C, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the waiting time.

  Further, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) permits access to the RAM 111C after the standby time has elapsed.

[Checksum calculation processing]
FIG. 100 shows the checksum calculation process (steps X19 and X40) in the main process described above. In this checksum calculation process, first, the start address of the RWM is set as the start value of the calculated address (step X51), the number of repetitions is set (step X52), and “0” is set as the calculated value (step X53). . The number of bytes of RAM used is set as the number of repetitions.

  Thereafter, a value obtained by adding the calculated value to the content of the calculated address is set as a new calculated value (step X54), the calculated address is updated by +1 (step X55), the number of repetitions is updated by -1 (step X56), and a checksum is obtained. It is determined whether the calculation of has been completed (step X57). If the calculation has not been completed (step X57: N), the process returns to step X54 and the above processing is repeated. If the calculation is completed (step X57: Y), the checksum calculation process is ended.

[Initial value random number update processing]
FIG. 101 shows the initial value random number update process (step X32) in the main process described above. In this initial value random number update process, first, the big hit symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (step X61), the small hit symbol initial value random number 1 is updated by +1 (step X62), and the initial value random number update process is terminated. Here, the “big hit symbol initial value random number” is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the big hit stop symbol in the special figure fluctuation display game, and the “small hit symbol initial value random number” is the special figure fluctuation display game. It is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the small hit stop symbol. In this way, the randomness of the random number can be improved by continuing to increment the initial value random number as long as time permits in the main process.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. That is, an interrupt routine started at a predetermined cycle. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and the timer interrupt process in FIG. 102 is started.

  When timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is designated (step X101). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing a register saving process in which a value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in the main process) is transferred to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step X102). At Step X102, the same processing as Step X4 in the main processing is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, input processing (step X103) is performed to input from various sensors and switches and to acquire signals, that is, to read the state of each input port. Then, output processing (step X104) for performing drive control of actuators such as solenoids (upper large winning opening solenoid 38b, lower large winning opening solenoid 39b) is performed based on output data set in various processes. In addition, when the signal for stopping the firing is output in step X5 in the main process, a signal for permitting the firing is output by performing this output process, and the launch permitting signal can be set to the permitted state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, no signal processing or the like is performed. In addition, the launch permission signal is a first signal indicating a launch permission state viewed from the game control device, and a second signal (launch permission signal) indicating the launch permission state viewed from the payout control device is also a payout control. Generated in the device and output to the launch controller. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the game ball can be launched.

  Next, a payout command transmission process (step X105), a random number update process 1 (step X106), and a random number update process 2 (step X107) for outputting commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control apparatus 200 are performed. Thereafter, it is monitored whether there is a normal signal input from the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the winning port switch 35a, the upper large winning port switch 38a, and the lower large winning port switch 39a, and error monitoring. A prize opening switch / state monitoring process (step X108) for performing (such as whether the front frame or the glass frame is open) is performed.

  Next, a start port switch monitoring process (step X109) for monitoring winning of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is performed. In the start port switch monitoring process, various random numbers (such as big hit random numbers) are extracted based on winning of game balls to the first start winning port 36 and the second starting winning port 37. And the special figure 1 game process (step X110) which performs the process regarding a special figure 1 fluctuation display game, and the special figure 2 game process (step X111) which performs the process regarding a special figure 2 fluctuation display game are performed.

Next, a segment LED editing process (step X112) that is provided in the gaming machine 10 and drives a segment LED that displays special information variation display games and various information related to the game to display desired contents, and a magnetic sensor 61. Magnet fraud monitoring process (step X113) that performs processing to check whether there is an abnormality by checking the detection signal from the board, and board fraud that performs processing to check the detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62 to determine whether there is any abnormality A monitoring process (step X114) is performed. Further, external information editing processing (step X115) for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer is performed, and the timer interrupt processing is terminated.
Here, in the present embodiment, the process for restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process for allowing the interrupt) and the process for restoring the designation of the register bank (that is, the process for designating the register bank 0) Automatically at the time of the timer interrupt processing. Depending on the CPU used, there is a gaming machine that needs to instruct execution of processing for restoring the interrupt disabled state and processing for restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Input processing]
Next, details of the input process (step X103) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 103, in the input processing, first, the state of the switch detection signal taken into the input port 1, that is, the first input port 122 is read (step X121). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the bit state is cleared (step X122), and the read state of the input port 1 is saved (stored) in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (step S122). X123).

Next, the address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 123 is prepared (step X124), and the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared (step X125).
Then, after preparing unused bit data (step X126), bit data to be inverted is prepared (step X127), and a switch reading process (step X128) is performed.

Thereafter, the address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 124 is prepared (step X129), and the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM is prepared (step X130).
Then, after preparing unused bit data (step X131), bit data to be inverted is prepared (step X132), switch reading processing (step X133) is performed, and the input processing is terminated.

In this embodiment, “preparation” means setting a value in a register, but is not limited to this, and a value may be set in an RWM or other memory.
In addition, as information about the unused bit data and the bit data to be inverted, information prepared for each input port is used.

[Switch read processing]
Next, details of the switch reading process (steps X128 and X133) in the above-described input process will be described. As shown in FIG. 104, in the switch reading process, first, the state of the signal taken into the target input port is read (step X141). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (step X142), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step X143), and then the port input state 1 of the target switch control area Is saved (stored) (step X144). Thereafter, the process waits for the delay time (0.1 ms) until the second reading to elapse (step X145).

  When the delay time (0.1 ms) elapses, a second reading of the state of the signal taken into the target input port is performed (step X146). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (step X147), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step X148), and then the port input state 2 of the target switch control area (Save) (step X149). After that, a definite bit pattern is created in which the same bit is 1 in the first and second readings, and a different bit is 0 (step X150), and the logical product of the definite bit pattern and port input state 2 is calculated. The confirmation bit is set (step X151).

  Next, an unconfirmed bit pattern is created in which the same bit in the first and second readings is 0, and a different bit is 1 (step X152), and the logic between the unconfirmed bit pattern and the final state at the previous interrupt The product is taken and used as the previous held bit (step X153). As a result, it is possible to obtain a signal state from which noise due to chattering of the switch or the like is removed. Then, the current fixed bit and the previous held bit are combined and saved as the current finalized state (step X154), the exclusive OR of the previous and current finalized state is taken and saved as the rising edge (step X155), The switch reading process ends.

  When the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch reading is performed once for each interrupt processing, and the signal changes by comparing the result with the previous reading. There is a method for determining whether or not the switch has been made. However, if the switch state read by the previous interrupt is lost before the next interrupt processing, the correct determination may not be made. On the other hand, it is possible to avoid the above-described problems by performing the switch reading process twice in one interrupt process at a predetermined time difference as in the present embodiment.

[Output processing]
Next, details of the output process (step X104) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 105, in the output process, first, off data is output (reset) to the port 135 (see FIG. 96) for outputting the segment data of the batch display device (LED) 50 (step X161). Next, the data to be output to the solenoid output port 134 that outputs the data of the upper large winning opening solenoid 38b and the lower large winning opening solenoid 39b is synthesized and output (step X162).

  Then, the digit counter value for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device (LED) 50 is updated (step X163), and the output data of the LED digit line corresponding to the digit counter value is acquired (step S163). X164), the acquired information and the external information data are synthesized (step X165). Then, the combined data is output to the digit output port 136 and the external information output port 137 (step X166). Thereafter, the segment line output data is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the digit counter value (step X167), and the loaded data is output to the segment output port 135 (step X168).

  Subsequently, the data to be output to the external information terminal board 71 is loaded and combined (step X169), the combined data and the output data for launch permission are combined (step X170), and the combined data is output for external information output. Output to the port 137 (step X171). Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (Step X172). Thereafter, the data output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (Step X173).

  Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. (Step X174). Furthermore, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal of the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 ( Step X175). Then, the data output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (Step X176) and the output process is terminated.

[Payout command transmission processing]
Next, details of the payout command transmission process (step X105) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 106, in the payout command transmission process, first, it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step X181).

  The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111C of the game control device 100, and a winning number counter area 1 and a winning number counter area 2 are provided. The winning number counter area 1 is an area used to transmit a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out a prize ball, and a prize for which a payout command has not yet been transmitted. The winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 serves as a prize ball command counter capable of storing information relating to a prize ball command.

  The winning number counter area 2 is for transmitting a main winning ball signal to be output to an external device every time the number of winning balls (scheduled number of payouts) generated by winning a winning opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). The winning data corresponding to the winning ball which is the area to be used and for which the main winning ball signal generation processing is not performed is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 serves as a main winning ball signal counter capable of storing information related to the main winning ball signal. In addition to the main prize ball signal, a payout prize ball signal is output to the external device every time the number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout control apparatus 200 reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). By checking these two signals, it is possible to monitor unauthorized payout.

  Each of these winning number counter areas is provided with a winning number counter area for each of the number of winning balls set for each winning opening (for example, three winning balls, ten winning balls, and 14 winning balls). Accordingly, 1 is added to the count number of the corresponding winning number counter area based on the winning at the winning opening. That is, information on the winning can be stored in units of one winning in the winning area. The win counter area 1 is assigned a larger area than the win counter area 2 so that more win data can be stored. This is because the main award ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the transmission destination, whereas the payout command may be suspended depending on the state of the payout control device 200 that is the transmission destination. This is because data may be accumulated.

  In the process of checking whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step X181), among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls, “0” is displayed in the winning number counter area to be checked. Judge whether there is any count number. If there is no count number (step X181: N), the address of the winning number counter area to be checked is updated (step X182), and it is determined whether the checking of the counting numbers of all the winning number counter areas is completed. (Step X183). If it is determined that all checks have been completed (step X183; Y), the process proceeds to step X192. On the other hand, if it is determined that all checks have not been completed (step X183; N), the process returns to step X181 and the above processing is repeated.

  If it is determined in step X181 that there is a count number (step X181; Y), the count number in the target winning number counter area is subtracted (-1) (step X184), and the target winning number counter is counted. The number of payouts corresponding to the area is acquired (step X185). Then, the value of the prize ball remaining area and the acquired payout number are added to obtain a new prize ball remaining number (step X186), and the result is saved in the prize ball remaining area (step X187). As the value of the remaining prize ball area before this processing, a fraction that does not satisfy a predetermined number that is a reference for output of the main prize ball signal is stored.

  Thereafter, 10 is subtracted from the addition result, which is a predetermined number serving as a reference for the output of the main prize ball signal (step X188), and it is determined whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (step X189). When the subtraction result is not 0 or more (step X189; N), the process proceeds to step X192. In this case, the result of the subtraction is not saved in the prize ball remaining area, so the value before the subtraction is stored in the prize ball remaining area. When the subtraction result is 0 or more (step X189; Y), the value of the main prize ball signal output frequency area is updated by +1 (step X190), and the subtraction result is saved in the prize ball remaining area (step X191). Return to Step X188.

  As a result, the main winning ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an external information output means for outputting a main prize ball signal including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out as a result of winning a game ball to a predetermined prize area to the outside of the gaming machine. . By outputting the main prize ball signal, when game ball payouts such as during big hits are concentrated, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed with the payout of game balls, and the exact generated during the big hit is delayed. It is possible to prevent a problem that the number of prize balls cannot be counted.

  In step X192, if the payout command transmission timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step X192), and it is determined whether or not the payout command transmission timer is 0 (step X193). If the payout command transmission timer is not 0 (step X193; N), the payout command transmission process is terminated. If the payout command transmission timer is 0 (step X193; Y), it is determined whether the payout busy signal flag is busy (step X194).

  The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start payout control. When the payout control cannot be started immediately, the payout busy signal is turned on. That is, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not a payout command (prize ball command) can be received. That is, the payout busy signal is a status signal indicating whether or not the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start payout control. The payout busy signal flag is information indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start payout control based on the state of the payout busy signal. Either a busy state in which control cannot be started immediately or an undefined state in which the state is undefined is set.

  The indefinite state is set, for example, by clearing the busy signal flag area in the process at power-on. This indefinite state means that the idle state or the busy state is set based on the state of the payout busy signal being maintained for a predetermined period in a state indicating that the payout control can be started immediately or cannot be executed. To eliminate. That is, when a power failure occurs and returns from the power failure, even if a state signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200, a prize ball command is immediately sent to the payout control device 200. A prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 200 in response to the continuous output of a state signal indicating that payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 over a predetermined period. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the prize ball command and knows that the payout process can be performed immediately, and then transmits the prize ball command, and the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed. It can be prevented from being broken.

  If the payout busy signal flag is busy (step X194; Y), the payout command transmission process is terminated. In this case, it is determined that the busy state is also in an indefinite state. In this way, when the payout control device 200 cannot immediately start payout control and does not transmit a payout command, it is possible to perform useless processing by not performing subsequent processing relating to the transmission of the payout command. To prevent and reduce the burden of control.

  If the payout busy signal flag is not busy (step X194; N), it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step X195). In the process of checking whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step X195), among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls, “0” is displayed in the winning number counter area to be checked. Judge whether there is any count number.

  If there is no count number in the winning number counter area to be checked (step X195; N), the address of the winning number counter area to be checked is updated (step X196), and all the winning number counter areas are updated. It is determined whether the count number has been checked (step X197). If it is determined in this determination that all checks have been completed (step X197; Y), the payout command transmission process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step X197; N), the process returns to step X195 and the above processing is repeated.

  If it is determined in step X195 that there is a count number in the winning counter area to be checked (step X195; Y), the count number in the target winning counter area is updated by -1 (step X198), a payout command corresponding to the address of the target winning number counter area 1 is acquired (step X199). Then, the acquired command is written in the payout serial transmission buffer (step X200), the initial value is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step X201), and the payout command transmission process is terminated. The payout command transmission timer is for managing transmission intervals, and for example, 200 ms is set as an initial value.

  As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one win in the winning area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 performs control for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the payout command. That is, the game control device 100 indicates that the state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start payout control can start payout control. A prize ball command transmitting means for transmitting a prize ball command to the payout control means.

  As described above, the game control device 100 performs control to transmit the award ball command based on the state signal output from the payout control device 200, so that the award is given only when the payout control device 200 can immediately execute payout control. A ball command will be sent. As a result, data corresponding to a winning that has not yet been paid out is held on the game control device 100 side, so that it is backed up by the game control device 100 in the event of a power failure and backed up to the payout control device 200. Even if it does not have the function to do, accurate payout control can be realized.

  In a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2000-312759), when a power-off state occurs for some reason, the payout control device 200 backs up data in its storage means and immediately before power-off. The payout control state based on the data is maintained. However, the conventional gaming machine requires a function for backing up, leading to a problem of increasing costs. According to the present invention, accurate payout control can be realized without providing the payout control apparatus 200 with a function for backing up.

  Also, since the main prize ball signal transmitted to the external device is output regardless of the state of the payout busy signal, the main prize ball signal can be output without delay. The time can be accurately grasped, for example, the base value can be grasped accurately. Also, since the prize ball command counter capable of storing information relating to the prize ball command and the main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information relating to the main prize ball signal are separately provided, the prize ball command and the main prize ball having different transmission timings are provided. Signal information can be managed separately, and information can be managed reliably.

  From the above, the game control is performed in an integrated manner, and the winning areas provided in the gaming area 32 (the first starting winning port 36, the second starting winning port 37, the general winning port 35, the first special variable winning device 38). , A game control means (game control apparatus 100) for transmitting a prize ball command based on the winning of a game ball to the second special variable prize winning device 39), and a game based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means. A payout control means (payout control apparatus 200) that performs payout control of the ball, and the game control means outputs a status signal indicating whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means can start payout control. Based on (busy signal), a control is performed to transmit a prize ball command to the payout control means. When a power failure occurs and the power is restored from the power failure, a status signal indicating that payout control can be started from the payout control means Is output In response to the fact that the prize signal is not immediately transmitted to the payout control means, and the state signal indicating that the payout control means can start the payout control is continuously output for a predetermined period. The prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means.

  In addition, the game area 32 has different winning areas (first start winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 37, general winning opening 35, first special variable winning apparatus 38, second special variable winning apparatus 39). A plurality of game control means (game control device 100) is provided for each prize ball number, and a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of specifying whether or not a prize ball command for instructing payout control of game balls is transmitted. When the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started and there is an unsent prize ball command in each prize ball command counter, the prize ball command is sent to the payout control means (payout control device 200). Before the identification of whether or not there is an unsent prize ball command in each prize ball command counter. I will do it.

  In addition to performing overall game control, a predetermined winning area (first start winning port 36, second starting winning port 37, general winning port 35, first special variable winning device 38, second special variable winning device 39). ) A game control means (game control device 100) for transmitting a prize ball command based on winning of a game ball to the game ball, and a payout control for performing game ball payout control based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means. Means (payout control device 200), and the game control means can start the payout control with a status signal output from the payout control means indicating whether or not the payout control means can start payout control. A prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) for sending a prize ball command to the payout control means, and the number of prize balls determined to be paid out when a game ball is won in a predetermined prize area. Prize ball containing information about And an external information output means (game control device 100) for outputting the number (main prize ball signal) to the outside of the gaming machine, and the external information output means is configured so that the status signal output from the payout control means is a payout control means. The award ball signal is output regardless of whether or not the payout control can be started.

  In addition, the prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) immediately receives a prize ball command even when a power failure occurs and the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started when the power failure is restored. Is not transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and a prize ball command is issued in response to a state in which the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started for a predetermined period of time. This means that it is transmitted to the payout control means.

  Further, the game control means (game control device 100) has a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of storing information relating to a prize ball command and a prize capable of storing information relating to a prize ball signal (main prize ball signal). A ball signal counter (game control device 100), and the prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) is a predetermined winning area (first start winning port 36, second start winning port 37, general winning port 35). The first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39) generate a prize ball command as a unit, and the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started. The prize ball command counter (game control apparatus 100) is configured to transmit the prize ball command to the payout control means (payout control apparatus 200). Is memorable Updates are made when a game ball is won in a predetermined winning area, and the number of award ball commands that have not been transmitted can be stored by updating the game ball in response to the transmission of a prize ball command to the payout control means. The external information output means accumulates the number of winning balls determined to be paid out in accordance with the winning of game balls to a predetermined winning area, and outputs a winning ball signal to the outside of the gaming machine every time the accumulated value reaches a predetermined number. The winning ball signal counter is capable of storing information of the winning in units of one winning in a predetermined winning area, and is updated when a game ball is won in the predetermined winning area, By updating in accordance with the accumulation process of the number of prize balls by the external information output means, the number of prize balls that have not yet been accumulated can be stored.

[Random number update process 1]
FIG. 107 shows the random number update process 1 (step X106) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 102). The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number and the small hit symbol random number that are the targets of the initial value random number update process. In this random number update process 1, it is first determined whether or not the big hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step X221).

  When the big hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step X221; N), it is determined whether the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step X224). When the big hit symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step X221; Y), the big hit symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step X222), and the next initial value of the loaded big hit symbol random number is handled. Set to a register (start value setting register) that holds a start value of a random number counter (random number area) to be executed (step X223). Thereafter, it is determined whether the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step X224).

  If the small hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step X224; N), the random number update processing 1 is terminated. When the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step X224; Y), the small hit symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step X225), and the next initial value of the loaded small hit symbol random number is set. The value is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step X226), and the random number update process 1 is terminated.

[Random number update process 2]
FIG. 108 shows the random number update process 2 (step X107) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 102). The random number update process 2 is a process for updating the fluctuation pattern random number for determining the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display game of the special figures 1 and 2. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, there are 1-byte random numbers (variation pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and 2-byte random numbers (variation pattern random number 1) as the variation pattern random numbers. Each time an interrupt occurs, the update target is switched and processed. In addition, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed for different interrupts for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, the update of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 (reach variation mode determining random number) by the random number update processing 2 executed in one interrupt processing for the main processing is executed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte. It is comprised so that.

  In this random number update process 2, first, a random number update scan counter for sequentially specifying which of the plurality of random numbers to be updated is the target of the current update process is updated (step X231). Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (step X232). Then, the random number upper limit determination value is acquired from the table referred to based on the calculated address (step X233). The table to be referred to at this time stores an upper limit determination value for each type of random number, that is, a value for determining whether or not the random number has made a round.

  Subsequently, for example, the value of the M1 counter provided in the gaming microcomputer in this embodiment is loaded (step X234). By using the value of the M1 counter, randomness can be given to the random number. Next, a mask value for masking the value of the M1 counter is acquired, and the value of the M1 counter is masked (step X235). Note that the mask value is a bit number that varies depending on the random number to be updated. For example, when the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter and the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 Is updated to the lower 4 bits of the M1 counter. This is because the upper limit varies depending on the type of random number. As a mask value, when the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter are updated. When the upper 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 is updated. Although 4 bits have been exemplified, the numerical value is an example and the present invention is not limited to this.

  Next, it is determined whether the random number area (random number counter) to be updated is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step X236). When the random number area is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step X236; Y), the remaining value by masking the value of the M1 counter with the upper 1 byte as a mask value as the addition value (hereinafter referred to as this) The mask update value obtained by adding “1” to the masked value is set, the lower 1 byte is set to “0” (step X237), and the process proceeds to step X239. If the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step X236; N), the upper 1 byte is set to “0” as the addition value, and the lower 1 byte is set to the mask update value (step X238), and proceeds to step X239. Note that “1” is added to the masked value because the masked value may be “0”, and if “0” is added later, it does not change from the value before the addition, so this is avoided. is there.

  Then, it is determined whether the random number to be updated is a 2-byte random number (step X239). If it is a 2-byte random number (step X239; Y), the value (2 bytes) of the random number area to be updated is set (step X240). The process proceeds to step X242. If the random number to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (step X239; N), “0” is set as the upper 1 byte of the random value, and the value of the random number area to be updated (1 byte) as the lower 1 byte of the random value. ) Is set (step X241), and the process proceeds to step X242.

  In step X242, a value obtained by adding the addition value determined in step X237 or X238 to the random value is set as a new random value, and it is determined whether this new random value is larger than the upper limit determination value acquired in step X233 (step X243). If the new random value is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step X243; N), the new random value is saved in the random number area below the 1-byte random number or 2-byte random number (step X245). If the new random value is larger than the upper limit determination value (step X243; Y), a value obtained by subtracting the upper limit determination value from the new random value is set as a new new random value (step X244). Save in the random number area below the byte random number or the 2-byte random number (step X245).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the updated random number is a 2-byte random number (step X246). If the updated random number is not a 2-byte random number (step X246; N), the random number update processing 2 is terminated. If it is a 2-byte random number (step X246; Y), a new random number value (or a value when a new random number is calculated again) is saved in the random number area above the 2-byte random number (step X247). ), The random number update process 2 is terminated.

  In this way, the CPU 111A updates the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of FIG. 1 and FIG. Therefore, the CPU 111A, among various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of game balls into the starting area of the first starting winning port 36 and the second starting winning port 37, changes the variation mode (variation pattern) of the special figure variation display game. Random number updating means for updating the fluctuation pattern random number for determining

[Prize mouth switch / status monitoring process]
FIG. 109 shows a winning opening switch / state monitoring process (step X107) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 102). In this winning opening switch / status monitoring process, first, the winning opening monitoring table 1 corresponding to one upper large winning opening switch 38a in the upper large winning opening (first special variable winning apparatus 38) is prepared (step X301). The illegal & winning monitoring process (step X302) for monitoring whether there is an illegal winning in the big winning opening even though the big winning opening is not open and detecting a normal winning is executed.

  The winning mouth monitoring table (illegal monitoring table) includes a monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data for determining whether or not there is an input to the target switch, a lower address of fraud monitoring information, a lower address of the illegal winning number area, and an illegal winning error. Information of a notification command, an illegal winning number upper limit (number of fraud occurrence determination), an address of a winning mouth switch table, and notification timer update information (permission / update) is defined. The winning opening switch table defines information on the number of monitoring repetitions (the number of switches), monitoring switch bits, the winning counter area 1 address, and the winning counter area 2 address. These fraud monitoring tables and winning tables are prepared according to each switch to be monitored.

  Thereafter, a winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other lower large winning opening switch 39a in the lower large winning opening (second special variable winning apparatus 39) is prepared (step X303), and it is monitored whether there is an illegal winning. A fraud & winning monitoring process (step X304) for detecting a normal winning is executed. Next, a winning opening monitoring table is prepared for a winning opening switch (in this case, the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, and the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35) (Step X305). The winning number counter updating process (step X306) is performed. Then, a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process for monitoring the execution of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the normal gaming state scheduled to be executed mainly by the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is performed (step X307).

  Next, the state scan counter for sequentially specifying which switch or signal among the plurality of switches and signals to be monitored is to be monitored this time is updated (step X308). This state scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. Thereafter, the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (step X309). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step X310) for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

  By referring to the state scan counter value in the gaming machine state monitoring table 1, when the state scan counter value is 0, the state monitoring based on the abnormality detection signal 1 output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector or the like can be performed. When the value of the state scan counter is set to 1, monitoring of the state based on the chute ball break switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the value of the state scan counter is 2, state monitoring based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 3, state monitoring based on the payout abnormality status signal is set.

  Next, the gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared according to the value of the state scan counter (step X311). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step X312) for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is performed.

  By referring to the state scan counter value in the gaming machine state monitoring table 2, when the state scan counter value is 0, state monitoring based on a signal output from the glass frame open detection switch is set, and state scanning is performed. When the value of the counter is 1, the state monitoring based on the signal output from the front frame open detection switch is set. When the value of the state scan counter is 2, the state monitoring based on the frame radio wave improper signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 3, the state monitoring based on the touch switch signal is set.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the state scan counter is 0 (step X313). If the value of the error scan counter is not 0 (step X313; N), the winning opening switch / state monitoring process is terminated. In this case, there is no state monitoring target in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 referred to next. In addition, when the value of the error scan counter is 0 (step X313; Y), the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is prepared (step X314), and a gaming machine state check for judging a state such as an error has occurred. Processing (step X315) is performed.

  By referring to the state scan counter value in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3, when the state scan counter value is 0, state monitoring based on the abnormality detection signal 2 output due to occurrence of disconnection of the connector of the switch or the like can be performed. Is set. The gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is not defined when the state scan counter is 1 to 3.

  Thereafter, a payout busy signal check process (step X316) for setting a busy signal flag based on a payout busy signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can start payout control is performed, and the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is terminated. To do. Note that the processing from step X314 to X316 is executed only when the value of the state scan counter updated for each timer interrupt is 0, so that it is executed at a rate of once every four timer interrupts. That is, when the timer interruption is performed every 4 ms, the processing from step X314 to X316 is performed every 16 ms.

[Unauthorized & winning monitoring process]
FIG. 110 shows the fraud & prize winning monitoring process (steps X302 and X304) in the above-described prize opening switch / status monitoring process. This fraud & winning monitoring process is a process that is performed on each of the two upper big prize opening switches 38a of the first special variable prize winning device 38 and the lower big prize opening switch 39a of the second special variable prize winning device 39. As for the big prize opening (special variable prize-winning devices 38 and 39), since it is easy to be fraudulently forcibly opening the door and inserting the game ball and paying out the prize ball, the fraud is monitored in addition to the detection of the prize. .

  In this fraud & winning monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning prize switch subject to error monitoring is checked (step X321) to determine whether it is during the fraud monitoring period (step X322). The fraud monitoring period is a period other than during the special gaming state in which the first special variable winning device 38 is opened when the error monitoring target winning port switch is the upper large winning port switch 38a. When the switch is the lower large prize opening switch 39a, it is a period other than during the special gaming state in which the second special variable prize winning device 39 is opened.

  If it is the fraud monitoring period (step X322; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target prize-winning switch (step X323). If there is no input to the target prize opening switch (step X323; N), the target notification timer update information is loaded (step X332). If there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step X323; Y), the target illegal winning number is updated by +1 (step X324), and the number of illegal winnings after addition is the number of fraud determinations to be monitored (for example, It is determined whether or not (5) has been exceeded (step X325).

  The number of judgments is set to five. For example, when a large winning opening in an open state is converted to a closed state, a game ball is sandwiched between door members of the large winning opening, and the gaming ball is valid for the large winning opening switch This is to prevent the player from judging that the player has won a prize or the noise has been added to the signal, and not to judge it as an error easily.

  If the determined number is not exceeded (step X325; N), a winning opening monitoring table for the target winning opening switch is prepared (step X330). When the number of determinations is exceeded (step X325; Y), the number of fraudulent winnings is limited to the number of fraud determinations (step X326), and an initial value (for example, 60000 ms) is saved in the target fraudulent winning notification timer area (step 6326). X327). Next, a target fraud occurrence command is prepared (step X328), a fraud winning flag is prepared as a fraud flag (step X329), and the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step X340). ).

  On the other hand, if it is not the fraud monitoring period (step X322; N), a winning opening monitoring table for the target winning opening switch is prepared (step X330), and a winning number counter updating process (step X331) for setting a winning ball is performed. . Then, the target notification timer update information is loaded (step X332), and whether or not the notification timer is permitted to be updated is determined (step X333). Then, when the update of the notification timer is not permitted (step X333; N), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. If the notification timer is permitted to be updated (step X333; Y), if the target notification timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step X334). Note that the minimum value of the notification timer is set to zero.

  The update of the notification timer is permitted when the error-monitoring prize opening switch is one of the upper prize-winning opening switches 38a, and is permitted when the error monitoring target prize-winning opening switch is the other upper prize-winning opening switch 38a. Not. As a result, it is possible to prevent the notification timer from being updated twice as much as the unauthorized notification about the first special variation winning device 38 and time-up in half of a specified time (for example, 60000 ms). . Note that when the prize port switch subject to error monitoring is the lower large prize port switch 39a, the update of the notification timer is always permitted.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the notification timer is 0 (step X335). If the value is not 0 (step X335; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. If the value is 0 (step X335; Y), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, a target fraud cancel command is prepared (step X336), and an illegal win cancel flag is set as the fraud flag. Prepare (step X337). Then, it is determined whether it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step X338).

  When it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step X338; Y), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the current fraud & prize monitoring process, the number of illegal winnings of interest is cleared ( In step X339, the prepared illegal flag is compared with the value of the target illegal flag area (step X340). Further, when it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step X338; N), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the previous fraud & winning monitoring process, the prepared fraud flag is targeted. The value is compared with the value of the illegal flag area (step X340).

  Then, if the prepared fraud flag matches the value of the target fraud flag area (step X340; Y), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. If the prepared illegal flag does not match the value of the target illegal flag area (step X340; N), the prepared illegal flag is saved in the target illegal flag area (step X341), and an effect command setting process is performed. (Step X342), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. Through the above processing, an error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when an error occurs, and an illegal winning error cancel command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 when the error is canceled, so that the start and end of error notification are set. Will be.

[Winner counter update process]
FIG. 111 shows the winning number counter update processing (steps X306 and X331) in the above-described winning opening switch / state monitoring processing and fraud & winning monitoring processing. In this winning number counter updating process, first, the number of winning port switches to be monitored is acquired from the winning port switch table of the winning port monitoring table (step X351), and input to the target winning port switch (more precisely, the change in input). ) Is determined (step X352).

  If there is no input (step X352: N), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step X361), and it is determined whether monitoring of all the switches has been completed (step X362). If there is an input (step X352; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 1 is loaded (step X353), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X354), and it is determined whether an overflow occurs (step X354). Step X355). If no overflow has occurred (step X355; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 1 (step X356), and the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step X357). ). When an overflow occurs (step X355; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step X357).

  After the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step X357), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step X358), and it is determined whether it overflows (step X359). If no overflow has occurred (step X359; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2 (step X360), and the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step X361). ), It is determined whether the monitoring of all the switches has been completed (step X362). If an overflow has occurred (step X359; Y), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step X361), and it is determined whether monitoring of all switches has been completed (step X362).

  When the monitoring of all the switches has not been completed (step X362; N), the process returns to the process of determining whether there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step X352). If all the switches have been monitored (step X362; Y), the winning number counter updating process is terminated. As a result of the above processing, the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are updated based on winning in the winning area and the winning information is stored.

[Direction command setting processing]
FIG. 112 shows the effect command setting process (step X342) in the above-described fraud & prize winning monitoring process. The effect command setting process is a process common to the effect command setting process in the other processes executed during the timer interrupt process. In this effect command setting process, first, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step X371), and it is determined whether or not the transmission buffer is full (step X372).

  If the transmission buffer is full (step X372; Y), the process returns to step X371. If the transmission buffer is not full (step X372; N), command data (MODE (upper byte)) is written to the production serial transmission buffer (step X373), and the status of the serial transmission buffer is read (step X374). Then, it is determined whether or not the transmission buffer is full (step X375).

  If the transmission buffer is full (step X375; Y), the process returns to step X374. If the transmission buffer is not full (step X375; N), command data (ACTION (lower byte)) is written to the effect serial transmission buffer (step X376), and the effect command setting process is terminated.

  Thus, by transmitting the command to the effect control device 300 by serial communication, it is possible to reduce the burden on the game control device 100 and make it difficult to analyze the command. Further, the command transmission timing is advanced and the number of data lines can be reduced. Furthermore, in the production control device 300, it is not necessary to take in a command in the strobe, and the burden can be reduced.

[Special Figure 2 Abnormal Variation Monitoring Processing]
FIG. 113 shows the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process (step X307) in the above-described winning opening switch / state monitoring process. As described above, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, it is advantageous for the player to play the special figure 1 variable display game in the normal gaming state which is in the low probability state, but the player who does not know this. Alternatively, it is conceivable that a player who intentionally aims to execute the special figure 2 variable display game makes a right strike. In the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process, a process for informing such a player to make a left strike is performed.

  In this special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process, it is first determined whether or not there is a special figure 1 fluctuation check flag (step X381). The special figure 1 check flag is a flag that is set when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is started in a low probability state. If there is no special figure 1 fluctuation check flag (step X381; N), it is determined whether there is a special figure 2 fluctuation check flag (step X387). If there is a special figure 1 fluctuation check flag (step X381; Y), the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is cleared (step X382), and the special figure 1 fluctuation number is updated by +1 (step X383).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation number is smaller than a prescribed value (for example, 18) (step X384), and if smaller than the prescribed value (step X384; Y), it is determined whether there is a special figure 2 fluctuation check flag. Determination is made (step X387). In addition, when it is larger than the specified value (step X384; N), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number added when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed in the normal gaming state (low probability state) must be zero. For example, -1 is updated (step X385), the special figure 1 fluctuation number is cleared to 0 (step X386), and it is determined whether there is a special figure 2 fluctuation check flag (step X387). The minimum value of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is set to zero.

  The special figure 2 check flag is a flag that is set when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is started in a low probability state. In determining whether there is the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag (step X387), if there is no special figure 2 fluctuation check flag (step X387; N), the process proceeds to step X390. If there is a special figure 2 check flag (step X387; Y), the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is cleared (step X388), and the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is updated by 1 (step X389). 2. It is determined whether the number of abnormal fluctuations is smaller than a specified value (for example, 5) (step X390).

  If the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is not smaller than the prescribed value (step X390; N), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is kept at the prescribed value (step X391), and the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer has an initial value (for example, 60000 ms) is set (step X392). Next, a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence flag is prepared (step X393), a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence command is prepared (step X394), and the process proceeds to step X399. In this case, the player makes a right-hand hit and the player makes a right-hand hit even though it is a normal game state (low probability state) in which it is recommended to advance the game mainly by the special figure 1 variable display game. FIG. 2 shows a case where a variable display game is being executed, and a process for notifying the player to make a left strike is performed.

  On the other hand, when the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is smaller than the specified value (step X390; Y), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer is updated by -1 (step X395), and it is determined whether the time is up (step X396). ). If the time is not up (step X396; N), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process is terminated. When the time is up (step X396; Y), a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation release flag is prepared (step X397), and a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation release command is prepared (step X398).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the prepared flag is the same as the current special figure 2 abnormality fluctuation flag area value (step X399). If the prepared flag and the current special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area value are the same (step X399; Y), that is, if there is no state change, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process is terminated. If the prepared flag and the current special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area value are not the same (step X399; N), that is, if there is a change in state, the prepared flag is the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation release flag. (Step X400).

  If the prepared flag is not the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation release flag (step X400; N), that is, if it is the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence flag, the prepared flag is saved in the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area (step X402), the effect command setting process is performed, and the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process is terminated. On the other hand, if the prepared flag is the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation release flag (step X400; Y), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is cleared to 0 (step X401), and then the processing of steps X402 and X403 is performed. (Step X403), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process is terminated. Through the above processing, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence command is transmitted to the effect control apparatus 300 along with the detection of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation, and the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation release command is issued along with the cancellation of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation. 300, the start and end of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification will be set.

  FIG. 114 and FIG. 115 show an example of processing by the special figure 2 abnormal variation monitoring process as the game progresses. In the example shown in FIG. 114, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is 3 and the special figure 1 fluctuation number is 15 in the normal gaming state. When the next special figure 1 fluctuation display game is started from this state (t11), the special figure 1 fluctuation number changes from 15 to 16. When the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is started (t12), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number changes from 3 to 4.

  Thereafter, each time the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is started, the special figure 1 fluctuation number is updated by one (t13, t14). Here, when the special figure 1 fluctuation number reaches the specified value 18 (t14), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is updated by -1 to change from 4 to 3, and the special figure 1 fluctuation number is cleared to 0. The Similarly, every time the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is started, the special figure 1 fluctuation number is updated by +1 (t15 to t17), and when the special figure 1 fluctuation number reaches a predetermined value 18 (t17), The special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is updated by -1 to change from 3 to 2, and the special figure 1 fluctuation number is cleared to zero. That is, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is subtracted every time a specified number (18 times here) of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is executed.

  FIG. 115 shows a case where special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification is performed. In this example, the special figure 2 abnormal variation number is 3 in the normal gaming state. When the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is started from this state (t21), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is updated from 3 to 4. Further, when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is started (t22), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number reaches a predetermined value of 5.

  Thereby, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence flag is saved, and based on this flag, the output of external information indicating that the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation has occurred and the gaming machine error status signal to the device outside the gaming machine is started, The occurrence of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation can be grasped by the management device of the amusement store or the like. Also, a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. Based on the reception of this command, the effect control device 300 notifies that the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation has occurred by display or voice.

  Further, when the number of abnormal fluctuations in the special figure 2 reaches a predetermined value of 5, the time measurement by the abnormal fluctuation notification timer in the special figure 2 is started (t22), and a predetermined time (60 seconds in this case) elapses ( t23), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is cleared to 0, and the output of the external information and the gaming machine error state signal is stopped. Further, a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation cancel command is transmitted to the production control apparatus 300, and the production control apparatus 300 ends the notification that the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation has occurred based on the reception of this command. If the special figure 2 variable display game is newly started before the lapse of the predetermined time, the measurement of the predetermined time is newly started from that point.

  Thus, by determining that the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation has occurred based on the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number reaching a specified value (for example, 5), for example, a game ball enters the game area on the right side unintentionally. Thus, when the second start winning opening 37 is won, it is possible to prevent immediately from determining that there is an abnormal fluctuation in the special figure 2. Furthermore, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation which occurred about the winning to the 2nd start winning opening 37 which is not intended because the special figure 2 fluctuation display game of the predetermined number of times was made to be subtracted. The number is canceled if a game is subsequently played, and it is possible to prevent a mere mistake or a result of another player's game from accumulating and determining that there is a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation.

  Note that the specified value of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number for which the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification is performed and the special value of the special figure 1 fluctuation number for performing the process of subtracting the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number are arbitrary. It can be set. Each specified value set here may be any value as long as it can prevent the player from aiming to start the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal gaming state. Also, when a power failure occurs and is restored, monitoring is resumed from the state before the power failure occurred. Even if special figure 2 abnormal change notification is performed, the payout of the winning ball for winning is performed as usual.

[Game machine status check processing]
FIG. 116 shows the gaming machine state check process (steps X310, X312 and X315) in the above-described prize opening switch / state monitoring process. In this gaming machine state check process, first, a state monitoring table corresponding to the state scan counter is acquired (step X451), and it is determined whether the signal to be monitored is on (step X452).

  Information corresponding to the state scan counter is defined in the state monitoring table. This information includes, for example, the lower address of the start address of the status monitoring area, the lower address of the port input status area of the switch control area where the target signal information is stored, mask data for extracting only the bits of the target signal, and the signal ON judgment data, status off command (in case of error system, error notification end command), status on command (in case of error system, error notification start command), status off monitoring timer comparison value, status on monitoring timer A comparison value is included.

  If the target signal is not on (step X452: N), a state off flag is prepared as a state flag (step X453), and a target state off command is acquired and prepared (step X454). Thereafter, a target state off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step X455), and the value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step X459). The case where the target signal is not on (step X452: N) is a state indicating that the error signal is not an error (normal), and that the signal from the touch switch indicates that the signal is not touched. is there.

  On the other hand, if the target signal is on (step X452: Y), a state on flag is prepared as a state flag (step X456), and a target state on command is acquired and prepared (step X457). Thereafter, the target state ON monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step X458), and the value of the target signal control region is compared with the current signal state (step X459). When the target signal is on (step X452: Y), this is a state indicating that an error signal is an error (abnormal or illegal), and that the signal from the touch switch is touched. It is the state which shows.

  If the value of the target signal control area matches the current signal state (step X459; Y), that is, if the signal state has not changed, the target state monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step X462). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step X463). If the value of the target signal control area does not match the current signal state (step X459; N), that is, if the signal state changes, the current signal state is saved in the target signal control area ( Step X460). Then, the target state monitoring timer is cleared (step X461), the target state monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step X462), and it is determined whether or not the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value ( Step X463).

  If the value of the target state monitoring timer is not equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step X463; N), the gaming machine state check process is terminated. If the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step X463: Y), the state monitoring timer is updated by -1 and kept at the value of comparison value -1 (step X464). The status flag is compared with the value of the target status flag area (step X465).

  When the prepared state flag matches the value of the target state flag area (step X465; Y), the gaming machine state check process is terminated. If the prepared state flag does not match the value of the target state flag area (step X465; N), the prepared state flag is saved in the target state flag area (step X466), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step X467), and the gaming machine state check process is terminated. Thereby, the state off command prepared in step X454 or the state on command prepared in X457 is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

[Payout busy signal check processing]
FIG. 117 shows the payout busy signal check process (step X316) in the above-described winning opening switch / state monitoring process. In this payout busy signal check process, first, it is determined whether or not the payout busy signal input from the payout control device 200 is on (step X471). The payout busy signal is turned on when the payout control device 200 cannot start payout control.

  If the payout busy signal is not on (step X471; N), an idle state flag is prepared as a state flag (step X472), and an off confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 ms) is set (step X473). When the payout busy signal is on (step X471; Y), a busy state flag is prepared as a state flag (step X474), and an on confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 ms) is set (step X475). .

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the busy signal state region is the same as the state of the current signal, that is, whether or not there has been a change of on and off (step X476), and if they are the same (step X476; Y) The busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step X479). If they are not the same (step X476; N), the current signal state is saved in the busy signal state area (step X477), the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to 0 (step X478), and the busy signal monitoring timer is set. +1 is updated (step X479).

Next, it is determined whether the value of the busy signal monitoring timer is larger than the previously set ON confirmation monitoring timer comparison value or the OFF confirmation monitoring timer comparison value, that is, the signal confirmation time (for example, 32 ms) has been reached (step) X480).
If the signal determination time has not been reached (step X480; N), the payout busy signal check process is terminated. When the signal determination time is reached (step X480; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by −1, and the previously set ON determination monitoring timer comparison value or OFF determination monitoring timer comparison value is −1. (Step X481), the prepared state flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area (Step X482), and the payout busy signal check process is terminated.

  By this processing, a busy signal flag is set based on the payout busy signal. At this time, even if the state of the payout busy signal changes, the busy signal flag is not changed immediately, but the busy signal flag is changed when the changed state continues over the signal determination time, and the noise is changed. It is hard to be affected by such as.

  Further, since the busy signal flag is cleared when the power is turned on, the busy signal flag is not set and is in an indefinite state until one of the signal states continues for the signal determination time. Thus, when a power failure occurs and the power supply recovers from the power failure, even if a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200, the prize ball command is immediately issued. In response to the fact that a state signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 is continuously output for a predetermined period of time, a prize ball command is sent to the payout control device 200. Will be sent. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the prize ball command and knows that the payout process can be performed immediately, and then transmits the prize ball command, and the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed. It can be prevented from being broken.

[Starter switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start port switch monitoring process (step X109) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 118, in the start port switch monitoring process, first, a start port 1 (first start winning port 36) winning monitor table is prepared (step X491), and a hard random number acquisition process is performed (step X492). Then, it is determined whether or not there is information on a start opening winning set that is set when a big hit random number is acquired based on winning in the first start winning opening 36 in the hard random number acquisition process (step X493).

  When the information on the presence of the start opening prize is not set based on the winning at the first start winning opening 36 (step X493; N), the process proceeds to step X499. In this case, no start opening information is set. On the other hand, if the information on the start opening winning is set based on the winning at the first starting winning opening 36 (step X493; Y), it is determined whether the low probability is in effect (step X494). And when it is in low probability (step X494; Y), it transfers to step X497. If the probability is not low (step X494; N), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step X495), and an effect command setting process is performed (step X496). After that, a table for setting information on hold by the start port 1 is prepared (step X497), and special figure start port 1 switch processing is performed (step X498).

  In the production control device 300, based on the reception of the right-handed instruction notification command, the right-handed instruction notification for instructing the player to make a right-handed strike is performed by display, voice, or the like. When the player is in the high probability state, the right-handed player is more advantageous for the player. Right-handed instruction notification is performed.

  Next, a winning opening monitoring table is prepared for the starting port 2 (second starting winning port 37) (step X499), hard random number acquisition processing is performed (step X500), and the big hit random number is calculated based on the winning to the second starting winning port 37. It is determined whether or not there is information on a start opening winning set that is set when acquired (step X501).

  If the information on the presence of the start opening prize is not set based on the winning at the second start winning opening 37 (step X501; N), the start opening switch monitoring process is terminated. In this case, no start opening information is set. On the other hand, when the start opening prize presence information is set based on the winning to the second start winning opening 37 (step X501; Y), it is determined whether the probability is high (step X502). And when it is in high probability (step X502; Y), it transfers to step X507. If the probability is not high (step X502; N), it is determined whether the jackpot is being hit, that is, the first special gaming state that is a special gaming state based on the jackpot (step X503).

  If it is a big hit (step X503; Y), the process proceeds to step X507. If it is not a big hit (step X503; N), it is determined whether a high probability final fluctuation is being performed (step X504). High probability final variation means that the special figure variation display game is being executed (including the stop time) for a predetermined number of times (here, the 50th time) since the end of the first special gaming state. The last special figure change display game that has been executed is being executed.

  When this high probability final change is being performed (step X504; Y), the process proceeds to step X507. If the high probability final change is not being performed (step X504; N), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step X505), and an effect command setting process is performed (step X506). After that, a table for setting information on hold by the start port 2 is prepared (step X507), special chart start port 2 switch processing is performed (step X508), and the start port switch monitoring processing is terminated.

  In the production control device 300, based on the reception of the left-handed instruction notification command, the left-handed instruction notification for instructing the player to left-hand is displayed by display or voice. When the player is in the low probability state, the left-handed player is more advantageous for the player. A left-handed instruction notification is performed.

  In the first special game state, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened except for some types of jackpots, so that the left-handed instruction notification is not performed even in the low probability state. In addition, in the special figure fluctuation display game that is executed last in the high probability state, the game is changed to the low probability state after the lottery at the start of the game, so the low probability state is in the game. Since the determination is made in the probability state, there is a high possibility that a special game state will occur. In addition, since the specific game state is produced until the end of the game, the left-handed instruction notification is not performed.

[Hard random number acquisition processing]
FIG. 119 shows a hard random number acquisition process (steps X492 and X500) in the above-described start port switch monitoring process. In this hard random number acquisition process, first, start opening no winning information is set (step X511), and it is determined whether there is an input to the target switch (step X512).

  If there is no input to the target switch (step X512; N), the hard random number acquisition process is terminated. When there is an input to the target switch (step X512; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step X513), and it is determined whether there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step X514).

  If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step X514; N), the hard random number acquisition process is terminated. When there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step X514; Y), the big hit random number extracted in the target hard random number latch register is loaded and prepared (step X515). Then, the start opening winning presence information is set (step X516), and the hard random number acquisition process is terminated.

[Special figure start port 1 switch processing]
FIG. 120 shows the special start port 1 switch process (step X498) in the above-described start port switch monitoring process. In this special figure starting port 1 switch process, first, the number of times of starting port signal 1 output, which is the number of times the information related to the number of winnings to the first starting winning port 36 is output to the management device outside the gaming machine 10, is loaded. (Step X521), the loaded value is updated by +1 (Step X522), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (Step X523). If the output count does not overflow (step X523; N), the updated value is saved in the RWM start port signal 1 output count area (step X524), and the special figure 1 hold count (first start storage count) Is less than the upper limit value (step X525). On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step X523; Y), the process proceeds to step X525. Here, the number of output times can be stored up to 255, but if the upper limit is stored, looping by +1 update results in 0, so the updated value is not saved.

  When the special figure 1 holding number is less than the upper limit (here, 4) (step X525; Y), a special figure 1 information setting flag used for distribution of the variation pattern in the special figure holding information determination process described later is set ( Step X526), the special figure 1 holding number is updated by +1 (Step X527). Next, the address of the random number storage area (random number storage area for special figure 1) corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is calculated (step X528), and the big hit random number prepared in the hard random number acquisition process described above is used as the RWM big hit random number. Save in the storage area (step X529).

  Thereafter, the jackpot symbol random number is extracted and prepared (step X530), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X531). Further, the small hit design random number is extracted and saved in the small hit design random number storage area of the RWM (step X532). Subsequently, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are extracted and saved in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the RWM corresponding to each random number (step X533). Then, a special figure hold information determination process (step X534), which is a pre-read process, is performed to prepare a decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number (step X535), and an effect command setting process is performed ( Step X536), the special figure starting port 1 switch processing is terminated. That is, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) can extract a predetermined random number based on the winning of a game ball to the first start winning opening 36 and store the predetermined random number as a first start memory up to a predetermined upper limit number. A first start storage means is provided.

[Special figure hold information judgment processing]
FIG. 121 shows the special figure hold information determination process (step X534) in the special figure start port 1 switch process described above. The special figure hold information determination process is a prefetching process for determining the result related information corresponding to the special figure 1 start memory before the start timing of the special figure 1 variable display game based on the special figure 1 start memory. In this special figure hold information determination process, first, it is determined whether or not a high probability state is in effect (step X541). If it is in a high probability state (step X541; Y), the special figure hold information determination process is terminated. . If not in the high probability state (step X541; N), it is determined whether or not the big special hit state, that is, the first special game state which is a special game state based on the big hit (step X542).

  If it is a big hit (step X542; Y), the special figure hold information determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if the jackpot is not being hit (step X542; N), a jackpot determination process is performed to determine whether the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value or not (step X543). If the determination result is a big hit (step X544; Y), a big hit symbol random number check table is set (step X545), and stop symbol information corresponding to the prepared big hit symbol random number is acquired (step X546). A pre-read stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information is prepared (step X551).

  On the other hand, if the determination result is not a big hit (step X544; N), a small hit determination process is performed to determine whether the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value or not (step X547). ). If the determination result is a small hit (step X548; Y), stop symbol information for small hit is set (step X549), and a pre-read stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information is prepared (step X551). If the determination result is not a small hit (step X548; N), the stop symbol information for the outage is set (step X550), and a pre-read stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information is prepared (step X551).

  After preparing a pre-read stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information (step X551), an effect command setting process is performed (step X552). Next, special figure 1 information setting processing (step X553) for setting special figure information, which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern, is performed, and special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting for setting the fluctuation mode of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is performed. Processing is performed (step X554).

  Then, pre-reading variation pattern commands corresponding to the first-half variation number indicating the first-half variation pattern and the second-half variation number indicating the second-half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure 1 variation display game are prepared (step X555), and the effect command setting process is performed. (Step X556), and the special figure hold information determination process is terminated. The special figure 1 information setting process in step X553 and the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process in step X554 are processes executed at the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process of the special figure 1 normal process. It is the same.

  By the above processing, the prefetch stop symbol command including the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game based on the special figure 1 start memory and the information of the fluctuation pattern in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game based on the special figure 1 start memory are included. A prefetch variation pattern command is prepared and transmitted to the effect control device 300. As a result, the determination result (prefetch result) of the result related information (whether big hit or small hit or variation pattern type) corresponding to the special figure 1 start memory is used as the special figure 1 fluctuation based on the corresponding special figure 1 start memory. The effect control device 300 can be notified before the start timing of the display game, and in particular, by changing the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41, the special figure 1 variable display game starts. It becomes possible to notify the player of the result related information before the timing.

  That is, the game control device 100 may determine the result of the first variation display game and the variation mode information before the start of the first variation display game based on the first start storage stored in the first start storage means. A possible first determination means. Further, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as the start memory in the start winning storage means (game control device 100) before the execution of the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). It is a pre-determination means. Note that the time when the random number value stored in correspondence with the start memory is determined in advance is not only at the start winning time when the start memory is generated, but any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is performed. Good.

  This special figure hold information determination process is performed only for the special figure 1 variable display game, and for the special figure 2 variable display game that does not generate a start memory for holding the start of the special figure variable display game. Not done. Also, the prefetch process is not performed when the probability is high. This is a state in which the special figure 2 variable display game is mainly performed during the high probability state, and the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly removed from the special figure derived by the special figure 2 variable display game. It is because it is almost stopped at. In other words, because most of them are out of date, it is not meaningful to notify the pre-reading result, or after the pre-reading result that is a special result in the special figure 1 variable display game is notified, it is forcibly changed to the out-of-order result. This is because a contradiction may occur.

  However, the special figure 2 variable display game does not generate a start memory for deferring the start of the special figure 2 variable display game. There is a high possibility that only the display game is played. In such a case, a pre-reading effect may be performed for the first start memory. Of the first start memories that perform such pre-reading effects, pre-reading processing is performed for those that occurred before the start of the specific gaming state, so the results are used to determine what occurred after the start of the specific gaming state. The prefetching process is performed on the target of such prefetching effects. Of course, the prefetch process may be performed regardless of the probability state, and it may be determined whether or not to perform a prefetch effect based on the result of the prefetch process in another process.

[Special figure start port 2 switch processing]
FIG. 122 shows the special start port 2 switch process (step X508) in the above-described start port switch monitoring process. In this special figure start port 2 switch process, first, the start port signal 2 output count, which is the number of times information related to the number of wins to the second start winning port 37, is output to the management device outside the gaming machine 10 is loaded. (Step X561), the loaded value is updated by +1 (Step X562), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (Step X563). If the number of outputs does not overflow (step X563; N), the updated value is saved in the RWM start port signal 2 output count area (step X564), and the start port 2 (second start winning port 37) wins. Determine if it is invalid.

  The start port 2 winning is invalid means that the special figure 1 variable display game that has a special result (big hit or small win) is stopped (during special figure display processing described later), in the first or second special game state, and The special figure 2 variable display game is being executed. When the start port 2 winning is invalid (step X565; Y), the special drawing start port 2 switch process is terminated. If the start port 2 winning is not invalid (step X565; N), the special figure 2 holding number is set to 1 (step X566), and the address of the random number storage area for the special figure 2 is calculated (step X567). ), The jackpot random number prepared in the hard random number acquisition process described above is saved in the jackpot random number storage area of the RWM (step X568).

  Thereafter, the jackpot symbol random number is extracted (step X569) and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step X570). Further, the small hitting design random number is extracted and saved in the small hitting design random number storage area of the RWM (step X571). Subsequently, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 2 and 3 are extracted and saved in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the RWM corresponding to each random number (step X572), and the special figure starting port 2 switch process is terminated. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a start winning storage means for extracting and storing a predetermined random number based on the inflow of game balls to the second start winning opening 37. Note that the variation pattern random number 1 is not used for the special figure 2 variation display game because there are few variation patterns.

[Special Figure 1 Game Processing]
FIG. 123 shows the special figure 1 game process (step X110) in the timer interrupt process described above. The control of the whole process related to the special figure 1 variable display game and the setting of the special figure 1 display are performed. In the special figure 1 game process, first, during the special game state that is executed based on whether the special figure 2 big hit / small hit is in effect, that is, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit or small hit. Is determined (step Y101).

  If the special figure 2 is not in big hit / small hit (step Y101; N), a big winning opening switch monitoring process is performed (step Y102), and if the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step Y103). ). If the big hit / small hit shown in FIG. 2 is in effect (step Y101; Y), the process proceeds to step Y103.

  In the big prize opening switch monitoring process, the game balls of the upper big prize opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable prize winning device 38 and the lower big prize port switch 39a provided in the second special variable prize winning device 39 are played. A process for monitoring detection is performed. In the special figure 1 game processing, the special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed for a special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 1 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit. For the special game state executed based on the game result being a big hit or a small hit, a special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the special figure 2 game process described later.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y104). If the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y104; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step Y119, and the subsequent processing is performed. Further, when the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is 0 (step Y104; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the process branches to the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game processing number. The special figure 1 game sequence branch table to be referred to is set in the register (step Y105). Then, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game process number is acquired using the table (step Y106), and a subroutine call is made with the special figure 1 game process number (step Y107).

  If the special figure 1 game process number is “0” in step Y107, the fluctuation start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is monitored, the fluctuation start setting of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the effect setting, 1 Special processing (step Y108) for setting information necessary for performing processing during fluctuation is performed (step Y108). When the special figure 1 game process number is “1” in step Y107, the special figure for setting the stop display time of special figure 1 and setting information necessary for performing the special figure 1 display process is shown. One fluctuation processing (step Y109) is performed.

  In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is “2”, if the game result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit, the fanfare command setting corresponding to the type of the big hit, A special figure 1 in-display process (step Y110) is performed for setting the fanfare time according to the special winning opening opening pattern, setting information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval process, and the like.

  In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is “3”, setting of the opening time of the big winning opening, updating of the number of opening, setting of information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning opening, etc. The fanfare / interval processing (step Y111) to be performed is performed. If the special figure 1 game process number is “4” in step Y107, an interval command is set if the big hit round is not the final round, while an ending command is set if the final round is a final round, A special winning opening opening process (step Y112) for setting information necessary for performing the remaining ball process is performed.

  In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game process number is “5”, if the big hit round is the final round, the process for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls in the big winning opening or the special figure 1 A big winning opening remaining ball process (step Y113) for setting information necessary for the big hit end process is performed. In step Y107, if the special figure 1 game process number is "6", special figure 1 big hit end process (step Y114) for setting information necessary for performing special figure 1 normal process (step Y108). I do.

  In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "7", to set the opening time / opening pattern of the big prize opening when the small hit occurs, the setting of the fanfare command, and the small hitting process. The small hitting fanfare process (step Y115) for setting information necessary for the process is performed. In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is “8”, a small hitting process (step Y116) for setting an ending command, setting information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball processing, and the like is performed. Do.

  In step Y107, when the special figure 1 game processing number is “9”, a process for setting a time for discharging the remaining balls won in the big winning opening during the small hitting process, The small hit remaining ball processing (step Y117) for setting information necessary for processing is performed. If the special figure 1 game process number is “10” in step Y107, special figure 1 small hit end processing (step Y118) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 1 normal process is performed.

  After that, a special figure 1 fluctuation control table for controlling fluctuations of the special figure 1 display 51 is prepared (step Y119), and a symbol fluctuation control process (step Y120) related to the special figure 1 display 51 is performed. FIG. 1 ends the game process. This special figure 1 game process performs a series of execution control related to the first fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game).

[Special Figure 2 Game Processing]
FIG. 124 shows a special figure 2 game process (step X111) in the timer interrupt process described above. In the special figure 2 game process, the whole process related to the special figure 2 variable display game is controlled and the display of the special figure 2 is set. The special figure 2 game process basically performs the same process as the special figure 1 game process described above for the special figure 2.

  In this special figure 2 game process, first, during the special game state which is executed based on whether the special figure 1 big hit / small hit is in effect, that is, the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit or small hit. Is determined (step Y131). Then, if the special figure 1 is not big hit / small hit (step Y131; N), the big prize opening switch monitoring process is performed (step Y132), and if the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated ( Step Y133). Further, when the big hit / small hit shown in FIG. 1 is in progress (step Y131; Y), the process proceeds to step Y133.

  In the big prize opening switch monitoring process, the game balls of the upper big prize opening switch 38a provided in the first special variable prize winning device 38 and the lower big prize port switch 39a provided in the second special variable prize winning device 39 are played. A process for monitoring detection is performed. In the special figure 2 game process, the special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed for the special game state executed based on the result of the special figure 2 variable display game being a big hit or a small hit. For the special game state executed based on the game result being a big hit or a small hit, the special winning opening switch monitoring process is performed in the above-described special figure 1 game process.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y134). If the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y134; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the process proceeds to step Y152 to perform the subsequent processing. If the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y134; Y), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, is the special figure 2 game processing timer repeated 0? Is determined (step Y135).

  When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y135; N), the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by -1 (step Y150), and the special figure 2 game processing timer area is long. The variation timer value (here 60000 ms) is saved (step Y151), and the processing after step Y152 is performed.

  In order to prevent a player from intentionally executing a special figure 2 variable display game with a high probability of occurrence in the normal gaming state, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal gaming state is very long. (For example, 10 minutes). However, since the area that can be used as the special figure 2 game processing timer is limited, it is difficult to measure the variation time at once even if the upper limit value is set as the timer initial value. Therefore, the variation time is measured by a plurality of times using the number of repetitions, which is the number of times of measuring the specified time (here 60000 ms).

  When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game process timer is 0 (step Y135; Y), the special figure 2 game sequence branch table to be referred to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is set in the register. (Step Y136). Then, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is obtained using the table (step Y137), and a subroutine call is made with the special figure 2 game process number (step Y138).

  If the special figure 2 game process number is “0” at step Y138, the fluctuation start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is monitored, the fluctuation start setting of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the effect setting, 2 Special processing (step Y139) for performing setting of information necessary for performing processing during fluctuation is performed (step Y139). When the special figure 2 game process number is “1” in step Y138, the special figure for setting the stop display time of special figure 2, setting of information necessary for performing the special figure 2 display process, etc. 2. Processing during fluctuation (step Y140) is performed.

  In step Y138, if the special figure 2 game process number is “2”, if the game result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit, the fanfare command is set according to the big hit type, A special figure 2 display process (step Y141) is performed for setting the fanfare time according to the special winning opening opening pattern and setting information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval process.

  If the special figure 2 game process number is “3” in step Y138, setting of the opening time of the big prize opening, updating of the number of times of opening, setting of information necessary for performing the processing during opening of the big prize opening, etc. The fanfare / interval processing (step Y142) to be performed is performed. If the special figure 2 game process number is “4” in step Y138, an interval command is set if the big win round is not the final round, while an ending command is set if it is the final round, A special winning opening opening process (step Y143) for setting information necessary for performing the remaining ball process is performed.

  In step Y138, if the special figure 2 game process number is "5", if the big hit round is the final round, a process for setting the time for discharging the remaining balls in the big winning opening, or special figure 2 The big winning opening remaining ball process (step Y144) for setting information necessary for the big hit end process is performed. In step Y138, if the special figure 2 game process number is "6", special figure 2 big hit end processing (step Y145) for setting information necessary for performing special figure 2 normal processing (step Y108). I do.

  In step Y138, when the special figure 2 game process number is “7”, to set the opening time / opening pattern of the big winning opening when the small hit occurs, the setting of the fanfare command, and the mid-small process The small hitting fanfare process (step Y146) for setting information necessary for the process is performed. If the special figure 2 game process number is “8” at step Y138, the small hitting process (step Y147) for setting the ending command, setting information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball process, and the like is performed. Do.

  If the special figure 2 game process number is “9” in step Y138, a process for setting a time for discharging the remaining balls won in the big winning opening during the small hitting process, A small hit remaining sphere process (step Y148) for setting information necessary for the process is performed. If the special figure 2 game process number is “10” in step Y138, special figure 2 small hit end processing (step Y149) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 2 ordinary process is performed.

  After that, a special figure 2 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 is prepared (step Y152), and the symbol fluctuation control process (step Y153) related to the special figure 2 display 52 is performed. FIG. 2 ends the game process. This special figure 2 game process performs a series of execution control related to the second fluctuation display game (special figure 2 fluctuation display game). The above special figure 2 game process basically performs the same process as the above special figure 1 game process for special figure 2, and in the following description, the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process will be described. The corresponding processing will be described in parallel.

[Big prize opening switch monitoring process]
FIG. 125 shows the big prize opening switch monitoring process (steps Y102 and Y132) in the above-described special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process. In this special winning opening switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not the upper special winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) is being opened (step Y161). If the upper prize winning opening is open (step Y161; Y), the process proceeds to step Y166. If the top prize winning opening is not open (step Y161; N), it is determined whether or not the remaining ball processing of the top prize winning opening is in progress (step Y162). It should be noted that the remaining ball processing in this determination includes both large winning opening remaining ball processing based on big hits and small hit remaining ball processing based on small hits.

  When the remaining ball processing of the top prize winning opening is being performed (step Y162; Y), the process proceeds to step Y166. Further, when the remaining ball processing of the upper prize winning opening is not in progress (step Y162; N), it is determined whether the lower prize winning opening (second special variable prize winning device 39) is being opened (step Y163). When the lower prize winning opening is not being opened (step Y163; N), the big winning prize switch monitoring process is terminated. If the lower major prize opening is being opened (step Y163; Y), it is determined whether there is an input to the lower major prize opening switch (step Y164).

  It should be noted that during the opening in steps Y161 and Y163, the special game state based on the first special result (big hit), the special game state based on the first special game state, and the second special result (small hit). Including both being released in the second special gaming state. Further, in the determination of steps Y161 to Y163, the determination may be made with reference to the special figure 1 or special figure 2 game processing number, or a flag indicating whether or not each state is set. You may make it determine based on this flag.

  If there is no input to the lower prize winning opening switch (step Y164; N), the big winning prize opening switch monitoring process is terminated. When there is an input to the lower prize winning opening switch (step Y164; Y), 1 is set in the winning counter for counting the number of winning prizes to the big winning prize added in the current big prize opening switch monitoring process. (Step Y165), the process proceeds to Step Y175.

  On the other hand, when the upper prize winning opening is open (step Y161; Y) or when the remaining ball processing of the upper prize winning opening is being performed (step Y162; Y), the winning counter is set to 0. Set (step Y166). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the upper prize winning switch 1 (one upper prize winning switch 38a) (step Y167). If there is no input (step Y167; N), the process proceeds to step Y171.

  When there is an input to the upper prize winning switch 1 (step Y167; Y), a prize winning count command is prepared (step Y168), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y169). In the case of the first special variable winning device 38, a big winning mouth count command is transmitted in order to produce an effect by winning. Further, the winning counter is updated by +1 (step Y170), and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the upper large prize opening switch 2 (the other upper big prize opening switch 38a) (step Y171).

  If there is no input to the upper prize winning switch 2 (step Y171; N), the process proceeds to step Y175. When there is an input to the upper prize winning switch 2 (step Y171; Y), a prize winning count command is prepared (step Y172), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y173). Further, the winning counter is updated by +1 (step Y174), and the process proceeds to step Y175.

  Thereafter, when the value of the winning counter is 0 (step Y175; Y), when the large winning opening remaining ball processing is being performed (step Y176; Y), or when the small hit remaining ball processing is being performed (step Y177; Y). If it is any of the above, the special winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. Also, if the value of the winning counter is not 0 (step Y175; N), the winning ball remaining ball processing is not being performed (step Y176; N), and the small hit remaining ball processing is not being performed (step Y177; N), the winning is achieved. The value of the counter is added to the number of winning prizes (step Y178), and it is determined whether the number of winning prizes is equal to or greater than the upper limit (the number of game balls that can be won in one round) (step Y179).

  When the number of the big winning mouth count is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (9 in this case) (step Y179; N), the big winning mouth switch monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the number of the big winning mouth count becomes equal to or greater than the upper limit (step Y179; Y), the number of the big winning mouth count is kept at the upper limit (step Y180), and the target special figure game processing timer area is cleared to zero. (Step Y181). Then, it is determined whether the game is being released in the big hit, that is, in the first special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on the big hit (step Y182).

  When the big hit is not being released (step Y182; N), that is, when the big hit is being opened, the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. Also, when the big hit is being released (step Y182; Y), the big hit opening operation end value is saved in the big winning opening control pointer area (step Y183), and the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. This closes the grand prize opening and ends one round.

  It should be noted that even when there is an input to the lower prize winning switch (step Y164; Y), the prize winning count command may be transmitted to the effect control device 300. Also, if there is a remaining ball process for the lower major prize opening, a special prize count command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 even if there is an input to the lower major prize opening switch during the remaining ball process. Anyway.

[Special Figure 1 Normal Processing]
FIG. 126 shows the special figure 1 routine process (step Y108) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In this special figure 1 normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 can be changed (step Y201). The state in which the special figure 1 in this determination can start fluctuation is that it is not from the stop of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 variable display game that is a big hit or the small hit to the end of the special gaming state. In addition, while the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is being executed or during the special game state based on the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the fluctuation cannot be started, but in this case, the special figure 1 normal processing is not executed. Here, this need not be determined.

  When the special figure 1 is not ready to be changed (step Y201; N), the special figure 1 routine process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y217), and the special figure 1 routine process is terminated. Further, when the special figure 1 can start changing (step Y201; Y), it is determined whether the left-handed instruction notification has been completed, that is, whether the left-handed instruction notification flag is set (step Y202). When the left hand instruction has been notified (step Y202; Y), the process proceeds to step Y206. If the left-handed instruction notification has not been completed (step Y202; N), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step Y203), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y204). Thereafter, a left-handed instruction notification flag is set (step Y205), and it is determined whether the special figure 1 holding number is 0 (step Y206). The left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared when a special figure variation display game that was last performed in a specific gaming state that is in a high-probability state is finished, and thereby a normal gaming state that is in a low-probability state A left-handed instruction notification will be performed when moving to.

  If the special figure 1 holding number is 0 (step Y206; Y), the process proceeds to step Y217. If the special figure 1 hold number is not 0 (step Y206; N), a variation start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y207), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y208). After that, special figure 1 fluctuation start processing for setting information related to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is performed (step Y210), and a special figure special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is prepared (step Y211). Then, an effect command setting process is performed (step Y212). At the time of performing the process of preparing the decoration special figure hold number command (step Y210), the special figure 1 hold number is not subtracted based on the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the current special figure 1 hold is held. The number-of-holds command corresponding to the special figure 1 number of reserves minus 1 is prepared.

  Next, the special figure status area is set (information addition) during special figure 1 fluctuation (step Y212). Here, the special figure status indicates the state of the special figure variation display game, and any one of 0 to 5 is set. The special figure status 0 indicates a state in which neither the special figure 1 fluctuation display game nor the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed, the special figure status 1 indicates a state in which only the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is executed, Special figure status 2 shows a state in which only the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed. Further, special figure status 3 shows a state in which both the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are executed, and special figure status 4 is a first special gaming state which is a special gaming state based on a big hit. The special figure status 5 indicates the second special gaming state, which is a special gaming state based on the small hit. Here, since the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is started, 1 or 3 is set as the special figure status.

  Next, it is determined whether the high probability state is being reached (step Y213). And when it is in a high probability state (step Y213; Y), it transfers to step Y216. If not in the high probability state (step Y213; N), it is determined whether the high probability final variation is in progress (step Y214). High probability final variation means that the special figure variation display game is being executed (including the stop time) for a predetermined number of times (here, the 50th time) since the end of the first special gaming state. The last special figure change display game that has been executed is being executed.

  When the high-probability final change is being performed (step Y214; Y), the process proceeds to step Y216. If the high probability final fluctuation is not in progress (step Y214; N), the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is set (step Y215). That is, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is started in a low probability state, the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag is set. After that, the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process is performed (step Y216), and the special figure 1 routine process is terminated.

[Special Figure 2 Regular Processing]
FIG. 127 shows the special figure 2 ordinary process (step Y139) in the special figure 2 game process described above. In this special figure 2 ordinary process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 can start to change (step Y221). The state in which the special figure 2 in this determination can start fluctuation is that it is not from the stop of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 variable display game, which is a big hit or small hit, to the end of the special gaming state. It should be noted that even during the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game or during the special game state based on the special figure 2 variable display game, the fluctuation cannot be started, but in this case, the special figure 2 normal processing is not executed. Here, this need not be determined.

  When the special figure 2 cannot be changed (step Y221; N), the special figure 2 ordinary process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y237), and the special figure 2 ordinary process is terminated. Further, when the special figure 2 can be changed (step Y221; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 holding number is 0 (step Y222). As described above, the special figure 2 hold (second start memory) is based on the winning when the second starting prize opening 37 is won in a state where the special figure 2 variable display game can be started. The special figure 2 is generated temporarily to start the variable display game, and is not for suspending the start of the special figure variable display game as in the first start memory.

  If the special figure 2 hold number is not 0 (step Y222; N), a change start probability information command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y223), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y224). Thereafter, special figure 2 fluctuation start processing for setting information on the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed (step Y225), and special figure 2 fluctuation is set in the special figure status area (information addition) (step Y226). Here, since the special figure 2 variable display game is started, 2 or 3 is set as the special figure status.

  Next, it is determined whether or not a high probability state is in effect (step Y227). And when it is in a high probability state (step Y227; Y), it transfers to step Y230. If not in the high probability state (step Y227; N), it is determined whether the high probability final fluctuation is in progress (step Y228). High probability final variation means that the special figure variation display game is being executed (including the stop time) for a predetermined number of times (here, the 50th time) since the end of the first special gaming state. The last special figure change display game that has been executed is being executed.

  When the high-probability final change is being performed (step Y228; Y), the process proceeds to step Y230. If the high probability final fluctuation is not in progress (step Y228; N), the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is set (step Y229). That is, the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag is set when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is started in a low probability state. Thereafter, the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process is performed (step Y230), and the special figure 2 ordinary process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the special figure 2 hold number is 0 (step Y222; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 hold number is 0 (step Y231). Then, when the special figure 1 holding number is 0 (step Y231; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 is changing (step Y232). If special figure 1 is not changing (step Y232; N), it is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration has been started (step Y233). If not disclosed (step Y233; N), the customer waiting state is set. Performs processing related to settings. Further, when the special figure 1 holding number is not 0 (step Y231; N), when the special figure 1 is changing (step Y232; Y), or when the customer waiting demonstration has been started (step Y233; Y). Then, the process proceeds to step Y237.

  In the process for setting the customer waiting state, first, a customer waiting demo flag is set in the customer waiting demo flag area (step Y234), and a customer waiting demo command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step Y235). Command setting processing is performed (step Y236), and the process proceeds to step Y237. By setting the customer waiting demo command to correspond to the current probability state, it is possible to display different customer waiting screens depending on the probability state.

  In addition, when the production control device 300 is restarted for some reason, the production control device 300 that does not have a backup function loses game state information, so that it is impossible to perform an appropriate production. By making the waiting demo command correspond to the current probability state, it is possible to produce an effect according to the gaming state from the reception of this command, and to transmit the probability information command based on the change of the gaming state. It becomes possible to return to the production according to the gaming state earlier than waiting.

  Further, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game can be executed simultaneously, and the probability state may be changed by the processing for the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. Therefore, a variation start probability information command is transmitted every time the special figure variation display game is started (steps Y207 and Y223). Thereby, it is possible to perform an appropriate effect according to the gaming state in the effect control device 300.

  In addition, since the variation start probability information command is transmitted each time the special figure variation display game is started, even when the production control device 300 is restarted, the production according to the gaming state is performed from the reception of this command. It is possible to return to the effect corresponding to the gaming state earlier than waiting for the probability information command based on the change of the gaming state to be transmitted. In addition, you may make it include other information for returning to the production | presentation according to a game state, when the production | presentation control apparatus 300 restarts in a customer waiting demo command or a change start probability information command.

[Special Figure 1 Change Start Processing]
FIG. 128 shows the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step Y209) in the special figure 1 ordinary process described above. This special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. First, a special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step Y241), and the result information of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is out of place information. The big hit flag 1 setting process (step Y242) for setting the big hit information or the small hit information is performed.

  Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step Y243) relating to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure which sets the special symbol information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern 1 information setting process (step Y244) is performed, and a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is set, is prepared. (Step Y245).

  After that, a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y246) for setting a fluctuation pattern, which is a fluctuation mode in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, is performed, and fluctuation start information setting for setting fluctuation start information of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is performed. Processing (step Y247) is performed. By these processes, the result and variation pattern of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed from now on are determined. Thereafter, a process for adjusting so that no inconvenience occurs between the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that can be executed simultaneously.

  Special Figure 1 Fluctuation Display Game and Special Figure 2 Fluctuation Display Game can be executed at the same time, but when a special result (big hit or small win) is derived, the other is forcibly disregarded regardless of the lottery result As a result, it ends. In particular, since the special figure 2 variable display game always has a big hit or a small hit, when the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped first, such a process is performed for the special figure 1 variable display game. Therefore, for example, in spite of a highly anticipated effect in the special figure 1 variable display game, the game is forcibly stopped due to the result of the loss, and the player has a distrust. Therefore, if there is a possibility that the special figure 2 variable display game will end before the end of the special figure 1 variable display game to be started, it is possible to take measures such as preventing an effect with high expectation from being selected. I am doing so.

  For this purpose, first, it is determined whether or not the state is in a high probability state (step Y248). If the state is in a high probability state (step Y248; Y), the process proceeds to step Y257. In the case of a high probability state, the game progresses mainly with the special figure 2 variable display game. In this state, since the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is short and frequently executed, it is known that there is a high possibility that the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped due to the result of detachment. In the special figure 1 variable display game, since a highly anticipated effect is preset so as not to be selected, no special processing is performed here.

  If not in the high probability state (step Y248; N), it is determined whether the high probability final fluctuation is in progress (step Y249). High probability final variation means that the special figure variation display game is being executed (including the stop time) for a predetermined number of times (here, the 50th time) since the end of the first special gaming state. The last special figure change display game that has been executed is being executed.

  When the high-probability final fluctuation is being performed (step Y249; Y), the process proceeds to step Y257. Since the special figure 2 fluctuation display game having high probability final fluctuation is stopped in a short time, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game started from now is highly likely to be forcibly stopped in a short time. Therefore, even if an effect with a high degree of expectation is selected for the special figure 1 variable display game, it ends before the start of the effect, so here a process for preventing the effect with a high degree of expectation from being selected. Do not do.

  If the high probability final change is not in progress (step Y249; N), it is determined whether the special figure 2 is changing (step Y250). If the special figure 2 is not changing (step Y250; N), the process proceeds to step Y257. In this case, since it is in a low probability state, even if the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is started from now on, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game becomes a very long fluctuation time. Therefore, since it is unlikely that the special figure 1 variable display game will be forcibly stopped, the process for preventing the highly anticipated performance from being selected is not performed here.

  If the special figure 2 is changing (step Y250; Y), it is determined whether the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y251). If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 0 (step Y251; Y), the process proceeds to step Y254. If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 0 (step Y251; N), it is determined whether the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 or more (step Y252).

  When the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 or more (step Y252; Y), the process proceeds to step Y257. In this case, the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game is sufficiently long, and the special figure 1 variable display game is finished first, so that a highly expected production is not selected. No processing is performed.

  If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not 4 or more (step Y252; N), the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is calculated (step Y253), and the special figure 1 fluctuation display to be executed from now on. It is determined whether the game variation time is less than the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game (step Y254). When the variation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be executed is less than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (step Y254; Y), the process proceeds to step Y257. In this case, since the special figure 1 variable display game is finished first, the process for preventing the production with the high expectation is not selected.

  Further, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be executed is not less than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (step Y254; N), the fact that the fluctuation time of special figure 1 is longer is notified. A command is prepared (step Y255), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y256). After that, a high probability variation number update process for managing the period of the high probability state is performed (step Y257), and the special figure 1 variation start process is terminated. The effect control device 300 performs processing such as restricting selection of a highly expected effect for the special figure 1 fluctuation display game based on receiving a command notifying that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is longer. To do.

  When the variation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be executed is not less than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (step Y254; N), the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y246) is set. Processing for resetting information related to the variation pattern (first and second half variation pattern numbers, etc.) may be performed to change the variation control pattern so that the production control device 300 does not select a production with a high expectation. In the process of resetting the variation pattern, the variation time may not be changed or may be changed. Further, the process (step Y255) for preparing a command for notifying that the fluctuation time in FIG. 1 is longer may be performed or may not be performed.

  That is, the special figure 1 variation pattern process (step Y246) performed in the game control device 100 determines the variation mode information including the variation time of the first variation display game in the normal gaming state. First variation mode determination means is provided that can determine the variation mode information of the first variation display game without referring to the variation mode information. Furthermore, the process for resetting the variation pattern performed in the game control device 100 is performed when the variation mode information including the variation time of the first variation display game is determined by the first variation mode determination means. Is being executed, with reference to the variation time included in the variation mode information of the second variation display game, information regarding the variation pattern can be obtained without changing the variation time of the first variation display game that has been determined. It constitutes a second variation mode determination means that can be determined again.

  Also, instead of changing the fluctuation pattern once determined in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y246) later, it is executed when the fluctuation pattern is decided in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y246). The process of determining whether the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is not less than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (step Y254) is performed, and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the game situation is determined from the beginning. You may do it.

  In addition, when a special result can be selected as the result of the special figure 2 variable display game, the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed from now on only when the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a special result. The process (step Y254) which determines whether it is less than the remaining fluctuation time of FIG. 2 fluctuation display game is performed. When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is lost, the special figure 1 variable display game is not forcibly stopped by the result of the deviation, and this process is unnecessary.

[Special Figure 2 Variation Start Processing]
FIG. 129 shows the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step Y225) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 ordinary process. This special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. First, a special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step Y261), and the result information of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is out of place information. The big hit flag 2 setting process (step Y262) for setting the big hit information or the small hit information is performed.

  Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step Y263) related to the setting of the special symbol 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special symbol for setting the special symbol information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern 2 information setting processing (step Y264) is performed to prepare a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is set. (Step Y265).

  After that, a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y266) for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation mode in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed, and fluctuation start information setting for setting fluctuation start information of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed. Processing (step Y267) is performed. By these processes, the result and variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed from now on are determined. After that, a high probability variation number update process for managing the period of high probability state is performed (step Y268), and the special figure 2 variation start process is terminated.

  In the special figure 2 fluctuation start process, a process for adjusting so that no inconvenience occurs between the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game that can be executed simultaneously is not performed. This is because the probability of a small hit in the special figure 1 variable display game is low, and the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly terminated with few results. However, similarly to the special figure 1 variable display game, when the game is forcibly stopped by the result of the deviation, the selection of the production with high expectation may be restricted.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
FIG. 130 shows the big hit flag 1 setting process (step Y242) in the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation start process. In the big hit flag 1 setting process, first, deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 1 area (step Y271), and deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step Y272). Next, a big hit random number is loaded and prepared from the RWM special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) (step Y273), and the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to zero. Note that for the number of holdings 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers or the like) about the special figure starting storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 2 which is a result of the big hit determination of the special figure 2 variable display game being executed is a big hit (step Y275), and if it is a big hit (step Y275; Y), the process proceeds to step Y279. To do. In other words, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that are executed simultaneously are prevented from being a big hit. On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (step Y275; N), a big hit determination process (step Y276) is performed to determine whether or not the acquired big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value.

  When the determination result of the big hit determination process (step Y276) is a big hit (step Y277; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 1 area where the loss information is saved in step Y272 (step Y278). ), The big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step Y276) is not a big hit (step Y277; N), whether or not the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value is a small hit. A small hit determination process (step Y279) is performed to determine whether or not.

  If the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y 279) is a small hit (step Y 280; Y), the small hit information is overwritten in the small hit flag 1 area where the loss information is saved in step Y 271 and saved. (Step Y281), the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y279) is not the small hit (step Y280; N), the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated. In this case, the loss information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag 1 area.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
FIG. 131 shows the big hit flag 2 setting process (step Y262) in the above-described special figure 2 fluctuation start process. In the big hit flag 2 setting process, first, deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (step Y291), and deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step Y292). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 2 big hit random number storage area and prepared (step Y293), and the special figure big hit random number storage area is cleared to zero.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 1 as a result of the big hit determination of the special figure 1 variable display game being executed is a big hit (step Y295), and if it is a big hit (step Y295; Y), the process proceeds to step Y299. To do. In other words, both the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that are executed simultaneously are prevented from being a big hit. On the other hand, if it is not a big hit (step Y295; N), a big hit determination process (step Y296) is performed for determining whether or not the acquired big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value.

  If the determination result of the big hit determination process (step Y296) is a big hit (step Y297; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 2 area where the lost information is saved in step Y292 (step Y298). ), The big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (step Y296) is not a big hit (step Y297; N), it is determined whether or not the big hit random number value matches the small hit determination value. A small hit determination process (step Y299) is performed.

  If the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is a small hit (step Y300; Y), the small hit information is overwritten on the small hit flag 2 area where the loss information is saved in step Y291 and saved. (Step Y301), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the determination result of the small hit determination process (step Y299) is not a small hit (step Y300; N), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated. In this case, the loss information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area and the small hit flag 2 area.

[Big hit judgment processing]
FIG. 132 shows the big hit determination process (steps Y276 and Y296) in the big hit flag 1 setting process and the big hit flag 2 setting process described above. In this jackpot determination process, first, a lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step Y311), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value that is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value that is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value It is determined that it is a big hit.

  If the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312; Y), that is, if it is not a big hit, the judgment result is set to be off (step Y317), and the big hit determination processing is terminated. Note that the loss as a result of the determination indicates that the lottery is lost. On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step Y312; N), it is determined whether or not the state is a high probability state (step Y313).

  If it is in a high probability state (step Y313; Y), an upper limit determination value with high probability is set (step Y314), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step Y316). ). If not in the high probability state (step Y313; N), an upper limit determination value with a low probability is set (step Y315), and it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step Y316). .

  If the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step Y316; Y), that is, if it is not a big hit, the judgment result is set to be off (step Y317), and the big hit determination process is terminated. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step Y316; N), that is, if it is a big hit, the big hit is set as the determination result (step Y318), and the big hit determination process ends.

[Small hit judgment processing]
FIG. 133 shows the small hit determination process (steps Y279 and Y299) in the big hit flag 1 setting process and the big hit flag 2 setting process described above. In this small hit determination process, first, it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321). Note that “small hit” means that the big hit random number matches the small hit determination value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value that is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value and not more than the upper limit judgment value that is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. In some cases, it is determined to be a small hit. Further, the big hit determination value and the small hit determination value do not overlap.

  If the value of the target big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321; Y), that is, if it is not a small hit, a deviation is set as the determination result (step Y326), and the small hit determination processing is terminated. In addition, the loss as the determination result indicates that the lottery is lost. Further, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit determination value (step Y321; N), it is determined whether the special figure 1 information is being set, that is, whether the special figure 1 variable display game is being determined. (Step Y322).

  If the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step Y322; Y), the small hit upper limit determination value for the special figure 1 is set (step Y323), and the value of the target big hit random number is the small hit upper limit determination value. It is determined whether it is larger (step Y325). If the information of the special figure 1 is not being set (step Y322; N), that is, if the judgment is for the special figure 2 variable display game, a small hit upper limit judgment value for the special figure 2 is set (step Y324). Then, it is determined whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step Y325).

  When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step Y325; Y), that is, when it is not the small hit, a deviation is set as the determination result (step Y326), and the small hit determination process is terminated. If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit determination value (step Y325; N), that is, if it is a small hit, a small hit is set as the determination result (step Y327), and the small hit determination process is terminated. To do.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 134 shows the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step Y243) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above. In the special symbol 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step Y331). ) Is loaded with the jackpot symbol random number (step Y332). Next, the special symbol 1 big hit symbol table is set (step Y333), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol saving area (step Y334). The big hit type is selected by this processing. Note that the special figure 1 variable display game stop symbol is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol save area instead of the special figure 1 stop symbol area when a special result is derived in the special figure 2 variable display game. This is because there is a possibility that the result is forcibly changed to the result.

  After that, a special symbol 1 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step Y335), a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol pattern area (step Y336). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special symbol 1 indicator 51) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area (step Y337), and the big prize opening release information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired. It is saved in the special figure 1 big prize opening release information area (step Y338). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state. Then, a decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y346).

  On the other hand, if it is not big hit (step Y331; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step Y339), and if it is a small hit (step Y339; Y), the special figure 1 small hit symbol. A small hit design random number is loaded from the random number storage area (for the number of holdings 1) (step Y340). Next, a special symbol 1 small hit symbol table is set (step Y341), a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol saving area (step Y342). The small hit type is selected by this processing. Thereafter, a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol pattern area (step Y343), and a decorative special symbol 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y346).

  If the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step Y339; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol save area (step Y344), and the loss stop symbol pattern is stopped in the special symbol 1 stop. The design pattern area is saved (step Y345), and a decorative special figure 1 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y346). Through the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decoration special figure 1 command is saved in the decoration special figure 1 command area (step Y347), and an effect command setting process (step Y348) is performed. This decoration special figure 1 command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y349), and the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of holdings 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y350). The small symbol symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step Y351), and the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 135 shows the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step Y263) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above. In the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, the same process as the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is performed on the special figure 2. In this special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step Y361). If it is a big hit (step Y361; Y), the big hit symbol random number is stored from the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area. Is loaded (step Y362). Next, the special figure 2 big hit symbol table is set (step Y363), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol saving area (step Y364). The big hit type is selected by this processing. Note that the special symbol 2 variable display game stop symbol is saved not in the special graphic 2 stop symbol area but in the special graphic 2 stop symbol save area when a special result is derived in the special graphic 1 variable display game. This is because there is a possibility that the result is forcibly changed to the result.

  Thereafter, a special symbol 2 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step Y365), a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol pattern area (step Y366). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on a special symbol display (here, special symbol 2 indicator 52) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area (step Y367), and the big prize opening release information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired. It is saved in the special figure 2 big prize opening release information area (step Y368). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state. Then, a decoration special figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y376).

  On the other hand, if it is not big hit (step Y361; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y369). If it is a small hit (step Y369; Y), the special figure 2 small hit symbol A small hit design random number is loaded from the random number storage area (step Y370). Next, a special symbol 2 small hit symbol table is set (step Y371), a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded small hit symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol save area (step Y372). The small hit type is selected by this processing. Thereafter, a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol pattern area (step Y373), and a decorative special symbol 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y376).

  If the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y369; N), the stop symbol number at the time of disconnection is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol saving area (step Y374), and the stop symbol pattern is stopped for the special symbol 2 stop. The design pattern area is saved (step Y375), and a special decoration figure 2 command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step Y376). Through the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decoration special figure 2 command is saved in the decoration special figure 2 command area (step Y377), and an effect command setting process (step Y378) is performed. This decoration special figure 2 command is transmitted to the production control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y379), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area is cleared to 0 (step Y380), and the special figure 2 small hit symbol random number is stored. The area is cleared to 0 (step Y381), and the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 1 information setting process]
FIG. 136 shows the special figure 1 information setting process (step Y244) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above. In the special figure 1 information setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a high probability is present (step Y401). When the probability is not high (step Y401; N), a variation pattern selection information table is set (step Y402), and first half offset data and second half offset data corresponding to the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern are acquired (step Y403). Then, it is determined whether the special figure 1 big hit, that is, whether the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern is a big hit stop symbol pattern (step Y404).

  If the special figure 1 is a big hit (step Y404; Y), the process proceeds to step Y412. If the special figure 1 big hit is not found (step Y404; N), it is judged whether the special figure 1 small hit, that is, whether the special figure 1 stop symbol pattern is a small hit stop symbol pattern (step Y405). If the special figure 1 is not small hit (step Y405; N), that is, if it is out of place, the process proceeds to step Y407. When the special figure 1 is small (step Y405; Y), the special figure 1 holding number is added to the latter half offset data to update the value (step Y406), and the special figure 1 holding number is added to the first half offset data. The value is converted by addition (step Y407), and the process proceeds to step Y412.

  On the other hand, when the probability is high (step Y401; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 big hit (step Y408). If the special figure 1 is not the big hit (step Y408; N), the first half offset data for the high probability probability special figure 1 deviation / small hit is set (step Y409), and the special figure 1 length fluctuation second half offset data is set. Set (step Y411). In the case of special figure 1 big hit (step Y408; Y), the first half offset data for high probability special figure 1 big hit is set (step Y410), and the latter half offset data for special figure 1 length fluctuation is set. (Step Y411).

  Then, the first half offset data set as described above is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area (step Y412), and the latter half offset data is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area (step Y413). The setting process ends.

  That is, in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the normal gaming state, in the case of a small hit, the fluctuation pattern considering the special figure 1 holding number is determined for both the first half fluctuation pattern and the second half fluctuation pattern, and in the case of a loss In the case of the first half variation pattern, the variation pattern is determined in consideration of the special figure 1 holding number, and in the case of big hit, the fluctuation pattern is determined without considering the special figure 1 holding number. Further, in the special figure 1 variable display game in the specific gaming state, the fluctuation pattern is determined without considering the special figure 1 holding number.

[Special figure 2 information setting process]
FIG. 137 shows the special figure 2 information setting process (step Y264) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above. In this special figure 2 information setting process, first, it is determined whether or not there is a high probability (step Y421). When the probability is high (step Y421; Y), the variation pattern selection information table is set (step Y422), and the first half offset data and the second half offset data corresponding to the special figure 2 stop symbol pattern are acquired (step Y423). ), The process proceeds to step Y428.

  On the other hand, when the probability is not high (step Y421; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 big hit (step Y424). If the special figure 2 is not a big hit (step Y424; N), the low-probability special figure 2 is set for the first half offset data for losing / small hits (step Y425), and the special figure 2 length fluctuation second half offset data is set. Set (step Y427). In the case of special figure 2 big hit (step Y424; Y), first half offset data for special figure 2 big hit at low probability is set (step Y426), and latter half offset data for special figure 2 length fluctuation is set. (Step Y427).

  Then, the first half offset data set as described above is saved in the variable distribution information 1 area (step Y428), and the latter half offset data is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area (step Y429), and the special figure 2 information is saved. The setting process ends.

[Special Figure 1 Variation Pattern Setting Process]
FIG. 138 shows the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y246) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above. Note that the fluctuation patterns are the first half fluctuation pattern that is a fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation that is a fluctuation aspect from the reach state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game. First, the second half variation pattern is set first, and then the first half variation pattern is set.

  In the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process, first, a variation group selection address table is set (step Y451), and an address of the latter half variation group table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step Y452). Then, the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the fluctuation pattern random number 1 storage area (for holding number 1) in FIG. 1 and prepared (step Y453).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is out of sync, that is, whether the stop symbol pattern is a discontinuous stop symbol pattern (step Y454). If the special figure 1 is out of alignment (step Y454; Y), a 2-byte sorting process is performed. (Step Y455), the process proceeds to Step Y457. If the special figure 1 is not shifted (step Y454; N), a sorting process is performed (step Y456), and the process proceeds to step Y457. When the result is a big hit or a small hit, the distribution value is 1 byte, but when the result is out of order, the distribution value is 2 bytes to enable a variety of effects.

  Then, the address of the latter half variation selection table obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and prepared (step Y457), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for holding number 1) in FIG. To prepare (step Y458). Then, a sorting process (step Y459) is performed, the latter half variation number obtained as a result of the sorting is acquired and saved in the latter half variation number area (step Y460). By this process, the latter half fluctuation pattern is set.

  Next, a first half variation group table is set (step Y461), and a table selection pointer is calculated based on the variation distribution information 1 and the determined second half variation number (step Y462). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (step Y463), and the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for holding number 1) in FIG. Preparation is made (step Y464).

  Then, a sorting process (step Y465) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the sorting is acquired and saved in the first half variation number area (step Y467), and the special figure 1 variation pattern setting process is terminated. By this processing, the first half variation pattern is set, and the variation pattern for the whole period of the special figure 1 variation display game to be started from now is set.

[Special Figure 2 Variation Pattern Setting Processing]
FIG. 139 shows the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y266) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above. In this special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process, first, the latter half fluctuation selection address table is set (step Y471), and the address of the latter half fluctuation selection table corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step Y472). Then, the fluctuation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the fluctuation pattern random number 2 storage area of FIG. 2 and prepared (step Y473).

  Next, a sorting process is performed (step Y474), the latter half variation number obtained as a result of the sorting is acquired and saved in the latter half variation number area (step Y475). By this process, the latter half fluctuation pattern is set.

  Then, the first half variation group table is set (step Y476), and a table selection pointer is calculated based on the variation distribution information 1 and the determined second half variation number (step Y477). Next, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (step Y478), and the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 3 storage area of FIG. 2 and prepared (step Y479). ).

  Then, a sorting process (step Y480) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the sorting is acquired and saved in the first half variation number area (step Y481), and the special figure 2 variation pattern setting process is terminated. The first half variation pattern is set by this processing, and the variation pattern for the whole period of the special figure 2 variation display game to be started from now is set. In the special figure 2 variation display game, since there are few types of variation in the latter half, the variation pattern is determined using only the variation pattern random numbers 2 and 3 without selecting the latter variation group by the variation pattern random number 1.

[2-byte sort processing]
FIG. 140 shows a 2-byte sorting process (step Y455) in the above-described special figure 1 variation pattern setting process. The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting the latter half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the latter half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

  In this 2-byte distribution process, first, it is checked whether or not the top data of the prepared second-half fluctuation group table (selection table) is a code without distribution (ie, “0”) (step Y501). Here, the latter half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation pattern group, but defines only the latter half fluctuation pattern group in which the latter half fluctuation pattern is “no reach”. Since there is no need for distribution in the variation group table, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is defined at the top.

  If the first data in the latter half variation group table is a code without distribution (step Y502; Y), the data address corresponding to the result of distribution is updated (step Y507), and the 2-byte distribution process ends. To do. On the other hand, if the first data in the latter half fluctuation group table is not a code without sorting (step Y502; N), the first sorting value specified in the latter half fluctuation group table is acquired (step Y503).

  Next, a new random value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step Y373 from the loaded random value (the value of fluctuation pattern random number 1) (step Y504), and the calculated new random value Is smaller than “0” (step Y505). If the new random value is not smaller than “0” (step Y505; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step Y506), the process proceeds to step Y503 and the subsequent processes are performed. Do. That is, after the distribution value specified next in the variation group selection table is acquired in step Y503, the distribution value is subtracted with the random number determined in step Y505 as a new random value, and a new random value is further subtracted. A numerical value is calculated (step Y504). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (step Y505).

  The above processing is executed until it is determined in step Y505 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step Y505; Y). As a result, any one of the latter-half variation selection tables is selected from at least one latter-half variation selection table defined in the latter-half variation group table. If it is determined in step Y505 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step Y505; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the result of distribution (step Y507), and the 2-byte distribution process is performed. Exit.

[Distribution processing]
FIG. 141 shows the sorting process (steps Y456, Y459, Y465, Y474, Y480) in the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process and special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting process. The sorting process is based on the fluctuation pattern random number 2 to select the latter half fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game from the latter half fluctuation selection table (second half fluctuation pattern group) or based on the fluctuation pattern random number 3. This is a process for selecting the first half variation pattern of the special figure variation display game from the first half variation pattern group).

  In this distribution process, first, it is checked whether or not the top data of the prepared latter half variation selection table (selection table) and first half variation selection table (selection table) is a code without distribution (ie, “0”). (Step Y511). Here, like the latter half fluctuation group table, the latter half fluctuation selection table and the first half fluctuation selection table store a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation pattern or first half fluctuation pattern. In the case of a selection table having no distribution, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is defined at the top.

  If the first data in the latter half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is a code with no sorting (step Y512; Y), it is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the sorting result (step Y517), and the sorting is performed. The process ends. On the other hand, if the first data of the second half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is not a code without distribution (step Y512; N), one distribution value first defined in the second half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table. Is acquired (step Y513).

  Next, a new random value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in Step Y513 from the loaded random value (the value of the fluctuation pattern random number 2 or the fluctuation pattern random number 3) (Step Y514), and then the calculation It is determined whether or not the new random number value is smaller than “0” (step Y515). If the new random value is not smaller than “0” (step Y515; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step Y516), the process proceeds to step Y513, and thereafter Process.

  That is, in step Y513, after the distribution value specified next in the second half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is acquired, the distribution value is subtracted with the random number value determined in step Y515 as a new random value. Further, a new random value is calculated (step Y514). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (step Y515).

  The above processing is executed in step Y515 until it is determined that the new random number value is smaller than “0” (step Y515; Y). As a result, one of the latter-half variation number and the first-half variation number is selected from at least one latter-half variation pattern or first-half variation pattern defined in the latter-half variation selection table or the first-half variation selection table. If it is determined in step Y515 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (step Y515; Y), the address is updated to the data address corresponding to the result of the distribution (step Y517), and the distribution process is terminated. To do.

[Variation start information setting process]
FIG. 142 shows the change start information setting process (steps Y247 and Y267) in the above-described special figure 1 change start process and special figure 2 change start process. In this variation start information setting process, it is first determined whether or not the information of FIG. 1 is being set (step Y551). If the information of FIG. 1 is being set (step Y551; Y), The random number storage area (for the hold number 1) of the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 is cleared (step Y552). Further, when the information of the special figure 1 is not being set (step Y551; N), that is, when the information of the special figure 2 is being set, the random number storage areas of the fluctuation pattern random numbers 2 and 3 of the special figure 2 are cleared (step). Y553).

  Next, the first half variation time value table is set (step Y554), and the first half variation time value corresponding to the first half variation number is acquired (step Y555). Further, the latter half variation time value table is set (step Y556), and the latter half variation time value corresponding to the latter half variation number is acquired (step Y557). Then, the first half variation time value and the second half variation time value are added (step Y558), and the added value is saved in the target special game process timer area (step Y559).

  When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal gaming state which is in the low probability state is out of play or a small hit, a long variation with a very long variation time is set. In this case, as the above-described addition value, the remaining time (time less than 60000 ms) is calculated as the addition value except for the time that can be measured using the number of repetitions that is the number of times of measuring the specified time (here 60000 ms). It has come to be.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the information of FIG. 1 is being set (step Y560). If the information of FIG. 1 is being set (step Y560; Y), the process proceeds to step Y564. Further, when the information of the special figure 1 is not being set (step Y560; N), that is, when the information of the special figure 2 is being set, it is determined whether or not the long fluctuation of the special figure 2 is started (step Y561). The long fluctuation is a fluctuation pattern that is set when the result is out of play or a small hit in the normal game state for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, and is determined by the set fluctuation pattern number.

  If it is not the start of the long fluctuation in FIG. 2 (step Y561; N), 0 is saved in the repeat count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (step Y562), and the process proceeds to step Y564. If it is the start of the long fluctuation in FIG. 2 (step Y561; Y), 9 is saved in the repeat count area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (step Y563), and the process proceeds to step Y564.

  Thereafter, a variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first variation number is prepared (step Y564), a variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second variation number is prepared (step Y565), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y566). ). Next, it is determined whether the information of FIG. 1 is being set (step Y567). If the information of FIG. 1 is not being set (step Y567; N), the variation start information setting process is terminated. If the information of special figure 1 is being set (step Y567; Y), the number of reserved special figure 1 is updated by -1 (step Y568), and the contents of the random number storage area of special figure 1 are shifted (step Y569). ) Clear the free area after the shift (step Y570), and end the variation start information setting process.

  Through the above processing, information related to the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control apparatus 100 displays the result of the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) and the variation mode information on the first variation display game based on the first start storage stored in the first start storage means. The first determination means that can be determined before the start of. Further, the game control device 100 extracts a predetermined random number based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening 37, and the result of the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) based on the predetermined random number. And a second determination means capable of determining the variation mode information before the start of the second variation display game. Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining a variation pattern of identification information executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

  From the above, the first start winning opening 36 is arranged at a position where a game ball launched to one side of the game area 32 can be won, and the second start winning opening 37 is fired to the other side of the game area 32. The game ball is arranged at a position where a prize can be won, and the variation mode information of the variation display game includes information on the variation time that can specify the execution time of the variation display game, and in the normal state (normal game state) The variation time that can be determined as the variation time of the second variation display game by the second determination unit is larger than the variation time that can be determined as the variation time of the first variation display game by the first determination unit. It will be a long time.

  Information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. To set the detailed contents of the decoration special map change display game. The information related to the start of the special figure variation display game includes a decoration special figure hold number command including information related to the start memory number (holding number), a decoration special figure command including information related to the stop symbol, and a fluctuation of the special figure variation display game. Examples include variable commands that contain information about patterns. It should be noted that the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced by transmitting the decoration special figure command before the variation command.

  That is, the game control device 100 serves as first variation display game execution control means capable of performing execution control of the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) based on the determination result of the first determination means. . Further, it can be said that the first variation display game execution control means performs a series of execution control related to the first variation display game from the entire special figure 1 game processing. Further, the game control device 100 serves as second variation display game execution control means capable of performing execution control of the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) based on the determination result of the second determination means. . Further, it can be said that the second variation display game execution control means performs a series of execution control related to the second variation display game from the entire special figure 2 game processing.

  Further, the game control device 100 controls the result and variation mode information of the first variation display game determined by the first determination unit and the result and variation mode information of the second variation display game determined by the second determination unit. As transmission means that can be transmitted to the production control means (production control device 300). In addition, when the game control device 100 starts measuring the variation time in response to the start of the variation display game for each of the first variation display game and the second variation display game, and the variation time has elapsed, It serves as a measuring means for ending the measurement of the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display game.

  In addition, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal game state which is in a low probability state is out of play or a small hit, a long variation with a very long variation time is set. Information about time may not be transmitted to the production control device 300, but a command indicating only a long fluctuation may be transmitted. In the case of a long variation, it is sufficient to simply display the variation, and there is no need to determine the effect in detail. Therefore, the effect control device 300 starts the variation display based on receiving the command indicating the long variation. The variation time is managed only by the game control device 100, and when the variation time ends, a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 stops the variable display based on receiving the stop command. Like that. If it does in this way, the burden of control in production control device 300 can be eased.

[High probability change count update processing]
FIG. 143 shows the high probability variation number update processing (steps Y257 and Y268) in the above-described special figure 1 fluctuation start process and special figure 2 fluctuation start process. In this high probability variation number update process, first, it is determined whether or not a high probability is present (step Y581), and if not high probability (step Y581; N), the high probability variation number update process is terminated. If the probability is high (step Y581; Y), the high probability variation count for managing the number of executions of the special figure variation display game in the high probability state is updated by -1 (step Y582), and the high probability variation count is updated. Is determined to be 0 (step Y583).

  If the high probability variation number is not 0 (step Y583; N), that is, if the high probability state continues, the high probability variation number update process is terminated. When the number of high-probability fluctuations is 0 (step Y583; Y), that is, when the high-probability state is to be ended, a signal related to high-probability end is saved in the external information output data area (step Y584). Here, the big hit 2 signal is set to be OFF. Further, a signal related to the high probability state and the end of time reduction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y585). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is set to OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is set to OFF, the special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal is set to OFF, and the special symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal is set to OFF.

  Further, the low probability number is saved in the game state display number area (step Y586), and the special figure low probability flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y587). Then, the high probability final variation flag corresponding to the symbol for which variation starts is set (step Y588), and the high probability variation number update process is terminated.

  In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the high probability state is set until the special figure variation display game is executed a predetermined number of times after the special game state is finished, but the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display are performed. Since the game can be executed at the same time, the high-probability variation number update process for managing the number of high-probability states is performed at the start of the special figure variation display game. If it is a gaming machine that does not execute one special figure fluctuation display game while the other special figure fluctuation display game is being executed as in the prior art, the probability state is not changed until the predetermined special figure fluctuation display game is finished. There is no problem if you change to a low probability state. However, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed simultaneously as in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the probability state is set to a low probability at the end of the predetermined special figure variable display game. If the state is changed to the state, the determination is made with a high probability state even for the other special figure fluctuation display game started during the execution of the one special figure fluctuation display game, and the high probability over a predetermined number of times. The game can be executed in the state. Therefore, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed simultaneously as in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, one special figure variable display game which is the predetermined number of times is displayed in a high probability state. After the determination, it is necessary to be in a low probability state before the start of the other special figure variation display game. Here, immediately after the start processing for one special figure variation display game which is the predetermined number of times is finished. It is possible to change to a low probability state.

  As described above, since the high probability variation number update process is performed at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game, the last special figure fluctuation display game in which the lottery is performed in the high probability state is changed. The display is already in a low probability state. Therefore, if other processing is performed with reference to the actual probability state during the variation display of the special figure variation display game, the processing is performed as a low probability state, which may cause inconvenience. is there. Therefore, the special probability variation display game is set with a high probability final variation flag so that it can be handled as a game executed as a high probability state. In addition, the high probability final variation flag is information that can determine whether the last special diagram variation display game in which the lottery is performed in the high probability state is a special diagram 1 variation display game or a special diagram 2 variation display game. Is included.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuating process transition setting process]
FIG. 144 shows the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process (step Y216) in the special figure 1 normal process. In the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process, first, "1" is set as the special figure 1 game process number (step Y601), and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y602).

  Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step Y603), and a signal relating to the fluctuation start in FIG. 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y604). Here, the special symbol 1 changing signal is set to ON. Thereafter, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step Y605), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (the blinking cycle timer of the special figure 1 display 51) is saved in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area. For example, 100 ms) is set (step Y606). Furthermore, an initial value is set in the special figure 1 changing symbol number area (step Y607), and the special figure 1 changing process transition setting process is terminated.

  The initial value set in the special symbol 1 changing symbol number area is 0, so that the variable display starts from the state where all the segments are turned off. Since at least one segment is lit when the result mode is displayed, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display has started by starting the variable display from a state where all the segments are turned off.

[Special Figure 2 Fluctuating process transition setting process]
FIG. 145 shows the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process (step Y230) in the special figure 2 ordinary process. In this special figure 2 changing process transition setting process, first, "1" is set as the special figure 2 game process number (step Y611), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y612).

  Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step Y613), and a signal relating to the fluctuation start in FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y614). Here, the special symbol 2 changing signal is set to ON. Thereafter, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step Y615), and the initial value of the blinking control timer (the blinking cycle timer of the special figure 2 display 52) is saved in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area. For example, 100 ms) is set (step Y616). Further, an initial value is set in the special figure 2 changing symbol number area (step Y617), and the special figure 2 changing process transition setting process is terminated.

  The initial value to be set in the special symbol 2 changing symbol number area is 0, so that the variable display starts when all segments are turned off. Since at least one segment is lit when the result mode is displayed, it is possible to immediately recognize that the variable display has started by starting the variable display from a state where all the segments are turned off.

  In addition, when starting the variable display in the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, it is started from a state in which all the segments are turned off. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the variable display may be started from a lighting mode different from the lighting mode of any result mode, and if there is a segment that is not used in any result mode, the variable display is started at least from the state in which the segment is lit. You may make it do. Alternatively, the variable display may be started from the state where the same one segment is always turned on. Moreover, the lighting mode at the time of starting a fluctuation | variation by the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be the same, and may differ.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuating Processing]
FIG. 146 shows the special figure 1 changing process (step Y109) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In the special figure 1 changing process, first, the symbol determination number of times of output is updated by +1 (step Y621), a command is loaded from the decoration special figure 1 command area and prepared (step Y622), and an effect command setting process is performed. Perform (step Y623).

  Next, a decoration special figure 1 stop command is prepared (step Y624), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y625). In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, there is a case where the game machine is forcibly stopped before the fluctuation time set at the start of the fluctuation, and therefore, when the fluctuation is stopped, a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. .

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the final variation has a high probability (step Y626). When the special figure 1 fluctuation display game has high probability final fluctuation, the high probability final fluctuation flag of special figure 1 is set. If the final variation is not a high probability (step Y626; N), the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y627), and the process proceeds to step Y629. In the case of a high probability final change (step Y626; Y), the display time at the time of the high probability final change is set (step Y628), and the process proceeds to step Y629. Note that the display time (stop time) of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game set here is 600 ms in the case of outage, 2000 ms in the case of big hit, and 136 ms in the case of small hit if it is not a high probability final fluctuation. Display time is set. In the case of a high probability final variation, a display time of 7000 ms is set regardless of the result.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is out of order, that is, whether or not the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is out of place (step Y629). If the special figure 1 is out of place (step Y629; Y), the process proceeds to step Y644. If the special figure 1 is not out of place (step Y629; N), that is, if it is a big hit or a small hit, it is determined whether the special figure 2 variable display game is also being executed (step Y630). Whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

  When the special figure 2 variable display game is not being executed (step Y630; Y), the process proceeds to step Y640. If the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed (step Y630; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 2 display process is being executed (step Y631). In other words, in this case, the special figure 2 variable display game being executed is forcibly stopped with the result of the detachment based on the special figure 1 variable display game having a special result. Note that even if the special figure 2 variable display game has already ended the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it is also subject to forced stop.

  When the special figure 2 is being displayed (step Y631; Y), the process proceeds to step Y633. If the special figure 2 display processing is not in progress (step Y631; N), the symbol determination count output count is updated by +1 (step Y632), and the special figure 1 display time set above as the special figure 2 display time. A display time of +4 ms is set (step Y633). By setting the display time of the special figure 1 + the display time of 4 ms as the display time of the special figure 2, the display time of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 ends at the same time. Even when the special figure 2 variable display game is already in the display time, the display time is reset and the display time is newly started.

  Next, the display time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y634), a command is loaded and prepared from the decorative special figure 2 command area (step Y635), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y636). ). Thereafter, a decoration special figure 2 stop command is prepared (step Y637), an effect command setting process is performed (step Y638), and a special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 is performed (step Y639).

  Then, the command is loaded from the decoration special figure 1 command area and saved in the winning symbol command area (step Y640), whether the special figure 1 is a small hit, that is, whether the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a small hit. Is determined (step Y641). If the special figure is a small hit (step Y641; Y), the process proceeds to step Y644. If the special figure 1 is not a small hit (step Y641; N), that is, if it is a big hit, information is loaded from the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step Y642). ), Information is loaded from the special figure 1 large winning opening information area and saved in the large winning opening information area (step Y643).

  Thereafter, the information is loaded from the special figure 1 stop symbol saving area and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step Y644), and the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1 is performed (step Y645). The displaying process is terminated.

[Special Figure 2 Fluctuating Processing]
FIG. 147 shows the special figure 2 changing process (step Y140) in the special figure 2 game process described above. In the special figure 2 changing process, first, the symbol determination number of times output is updated by +1 (step Y651), a command is loaded from the special figure 2 command area and prepared (step Y652), and the effect command setting process is executed. Perform (step Y653).

  Next, a decoration special figure 2 stop command is prepared (step Y654), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y655). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the final variation has a high probability (step Y656). When the special figure 2 fluctuation display game has high probability final fluctuation, the high probability final fluctuation flag of special figure 2 is set.

  If the final variation is not a high probability (step Y656; N), the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y657), and the process proceeds to step Y659. In the case of a high probability final variation (step Y656; Y), the display time at the time of the high probability final variation is set (step Y658), and the process proceeds to step Y659. The display time (stop time) of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game set here is 600 ms regardless of the result if it is not a high probability final fluctuation, and regardless of the result if it is a high probability final fluctuation. A display time of 7000 ms is set.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 is out of order, that is, whether or not the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is out of place (step Y659). When the special figure 2 is out of place (step Y659; Y), the process proceeds to step Y674. If the special figure 2 is not out of step (step Y659; N), that is, if it is a big hit or a small hit, it is determined whether the special figure 1 variable display game is also being executed (step Y660). Whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is being executed can be grasped by referring to the special figure status.

  When the special figure 1 variable display game is not being executed (step Y660; Y), the process proceeds to step Y670. When the special figure 1 variable display game is being executed (step Y660; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 display process is being executed (step Y661). That is, in this case, the special figure 1 variable display game that is being executed is forcibly stopped by the result of the detachment based on the fact that the special figure 2 variable display game has a special result. In addition, even if the special figure 1 variable display game has already ended the variable display but the display time (stop time) has not ended, it is also subject to forced stop.

  When the special figure 1 display process is in progress (step Y661; Y), the process proceeds to step Y664. When the special figure 1 display process is not in progress (step Y661; N), the symbol determination number of times of output is updated by +1 (step Y662), and the process proceeds to step Y664.

  Next, the display time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y664), the command is loaded from the special figure 1 command area and prepared (step Y665), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y666). ). Thereafter, a special decoration figure 1 stop command is prepared (step Y667), an effect command setting process is performed (step Y668), and a special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 is performed (step Y669).

  Then, the command is loaded from the decoration special figure 2 command area and saved in the winning symbol command area (step Y670), whether the special figure 2 small hit, that is, whether the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is a small hit. Is determined (step Y671). If the special figure 2 is a small hit (step Y671; Y), the process proceeds to step Y674. If the special figure 2 is not a small hit (step Y671; N), that is, if it is a big hit, information is loaded from the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step Y672). ), Information is loaded from the special figure 2 big prize opening information area and saved in the big prize opening information area (step Y673).

  Thereafter, the information is loaded from the special figure 2 stop symbol saving area and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (step Y674), and the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 is performed (step Y675). The displaying process is terminated.

[Special figure 1 display transition setting process 1]
FIG. 148 shows the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1 (step Y645) in the special figure 1 changing process described above. In this special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1, first, a special figure 1 game process number “2” related to the special figure 1 display process is set (step Y681), and a process number is stored in the special figure 1 game process number area. Is saved (step Y682).

  Next, a signal related to the end of fluctuation in FIG. 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y683). Here, the special symbol 1 changing signal is set to OFF. Thereafter, as information for controlling the special figure 1 variable display game in the special figure 1 display 51, a stop flag related to the variable stop on the special figure 1 display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step Y684). ), The special figure 1 changing process transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Special figure 2 display transition setting process 1]
FIG. 149 shows the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 (step Y675) in the special figure 2 changing process described above. In the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1, first, a special figure 2 game process number “2” relating to the special figure 2 display process is set (step Y691), and a process number is stored in the special figure 2 game process number area. Is saved (step Y692).

  Next, a signal related to the end of fluctuation in FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y693). Here, the special symbol 2 changing signal is set to OFF. Thereafter, as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 display 52, a stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step Y694). ), The special figure 2 changing process transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Special figure 1 display transition setting process 2]
FIG. 150 shows the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 (step Y669) in the special figure 2 changing process described above. In the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2, first, a special figure 1 game process number “2” related to the special figure 1 display process is set (step Y701), and a process number is stored in the special figure 1 game process number area. Is saved (step Y702).

  Next, a signal related to the end of the fluctuation in FIG. 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y703), and then, as information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 1 is displayed. The stop flag related to the change stop on the display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 change control flag area (step Y704).

  Up to this point, the process is the same as the above-described special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1, and hereinafter, information for setting a result of the deviation is set. First, the shift stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step Y705), and the special figure 1 round number upper limit value information area is cleared (step Y706).

  Next, the special figure 1 big opening opening information area is cleared (step Y707), the deviation information is saved in the small hit flag 1 area (step Y708), and the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step Y709). ). Then, the special figure 1 stop symbol save area is cleared (step Y710), the shift symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol area (step Y711), and the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2 is finished. .

[Special figure 2 display transition setting process 2]
FIG. 151 shows the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 (step Y639) in the special figure 1 changing process described above. In the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2, first, a special figure 2 game process number "2" related to the special figure 2 display process is set (step Y721), and a process number is stored in the special figure 2 game process number area. Is saved (step Y722).

  Next, a signal relating to the end of the fluctuation in FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y723), and then, as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 display 52, the special figure 2 is displayed. A stop flag related to the change stop on the display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 change control flag area (step Y724).

  Up to this point, the process is the same as the above-described special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1, and thereafter, setting of information for obtaining a result of losing is performed. First, the shift stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step Y725), and the special figure 2 round number upper limit value information area is cleared (step Y726).

  Next, the special figure 2 big winning opening information area is cleared (step Y727), the shift information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (step Y728), and the shift information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step Y729). ). Then, the special figure 2 stop symbol saving area is cleared (step Y730), the shift stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol area (step Y731), and the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2 is finished. .

  As a result of the processes in FIGS. 146 to 151 described above, when one special figure fluctuation display game has a special result, the other special figure fluctuation display game is forcibly stopped by the result of the detachment. That is, based on the special figure 1 variable display game having a special result, the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped by the result of detachment, and the special figure 2 variable display game is determined to have the special result. Based on this, the second end control process in which the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped by the result of the deviation is performed.

  From the above, the first variation display game execution control means (game control device 100) executes the second variation display game when the execution control of the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) is performed. When the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) for which execution control is performed by the control means (game control device 100) has a special result, the first variation display game for which execution control is performed Can be terminated as a result other than the special result, and the second variation display game execution control means is executed by the first variation display game execution control means when executing the execution control of the second variation display game. When the first variation display game being controlled has a special result, the second variation display game performing the execution control can be terminated as a result other than the special result. The Rukoto. As a result, when a special result is derived in one variation display game, the other variation display game can be forcibly stopped by the result, so that no trouble occurs even when simultaneous variation is performed. Can be.

[Special figure 1 display processing]
152 and 153 show the special figure 1 display process (step Y110) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In the special figure 1 display process, first, the small hit flag 1 set in the small hit flag 1 area in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 variation start process is loaded (step Y751), and the small hit flag is set. One area is cleared (step Y752).

  Next, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 area in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 variation start process is loaded (step Y753), and the big hit flag 1 area is cleared (step Y754). Then, it is determined whether the special figure 1 is a big hit, that is, whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is a big hit information (step Y755). If it is not a big hit (step Y755; N), the process proceeds to step Y777. In the case of a big hit (step Y755; Y), a test signal related to the start of the special figure 1 variable display game big hit (special figure 1 big hit) (for example, the condition device operating signal is ON, the accessory continuous operating device is activated) The medium signal is turned on and the signal per special symbol is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y756).

  Then, a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation cancel command is prepared (step Y757), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y758). That is, the abnormal variation notification ends with the occurrence of the first special gaming state. Thereafter, a round number upper limit table is set (step Y759), and the round number upper limit value (16, 8, 4 or 2 in the case of this embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit information is obtained to obtain the round number upper limit value. Save in the area (step Y760). Further, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y761).

  Next, a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the special symbol 1 stop symbol pattern is loaded from the symbol symbol command area and prepared (step Y762), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y763). Thereafter, a fanfare command is prepared (step Y764), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y765).

  Next, a signal corresponding to the state of the probability of winning a big hit in the special winning opening information and the special figure display game is saved in the external information output data area (step Y766). In the present embodiment, in step Y766, two jackpot signals and three jackpot signals are saved as signals corresponding to the winning prize opening information and the probability state. Each ON / OFF is determined by the special winning opening information and the probability state. For example, a jackpot 2 signal is ON when the jackpot type is a jackpot other than the 2R probability variation D1, and is ON when the jackpot type is the 2R probability variation D1 in the high probability state, and the 2R probability variation in the low probability state. When it is D1, it is turned OFF. The big hit 3 signal is ON when the big hit type is a big hit other than the 2R probability variation D1, and is OFF when the 2R probability variation D1 in the high probability state, and the 2R probability variation in the low probability state. When it is D1, it is turned ON.

  Thereafter, a big hit fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms, 3000 ms or 4 ms) corresponding to the big prize opening information is set (step Y767), and the set big hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y768). . Then, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit to open the top large winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) (step Y769).

  If it is a big hit to open the upper prize winning opening (step Y769; Y), the upper prize winning opening illegal winning number area is cleared (step Y770), and the illegal extra monitoring period flag is set in the upper winning prize illegal monitoring period flag area. Is saved (step Y771), and the process proceeds to step Y774. In addition, when it is not a big hit to open the upper big prize opening (step Y769; N), that is, when it is a big hit to open the lower big prize opening (second special variable prize winning device 39), the lower big prize opening illegal prize number area Is cleared (step Y772), the fraud monitoring period outside flag is saved in the lower large winning prize fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y773), and the process proceeds to step Y774.

  Next, 3 is set as the process number (step Y774) and saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y775). Furthermore, a fanfare / interval process transition setting process (step Y776) is performed, and the special figure 1 display process is terminated.

  On the other hand, in step Y755, if Special Figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y755; N), that is, if big hit flag 1 is out of place information, it is determined whether loaded small hit flag 1 is a small hit (small hit information). (Step Y777). If the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step Y777; Y), it is determined whether it is a high probability final variation, that is, whether it is the last special figure variation display game in which a lottery is performed in a high probability state. Determination is made (step Y778).

  If it is not the high probability final fluctuation (step Y778; N), the process proceeds to step Y783. If the final variation is high probability (step Y778; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y779), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y780). Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y781), and the left-handed instruction notification flag and the high probability final variation flag are cleared (step Y782). By clearing the left-handed instruction notification flag, a left-handed instruction notification command is set and notification for instructing left-handed is performed in the special process shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, a command is loaded from the winning symbol command area and prepared (step Y783), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y784). Further, a small hitting fanfare command is prepared (step Y785), an effect command setting process is performed (step Y786), and it is determined whether a high probability is in progress (step Y787).

  When the probability is not high (step Y787; N), a signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y788). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to be OFF. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y789). As a result, the first game state display unit 77 is turned off, and a display for instructing left-handed is displayed.

  On the other hand, when the probability is high (step Y787; Y), a signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y790). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to be ON. Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y791). As a result, the first game state display unit 77 is turned on, and a display for instructing a right turn is made.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not it is a small hit to open the top prize winning opening (first special variable winning prize apparatus 38) (step Y792), and if it is a small hit to open the top big winning opening (step Y792; Y), The upper prize winning portion illegal winning number area is cleared (step Y793), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper big winning prize fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y794), and the process proceeds to step Y797. In addition, when it is not a small hit to open the upper large winning opening (step Y792; N), that is, when it is a small hit to open the lower large winning opening (the second special variable winning apparatus 39), an illegal winning of the lower large winning opening is performed. The number area is cleared (step Y795), the fraud monitoring period outside flag is saved in the lower prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y796), and the process proceeds to step Y797. Then, the special figure 1 small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process (step Y797) is performed, and the special figure 1 display mid-process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step Y777 that the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step Y777; N), it is a high probability final variation, that is, the last special drawing in which a lottery in a high probability state is performed. It is determined whether the game is a variable display game (step Y798).

  If it is not the high probability final fluctuation (step Y798; N), the process proceeds to step Y806. If it is a high probability final variation (step Y798; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y799), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y800). Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y801), and the left-handed instruction notification flag and the high probability final variation flag are cleared (step Y802).

  Next, it is determined whether the game is in the second special game state based on the small hit in the special figure 2, that is, the small hit generated in the special figure 2 variable display game (step Y803). If it is during the small hit of special figure 2 (step Y803; Y), the process proceeds to step Y806. As a result, the state of instructing the right handing is maintained. Further, when the special figure 2 is not in a small hit (step Y803; N), a signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y804), and the game state display number 2 area is in the left-handed state. The number is saved (step Y805). Thereafter, the special figure status area in the special figure status 1 is cleared (information subtraction) (step Y806), the special figure 1 normal process transition setting process 1 is performed (step Y807), and the special figure 1 display process is terminated. .

[Special figure 2 display processing]
FIGS. 154 and 155 show the special figure 2 displaying process (step Y141) in the special figure 2 game process described above. In this special figure 2 display process, a process equivalent to the above-described special figure 1 display process is performed for special figure 2. In the special figure 2 display processing, first, the small hit flag 2 set in the small hit flag 2 area in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 variation start process is loaded (step Y811), and the small hit flag is set. The two areas are cleared (step Y812).

  Next, the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 area in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is loaded (step Y813), and the big hit flag 2 area is cleared (step Y814). Then, the special figure 2 determines whether it is a big hit, that is, whether the loaded big hit flag 2 is a big hit information (step Y815). If it is not a big hit (step Y815; N), the process proceeds to step Y837. Also, in the case of a big hit (step Y815; Y), a test signal related to the start of the big hit (special figure 2 big hit) of the special figure 2 variable display game (for example, the condition device operating signal is ON, the accessory continuous operating device is activated) The middle signal is turned on and the special symbol 2 signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y816).

  Then, a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation cancel command is prepared (step Y817), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y818). That is, the abnormal variation notification ends with the occurrence of the first special gaming state. Thereafter, the round number upper limit table is set (step Y819), and the round number upper limit value (16, 8, 4 or 2 in this embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit information is obtained to obtain the round number upper limit value. Save in the area (step Y820). Further, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y821).

  Next, a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the special symbol 2 stop symbol pattern is loaded from the symbol symbol command area and prepared (step Y822), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y823). Thereafter, a fanfare command is prepared (step Y824), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y825).

  Next, a signal corresponding to the state of the probability of winning a big win in the special winning opening information and the special figure changing display game is saved in the external information output data area (step Y826). In the present embodiment, in step Y826, two jackpot signals and three jackpot signals are saved as signals corresponding to the winning prize opening information and the probability state. Each ON / OFF is determined by the special winning opening information and the probability state. For example, a jackpot 2 signal is ON when the jackpot type is a jackpot other than the 2R probability variation D1, and is ON when the jackpot type is the 2R probability variation D1 in the high probability state, and the 2R probability variation in the low probability state. When it is D1, it is turned OFF. The big hit 3 signal is ON when the big hit type is a big hit other than the 2R probability variation D1, and is OFF when the 2R probability variation D1 in the high probability state, and the 2R probability variation in the low probability state. When it is D1, it is turned ON.

  Thereafter, a big hit fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms, 3000 ms or 4 ms) corresponding to the big prize opening information is set (step Y827), and the set big hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y828). . Then, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit to open the top large winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) (step Y829).

  If it is a big hit to open the top prize winning opening (step Y829; Y), the upper prize winning opening illegal prize number area is cleared (step Y830), and the fraud monitoring period flag is set in the upper university winning prize illegal monitoring period flag area. Is saved (step Y831), and the process proceeds to step Y834. In addition, when it is not a big hit to open the upper big prize opening (step Y829; N), that is, when it is a big hit to open the lower big prize opening (second special variable prize winning device 39), the lower big prize opening illegal prize number area Is cleared (step Y832), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y833), and the process proceeds to step Y834.

  Next, 3 is set as the process number (step Y834) and saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y835). Furthermore, a fanfare / interval process transition setting process (step Y836) is performed, and the special figure 2 display process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the special figure 2 is not a big hit at step Y815 (step Y815; N), that is, if the big hit flag 2 is missing information, it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag 2 is a small hit (small hit information). (Step Y837). If the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step Y837; Y), it is determined whether it is a high probability final variation, that is, whether it is the last special figure variation display game in which a lottery is performed in a high probability state. Determination is made (step Y838).

  If it is not the high probability final fluctuation (step Y838; N), the process proceeds to step Y843. If it is a high probability final variation (step Y838; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y839), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y840). Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y841), and the left-handed instruction notification flag and the high probability final variation flag are cleared (step Y842). By clearing the left-handed instruction notification flag, a left-handed instruction notification command is set and notification for instructing left-handed is performed in the special process shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, a command is loaded from the winning symbol command area and prepared (step Y843), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y844). Further, a small hitting fanfare command is prepared (step Y845), an effect command setting process is performed (step Y846), and it is determined whether the probability is high (step Y847).

  When the probability is not high (step Y847; N), a signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y848). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to be OFF. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y849). As a result, the first game state display unit 77 is turned off, and a display for instructing left-handed is displayed.

  On the other hand, when the probability is high (step Y847; Y), a signal relating to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y850). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to be ON. Then, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y851). As a result, the first game state display unit 77 is turned on, and a display for instructing a right turn is made.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not it is a small hit to open the top prize winning opening (first special variable winning prize apparatus 38) (step Y852). If it is a small hit to open the top big winning opening (step Y852; Y), The upper prize winning portion illegal winning number area is cleared (step Y853), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper prize winning portion fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y854), and the process proceeds to step Y857. In addition, when it is not a small hit to open the upper large winning opening (step Y852; N), that is, when it is a small hit to open the lower large winning opening (second special variable winning apparatus 39), the illegal winning of the lower large winning opening The number area is cleared (step Y855), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y856), and the process proceeds to step Y857. Then, the special figure 2 small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process (step Y857) is performed, and the special figure 2 mid-display process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step Y837 that the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step Y837; N), it is a high probability final variation, that is, the last special drawing in which a lottery is performed in a high probability state. It is determined whether the game is a variable display game (step Y858). If it is not the high probability final fluctuation (step Y858; N), the process proceeds to step Y866. If it is a high probability final variation (step Y858; Y), a probability information command (low probability) is prepared (step Y859), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y860). Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y861), and the left-handed instruction notification flag and the high probability final variation flag are cleared (step Y862).

  Next, it is determined whether the game is in the second special game state based on the small hit in the special figure 1, that is, the small hit generated in the special figure 1 variable display game (step Y863). If it is during the small hit in FIG. 1 (step Y863; Y), the process proceeds to step Y866. As a result, the state of instructing the right handing is maintained. Further, when the small hit in FIG. 1 is not in progress (step Y863; N), a signal related to the left hand instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y864), and the game state display number 2 area is in the left handed state. The number is saved (step Y865). Thereafter, the special figure status area in the special figure 2 fluctuation is cleared (information subtraction) (step Y866), the special figure 2 normal process transition setting process 1 is performed (step Y867), and the special figure 2 displaying process is terminated. .

  That is, the first special game in which the game control device 100 generates a first special game state in which the special variable winning device is released with the operation of the condition device based on the fact that the variable display game has reached the first special result. And a second special game generating means for generating a second special game state in which the special variable winning device is opened without the operation of the condition device based on the fact that the variable display game has a second special result. Make.

[Fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1]
FIG. 156 explains the details of the fanfare / interval process transition setting process (steps Y776, Y836) in the above-described special figure 1 display process and special figure 2 display process. In this fanfare / interval process transition setting process, first, a signal relating to the start of the big hit (first special game state) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y871). Here, one big hit signal that is output in big hit or small hit is set to ON. Next, a signal relating to the end of the high-probability state and the time-short state (special symbol variation time shortening state) is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y872). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is set to OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is set to OFF, the special symbol 1 variation time shortening state signal is set to OFF, and the special symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal is set to OFF.

  Thereafter, the number of rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state is cleared (step Y873), and the number with a low probability is saved in the game state display number area (step Y874). The special figure low probability flag is saved in the flag area (step Y875).

  Then, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery to save the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step Y876), and the special figure variation display that can be executed in the high probability state The high probability variation count area for managing the number of games is cleared (step Y877). As a result, the high-probability state and the short-time state are terminated, and the normal probability state and the normal state are obtained.

  Next, the big hit information is saved in the special figure status area (step Y878), and the high probability final fluctuation flag area is cleared (step Y879). Further, a signal relating to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y880), and the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y881).

  Thereafter, the release flag is saved in the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation flag area (step Y882), and the special figure 2 abnormal number area for storing the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number is cleared (step Y883). Further, the special figure 1 fluctuation frequency area is cleared to 0 (step Y884), the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer area is cleared to 0 (step Y885), and the fanfare / interval process transition setting process is terminated. That is, all the information related to the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation is cleared with the occurrence of the big hit.

[Special figure 1 small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process]
FIG. 157 shows the special figure 1 small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process (step Y797) in the special figure 1 display process described above. In this special figure 1 small hitting fanfare process transition setting process, first, “7” relating to the small hitting fanfare process is set as the process number (step Y891), and the processing number is set in the special figure 1 game processing number area. Save (step Y892).

  Next, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 4 ms) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y893), and a signal relating to the start of the small hit is saved in the external information output data area (step Y894). Here, one big hit signal that is output in big hit or small hit is set to ON. Furthermore, a signal relating to the start of the special figure 1 small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y895). Here, the special symbol small hit signal is set to ON.

  After that, the small hitting information is saved in the special figure status information (step Y896), the small hitting display pointer is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y897), and the special figure one small hitting fanfare mid-process transition setting process is completed. To do.

[Special figure 2 small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process]
FIG. 158 shows the special figure 2 small hit fanfare mid-process transition setting process (step Y857) in the special figure 2 display middle process described above. In the special figure 2 small hit fanfare process transition setting process, first, “7” relating to the small hit fanfare process is set as the process number (step Y901), and the process number is set in the special figure 2 game process number area. Save (step Y902).

  Next, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 4 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y903), and a signal related to the start of the small hit is saved in the external information output data area (step Y904). Here, one big hit signal that is output in big hit or small hit is set to ON. Further, a signal relating to the start of the special figure 2 small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y905). Here, the special symbol 2 small hit signal is set to ON.

  After that, the small hitting information is saved in the special figure status information (step Y906), the small hit display pointer is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y907), and the special figure 2 small hitting fanfare mid-process transition setting process is completed. To do.

[Fanfare / In-interval processing]
FIG. 159 shows fanfare / interval processing (steps Y111 and Y142) in the above-described special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing. In this fanfare / interval processing, first, the number of rounds in the special gaming state is updated by +1 (step Y951), and a round command corresponding to the winning prize opening information and the number of rounds is prepared (step Y952). (Step Y953).

  Next, the big hit midway processing control pointer initial value corresponding to the big winning opening information and the number of rounds is set (step Y954), and the pointer initial value is saved in the big hit middle processing control pointer area (step Y955). As an initial value for the big hit processing control pointer, 0 is set when opening and closing is repeated in one round. Here, the 5th R of 16R probability variation F3 (special drawing 2 top winning opening / closing pattern 5) corresponds. Further, in the case of performing one continuous release in one round, 21 is set as the jackpot operation end value. Note that the initial value may be set to other than 0 according to the number of times of opening and closing in one round.

  Then, the winning opening opening time corresponding to the winning opening information and the number of rounds is set (step Y956), and 4 is set as the process number (step Y957). The opening time set here is, for example, any one of 200 ms, 600 ms, 1600 ms, and 29000 ms.

  Next, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit of special figure 1 (step Y958). If it is a big hit of special figure 1 (step Y958; Y), the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y959). ), The special winning opening opening time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y960). On the other hand, if the special figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y958; N), the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y961), and the big prize opening time is saved in the special figure 2 game process timer area. (Step Y962).

  Then, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit for opening the top prize winning opening (first special variable prize winning device 38) (step Y963). Whether or not it is a big hit for opening the top prize winning opening can be determined from the set big opening opening information. If it is a big hit for opening the top prize winning opening (step Y963; Y), the process setting process 1 for opening the big winning opening is performed (step Y964), and the fanfare / interval processing is ended. Further, when it is not a big hit for opening the top prize winning opening (step Y963; N), the process transition setting process 2 for opening the big winning opening is performed (step Y965), and the process during the fanfare / interval is ended.

[Large winning opening open process transition setting process 1]
FIG. 160 shows the process for setting process 1 for opening the special winning opening during the fanfare / interval process described above (step Y964). In this special winning opening opening process transition setting process 1, first, a signal related to the opening of the upper winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y971). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is set to ON. Then, in order to open the open / close door 38c of the first special variable winning device 38, the upper winning port on-data is saved in the large winning port solenoid output data area (step Y972), and the number of winnings to the big winning port is counted. The winning prize mouth count is cleared (step Y973), and the winning prize opening opening process transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Large winning opening open process transition setting process 2]
FIG. 161 shows the transition process setting process 2 (step Y965) during the big prize opening opening in the above-described fanfare / interval process. In this special winning opening opening process transition setting process 2, first, a signal related to the opening of the lower large winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y981). Here, the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is set to ON. Then, in order to open the open / close door 39c of the second special variable prize winning device 39, the lower big prize opening on-data is saved in the big prize opening solenoid output data area (step Y982), and the number of winning prizes to the big prize opening is counted. The winning prize mouth count is cleared (step Y983), and the winning prize opening opening process transition setting process 2 is terminated.

[Processing during the grand prize opening]
FIG. 162 shows the special prize opening opening process (steps Y112, Y143) in the above-described special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process. In the big winning opening opening process, first, the big hit processing control pointer is loaded (step Y1001), and it is determined whether or not the loaded value is equal to or larger than the big hit operation end value (here 21) (step Y1002).

  If the loaded value is not equal to or greater than the big hit operation end value (21 in this case) (step Y1002; N), the big hit operation transition setting process is performed (step Y1003), and the big hit middle processing control pointer is updated by +1 (step Y1004). Then, the process for opening the big prize opening is finished. In this case, opening / closing is performed during one round, and the opening / closing mode of the special variable winning device is set according to the updated jackpot processing control pointer.

  On the other hand, if the loaded value is greater than or equal to the jackpot action end value (21 in this case) (step Y1002; Y), the current round number in the special gaming state being executed and the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit area Are compared to determine whether the current round is the final round (step Y1005). If it is not the final round (step Y1005; N), an interval command related to the interval between rounds is prepared (step Y1006), and an effect command setting process (step Y1008) is performed. If it is the final round (step Y1005; Y), an ending command relating to display control of the ending display screen at the end of the special gaming state is prepared (step Y1007), and an effect command setting process (step Y1008). I do.

  Next, the remaining ball processing time corresponding to the winning prize opening information is set (step Y1009), and 5 related to the winning ball remaining ball processing is set as the process number (step Y1010). As the remaining sphere processing time, 600 ms, 800 ms, or 1400 ms is set. And it is determined whether it is a big hit of special figure 1 (step Y1011).

  If it is a big hit in the special figure 1 (step Y1011; Y), the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y1012), and the remaining ball processing time is saved in the special figure 1 game process timer area (step Y1012). Step Y1013). On the other hand, if the special figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y1011; N), the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1014), and the remaining ball processing time is saved in the special figure 2 game process timer area. (Step Y1015).

  Thereafter, the off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1016), and the special winning opening open process is terminated. In step Y1016, the off data is set for both the upper prize winning solenoid and the lower prize winning solenoid, and the process of closing any of the big winning prizes is performed.

[Big hit action transition setting process]
FIG. 163 shows the big hit operation transition setting process (step Y1004) in the above-described special winning opening opening process. In the big hit operation transition setting process, first, branch processing is performed depending on whether the value of the big hit mid-process control pointer is an even number or an odd number (step Y1021). Here, branch processing is performed assuming that 0 is an even number.

  If the value of the big hit processing control pointer is an even number in step Y1021, a wait time corresponding to the control pointer is set (step Y1022). Here, 1500 ms is set as the wait time. Note that different wait times may be set depending on the value of the pointer. Next, off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1023), and the process proceeds to step Y1026. In step Y1023, off data is set for both the upper prize winning solenoid and the lower prize winning solenoid, and a process for closing any of the big winning prizes is performed.

  On the other hand, if the value of the big hit processing control pointer is an odd number in step Y1021, the big winning opening opening time corresponding to the control pointer is set (step Y1024). Here, when the value of the big hit processing control pointer is 1 to 19 as the big winning opening time, 200 ms is set, and when it is 21, 25000 ms is set. Next, the top prize winning port on-data is saved in the big winning prize solenoid output data area (step Y1025), and the process proceeds to step Y1026. In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, only the top prize winning opening (the first special variable prize winning device 38) is repeatedly opened and closed during one round. Therefore, in step Y1024, on data is saved for the top prize winning solenoid. doing. Of course, depending on the setting of the gaming machine, it may be possible to repeat the opening and closing of the lower large prize opening (second special variable prize winning device 39) in one round.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not it is a big hit of special figure 1 (step Y1026). If it is a big hit of special figure 1 (step Y1026; Y), the set time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area ( Step Y1027), the jackpot movement transition setting process is terminated. If the special figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y1026; N), the set time is saved in the special figure 2 game process timer area (step Y1028), and the big hit action transition setting process is terminated. With the above processing, it is possible to repeatedly open and close the big prize opening in one round.

[Large winning ball remaining ball processing]
FIG. 164 shows the special winning opening remaining ball process (steps Y113 and Y144) in the above-described special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process. In this winning ball remaining ball process, first, the current round number in the special game state being executed is compared with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit area to determine whether the current round is the final round. (Step Y1041).

  If the current round in the special gaming state is not the final round (step Y1041; N), a signal related to the end of the big prize opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1042). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is set to OFF and the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is set to OFF. Next, an interval time corresponding to the winning prize opening information and the current round number is set (step Y1043), and 3 for the fanfare / interval processing is set as the process number (step Y1044).

  The interval period between rounds is a period from when the remaining sphere processing time elapses from the end of the round to when the interval time elapses after the remaining sphere processing time elapses. For example, in the case of the special prize opening / closing pattern 1 in FIG. 1, since the remaining ball processing time of 1400 ms and the interval time of 600 ms are set, the interval period becomes 2000 ms, and the interval effect is displayed on the display device 41 or the like in this interval period. Is executed.

  On the other hand, when the current round in the special gaming state is the final round (step Y1041; Y), a big hit end process transition setting process is performed (step Y1045), and an ending time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step Y1046), 6 for the special figure 1 big hit end process or special figure 2 big hit end process is set as the process number (step Y1047).

  And it is determined whether it is a big hit of special figure 1 (step Y1048). If it is a big hit in the special figure 1 (step Y1048; Y), the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y1049), and the set time is saved in the special figure 1 game process timer area (step Y1048). Y1050), the winning prize remaining ball processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the special figure 1 is not a big hit (step Y1048; N), the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1051), and the set time is saved in the special figure 2 game process timer area (step Y1051). Step Y1052), the special winning opening remaining ball processing is terminated.

  The ending period from the end of the final round to the end of the special gaming state is a period from the end of the final round until the ending time elapses after the remaining sphere processing time elapses. For example, in the case of the special prize opening / closing pattern 1 on the special figure 1, since the remaining ball processing time of 1400 ms and the ending time of 9600 ms are set, the ending period is 11000 ms. Is executed.

[Big jackpot end process transition setting process]
FIG. 165 shows the jackpot end process transition setting process (step Y1045) in the above-described winning prize remaining ball process. In this jackpot end process transition setting process, first, a signal related to the end of opening of the big prize opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1071). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is set to OFF and the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is set to OFF.

  Next, the information on the number-of-winner count area for storing the number of winning prizes is cleared (step Y1072), and the information on the number-of-rounds area for storing the number of rounds in the special gaming state is cleared (step Y1073). ), Information on the round number upper limit area for storing the upper limit value of the round number in the special game state is cleared (step Y1074).

  Then, the information of the round number upper limit information area storing the flag for determining the upper limit value of the round number is cleared (step Y1075), and the big winning opening opening information area for storing the flag for determining the opening information of the big winning opening is stored. The information is cleared (step Y1076), the information of the big hit control pointer area for setting the opening / closing mode of the big prize opening is cleared (step Y1077), and the big hit end process transition setting process is ended.

[Special figure 1 big hit end processing]
FIG. 166 shows the special figure 1 big hit end process (step Y114) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In the special figure 1 big hit ending process, first, “0” is set as the process number related to the special figure 1 ordinary process (step Y1101), and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y1102).

  Next, a signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1103). Here, the big hit 1 signal and the big hit 3 signal are set to OFF. Then, a signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the short time state (special symbol fluctuation time shortening state) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1104). Here, the big hit 2 signal is set to ON. Note that the jackpot 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is continued.

  Thereafter, a signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1105). Here, the condition device operating signal, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, the special symbol 1 signal and the special symbol 2 signal are set to OFF. Next, a signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the short time state is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1106). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal, and the special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal are set to ON.

  Then, a signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1107). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Next, a number having a high probability is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1108). In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, since the time is always short during high probability, these numbers are not distinguished from each other and are numbered with high probability. Thereafter, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1109), and the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1110).

  Next, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1111), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1112). The special figure status area is cleared (step Y1113). Note that clearing the special figure status area results in a special figure status 0 indicating that neither the special figure 1 fluctuation display game nor the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being executed.

  After that, a high probability flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1114), and an initial value (here, 50) is stored in the high probability fluctuation frequency area for managing the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game in the high probability state. ) Is saved (step Y1115). Further, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1116), and the special figure 2 game wait time value (here 8 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1117), the special figure 1 big hit end processing is ended.

  By performing the special figure 1 big hit end process, it is possible to start the special figure variation display game for both special figure 1 and special figure 2, but in the timer interruption process, the special figure 2 game is executed after the special figure 1 game process. In order to perform the process, a special interrupt process that starts the special figure fluctuation display game is performed in the special figure 2 game process by the timer interruption that has performed the special figure 1 big hit end process. Will be able to start first. Therefore, in step Y1117, the special figure 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game process timer area, so that the start process for the special figure 2 variable display game is delayed until the next timer interrupt process. The variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are processed by the same timer interruption.

  In other words, the second variation display game execution control means is the second variation display game execution control means until the first variation display game execution control means can execute the process related to the start of the first variation display game after the game control device 100 ends the special gaming state. A game process standby means is provided for preventing the execution of the process relating to the start of the two-variable display game.

[Special figure 2 big hit end processing]
FIG. 167 shows the special figure 2 big hit end process (step Y145) in the special figure 2 game process described above. This special figure 2 jackpot end process is equivalent to the above-mentioned special figure 1 big hit process except that step Y1117 is not performed.

  First, “0” is set as the process number related to the special figure 2 ordinary process (step Y1121), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1122). Next, a signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1123). Here, the big hit 1 signal and the big hit 3 signal are set to OFF. Then, a signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the short time state (special symbol variation time shortening state) is saved in the external information output data area (step Y1124). Here, the big hit 2 signal is set to ON. Note that the jackpot 2 signal is ON even during the special game state, and this is continued.

  Thereafter, a signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1125). Here, the condition device operating signal, the accessory continuous operating device operating signal, the special symbol 1 signal and the special symbol 2 signal are set to OFF. Next, a signal relating to the start of the high probability state and the short time state is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1126). Here, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, the special symbol 1 variation time reduction state signal, and the special symbol 2 variation time reduction state signal are set to ON.

  Then, the signal relating to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1127). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to ON. Next, a number having a high probability is saved in the game state display number area (step Y1128). In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, since the time is always short during high probability, these numbers are not distinguished from each other and are numbered with high probability. Thereafter, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1129), and the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1130).

  Next, the fraud monitoring flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the upper prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1131), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1132). The special figure status area is cleared (step Y1133). Note that clearing the special figure status area results in a special figure status 0 indicating that neither the special figure 1 fluctuation display game nor the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is being executed.

  Thereafter, a high probability flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step Y1134), and an initial value (here, 50) is stored in the high probability fluctuation number area for managing the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game in the high probability state. ) Is saved (step Y1135). Further, a probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step Y1136), and the special figure 2 jackpot ending process is ended.

  By these special figure 1 big hit process and special figure 2 big hit process, the specific game state which is a high probability state is set until 50 special figure variation display games are executed after the first special game state is finished. . In other words, the game control device 100 is capable of generating a specific game state generating means capable of generating a specific game state in which the probability that the result of the variable display game will be a special result is higher than the normal state over a predetermined period after the end of the special game state. Make. Further, the specific game state generating means is configured to increase the probability that the result of the variable display game is the first special result over the predetermined period as the specific game state, compared to the normal state.

[Small fanfare during processing]
Next, the details of the small hit fanfare process (steps Y115 and Y146) in the above-described special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 168, in this small hitting fanfare mid-process, first, branching by an open pattern is performed (step Y1201).

  In step Y1201, if the opening pattern is 1 per bonus (special figure 1 lower big prize opening / closing pattern 1), the lower big prize opening (second special variable prize winning device 39) opening small hitting opening command is prepared. (Step Y1202), an effect command setting process is performed (Step Y1203). Next, 8 is set as the process number for the small hitting process (step Y1204), and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y1205).

  Thereafter, the small hit release time 1 (here 48 ms) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1206), and a signal relating to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1207). Here, the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is set to ON. Then, the lower big prize opening on data is saved in the big prize opening solenoid output data area (step Y1208), and the process proceeds to step Y1230.

  Also, if the opening pattern is 2 in small hits (special figure 2 lower big prize opening / closing pattern 2) in step Y1201, the small hitting opening command for opening the lower big prize opening (second special variable prize winning device 39) is issued. Preparation (step Y1209) and an effect command setting process are performed (step Y1210). Next, 8 as the process number is set for the small hitting process (step Y1211), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1212).

  Thereafter, the small hit release time 2 (here, 1600 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1213), and a signal related to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1214). Here, the special electric accessory 2 operating signal is set to ON. Then, the lower big prize opening on data is saved in the big prize opening solenoid output data area (step Y1215), and the process proceeds to step Y1230.

  If the opening pattern is 3 in small hits (special figure 2 upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 6) in step Y1201, a small hitting opening command for opening the upper prize winning opening (first special variable prize winning device 38) is issued. Preparation (step Y1216) and effect command setting processing are performed (step Y1217). Next, 8 as the process number is set for the small hitting process (step Y1218), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1219).

  Thereafter, the small hit release time 3 (here, 1200 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1220), and a signal relating to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1221). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is set to ON. Then, the upper prize winning opening on data is saved in the big winning prize solenoid output data area (step Y1222), and the process proceeds to step Y1230.

  In addition, if the opening pattern is 4 in small hits (special figure 2 top prize opening opening / closing pattern 7) in step Y1201, the top hitting opening (first special variable prize winning device 38) opening small hits opening command is issued. Preparation (step Y1223) and effect command setting processing are performed (step Y1224). Next, 8 is set as the process number for the small hitting process (step Y1225), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1226).

  Thereafter, the small hit release time 4 (here, 1600 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1227), and a signal relating to the start of the small hit operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1228). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is set to ON. Then, the top winning opening on-data is saved in the large winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1229), and the process proceeds to step Y1230. After performing processing according to these types of small hits, the big prize count area for counting the number of winning prizes to the big prize opening is cleared (step Y1230), and the small hit fanfare processing is ended.

[Processing during small hits]
FIG. 169 shows the small hit / medium process (steps Y116 and Y147) in the above-described special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process. In this small hitting process, first, a small hitting end screen command is prepared (step Y1241), and an effect command setting process is performed (step Y1242). Next, branching by an open pattern is performed (step Y1243).

  In step Y1243, if the opening pattern is 1 for small hits (special figure 1 lower big prize opening / closing pattern 1), 9 for the small hit remaining ball process is set as the processing number (step Y1244). The process number is saved in the game process number area (step Y1245). Then, the small hit remaining ball processing time 1 (here, 600 ms) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1246), and the off data is saved in the big winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1247). The hit processing ends.

  If the open pattern is 2 per small hit (special figure 2 lower big prize opening / closing pattern 2) in step Y1243, 9 for the small hit remaining ball process is set as the process number (step Y1248). The process number is saved in the game process number area (step Y1249). Then, the small hit remaining ball processing time 2 (here, 600 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1250), and the off data is saved in the big prize opening solenoid output data area (step Y1251). The hit processing ends.

  If the open pattern is 3 or 4 per small hit in step Y1243 (special winning opening / closing pattern 6 or 7 in Special Figure 2), 9 is set as the processing number for the small hit remaining ball process (step Y1252). Then, the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1253). Then, the small hit remaining ball processing time 3 (here, 800 ms) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1254), and the off data is saved in the big winning opening solenoid output data area (step Y1255). The hit processing ends.

  In steps Y1247, Y1251, and Y1255, off data is set for both the upper prize winning solenoid and the lower prize winning solenoid, and the process of closing any of the big winning prizes is performed.

[Small ball remaining treatment]
FIG. 170 shows the small hit remaining ball process (steps Y117 and Y148) in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process described above. In this small hit remaining sphere process, first, it is determined whether or not the small hit of special figure 1 (step Y1271). When the special figure 1 is a small hit (step Y1271; Y), 10 is set as the process number for the special figure 1 small hit end process (step Y1272), and the process number is set in the special figure 1 game process number area. Save (step Y1273). Next, the small hit ending time (here, 100 ms) is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step Y1274), and the process proceeds to step Y1278.

  If the special figure 1 is not a small hit (step Y1271; N), 10 is set as the process number for the special figure 2 small hit process (step Y1275), and the process number is set in the special figure 2 game process number area. Save (step Y1276). Next, the small hit ending time (100 ms in this case) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1277), and the process proceeds to step Y1278.

  Then, a signal relating to the end of the small hitting operation is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1278). Here, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal and the special electric accessory 2 operating signal are set to OFF. Furthermore, the special winning opening count number area is cleared (step Y1279), and the small hit remaining ball processing is ended.

[Special figure 1 small hit end processing]
FIG. 171 shows the special figure 1 small hit end process (step Y118) in the special figure 1 game process described above. In this special figure 1 small hit end process, first, 0 is set as the process number for the special figure 1 normal process (step Y1301), and the process number is saved in the special figure 1 game process number area (step Y1302).

  Next, a signal relating to the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1303). Here, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is set to OFF. Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the lower prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1304), the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1305), and the special figure status area is cleared (step Y1304). Y1306). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status 0 indicating a state in which neither the special figure 1 fluctuation display game nor the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed is set.

  Next, it is determined whether the probability is high (step Y1307). If the probability is high (step Y1307; Y), the process proceeds to step Y1310. If the probability is not high (step Y1307; N), a signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1308). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1309), and the special figure 2 game wait time value (8 ms here) is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step Y1310). ), Special figure 1 small hit end processing is ended. Again, the special figure 2 game wait time value is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area so that the start process for the special figure 2 variable display game is delayed until the next timer interruption process. And the special figure 2 variable display game are processed by the same timer interruption.

[Special figure 2 small hit end processing]
FIG. 172 shows the special figure 2 small hit end process (step Y149) in the special figure 2 game process described above. In this special figure 2 small hit end process, first, 0 is set as a process number for the special figure 2 ordinary process (step Y1331), and the process number is saved in the special figure 2 game process number area (step Y1332).

  Next, a signal relating to the end of the small hit is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1333). Here, the special symbol 2 small hit signal is set to OFF. Then, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1334), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the lower prize winning fraud monitoring period flag area (step Y1335). Thereafter, the turn-off number is saved in the round LED pointer area (step Y1336), and the special figure status area is cleared (step Y1337). By clearing the special figure status area, the special figure status 0 indicating a state in which neither the special figure 1 fluctuation display game nor the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed is set.

  Next, it is determined whether the probability is high (step Y1338). If the probability is high (step Y1338; Y), the special figure 2 small hit end processing is terminated. If the probability is not high (step Y1338; N), a signal related to the left-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step Y1339). Here, the launch position designation signal 1 is set to OFF. Then, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step Y1340), and the special figure 2 small hit end processing is ended.

[Design variation control processing]
FIG. 173 shows the symbol variation control process (steps Y120 and Y153) in the above-described special figure 1 game process and special figure 2 game process. The symbol variation control process is a process for controlling the variation of the special symbol and setting the display data of the special symbol on the special symbol 1 display 51 or the special symbol 2 display 52. In this symbol variation control process, first, it is checked whether the variation control flag of the symbol to be controlled (Special Fig. 1 or Special Fig. 2) is changing (Step Y1401).

  If the fluctuation control flag is fluctuating (step Y1402; Y), a symbol display table (for fluctuation) corresponding to the control target symbol is acquired (step Y1403), and the blinking control timer related to the control target symbol is acquired. -1 is updated (step Y1404), and it is determined whether the timer value is 0, that is, whether the time is up (step Y1405).

  If the value of the blinking control timer is not 0 (step Y1405; N), the process proceeds to step Y1408. If the value of the blinking control timer is 0 (step Y1405; Y), the initial value of the blinking control timer (here, 100 ms) is saved in the blinking control timer area to be controlled (step Y1406), Is updated by +1 (step Y1407), and display data corresponding to the value of the target fluctuation symbol number area is acquired (step Y1408). Thereafter, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step Y1411), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the fluctuation control flag is not changing (step Y1402; N), a symbol display table (for stoppage) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled is acquired (step Y1409). Then, display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (step Y1410), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step Y1411), and the symbol variation control process is terminated. Thereby, the special figure corresponding to the symbol number is displayed on the special figure display to be controlled among the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52.

[Segment LED editing processing]
FIG. 174 shows the segment LED editing process (step X112) in the timer interrupt process described above. In this segment LED editing process, the storage display unit 54 provided in the collective display device 50, a round display for displaying the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of opening / closing of the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39) Unit 60, first game state display unit 77 for notifying the player of the left strike (normal strike) and right strike, which is advantageous to the player, and the probability state (high probability state or low probability state) of the special figure variation display game. Settings relating to driving of the segment LEDs constituting the probability display unit 78 to be notified are made.

  In this segment LED editing process, first, a special figure 1 hold number table in which the display mode on the storage display unit 54 is defined is set (step X601), and display data corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is obtained to obtain a segment. Save in the area (step X602). Next, a round display table in which the display mode on the round display unit 60 is defined (step X603), display data corresponding to the round LED pointer is acquired and saved in the segment area (step X604).

  Then, the gaming state display table 1 in which the display mode in the probability display unit 78 is defined (step X605), display data corresponding to the gaming state display number is acquired and saved in the segment area (step X606). After that, the game state display table 2 in which the display mode on the first game state display unit 77 is defined is set (step X607), display data corresponding to the game state display number 2 is acquired and saved in the segment area ( Step X608), the segment LED editing process is terminated.

[Magnetic fraud monitoring processing]
FIG. 175 shows the magnet fraud monitoring process (step X113) in the timer interrupt process described above. In this magnet fraud monitoring process, the presence / absence of an abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61, and fraud notification is set to start or end.

  In the magnet fraud monitoring process, first, the magnet sensor 61 (magnetic sensor switch) is turned on, that is, abnormal magnetism is detected from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor 61 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3). Is detected (step X611). If the magnet sensor is on (step X611; Y), that is, if abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer that counts the abnormal magnetism detection period is updated by +1 to determine whether the timer has expired. Determination is made (step X613).

  When the magnet fraud monitoring timer expires (step X613; Y), that is, when abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step X614), and the magnet fraud monitoring timer initial value ( Here, 60000 ms) is saved in the magnet fraud notification timer area (step X615). Then, a magnet fraud notification command is prepared (step X616), a magnet fraud flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step X617), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area. (Step X613). That is, when the magnetic sensor 61 is continuously turned on for a certain period (for example, eight interruptions), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

  On the other hand, when the magnet sensor 61 (magnetic sensor switch) is not on (step X611; N), that is, when no abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step X618), and the magnet fraud notification time is reached. If the magnet fraud notification timer that prescribes is not 0, -1 is updated (step X619). The minimum value of the magnet fraud notification timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is 0 (step X620). Note that if the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not expired (step X613; N), the process proceeds to step X619.

  If the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is not 0 (step X620; N), that is, if the time is not up, the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is 0 (step X620; Y), that is, when the time is up or when the time has already expired, and when the fraud notification period has ended, If not, a command for terminating the magnet fraud notification is prepared (step X621). Further, a magnet fraud release flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step X622), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region (step X623).

  When the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (step X623; Y), the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated. If the values do not match (step X623; N), the prepared magnet fraud flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area (step X624), a production command setting process is performed (step X625), and the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated. To do.

[Board radio fraud monitoring processing]
FIG. 176 shows the board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step X114) in the timer interrupt process described above. In the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process, the presence / absence of an abnormality is determined based on a detection signal from the panel radio wave sensor 62, and fraud notification is started or stopped.

  In this panel radio wave fraud monitoring process, first, the panel radio wave sensor 62 starts from the state of the detection signal output from the panel radio wave sensor 62 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3) via the proximity I / F 121a. It is determined whether or not an abnormal radio wave is detected (step X631). When the panel radio wave sensor is on (step X631; Y), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer initial value (here 60000 ms) is saved in the radio wave fraud notification timer area (step X632).

  Then, a board radio fraud notification command is prepared (step X633), a board radio fraud occurrence flag is prepared as a board radio fraud flag (step X634), and the prepared board radio fraud flag is set to the value of the board radio fraud flag area. It is determined whether they match (step X639). That is, in the case of radio wave fraud, unlike the case of magnetic fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when an abnormal radio wave is detected.

  On the other hand, when the panel radio wave sensor is not on (step X631; N), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is not detected, -1 is updated unless the radio wave fraud notification timer that defines the radio wave fraud notification time is 0 ( Step X635). Note that the minimum value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether the value of the radio wave unauthorized notification timer is 0 (step X636).

  If the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is not 0 (step X636; N), that is, if the time is not up, the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated. In addition, when the value of the radio wave unauthorized notification timer is 0 (step X636; Y), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, and when the unauthorized notification period has ended, If not, a command to terminate board radio wave fraud notification is prepared (step X637), a board radio wave fraud cancel flag is prepared as a board radio wave fraud flag (step X638), and the prepared board radio wave fraud flag is set to the board radio wave. It is determined whether or not the value matches the value of the illegal flag area (step X639).

  When the prepared board radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the board radio wave fraud flag area (step X639; Y), the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated. If the values do not match (step X639; N), the prepared board radio wave fraud flag is saved in the board radio wave fraud flag area (step X640), an effect command setting process is performed (step X641), and the board radio wave fraud monitoring End the process.

[External information editing process]
FIG. 177 shows the external information editing process (step X115) in the timer interrupt process described above. In the external information editing process, the monitoring result in the payout command transmission process (step X105), the winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step X108), the magnet fraud monitoring process (step X113), the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process (step X114), etc. Based on the above, processing to create information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device or a test firing test device and set it in an output buffer is performed.

  In this external information editing process, it is first determined whether a glass frame opening error is occurring (step X701). If a glass frame opening error is not occurring (step X701; N), the main body frame (front frame 12) is determined. It is determined whether an open error is occurring (step X702). If the body frame opening error is not occurring (step X702; N), the door / frame opening signal OFF data is saved in the external information output data area (step X703), and the security signal OFF data is stored in the external information. The output data area is saved (step X704), and the process proceeds to step X707.

  On the other hand, when a glass frame opening error is occurring (step X701; Y), or when a body frame (front frame 12) opening error is occurring (step X702; Y), the door / frame opening signal is displayed. The on data is saved in the external information output data area (step X705), the on data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step X706), and the process proceeds to step X707. That is, information that the glass frame 14 and the front frame 12 are opened is output as external information.

  Next, if the security signal control timer that counts a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) from when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like is updated to −1 (step X707). ). The minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to 0.

  If the value of the security signal control timer is not 0 (step X708; N), that is, if the time is not up, the security signal ON data is saved in the external information output data area (step X710), and the process goes to step X711. Transition. As a result, the fact that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized is output as external information. If the value of the security signal control timer is 0 (step X708; Y), whether or not fraudulent radio waves are occurring, which is the detection of abnormal radio waves by the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12. Is determined (step X709).

  If the frame radio wave fraud is occurring (step X709; Y), the security signal ON data is saved in the external information output data area (step X710), and the process proceeds to step X711. If no frame radio wave fraud is occurring (step X709; N), it is determined whether a switch abnormality error such as a switch connector disconnection is occurring (step X711). If a switch abnormality error is not occurring (step X711; N), the process proceeds to step X713. If a switch abnormality error is occurring (step X711; Y), the on data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step X712), and the process proceeds to step X713.

  And, magnet fraud is occurring (step X713; Y), board radio wave fraud is occurring (step X714; Y), big prize opening fraud is occurring (step X715; Y), and special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation is occurring (step X716; Y). ), The security data on-data is saved in the external information output data area (step X718), and the gaming machine error status signal on-data is saved in the test signal output data area (step X718). X719), the process proceeds to step X720. That is, the occurrence of an error is output as external information. If none of the errors in steps X713 to X716 has occurred, the off data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step X717), and the process proceeds to step X720.

  Then, a start port 1 signal editing process for editing a winning signal to the first start winning port 36 (step X720) and a start port 2 signal editing process for editing a winning signal to the second start winning port 37 (step X721). Do. Next, a main prize ball signal editing process (step X722) for setting information relating to the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and a symbol determination number signal editing process for setting information related to the number of executions of the special figure variation display game is performed. (Step X723), the external information editing process is terminated.

[Starter 1 signal editing process]
FIG. 178 shows the start port 1 signal editing process (step X720) in the external information editing process described above. In this starting port 1 signal editing process, first, if the starting port 1 signal output control timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step X731). The minimum value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is set to 0. And it is determined whether the value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is 0 (step X732). When the value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is 0 (step X732; Y), it is determined whether the start port 1 signal output count is 0 (step X733).

  If the start port 1 signal output count is not 0 (step X733; N), the start port 1 signal output count is updated by -1 (step X734), and the start port 1 signal output is output to the start port 1 signal output control timer area. The control timer initial value is saved (step X735). The initial value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is a time obtained by adding the time (for example, 128 ms) of the start state (for example, high level) of the start port signal and the time (for example, 64 ms) of the off state (for example, low level). (For example, 192 ms). Thereafter, ON data for turning on the start port 1 signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X737), and the start port 1 signal editing process is terminated. If the number of start port 1 signal outputs is 0 (step X733; Y), the off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X738). ), The start port 1 signal editing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is not 0 (step X732; N), it is determined whether the start port 1 signal output control timer is in the output on period (step X736). Note that the fact that the start port 1 signal output control timer is in the output-on period means that the value of the start port 1 signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms). If the start port 1 signal output control timer is in the output on period (step X736; Y), the process proceeds to step X737. When the start port 1 signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step X736; N), the off data for turning off the start port 1 signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step X838), the start port 1 signal editing process is terminated. The start port 2 signal editing process (step X721) in the external information editing process described above is performed for the start port 2 signal in the same manner as the start port 1 signal editing process.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
FIG. 179 shows the main prize ball signal editing process (step X722) in the external information editing process described above. In the main prize ball signal editing process, a main prize ball signal generated every time the number of prize balls (scheduled number to be paid out) generated by winning a prize opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10) is output to an external device. It is processing.

  In the main prize ball signal editing process, first, if the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step X741). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (step X742). When the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (step X742; Y), it is determined whether the number of main prize ball signal outputs is 0 (step X743).

  If the main prize ball signal output count is not 0 (step X743; N), the main prize ball signal output count is updated by -1 (step X744), and the main prize ball signal output control timer area is output. The initial value of the control timer is saved (step X745). The initial value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is obtained by adding the time (eg, 128 ms) of the on state (eg, high level) of the main prize ball signal and the time (eg, 64 ms) of the off state (eg, low level). It is time (for example, 192 ms). Thereafter, ON data for turning on the main prize ball signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X747), and the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated. If the main prize ball signal output count is 0 (step X743; Y), off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S743). X748), the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0 (step X742; N), it is determined whether the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period (step X746). The fact that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output-on period means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms). If the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON period (step X746; Y), the process proceeds to step X747. If the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step X746; N), off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step X748), the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

[Design determination frequency signal editing process]
FIG. 180 shows the symbol determination number signal editing process (step X723) in the external information editing process described above. The symbol determination number signal editing process is a process for controlling the output time of information related to the number of executions of the special figure variation display game.

  In this symbol determination frequency signal editing process, first, if the symbol determination frequency signal output control timer is not 0, −1 is updated (step X751). The minimum value of the symbol determination number signal output control timer is set to zero. Then, it is determined whether the value of the symbol determination number signal output control timer is 0 (step X752). When the value of the symbol determination number signal output control timer is 0 (step X752; Y), it is determined whether or not the symbol determination number signal output count updated by +1 every time the special symbol variation display game is completed is 0. (Step X753).

  If the symbol determination number signal output count is not 0 (step X753; N), the symbol determination count signal output count is updated by -1 (step X754), and the main winning ball signal is output to the symbol determination count signal output control timer area. The initial value of the control timer is saved (step X755). The initial value of the symbol determination number signal output control timer is obtained by adding the time (256 ms in this case) of the symbol determination number signal (in this case, high level) and the time (in this case, 300 ms) in the off state (for example, low level). It is time (here 556 ms). In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, since the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game can be executed simultaneously, the on-state time is 256 ms and the off-state time is 300 ms.

  Thereafter, the on data for turning on the symbol determination number signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step X7547), and the symbol determination number signal editing process is terminated. Further, when the symbol determination frequency signal output count is 0 (step X753; Y), off data for turning off the symbol determination frequency signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S753). X758), the symbol determination number signal editing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the value of the symbol determination number signal output control timer is not 0 (step X752; N), it is determined whether the symbol determination number signal output control timer is in the output ON period (step X756). Note that the symbol fixed number signal output control timer is in the output on period means that the value of the symbol fixed number signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 300 ms). If the symbol determination number signal output control timer is in the output on period (step X756; Y), the process proceeds to step X757. Further, when the symbol determination number signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step X756; N), off data for turning off the symbol determination number signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step X748), the symbol determination number signal editing process is terminated.

  Next, game effects will be described. FIG. 181 shows a display example on the display device 41. These display controls are controlled by the effect control device 300 based on the control information received from the game control device 100.

  FIG. 181 (a) shows a display example on the display device 41 during a game in the normal gaming state. In the upper right part of the display area, a game mode display unit 80 for displaying a game state is provided. Here, a “normal stage” signifying a normal gaming state is displayed. In the center of the display area, a decorative special figure 1 variable display game display unit 81 for displaying a decorative special figure 1 variable display game is provided. Here, the decoration special figure 1 variable display game is displayed by stopping and displaying the identification information in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas.

  In the lower right part of the display area, there is provided a decorative special figure 2 variable display game display section 82 for displaying a decorative special figure 2 variable display game. Here, ◯ and-are used as identification information, and these are alternately displayed in the variable display, and after that, in the case of a special result, ◯ is displayed, and in the case of a loss,-is stopped and displayed. Display the game.

  At the lower center of the display area, a storage display unit 83 for displaying a decoration start storage display corresponding to the first start storage is provided. The decorative start memory display displayed here corresponds to the first start memory in a one-to-one correspondence and is displayed side by side in the storage order, and here, there are four first start memories. The decoration start memory display at the left end is a decoration start memory display corresponding to the first start memory stored first, and shifts to the left every time it is digested. Further, it is possible to suggest the result of pre-reading such as the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to each start memory by the display mode.

  An in-execution storage display unit 84 for displaying information related to the start-up memory corresponding to the currently executed special figure 1 variable display game is provided at the lower center of the display area and to the left of the storage display unit 83. In the in-execution memory display portion 84, the decoration start storage display at the left end of the memory display portion 83 is shifted at the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, and the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be executed, the fluctuation pattern, etc. Is suggested by the display mode.

  FIG. 181 (b) shows a display example on the display device 41 during a game in a specific game state. In the upper left part of the display area, there is provided a game number information display unit 85 showing information on the number of games in a specific gaming state. “LAST” displays the number of remaining games that can be executed in a specific game state, and “TOTAL” displays the number of games executed in a series of specific game states.

  Although the numerical value on the display in the game number information display unit 85 does not necessarily match the actual number of games, the actual number of games is managed inside the production control device 300, and Based on this, the display contents on the game number information display unit 85 are set. The effect control device 300 manages the information on the number of remaining games by subtracting the number of remaining games in the specific game state every time the decoration special figure variation display game is executed, and the display content on the game number information display unit 85 is this information. Is set based on.

  On the right side of the game number information display section 85, a game mode display section 80 for displaying the game state is provided. Here, “pounding RUSH” indicating that the game state is normal is displayed. On the right side of the game mode display unit 80, a right-handed instruction display 86 for notifying that right-handed is advantageous for the player is made. On the right side of the right-handed instruction display 86, a memory display unit 83 and a decorative special figure 1 variable display game display unit 81 are provided. Here, the first start memory number is indicated by a number. Further, the decoration special figure 1 variable display game display unit 81 and the memory display unit 83 may not be displayed when the special figure 1 variable display game is not being executed.

  Below the decorative special figure 1 variable display game display section 81, an acquired number display section 87 indicating the number of prize balls acquired in a series of specific game states is provided. In the number-of-acquisition display section 87, one prize ball is displayed as 1pt, which indicates that 1234 prize balls have been obtained. Further, in the center of the display area, the number of winning balls is displayed based on the winning to the special variable winning device, and is added to the acquired number display section 87.

  In the acquired number display section 87, the special game state based on the first special result generated in the low probability state from the start of the special game state to the start of the specific game state until the end of the series of specific game states. The number of prize balls won in the period from the start of the game to the fall in the low probability state by executing the special figure variation display game a predetermined number of times without the first special result being derived during the specific gaming state is displayed. During this period, it is added as needed every time a prize ball is acquired. The number of prize balls acquired in the special game state based on the first special result and the number of prize balls acquired in the special game state based on the second special result may be displayed separately, or only one of them is displayed. You may do it. Further, only the number of winning balls based on winning in the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39 may be displayed, or the first start winning port 36, the second starting winning port 37, The number of winning balls based on winning in the general winning opening 35 may also be displayed.

  In the lower right part of the display area, there is provided a decorative special figure 2 variable display game display section 82 for displaying a decorative special figure 2 variable display game. The display position of the decorative special figure 2 variable display game display section 82 is the same as the normal gaming state. In addition, an effect symbol display unit 88 that displays an effect symbol corresponding to the special symbol variation display game is provided at the lower center of the display area. The effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the left, middle, and right variation display areas, and then the effect symbols corresponding to the special symbol variation display game are displayed. It should be noted that the change and stop of the effect design do not necessarily correspond to the change and stop of the special figure change display game. This effect symbol can be executed at the same time, and the execution state of the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game that are forcibly stopped due to the result of the other being out of play as a special result. It is intended to make it easier for the person to understand.

  In other words, the effect control device 300 constitutes a receiving means capable of receiving control information from the transmitting means (game control device 100), and based on the control information received by the receiving means, a decoration variation display game (decorative display) (1 variation display game and decoration special figure 2 variation display game) execution control means capable of performing execution control is made. In addition, the effect control device 300 executes a decoration variation display game corresponding to the first variation display game (Special Figure 1 variation display game) or the second variation display game (Special Figure 2 variation display game) in the specific gaming state. Subtracting means for subtracting the number of times of execution of the variable display game from the predetermined number of times each time. Also, the effect control device 300 corresponds to the subtraction number of the subtracting means that the plurality of effect identification information is displayed in a variable manner and stopped in a specific gaming state without corresponding to the execution of the decoration variation display game. The display identification information fluctuation display means can be executed. Further, the effect control device 300 serves as a game number information notifying unit capable of notifying the game number information which is information corresponding to the subtraction result by the subtracting unit.

  FIG. 182 shows the execution of the special map variation display game and the decoration special map variation display game, and changes in the display of the effect symbol and game number information display unit 85, and FIG. 183 shows the display on the display device 41. It was. In the ending period (t31) of the first special game state shown in FIG. 182, notification that the specific game state is started is performed as shown in FIG. 183 (a), and the specific game is displayed on the game number information display section 85. The remaining number of games that can be executed in the state (50 times) is displayed.

  Here, there are three first start memories at the end of the first special gaming state, and as shown in FIG. 182, the special figure 1 variable display game is started at the end of the first special gaming state, and the decorative special figure is displayed. A one-variable display game is also started (t32). Further, with the end of the first special gaming state, the game ball has won the second start winning opening 37, the special figure 2 variable display game is started, and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is also started (t32). . That is, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are simultaneously executed. Although it is shown here that it is started at the same time, in actuality, since the processing of the special figure 1 variable display game is performed after the end of the special gaming state, the special figure 1 variable display game is executed. After the game is started, the special figure 2 variable display game is started.

  This special figure 2 variable display game ends (t35) before the scheduled end time (t37) of the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the result is a small hit. For this reason, with the end of the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped as a result of the loss (t35).

  Here, if the progress of the game is displayed only with the decorative special figure 1 variable display game, the decorative special figure 2 variable display game, and the game number information display unit 85, the conventional gaming machine that does not execute the special figure variable display game at the same time. There is a risk that it may be difficult for a player accustomed to to understand the progress of the game. Therefore, by using an effect design that displays the progress of the game by a display like a conventional game machine that does not simultaneously execute the special figure variation display game, the number-of-games information display section 85 is changed in accordance with the progress of the effect design. Makes it easy to keep track of the progress of the game.

  First, accompanying the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, the effect symbol display unit 88 starts to display the effect symbols in a variable manner. Accordingly, the number-of-games information display unit 85 sets the number of remaining games (LAST) to 49 and the number of executed games (TOTAL) to 1 (t32). In this example, the first special result is derived in the normal gaming state, the first special gaming state is executed, and the specific gaming state is started after the end of the first special gaming state. The number of executed games is one. When the special game state occurs in the specific game state, the specific game state is continuous, and thus becomes a value obtained by adding 1 to the number of executed games before the start of the special game state.

  As shown in FIG. 183 (b), even if the special figure 2 variable display game is started thereafter, the variable display of the effect symbols is maintained as it is, and the display content of the game number information display unit 85 does not change. In the figure, ◯ and-are displayed simultaneously to show a variable display, but actually, ◯ and-are alternately displayed to perform a variable display. Since the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped by the special figure 2 variable display game, the setting of the display contents of the effect symbols is changed based on the start of the special figure 2 variable display game. It becomes.

  As shown in FIG. 182, due to this change, the effect symbol that is currently displayed in a variable state is stopped before the end of the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game (t33). As shown in FIG. 183 (c), the stop symbol at this time is a stop symbol indicating that it is out of place. At this time, only the design symbols are stopped, and the decorative special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the decorative special figure 2 fluctuation display game remain variably displayed.

  In addition to the stop symbol indicating that it is out of place, the stop symbol of the effect design at this time suggests or informs that a special result will be derived at the next stop as “NEXT” or “attention”, etc. Also good. Further, as a variation pattern of the decoration special figure fluctuation display game, a revariation display for starting the fluctuation display again after a temporary stop in a result aspect other than the special result aspect in the decoration special figure fluctuation display game in the middle of the special figure fluctuation display game. When a so-called pseudo-continuous variation display mode that is performed once or more can be executed, an effect at the time of stopping or resuming the effect design may be the same as the temporary stop or re-variable display in the pseudo-continuous variation display mode.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 182, the variation display of the effect design is started again (t34). At this time, the display of the game number information display unit 85 is updated, the remaining game number (LAST) becomes 48, and the number of executed games (TOTAL) becomes 2 (FIG. 183 (d)). Then, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are stopped, the fluctuation display of the effect symbols is stopped (t35). As shown in FIG. 183 (e), the stop symbol at this time is a stop symbol indicating a small hit. In addition, the decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game also stop the fluctuation display and display the result mode.

  Thus, by changing the setting of the display pattern of the effect symbols, the progress of the special figure variation display game is displayed in the same display manner as a conventional gaming machine that does not execute the special figure variation display game at the same time. That is, at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game (t32), the effect symbols are continuously displayed in a variable manner until the scheduled stop of the special figure 1 variable display game (t37), and then stopped and displayed once. Although it was scheduled to show that the game was played, the setting of the display contents of the effect symbols is changed based on the start of the special figure 2 variable display game thereafter (t32). In this change, before the end of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, it is temporarily stopped (t33), and then the fluctuation is started again (t34), and is changed to stop at the end of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (t35). Yes. In other words, the effect symbols are stopped according to the number of subtractions (here, 2) by the subtracting means from the start to the stop of the special symbol variation display game that triggered the effect symbol variation start. ing.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 182, the second special gaming state is started and the first special variable winning device 38 is released. As shown in 99 (f), in the special gaming state, the number of winning balls is displayed as a result of winning the special variable winning device, and is added to the earned number display portion 87. After that, when the second special game state ends, the special figure variation display game can be executed (t38). The game proceeds from t38 to t39 and t39 to t40 in the same manner as t32 to t38 described above.

  In addition, when there is no first start memory and only the special figure 2 variable display game is executed, the change and stop of the effect symbols are simultaneously with the fluctuation and stop of the special figure 2 variable display game (t40 to t41). . In addition, even when only the special figure 1 variable display game is executed, the change and stop of the effect design are simultaneous with the fluctuation and stop of the special figure 1 variable display game.

  When the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are executed at the same time and the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is finished first, the result of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is obtained. If it is off, the special design 1 variable display game is stopped and the effect design is stopped and the variable display is performed again. In addition, when the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a special result, the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped due to the result of losing, so the production symbol is stopped before the special figure 1 variable display game is stopped. Then, the variable display is performed again, and is stopped when the special figure 1 variable display game is stopped.

  From the above, the effect control means (effect control device 300) executes the decoration variation display game (decoration special map variation display game) corresponding to the first variation display game or the second variation display game in the specific gaming state. Subtracting means (effect control device 300) for subtracting the number of times of execution of the variable display game from the predetermined number of times, and in the specific game state, a plurality of pieces of effect identification information (effect And a production identification information variation display means (production control device 300) that can be executed in accordance with the number of subtractions of the subtraction means, and the production identification information fluctuation display. The means changes the decoration corresponding to the execution of the first end control process in the first variation display game based on the second variation display game having a special result in the specific gaming state. When the display game ends, the number of change displays and stop displays corresponding to the first change display game and the second change display game are displayed by the end, and subtraction by the subtracting means is performed for each change display game. This can be notified to the player.

  Further, the effect identification information variation display means is configured so that the decoration variation display game corresponds to the execution of the first end control process in the first variation display game based on the second variation display game having a special result. When the game ends, a variable display corresponding to the first variable display game is displayed before the end and a stop display is performed. Thereafter, a variable display corresponding to the second variable display game is performed, and then the second variable display is displayed at the end. The stop display corresponding to the game is performed.

  Next, the control for the special figure 1 variable display game in the normal gaming state will be described. As shown in FIG. 184, in a state in which the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are simultaneously executed, as shown in FIG. 184, when the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped with the special result first, the effect in the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted and the result is forced. Will be stopped. In order to avoid such a state, when the effect control device 300 receives a command from the game control device 100 to notify that the special figure 1 variable display game is longer, it produces a highly expected effect. I do not do it.

[Direction lottery processing]
FIG. 185 shows an effect lottery process performed by the effect control device 300 as a process for determining the variation pattern of the decorative special figure 1 fluctuation display game at the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. In this effect lottery process, first, the variation pattern received from the game control device 100 is checked (step Z11), and it is determined whether the variation pattern is capable of executing a premier effect that is a highly expected effect (step Z12). . If the variation pattern is not capable of executing the premier effect (step Z12; N), the effect lottery process is performed (step Z15), and the effect lottery process is terminated. In the effect lottery process, a variation pattern other than the premium effect is selected according to the variation pattern received from the game control device 100.

  If the variation pattern is such that the premier effect can be executed (step Z12; Y), it is determined whether a command notifying that the variation time of FIG. 1 is longer is received (step Z13). When the command notifying that the fluctuation time in FIG. 1 is longer (step Z13; Y), a specific pattern is set (step Z16), and the effect lottery process is terminated. In this case, since the situation as shown in FIG. 184 may occur, the specific pattern is selected instead of the premier effect. The specific pattern will be described later.

  Further, when the command notifying that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is longer (step Z13; N), the premier effect lottery process is performed (step Z14), and the normal effect lottery process (step Z15). To finish the effect lottery process. In the premier effect lottery process, the presence / absence and type of the premier effect (special effect) is selected. When it is determined to execute the premier effect, the type is determined, and the determined premier effect becomes the variation pattern of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game. In this case, the lottery in the normal production lottery process is not performed. If it is determined not to execute the premier effect, a variation pattern other than the premier effect is selected in the normal effect lottery process. In the premier effect lottery process, whether or not the premier effect lottery is performed may be varied depending on whether or not the result is a special result, and the probability of winning the premier effect when the lottery is performed may be varied.

  FIG. 186 shows an example in which the specific pattern is not set because the special figure 1 variable display game ends before the special figure 2 variable display game. When the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed in the normal gaming state as shown in FIG. 186 (a), the special figure 1 variable display game is started as shown in FIG. 186 (b). In this case, a premier effect can be set. In this example, the premier effect is performed as shown in FIGS. 186 (c) and 186 (d).

  Here, since the special figure 1 variable display game has a special result (here, a big hit), as shown in FIG. 186 (e), as the special figure 1 variable display game ends, the special figure 2 variable display game is lost. Forced to stop at the result. When the special figure 1 variable display game is out of play, the special figure 2 variable display game is not forcibly stopped.

  FIG. 187 shows an example in which a specific pattern is set. As shown in FIG. 187 (a), when the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed in the normal gaming state, the special figure 1 variable display game is started as shown in FIG. 187 (b). The special figure 2 variable display game being executed ends earlier than the special figure 1 variable display game, and has a special result (here, a small hit). Therefore, since the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped by the result of losing, a specific pattern is set.

  This specific pattern is a fluctuation pattern having a fluctuation time (for example, 12 seconds) of a predetermined time in which no reach state is generated. If the special figure 2 fluctuation display game does not end even after this fluctuation time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 187 (c), the decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game is displayed in a temporarily stopped state so as to be shaken by the result. Become. If the special figure 2 variable display game is finished before the fluctuation time elapses, the identification symbol of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is stopped at that time.

  When the special figure 1 variable display game is ended with the end of the special figure 2 variable display game, the identification symbol of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is stopped as shown in FIG. 187 (d). After this, the second special game state is entered, and after the second special game state ends, the special figure 1 variable display game is started based on the first start memory as shown in FIG. 187 (e).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 187 (b), the period during which the identification symbol is variably displayed at a high speed in the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is set to the time from the stop of the special figure 2 variable display game to a predetermined time, and always. You may make it pass through the state of FIG.187 (c).

  In addition, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are simultaneously executed, the specific pattern is set even when the special figure 1 variable display game is finished first and the first special result is obtained. Anyway. FIG. 188 shows a display example in this case. 188 (a) to (c) are the same as FIG. 186. Then, with the end of the special figure 1 variable display game, the decorative special figure 1 variable display game stops in the result form of the first special result as shown in FIG. 188 (d) and the special figure 2 variable display game ends. The first special gaming state is entered. By enabling such an effect, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the specific pattern.

  Note that a specific pattern as shown in FIG. 188 is also set when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game can be selected and the special figure 2 variable display game stops first due to the result of the deviation. It is possible. In addition, when the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is an outlier result, the premium lottery process (step Z14) may be executed even when the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped first.

  In the above-described effect lottery process for determining the variation pattern of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, if the special figure 2 variable display game is being executed, the premier effect lottery The process (step Z14) may not be performed. In this case, when the special figure 2 variable display game has a special result in the normal gaming state than the longest fluctuation time set when the special figure 1 variable display game has the first special result in the normal gaming state. It is preferable that the shortest variation time to be set is longer. By doing in this way, even if the special figure 2 variable display game is started after the start of the special figure 1 variable display game in which the premier effect is set, the special figure 1 variable display game is stopped first. Does not occur.

  It should be noted that a countermeasure other than the above may be considered as a countermeasure for the case where the other special figure variation display game is forcibly stopped by the result of the detachment based on the special result derived in one special figure variation display game. For example, as described in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process shown in FIG. 128, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be executed is not less than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (step Y254; N ), A process for resetting the fluctuation pattern may be performed in addition to or instead of the process for preparing the command for notifying that the fluctuation time of FIG. 1 is longer (step Y255). .

  In the process of resetting the variation pattern, if the effect control device 300 is changed to a variation pattern in which the premier effect cannot be selected, it is not a variation pattern that can execute the premier effect in the process of FIG. 185 (step Z12; N). As a result, the premier production is not selected. Also, in the process of resetting the variation pattern, it is possible to change the variation pattern so as to select the specific pattern so that the specific pattern is always selected. In the process of resetting the variation pattern, the variation time may not be changed or may be changed.

  Also, instead of changing the fluctuation pattern once determined in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y246) later, it is executed when the fluctuation pattern is decided in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting process (step Y246). The process of determining whether the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is not less than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (step Y254) is performed, and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the game situation is determined from the beginning. You may do it.

  In addition, when a special result can be selected as the result of the special figure 2 variable display game, the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed from now on only when the special figure 2 variable display game becomes a special result. The process (step Y254) which determines whether it is less than the remaining fluctuation time of FIG. 2 fluctuation display game is performed. When the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is lost, the special figure 1 variable display game is not forcibly stopped by the result of the deviation, and this process is unnecessary.

  Further, as another example of coping with the case where the other special figure fluctuation display game is forcibly stopped by the result of the detachment based on the special result being derived in one special figure fluctuation display game, for example, FIG. In the normal game state in which the variable display game is mainly performed, the special figure 1 variable display game may be treated as an advantage, and the process may be advanced so that the special figure 1 variable display game progresses advantageously.

  When such a process is performed, in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process shown in FIG. 128, the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be executed is not less than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game ( In step Y254; N), instead of the processing of steps Y225 and Y226, it is determined whether the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is a special result. If the result is a special result, the fluctuation of the special figure 1 variable display game is determined. A process of changing the time so that the time becomes less than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is performed. By doing in this way, it can prevent that the special result which should have been derived | led-out by the special figure 1 fluctuation display game will be changed into a loss result.

  In addition, even if the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is out of date and less than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variable display game, if the number of first start memories is large, the special characteristics based on these A short variation time may be set so that the variation display game in FIG. 1 fits before the end of the special variation variation game.

  For the special figure 2 variable display game, even if a special result is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game, it is not so disadvantageous, but in the specific game state mainly using the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 2 variable display game is displayed. You may make it treat a game as an advantage. For example, in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process shown in FIG. 129, if the fluctuation time is not less than the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game for the special figure 2 fluctuation display game determined in the high probability state, It is determined whether the 1-variable display game has a special result and the result of the special-figure 2 variable-display game becomes the first special result. You may make it perform the process changed so that the fluctuation time of a display game may become less than the remaining fluctuation time of a special figure 1 fluctuation display game.

  By doing in this way, it can prevent that the 1st special result which should have been derived | led-out by the special figure 2 fluctuation display game will be changed into a loss result. When the special figure 1 fluctuation display game has the first special result, the fluctuation time is adjusted so that one of the advantageous results is derived compared with the first special result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. You may do it.

  From the above, when the first determining means (game control device 100) determines the variation mode information of the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) in the normal state (normal game state), Determining the variation mode of the first variation display game by referring to whether or not the variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) is being executed and / or variation mode information of the second variation display game. It will be possible.

  The variation mode information of the first variation display game or the second variation display game includes information on the variation time that can specify the execution time of the variation display game, and the first determination means performs the normal state (normal game) In the state), when determining the variation mode information including the variation time of the first variation display game, if the second variation display game is being executed, the variation included in the variation mode information of the second variation display game It is possible to determine the variation mode information of the first variation display game with reference to the time.

  The variation mode information of the first variation display game or the second variation display game includes information regarding the variation time that can specify the execution time of the variation display game and information regarding the variation pattern corresponding to the variation time. The first determination means is included without referring to the variation mode information of the second variation display game when determining the variation mode information including the variation time of the first variation display game in the normal state (normal game state). The first variation mode determining means (game control device 100) capable of determining the variation mode information of the first variation display game, and the first variation mode determination means includes the variation time of the first variation display game. If the second variation display game is being executed when the variation mode information is determined, the variation mode information is determined with reference to the variation time included in the variation mode information of the second variation display game. And it has a second variation mode determining means it is possible to re-determine information about variation pattern without changing the fluctuation time of the first variable display games (gaming controller 100), and further comprising a.

  Further, the second variation mode determination means does not re-determine information on the variation pattern when the result of the second variation display game being executed does not result in a special result.

  The decoration variation display game execution control means (production control device 300) corresponds to the first variation display game when the state of the second variation display game at the start of the first variation display game satisfies a predetermined condition. Thus, it is possible to execute a special effect lottery that determines whether or not to perform a special effect in the decorative variation display game that is executed.

  Further, the decoration variation display game execution control means is configured to execute the first variation display game when the second variation display game is being executed at the start of the first variation display game and the result of the second variation display game is out of sync. It is possible to execute a special effect lottery that determines whether or not to perform a special effect in a decoration variable display game that is executed corresponding to the variable display game.

  In the embodiment described above, the second start memory for holding the start of the special figure 2 variable display game is not generated for the special figure 2 variable display game. The second start memory may be generated up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4). In addition, the normally variable prize-winning device capable of changing the state between the closed state in which the game ball is difficult to win or cannot win, and the open state in which the game ball can be easily won or won in the second start winning opening 37. You may make it provide. Then, in the specific game state in which the game is progressed mainly by the special figure 2 variable display game, it may be controlled so that the opening time of the normal variable winning device per unit time is substantially longer than that in the normal game state. .

[First Modification]
Next, a first modification of the gaming machine of the second embodiment described above will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described second embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The game machine of this modification differs in the display mode of the game number information display part 85 and the design for an effect.

  As described above, when the progress of the game is displayed only with the decorative special figure 1 variable display game, the decorative special figure 2 variable display game, and the game number information display unit 85, the conventional special figure variable display game is not executed at the same time. There is a possibility that it becomes difficult for a player who is used to a gaming machine to grasp the progress of the game. For this reason, in this modification, at least during the period in which the special figure 1 variable display game based on the first start memory is executed from the end of the special gaming state, clear information is not displayed on the game number information display unit 85. I have to.

  FIG. 189 shows the execution of the special figure change display game and the change in the display of the game number information display unit 85, and FIGS. 190 and 191 show the display on the display device 41. FIG. In the ending period (t61) of the first special gaming state shown in FIG. 189, notification that the specific gaming state is started is performed as shown in FIG. 190 (a). In this example, there are three first start memories at the end of the first special gaming state, and as shown in FIG. 189, the special figure based on the first first start memory with the end of the first special gaming state. A one-variable display game is started (t62). In addition, the decorative special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the fluctuation display of the effect design are also started.

  Further, during the execution of the special figure 1 variable display game, the game ball is won in the second start winning opening 37 and the special figure 2 variable display game is started (t63). In addition, the variation display of the decorative special figure 2 variation display game is also started. That is, the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are simultaneously executed. It should be noted that the effect design that started the variable display with the start of the special figure 1 variable display game is changed while the variable display is continued as shown in FIG. 190B even if the special figure 2 variable display game is started. I do not.

  As shown in FIG. 189, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is finished before the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, and the second special result (small hit) is obtained. Therefore, with the end of the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 1 variable display game is forcibly stopped by the result of disengagement (t64). At this time, as shown in FIG. 190 (c), the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game are stopped in a result form corresponding to the results of the respective games, and the effect design is the second special result. It stops in the result mode corresponding to.

  In the game so far, the special figure variation display game is executed twice, but the effect design starts at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game and stops at the stop of the special figure 2 variation display game. Therefore, it seems to the player that one special figure variation display game that is the second special result has been played. In this way, it becomes possible to convey the progress and contents of the game in an easy-to-understand manner to a player who is used to a conventional gaming machine that does not execute the special figure variation display game at the same time.

  Although the display on the game number information display unit 58 is started with the end of the first special gaming state (t62), here, “Preparing” is displayed to clearly display the number of remaining games and the number of executions. The preparation mode is displayed. During the period when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are likely to be executed at the same time, displaying information on the actual number of games will be cumbersome and the player will be unable to understand or distrust. Since there is a possibility of feeling a feeling, the information on the number of games is not clearly displayed here. This preparation mode display is continued until at least the special figure 1 variable display game based on the first start memory stored at the end of the first special game state is ended. Here, the first start memory is stored. It is (t67) until the special gaming state is finished in a state where there is no game.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 189, after the end of the second special game state, the second special figure 1 variable display game based on the first start memory is started (t65). This special figure 1 variable display game is also forcibly stopped by the result of the disparity when the special figure 2 variable display game becomes the second special result in the same manner as the special figure 1 variable display game based on the first first start memory. The second special game state is entered (t65 to t66). The same applies to the third first start memory (t66 to t67).

  The contents of display on the display device 41 during the period from t65 to t66 and t66 to t67 are the same as the display at t62 to 65 as shown in FIGS. 190D and 190E, for example. The information display unit 85 displays “Preparing”, and the effect design starts at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game and stops in a result mode corresponding to the second special result based on the stop of the special figure 2 variable display game. To do.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 189, when the special game state is ended in the state where the first start memory does not exist (t67), after that, only the special figure 2 variable display game is executed. Since it is the same as a conventional gaming machine that does not execute the special figure variation display game at the same time, the game number information display unit 85 starts the RUSH display mode.

  At this time, as shown in FIG. 191 (a), “RUSH start” indicating that the RUSH display mode has been entered is displayed, and the remaining number of games is displayed in the game number information display section 85. However, the number of remaining games that is smaller than the actual number of remaining games is displayed. Here, although the actual number of remaining games is 43, 40 is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 189, the number of remaining games in the game number information display section 85 is subtracted every time the special figure variation display game is executed (FIG. 191 (c)). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 191 (d), a display for instructing to operate the effect button 25 at a predetermined timing is made. When the player operates the effect button 25 in accordance with the instruction, the effect that the dragon flares the game number information display unit 85 is performed as an effect display as shown in FIG. 191 (e), as shown in FIG. 191 (f). An extra effect in which the value of the game number information display unit 85 is added so as to be the actual number of remaining games is provided.

  Note that the actual number of remaining games may be displayed at the start of the RUSH display mode (t67). Further, although the actual number of remaining games is displayed based on the operation of the effect button 25, a predetermined value is set such that the value of the game number information display unit 85 is less than the actual number of remaining games based on the operation of the effect button 25. A value may be added.

  In addition, the number of games to be reduced from the actual remaining number of games displayed on the game number information display unit 85 at the start of the RUSH mode is preferably equal to or greater than the upper limit number (here, 4) of the first start memory. . When the second start memory can be stored up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4) for the special figure 2 variable display game, a value obtained by adding the upper limit number of the first start memory and the upper limit number of the second start memory (for example, 8) or more is preferable.

  When the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are simultaneously executed in the RUSH display mode, the effect design is displayed as a single fluctuation display as in t62 to t65, and the number-of-games information display section The subtraction of the remaining number of games at 85 may be set to 1 so that the player can easily understand. By subtracting the number of remaining games to be displayed at the start of the RUSH display mode from the actual number of remaining games, the subtraction of the remaining number of games can be made 1 in such a case. However, if the number of remaining games currently displayed matches the actual number of remaining games, the subtraction of the remaining number of games is set to 2, or the RUSH display mode is set again after a predetermined period of time as a preparation mode display. It is preferable to make a transition so that no contradiction occurs.

  From the above, the effect control means (effect control device 300) can notify the game number information (effect control device 300) that can notify the game number information that is information corresponding to the subtraction result by the subtraction means (effect control device 300). And the game number information notifying means notifies the game number information at least for a period until the first variable display game based on the first start memory stored at the end of the first special gaming state is completed. It will not be.

[Second Modification]
Next, a second modification of the gaming machine of the second embodiment described above will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described second embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. The gaming machine of this modification is configured to perform special figure 1 game processing and special figure 2 game processing at different interrupt timings.

  In the gaming machine of this modification, the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 192 is performed instead of the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. In this timer interrupt process, the special winning opening switch monitoring process, which was performed in the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process, is performed in the main routine of the timer interrupt process (step X801).

  Further, in the branch process (step X802) by the special figure processing counter, if the value of the special figure processing counter is an even number, the special figure 1 game process is performed (step X110), and if the value is an odd number, the special figure 2 game process (step X111). )I do. Note that 0 is treated as an even number. Thereafter, the special figure processing counter is updated by +1 (step X803).

  The special figure processing counter may be sequentially updated in the range of 0 to 255, may be updated alternately with 0 and 1, and may be updated with an even number of values. In addition, since the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process are alternately performed for each timer interrupt, these processes are performed every time (here, 8 ms) twice the time of the timer interruption process (here, 4 ms). Will be done. Therefore, the setting of the timer value updated by these processes is performed in consideration of this.

  FIGS. 193 and 194 show the special figure 1 game process and the special figure 2 game process in this modification. In these processes, the processes of steps Y101, Y102, Y131, and Y132 that were performed in the processes of FIGS. 121 and 122 are not performed.

  FIG. 195 shows the big winning opening switch monitoring process in this modification. This special winning opening switch monitoring process is the same as the process shown in FIG. 123 except that the process of determining the hit state of the special figure (step Y1501) is performed. In the process of determining the hit state of the special figure (step Y1501), it is determined whether the special figure derived from either the special figure 1 fluctuation display game or the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is processed, and according to this determination result. Set the target special figure. If it is not necessary to distinguish which special figure is to be processed, the process (step Y1501) for determining the hit state of the special figure may not be performed.

  From the above, an interrupt routine started at a predetermined cycle can be executed, and the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) is executed by the first variation display game control means (game control device 100). The second variation display game control means (game control device 100) can execute the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) and the second variation display game control means can execute the second. Even if the variation display game is being executed, the first variation display game control means can execute the first variation display game, and the first variation display game control means performs a series of execution controls relating to the first variation display game. And a series of execution control related to the second variation display game by the second variation display game control means so as not to be executed simultaneously in one interrupt routine. And thus it was. As a result, the processing time can be shortened even when simultaneous fluctuations are performed.

[Third Modification]
Next, a third modification of the gaming machine of the second embodiment described above will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described second embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. In the gaming machine of this modification, the processing contents in the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process shown in FIGS. Based on the number of special figure 2 abnormal prizes counted based on the prize winning, the same determination as the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation is performed.

  FIG. 196 shows an example of the special figure 2 abnormal winning count. The special figure 2 abnormal winning number is updated by +1 based on winning in the second start winning port 37 in the normal gaming state (t101, t102). When the special figure 2 abnormal winning number reaches a predetermined value of 5, the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence flag is saved, and external information indicating that the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation has occurred and the gaming machine error are based on this flag. The output of the status signal to the device outside the gaming machine is started, and it becomes possible to grasp the occurrence of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation in the management device of the gaming store or the like. Also, a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation occurrence command is transmitted to the effect control device 300. Based on the reception of this command, the effect control device 300 notifies that the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation has occurred by display or voice.

  Also, when the special figure 2 abnormal winning number reaches the predetermined value of 5, the time measurement by the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification timer is started (t102), and a predetermined time (60 seconds in this case) elapses ( t103), the special figure 2 abnormal winning number is cleared to 0, and the output of the external information and the gaming machine error state signal is stopped. Further, a special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation cancel command is transmitted to the production control apparatus 300, and the production control apparatus 300 ends the notification that the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation has occurred based on the reception of this command. In addition, when the winning to the 2nd start winning opening 37 newly generate | occur | produces before progress of predetermined time, the time measurement of predetermined time is newly started from that time.

  FIG. 197 and FIG. 198 show an example of counting the special figure 2 abnormal winning numbers. As shown in FIG. 197, whether the monitoring state is valid or invalid is set. When the monitoring state is valid, if there is a winning at the second start winning opening 37, the special figure 2 abnormal winning is obtained. The number is updated by +1 (t113, t116).

  This monitoring state is basically effective when the state is a low probability state. However, when a winning is made to the second start winning opening 37 with the monitoring state being valid (t113, t116), a predetermined invalid setting period (here, 10 seconds) from the winning is invalidated (t113). To t115, t116 to t117), the winning (t144) to the second start winning opening 37 generated during this invalid setting period (t113 to t115) is not counted as an abnormal winning number. Further, it is invalidated during the first special game state. Further, the second special gaming state in the low probability state is valid because it is a short period.

  And, the special figure 2 abnormal winning number is, when the special figure 2 abnormal winning number is not newly added over the predetermined clear period (t117 to t118, here 1800 seconds) from the end of the invalid setting period, It is supposed to be cleared. It is also cleared when the first special gaming state is started.

  FIG. 198 shows the counting of the special figure 2 abnormal winnings at the end of the specific gaming state. In the case of a high probability state, since the monitoring state is invalid, the special figure 2 abnormal winning number is not added even if the second start winning opening 37 is won. For the last special figure fluctuation display game in the high probability state, the probability state is changed to the low probability state at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game (t123). It remains in an invalid state until the end (t124).

  Here, since it becomes a valid state from the end of the last special figure fluctuation display game started in the high probability state, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is the second special result, the second special game The effective state is entered from the start of the state (t124). In this second special gaming state, the right-handed game will be continued to the right in the specific gaming state, so that a winning at the second start winning opening 37 occurs and the special figure 2 abnormal winning number is added (t125). However, since the second special gaming state ends in a short time and the invalid setting period is set from the addition of the special figure 2 abnormal winning number (t125 to t127), In the subsequent winning at the second start winning opening 37, the special figure 2 abnormal winning number is not added (t126). Therefore, the special figure 2 abnormal winnings added according to the second special gaming state stays at 1 and is cleared after the clearing period (t127 to t128) has passed.

  In the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation monitoring process of FIG. 111 in order to enable such a process, the winning to the second start winning opening 37 in the monitoring state is valid instead of the processes of steps X381 to X389. The special figure 2 abnormal prize-winning number is updated by +1 based on this. In the processing of steps X390 to X403, the special figure 2 abnormal winning number is used instead of the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation number.

  It should be noted that the specified value of the special figure 2 abnormal winning number for which the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation notification is to be performed and the length of the clear period can be arbitrarily set. The specified value and the length of the period set here may be any values as long as they can prevent the player from aiming to start the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal gaming state. Also, when a power failure occurs and is restored, monitoring is resumed from the state before the power failure occurred. Even if special figure 2 abnormal change notification is performed, the payout of the winning ball for winning is performed as usual.

[Fourth Modification]
Next, a fourth modification of the gaming machine of the second embodiment described above will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described second embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. In the gaming machine of this modification, when the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are simultaneously executed, the special result is derived in one special figure variable display game, and the other special figure is displayed. The figure change display game is interrupted, and the special figure change display game interrupted after the special game state is ended is resumed.

  FIG. 199 shows a collective display device 50 in the gaming machine of this modification. D1 to D18 are the same as those in FIG. D19 and D20 are an interruption display section 79 indicating whether or not the special figure variation display game is interrupted. As shown in FIG. 199 (b), the interruption display unit 79 is in a state where neither the special figure 1 fluctuation display game nor the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is interrupted, and the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is interrupted. State, Special Figure 2 Indicates either the state where the variable display game is interrupted.

  FIG. 200 shows an example in which the special figure variation display game is interrupted, and FIGS. 201 and 202 show displays on the display device 41 and the collective display device 50. In this example, first, as shown in FIG. 200, the fluctuation display game b which is the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is started in a state where neither the special figure 1 fluctuation display game nor the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed. (T151), and thereafter, the variable display game a which is the special figure 1 variable display game is started (t152).

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 201 (a), the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are in a state in which variable display is performed. In addition, the interruption display unit 79 is in a state of being extinguished. In addition, the display device 41 performs a variable display of the decorative special figure 1 variable display game and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 200, the variable display game a is terminated after the first special result is derived as a result prior to the variable display game b (t153), and the first special gaming state is reached after a predetermined stop time has elapsed. (T154). Based on the derivation of the first special result, the variable display game b is interrupted (t153). During the interruption, the measurement of the fluctuation time is interrupted and the fluctuation display is continued. In addition, during the interruption, the interruption display unit 79 displays that the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted.

  As shown in FIG. 201 (b), when the variable display game a is in a state where the first special result is derived and stopped, the special result mode corresponding to the first special result is displayed on the special figure 1 display 51. It becomes. In addition, the special figure 2 display 52 remains in a variable display. Furthermore, D20 is lit in the interruption display section 79, indicating that the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted. In the display device 41, the decorative special figure 1 variable display game is stopped in a special result mode corresponding to the first special result, and the decorative special figure 2 variable display game is still subjected to the variable display. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 201 (c) and 202 (a), the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 2 display 52, and the interruption display unit 79 are shown in FIG. 201 (b) even in the special gaming state. The display mode is the same as when the result is derived.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 200, when the first special game state ends, the suspended variation display game b is resumed, and the variation time measurement is resumed (t155). Then, the fluctuation display game b is finished based on the passage of the remaining fluctuation time (t157). In addition, after the end of the first special game state, the variable display game c is newly started in the special figure 1 variable display game. The variation display game c stops before the variation display game b (t156), but since the result is out of order, the variation display game b continues without being interrupted.

  As shown in FIGS. 201 (b) and 201 (c), with the end of the special game state, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 perform variable display. Further, in the interruption display section 79, when the special figure 2 variable display game is resumed, all are turned off to indicate that they are not interrupted.

  In this way, by suspending the other special figure fluctuation display game based on the special result derived in one special figure fluctuation display game, and restarting the special figure fluctuation display game suspended after the end of the special gaming state, It becomes possible to derive the result as determined by the lottery performed at the start of each special figure variation display game. During the interruption of the special figure variation display game, an interruption signal may be output as external information, and information for determining which of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is interrupted is output together. May be.

  In order to perform the process related to the interruption of the special figure fluctuation display game, the special figure 1 changing process shown in FIG. 203 is performed instead of the special figure 1 changing process shown in FIG. In the special figure 1 changing process, when the special figure 2 is also being executed (step Y630; Y), the special figure 2 interruption flag is not executed in steps Y631 to Y639 without stopping the special figure 2 variable display game. Is saved (step Y1511).

  Further, instead of the special figure 2 changing process shown in FIG. 147, the special figure 2 changing process shown in FIG. 204 is performed. In the special figure 2 changing process, when the special figure 1 is also being executed (step Y660; Y), the special figure 1 suspension flag is not executed without performing the special figure 1 variable display game stop process of steps Y661 to Y669. Is saved (step Y1512).

  Further, instead of the special figure 1 game process shown in FIG. 123, the special figure 1 game process shown in FIG. 205 is performed. In this special figure 1 game process, it is determined whether or not there is a special figure 1 suspension flag (step Y1513), and if there is no special figure 1 suspension flag (step Y1513; N), that is, the special figure 1 variable display game. When the interruption is not performed, processing relating to the special figure 1 variable display game after step Y103 is performed. On the other hand, when there is a special figure 1 interrupting flag (step Y1513; Y), that is, when the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted, the processing related to the special figure 1 variable display game in steps Y103 to Y118 is not performed. Then, the process proceeds to step Y119. As a result, during the interruption of the special figure 1 variable display game, the special figure 1 variable display game does not proceed (the special figure 1 game processing timer is not updated), and only the variable display continues.

  In addition, the special figure 2 game process shown in FIG. 206 is performed instead of the special figure 2 game process shown in FIG. 124. In this special figure 2 game process, it is determined whether or not there is a special figure 2 interrupting flag (step Y1514). If there is no special figure 2 interruption flag (step Y1514; N), that is, the special figure 2 variable display game. When the interruption is not performed, processing relating to the special figure 2 variable display game after step Y133 is performed. On the other hand, if there is a special figure 2 suspension flag (step Y1514; Y), that is, if the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted, the processing related to the special figure 2 variable display game in steps Y133 to Y149 is not performed. The process proceeds to step Y152. As a result, during the interruption of the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 2 variable display game does not proceed (the special figure 2 game processing timer is not updated), and only the variable display continues.

  Also, instead of the special figure 1 big hit end process shown in FIG. 166, the special figure 1 big hit end process shown in FIG. 207 is performed. In the special figure 1 big hit ending process, a special figure 2 suspension flag is cleared (step Y1515). As a result, the special figure 2 variable display game that has been interrupted after the end of the first special gaming state is resumed.

  Also, instead of the special figure 2 jackpot end process shown in FIG. 167, the special figure 2 jackpot end process shown in FIG. 208 is performed. In the special figure 2 big hit end process, the special figure 1 suspension flag is cleared (step Y1517). As a result, the special figure 1 variable display game that has been interrupted after the end of the first special gaming state is resumed.

  Further, instead of the special figure 1 small hit end process shown in FIG. 171, the special figure 1 small hit end process shown in FIG. 209 is performed. In this special figure 1 small hit end process, the special figure 2 suspension flag is cleared (step Y1518). As a result, the special figure 2 variable display game that has been interrupted after the end of the second special gaming state is resumed.

  Also, instead of the special figure 2 small hit end process shown in FIG. 172, the special figure 2 small hit end process shown in FIG. 210 is performed. In this special figure 2 small hit end process, the special figure 1 suspension flag is cleared (step Y1519). As a result, the special figure 1 variable display game that has been interrupted after the end of the second special gaming state is resumed.

  It should be noted that in the special game state that is performed while the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted, a notice effect regarding the result of the special figure 1 variable display game being interrupted or the fluctuation pattern may be performed. Further, when there is a first start memory, a prefetch effect for the first start memory may be performed during the special game state.

  FIG. 211 shows an example of a pattern using different control methods depending on the situation on how to control the other special figure fluctuation display game based on the special result derived in one special figure fluctuation display game. showed that. Here, the control method 1 is a control method in which the other special figure variation display game is forcibly disengaged and stopped based on the special result derived in one special figure variation display game. The control method 2 is a control method in which a special result is derived in one special figure variation display game and the other special figure variation display game is interrupted and resumed after the special game state is ended.

  Pattern 1 shown in FIG. 211 (a) is a pattern for setting a control method according to the special figure type. In this pattern, when a special result (big hit or small hit) is derived in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is forcibly stopped by the result (control method 1). On the other hand, when a special result (big hit or small hit) is derived in the special figure 2 variable display game, the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted and resumed after the special game state is ended (control method 2). ).

  In particular, when a big win is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game, the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly disengaged and stopped with the result (control method 1), so that the game is started when the high probability state is started. The game can proceed in an advantageous manner for the player. In other words, if the control method 2 is used in this case, the special figure 2 variable display game having a long variation time started at the low probability state at the start of the high probability state is resumed. It will be difficult to start the game. In the high probability state, it is a period in which the player can acquire a large amount of prize balls by shortening the variation time of the special figure 2 variable display game and causing the special results to occur frequently. As a result, the start of a new special figure 2 variable display game is accelerated, and the game proceeds advantageously for the player.

  Pattern 2 shown in FIG. 211 (b) is a pattern for setting a control method according to a special result. In this pattern, for example, when the first special result (big hit) is derived in one special figure fluctuation display game, the other special figure fluctuation display game is forcibly disengaged and stopped (control method 1). . On the other hand, when the second special result (small hit) is derived in one special figure fluctuation display game, the other special figure fluctuation display game is interrupted and resumed after the special game state is ended (control). Method 2). Note that the control method may be selected in consideration of the special figure type.

  Pattern 3 shown in FIG. 211 (c) is a pattern for setting the control method according to the hit type. For example, when the big hit symbol 1A or the small hit symbol 1a is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game, the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped by the result (control method 1). On the other hand, when the big hit symbol 1B or the small hit symbol 1b is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game, the special figure 2 variable display game is interrupted and resumed after the special game state is ended (control method 2). ). The control method may be set depending on whether the first special result or the second special result is used.

  Pattern 4 shown in FIG. 211 (d) is a pattern for setting the control method according to the gaming state and the special figure type. When a special result is derived in the special figure 1 variable display game in the normal gaming state, the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly discontinued and stopped with the result (control method 1). On the other hand, when a special result is derived in the special figure 2 variable display game in the normal gaming state, the special figure 1 variable display game is interrupted and resumed after the special gaming state ends (control method 2). In the specific gaming state (during ST), the control method 2 is used regardless of the special figure type or the special result type.

  In this example, in the normal gaming state, the special figure 2 variable display game is forcibly stopped by the result of disengagement so that the player is disadvantaged, and the player does not select the execution of the special figure 2 variable display game. I am doing so. In addition, for the special figure 1 variable display game which is the main player in the normal gaming state, the special result is not changed by the forced stop. In addition, since the specific game state is advantageous to the player, the special result will not be changed by any forced stop for any special figure fluctuation display game, and the player can maximize the profit. So that you can get In consideration of the profit balance with the game store, the special figure 1 variable display game that is not the main player in the specific gaming state is forcibly stopped to prevent the player from gaining excessive profits. Also good. Further, the control method may be set only by the gaming state, for example, only the control method 1 may be set in the normal gaming state and only the control method 2 may be set in the specific gaming state.

  Pattern 5 shown in FIG. 211 (e) is a pattern in which a control method is set according to the gaming state, the special figure type, and the special result type. In the normal gaming state, the second special result is derived in one of the special figure variation display games so that the special result of the other special figure variation display game is not changed to an outlier result. Further, in the specific gaming state, the first special result is derived in one special figure variation display game, so that the special result of the other special figure variation display game is not changed to the outlier result. Increase the value of special results.

  The pattern of the control method is not limited to those described here, and other patterns may be used. In addition, as the control method selection parameters, the special figure type, the special result type, the gaming state, and the like are described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other parameters may be considered. Examples of other parameters include the number of games since the end of the special gaming state, calendar information such as date, day of the week, and current time, and achievement of certain conditions in the game such as occurrence of outlier reach a predetermined number of times.

  When selecting a control method as shown in FIG. 211, in the special figure 1 changing process shown in FIG. 203, when special figure 2 is also being executed (step Y630; Y), according to the conditions. A process of selecting whether to interrupt or end is performed. If the interruption is selected, the special figure 2 interruption flag is saved (step Y1511), and the processes after step Y640 are executed. If the end is selected, the process of stopping the special figure 2 variable display game in steps Y631 to Y639 shown in FIG. 146 is performed, and the processes after step Y640 are performed.

  Further, in the special figure 2 changing process shown in FIG. 204, when special figure 1 is also being executed (step Y660; Y), a process for selecting whether to interrupt or end depending on the condition is performed. To. If the interruption is selected, the special figure 1 interruption flag is saved (step Y1512), and the processes after step Y670 are executed. If the end is selected, the process of stopping the special figure 1 variable display game in steps Y661 to Y669 shown in FIG. 147 is performed, and the processes after step Y670 are performed.

  In other words, after the game control device 100 ends the one variation display game as a result other than the special result and interrupts one variation display game and ends the special game state based on the other variation display game. Selection means is provided for selecting and executing either of the resumption control for resuming one of the suspended variation display games based on a predetermined condition.

  From the above, one of the fluctuation display game execution control means (game control apparatus 100) and the second fluctuation display game execution control means (game control apparatus 100) is changed by one fluctuation display game execution control means. When execution control of a display game (special figure fluctuation display game) is performed, when the other fluctuation display game whose execution control is performed by the other fluctuation display game execution control means has a special result, Control for ending the variable display game as a result other than the special result, and one variable display game that was interrupted after the special game state based on the other variable display game was terminated Selection means (game control device 100) for selecting and executing either of the restart control for restarting the game based on a predetermined condition.

  The selection means is controlled by the second variation display game execution control means when execution control of the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) is performed by the first variation display game execution control means. When the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) in which the game is performed has a special result, after the first variation display game is interrupted and the special game state based on the second variation display game is ended When the second variation display game execution control unit performs execution control of the second variation display game, the first variation display game is resumed by selecting and executing the resumption control for resuming the first variation display game that has been interrupted. When the first variation display game whose execution control is being performed by the game execution control means has a special result, an end control for ending the second variation display game as a result other than the special result is selected and executed. The it has to so that.

  The selection means selects and executes an end control for ending one of the variable display games as a result other than the special result when the other variable display game has a first special result, and executes the other variable display game. When the game results in the second special result, the resumption control for resuming one of the variable display games after interrupting one of the variable display games and ending the special game state based on the other variable display game. Will be selected and executed.

  In addition, when the selection means is in the specific gaming state, the execution control is performed by the first variation display game execution control means when the second variation display game execution control means performs execution control of the second variation display game. The second variation that was interrupted after the second variation display game was interrupted and the special gaming state based on the first variation display game was terminated when the first variation display game in which the game is performed has a special result This means that the resumption control for resuming the display game is selected and executed.

  In addition, the variation mode information of the first variation display game and the second variation display game includes information regarding the variation time in which the execution time of the variation display game can be specified, and the first variation display game and the second variation display game. For each of these, measurement means (game control device 100) that starts measuring the variation time in response to the start of the variation display game and ends the variation time measurement of the variation display game when the variation time has elapsed. And the first variation display game execution control means and the second variation display game execution control means end the variation display of the variation display game being executed in response to the measurement means ending the measurement of the variation time. When the restart control is selected by the selection unit, the measurement unit is configured so that the one variation display game is based on the fact that the other variation display game has a special result. Of interrupting the measurement of the variation time, so that the special game state based on the other of the variable display games so as to resume the measurement of the variation time of one variation display game that was interrupted at the end of completion.

[Fifth Modification]
Next, a fifth modification of the gaming machine of the second embodiment described above will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described second embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. In the gaming machine of this modification, the display method and configuration of the collective display device 50 are different.

  In FIG. 212, the display method at the time of the fluctuation | variation start of the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 was shown. As shown in FIG. 212 (a), when the variation display of the next special figure variation display game is started from the state where the previous special figure variation display game is displayed and the result mode of the special result is displayed, all the lights are turned off. Start from the state. In this way, it will be immediately apparent that the change has started. In addition, during the fluctuation, the symbols that are completely off and repeated are repeated. However, as shown in FIG. 212 (b), the symbols that are not used as a result mode may be repeated as shown in FIG. 212 (b). In any case, it will be immediately apparent that the change has started regardless of where it starts. Further, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be configured such that the symbols that are off, the symbols that are initially lit at the start of variation, the symbols that are displayed during variation display, and the like are different.

  FIG. 213 shows another example of the configuration of the collective display device 50. As shown in FIG. 213 (a), in the collective display device 50, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are each composed of a plurality of LEDs arranged in a straight line. In addition to this, the LEDs q to t functioning as the memory display unit 54 for notifying the start memory number of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the LEDs u having the functions of the round display unit 60, the first game state display unit 77 and the probability display unit 78. -X are provided. Other functions may be assigned.

  As shown in FIG. 213 (b), in the special figure 1 display 51, the LED a and b are turned on to form a shift symbol, and during the variable display, the shift symbol and the all-off are repeated. Further, as shown in FIG. 213 (c), in the special figure 2 display 52, the off symbol is formed by turning on only LEDi, and this off symbol and all extinction are repeated during the variable display. In this way, the outlier symbol of the special figure 1 variable display game and the outlier symbol of the special figure 2 variable display game are different.

  Further, the display mode during the variable display of the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 configured as described above may be a display mode other than those described above. For example, one or a plurality of LEDs blink or alternate. It is also possible to turn on and off the LEDs adjacent to each other so that the light flows along the direction from the LED at one end to the LED at the other end, by repeating the lighting, the off-symbol design, and all lighting. In addition, as shown in FIG. 214, the number of LEDs may be different between the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52. In this case, the time for light to flow from the LED at one end to the LED at the other end may be controlled to be the same in any special-purpose display. That is, the special figure 2 display 52 having a larger number of LEDs than the special figure 1 display 51 may increase the speed of light flow. Of course, the speed at which light flows may be the same. Also, the off-symbol design or the changing design may be different.

  When the number of LEDs is different between the special figure 1 display 51 and the special display 2 shown in FIG. 2, it is possible to set more result forms for the larger special figure. That is, when there are a plurality of small hits due to different opening modes as in this embodiment, right-handed to the extent that it is not determined to be fraudulent in the normal state, and the game ball is awarded to the special figure 2 start winning opening 37, It is highly conceivable that an illegal act of aiming at the first special variable prize-winning device 38 is performed when a result mode corresponding to the long open is observed by looking at the LED of the special figure 2 display 52 after a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed. On the other hand, for example, if the number of LEDs of the special figure 2 display 52 is increased, more small hit result modes can be set, and the player can easily recognize the long open result mode. The above-described fraud can be prevented.

  FIG. 215 shows another example of the configuration of the collective display device 50. The collective display device 50 includes LEDs a to y and z1 to z4. A covering member 95 made of a seal or a plate material is attached to the front surface so as to cover the front surface of the collective display device 50. In this covering member 95, the portions of LEDs a to y which are portions used during the game are transparent, and it can be seen that the LEDs are present at first glance. It should be noted that it is understood that the LED exists at first glance, and may be translucent or hollowed out in addition to being transparent.

  In addition, the covering member 95 has a display indicating the function of the LED adjacent to a necessary portion among the portions where the presence of the LED can be understood at first glance. For example, the LEDu forming the round display portion 60 is displayed. The number of rounds notified when each lights up is displayed at positions adjacent to .about.x.

  The LEDs z <b> 1 to z <b> 4 that are not used during the game are hidden by the covering member 95 so that it cannot be understood at first glance that the LEDs exist. The LEDs z1 to z4 may not be used at all as a function of the gaming machine. However, if there is an inconvenience due to the presence of LEDs that are not used, for example, they are used as LEDs for informing the RAM initialization, and the portions covering the LEDs z1 to z4 of the covering member 95 are at first glance when the LEDs are off. It is assumed to be semi-transparent so that the lighting state can be confirmed.

  By using the collective display device 50 and the covering member 95, the function of each LED and the configuration of the covering member 95 are set according to the model, so that the collective display device 50 can be used in common even for different models. Can be used.

  FIG. 216 shows another example of the configuration of the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 in the collective display device 50. As shown in FIG. 216 (a), the arrangement of the LEDs of the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 is different.

  In the case of such a configuration, even if the number of the LED to be lit for the result mode and the changing pattern is common to the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, the display has a different shape on the display. can do. For example, FIG. 216 (a) shows a state in which a shifted symbol is displayed on both the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52. In this off-set design, the LEDs 2 and 5 are turned on in any special display, but because the arrangement of the LEDs is different, the display has a different shape. As a result, even if the graphic data common to the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 is used, it can be displayed in a different shape on the display, and various symbols are expressed using the common data. be able to.

  FIG. 216 (b) shows a display during fluctuation on the special figure 1 display 51. FIG. In the display during fluctuation, all the lights are turned off and a predetermined LED is turned on repeatedly. Here, before the reach occurs (during the first half of the fluctuation), all the lights are turned off and the LEDs 6 and 7 are turned on repeatedly, and during the N reach, the lights are turned off and the LEDs 2 and 5 are turned on repeatedly. During SP1 reach, all the lights are turned off and the LEDs 1 and 3 are turned on repeatedly. During SP2 reach, the lights are turned off and the LEDs 4 and 8 are turned on repeatedly. In this way, various lighting effects can be performed by changing the lighting location according to the variation pattern.

  For example, in the case of SP1 reach, a display mode in which all the lights are turned off and the LEDs 1 and 3 are turned on before the occurrence of the reach may be used, and the occurrence of the reach may be notified in advance on the special display. Further, a lighting mode for suggesting or definitively reporting the occurrence of a big hit may be provided as the lighting mode during fluctuation, and the occurrence of the big hit may be suggested or reported on a special figure display.

  FIG. 217 shows another example of the configuration of the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 in the collective display device 50. As shown in FIG. 217 (a), the special figure 1 display 51 is composed of LEDs arranged in an annular shape, and displays light so that it circulates during fluctuation display. And the display of a result aspect is performed by lighting one or some LED. Of course, the special figure 2 display 52 has the same configuration. Further, the special figure display may form some design, and for example, in the example shown in FIG. 217 (b), a mushroom shape is formed.

[Sixth Modification]
Next, a sixth modification of the gaming machine of the second embodiment described above will be described. Basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described second embodiment, and hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals, description thereof is omitted, and mainly different. The part will be described. In the gaming machine of this modification, the content of the game is different.

  As shown in FIG. 218, in this modified example, there are four gaming states of a low probability disadvantage mode M1, a high probability disadvantage mode M2, a high probability advantage mode M3, and a low probability advantage mode M4. These gaming states are transitioned. Here, in the name of each gaming state, low probability means a low probability state, and high probability means a high probability state. Also, the disadvantage is a special figure 2 fluctuation display game in which a long fluctuation (about 10 minutes) with a very long fluctuation time is set, so that the probability of hitting is low and the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is disadvantageous for the player. This means that the game is progressing mainly. Further, advantageous means that the long game is not set in the special figure 2 variable display game, and the game is advanced mainly by the special figure 2 variable display game that has a high probability of hitting and is advantageous to the player. .

  The low probability disadvantage mode M1 is a gaming state corresponding to the normal gaming state, and the high probability advantageous mode M3 is a gaming state corresponding to the specific gaming state. The high probability disadvantage mode M2 is a so-called latent state, and is an effect state in which it is not possible to clearly determine whether the player is in the low probability disadvantage mode M1 or the high probability disadvantage mode M2. This effect state is also set when 2R normal or small hit is won in the low probability disadvantage mode M1. The low probability advantageous mode M4 is similar to the time-short state in the conventional gaming machine. In this game state, the game is progressed mainly by the special figure 2 variable display game, so that it is possible to wait for the next big hit without reducing the number of held balls due to the high occurrence of the small hit.

  Further, the types of hits in the special drawings 1 and 2 are as shown in FIG. Of these, the probable jackpot is a jackpot that is in a high probability state until the special game state display game is executed 50 times after the end of the special game state, and the normal jackpot is a jackpot that is in a low probability state after the end of the special game state. It is.

  In addition, the number of winning balls obtained by small hits and the variation time may be adjusted so that the number of balls held tends to increase in the low probability advantageous mode M4. Since this low probability advantage mode M4 continues until the next big hit, it can be continued for a long period of time, and a game mode in which the number of possessed balls gradually increases during this time can be obtained, and a large number of prize balls can be obtained in a special game state in a short time. The game can be different. Furthermore, the right-handed game is configured such that the first start winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 37 can both be won, and the special figure 1 variable display game that is normally a big hit in the low probability advantageous mode M4 has been started. In this case, a special result may be generated in the special figure 2 variable display game to prevent the normal big hit of the special figure 1 variable display game, and a notification that prompts to maintain the low probability advantageous mode M4 may be issued.

  As described above, in the gaming machine having a plurality of gaming states, the rendering control device 300 sets the rendering according to the gaming state. However, when the production control device 300 is restarted for some reason, the production control device 300 that does not have the backup function loses information on the gaming state, and thus cannot perform an appropriate production. In order to minimize inconvenience due to such a situation, the game control device 100 transmits information related to the game state to the effect control device 300 at a predetermined timing.

  The game control device 100 sends the probability information command shown in FIG. 219 (a) including the game state information to the effect control device 300 at the start of the special game state and at the start of the special figure variable display game when the game state is switched. Send. As shown in FIG. 219 (b), a command of A801h which is a probability information command indicating a low probability disadvantage at the start (t171) of the special figure variation display game when the gaming state is a low probability disadvantage. Is transmitted to the production control device 300. Also, at the start of the special gaming state that occurs when the probability is low (t172), a command A801h that is a probability information command indicating that the probability is low is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

  Here, since the result is a probable big hit, the gaming state shifts to a highly probable advantage when the special gaming state ends. Along with this, a command of A802h, which is a probability information command indicating that it is highly probable, is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (t173). The production control device 300 performs a highly advantageous production based on the reception of this command.

  Then, at the start of the special figure variation display game when the gaming state is highly advantageous (t174, t175), a command of A802h which is a probability information command indicating that it is highly advantageous is sent to the effect control device 300. Send. After this, the power source of the effect control device 300 is shut off for some reason (t176), and the display device 41 is not displayed (black display). During this time, the game is progressing in the game control device 100, but the decoration special figure variation display game or the like on the display device 41 is not performed.

  Thereafter, when the power of the effect control device 300 is restored, the effect control device 300 is activated (t177). The effect control device 300 displays the restored image on the display device 41 until a command is received from the game control device 100 (t177 to t178). When the A802h command, which is a probability information command indicating that it is highly advantageous with the start of the special figure fluctuation display game, is received from the game control device 100, the decoration special figure fluctuation display game is started with a highly accurate effect. (T178). By doing in this way, it becomes possible to return to the effect according to the gaming state without waiting for the transmission of the probability information command based on the gaming state change.

  Further, the game control apparatus 100 is in a state where neither the special figure 1 variable display game nor the special figure 2 variable display game is executed for the customer waiting command shown in FIG. 220 (a) including the game state information. It is transmitted to the production control device 300 when a certain waiting time is set. As shown in FIG. 220 (b), here, the power source of the production control device 300 is cut off for some reason (t181), and thereafter, the power supply of the production control device 300 is restored and the production control device 300 is activated ( t182).

  If the special figure variation display game is started after the production control device 300 is restored, the probability information command including the game state information is transmitted as described above, so that it is possible to return to the production according to the game state. The waiting state is set so that neither the special figure 1 fluctuation display game nor the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed (t184).

  The game control device 100 transmits a command of 8002h which is a customer waiting command indicating that it is highly advantageous at the time of customer waiting setting, and the production control device 300 is highly advantageous based on the information of the customer waiting command. The production is set and the customer waits. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to return to the effect according to the gaming state without waiting for the transmission of the probability information command based on the gaming state change.

  Note that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above-described embodiment as a gaming machine, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, etc. It can be applied to all gaming machines that use this game ball. The configurations of the above-described embodiments and modification examples can be applied in appropriate combination.

  Further, it should be considered that the embodiment disclosed this time is illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

10 gaming machine 25 production button (operation means)
29 Touch panel (operation means)
36 Start prize opening (starting area)
37 Ordinary variable prize-winning device (starting area)
41 Display device (variable display device)
100 Game control device (start-up storage means, prior determination means)
300 Production control device (occurrence time notification means)

Claims (2)

A special game that includes a variable display device capable of displaying a variable display game based on the inflow of game balls into the starting area, and gives a predetermined game value to the player when the result of the variable display game is a special result In gaming machines that can execute
Start memory means capable of storing start memory as a right to execute the variable display game based on the inflow of game balls into the start area up to a predetermined upper limit number;
Pre-determination means for determining information on the variable display game based on the start-up memory stored in the start-up storage means before executing the variable display game;
Operation means that can be operated by the player;
An occurrence time notification means capable of performing a time notification effect that suggests or notifies the occurrence time of a specific event in a variable display game based on a specific start memory,
The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the generation time notification means starts the time notification effect based on the operation of the operation means. The occurrence time informing means is
As the time notification effect, it is possible to notify the remaining time until the occurrence of the specific event in the variable display game based on the specific start memory,
In the time notification effect, provisional notification is performed to notify a time different from the remaining time until the occurrence of the specific event, and the operation of the operation unit is performed during the provisional notification. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the game machine can be changed to a notification of a remaining time until occurrence.